JP2020124555A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of immediately reading a program to be executed and starting execution of processing, while allowing storage means for storing image information to store the program therein.SOLUTION: A program to be executed by an MPU 181 of a display control device 81 is stored in a character ROM 192 for storing image data. In the character ROM 192, a NAND type flash memory 192a is provided, a ROM controller 192b incorporates a first program storage area 192d, image data and most programs are stored in the NAND type flash memory 192a, and a part of boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 192d. When it is detected that power is supplied in the ROM controller 191b, the ROM controller 192b sets the boot program from the first program storage area 192d to a buffer RAM 192c.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 24

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, a gaming machine is configured to control the gaming machine by a main control means and a sub control means. For example, while the main control of the game is performed by the main control unit, the sub-control unit controls the display of the effect image on the image display unit such as a liquid crystal display device provided in the gaming machine.

In recent years, in order to further enhance the enjoyment of the game, there is a tendency for a variety of effect images to be displayed on the image display means.

JP, 2006-223598, A

However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the processing may be complicated and enormous as the effect images are diversified.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and provides a gaming machine capable of easily diversifying display modes such as effect images displayed on an image display unit. The purpose is to do.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1, main control means for performing main control of the game, sub-control means for operating based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and its sub-control Image display means for displaying an image based on control by the means, wherein the sub-control means draws an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means, and the image. A first image storage means for storing a plurality of image information used for drawing an image by the drawing means, and a predetermined display for dynamically displaying the identification information on the image display means in response to a predetermined command received from the main control means. First display specifying means for specifying a mode from a plurality of display modes, and first standard information storage for storing first standard information defining, for each screen, drawing information showing information necessary for drawing in each display mode. Means, first specifying means for specifying the first prescribed information corresponding to the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying means, updating means for updating every predetermined time, and updating means therefor. Drawing that generates drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen based on the updated drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated updating means each time it is updated The image drawing unit includes an instruction information generating unit and a measuring unit capable of measuring time, and the image drawing unit uses one image for one screen based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating unit. An image is drawn, and a display mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed on the image display unit is predetermined for each display mode from the start to the end of the dynamic display. The sub-control unit is used for the dynamic continuous display of the identification information, which is continuously displayed when the required time has elapsed after the display is started in the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying unit. When the command transmitted from the main control means is the predetermined command, the sub-control means that has received the predetermined command corresponds to the predetermined command. Dynamic display of time identification information is executed in a specific display mode, and there are a plurality of display modes that can be executed for a predetermined time corresponding to the predetermined command, and there are a plurality of times corresponding to the predetermined command. Even if the predetermined display mode that is present and specified by the first display specifying means is a display mode of any predetermined time, the movement of the identification information that is continuously displayed when the required time has elapsed The display mode of the target continuous display is the same display mode, and the sub control means performs a predetermined display on the image display means when the operation means operable by the player is operated. The predetermined display is not executed by the predetermined display execution means at least during a period in which the dynamic continuous display of the identification information is performed on the image display means.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the main control means for performing the main control of the game, the sub-control means that operates based on the command transmitted from the main control means, and the image based on the control by the sub-control means Image display means for displaying, and the sub-control means draws an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means, and an image drawing means for drawing the image. First image storage means for storing a plurality of image information to be used, and a predetermined display mode for dynamically displaying identification information on the image display means in response to a predetermined command received from the main control means. First display specifying means for specifying from inside, first specifying information storing means for storing first specifying information specifying drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing in each display mode for each screen, and the first display First specifying means for specifying the first prescribed information corresponding to the predetermined display mode specified by the specifying means, updating means for updating every predetermined time, and each time the updating means is updated, Drawing instruction information generating means for generating drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen based on the updated drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated means, and time. The image drawing means draws an image for one screen by using the image information based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means. The display mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed on the image display unit is predetermined for each display mode from the start to the end of the dynamic display, and the sub-control unit is Specifying the first stipulation information used for the dynamic continuous display of the identification information, which is continuously displayed when the required time has elapsed after the display is started in the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying means. When the command transmitted from the main control means is the predetermined command, the sub-control means that has received the predetermined command dynamically changes the identification information of the time corresponding to the predetermined command. The display is executed in a specific display mode, and there are a plurality of display modes that can be executed for a predetermined time corresponding to the predetermined command, and there are a plurality of times corresponding to the predetermined command. Regardless of the predetermined display mode specified by the specifying means, the display mode of the dynamic continuous display of the identification information that is continuously displayed when the required time has elapsed is the same. In one display mode, the sub-control means includes a predetermined display execution means for performing a predetermined display on the image display means when the operation means operable by the player is operated, and at least the image display means Since the predetermined display by the predetermined display execution means is not executed during the period in which the identification information is dynamically continuously displayed on the means, it is possible to easily diversify the display mode displayed on the image display means. The effect is that you can.

FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door closed in the first embodiment. FIG. 38 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door opened. It is a rear view of a front door. It is a front view of a housing. It is an array diagram showing a symbol array of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the symbol which can be visually recognized from a display window, and a combination line. It is an explanatory view showing a relationship between a winning mode, a stop symbol corresponding to the winning mode, a winning probability, and the number of paid-out medals. FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the slot machine. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows typically an example of a three-drawing lottery table, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a two-drawing lottery table, and (c) is one. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a hanging lottery table typically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a scanning area of a screen included in the auxiliary display unit and a display area in which an image is actually displayed on the screen. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows lottery table setting processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows reel control processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the bonus state processing performed by MPU of the main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the display main processing performed by MPU of a display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by the MPU of the display control device. It is a flow chart which shows start command processing performed by MPU of a display control device. It is a flow chart which shows lottery result command processing performed by MPU of a display control device. It is a flow chart which shows error command processing performed by MPU of a display control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 5th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power activation. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface C. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display data table for a change. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the additional data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit. 7 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing a start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 6 is a flowchart showing a vibration sensor input monitoring process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flow chart showing a reserved ball number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing a confirmation command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. Yes, (c) is a flowchart showing a demo command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing a continuous notice command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. Is. (A) is a flowchart showing a frame button operation command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a reserved image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. Yes, (c) is a flowchart showing a frame button operation process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a comparison process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 6 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in 8th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 22, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in the case of being applied to a spinning-type gaming machine which is a kind of gaming machine, specifically, a slot machine 10 will be described. 1 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, FIG. 3 is a rear view of the front door 12, and FIG. It is a front view of the body 11.

In the slot machine 10, the player inserts a medal, which is a game medium, from the medal insertion slot 45, and operates the start lever 41 to rotationally drive the three reels 32L, 32M, 32R having a plurality of symbols. When the player operates the stop switches 42, 43, 44 provided corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are When the combination of symbols displayed by stopping is a predetermined combination, the player is provided with a privilege of granting a predetermined number of medals and a privilege of shifting to a gaming state.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 forming an outer shell thereof. The housing 11 is formed by combining wooden panels and is formed into a box-like shape with an open front surface. When the housing 11 is installed in a game hall, it is attached by hitting a nail against so-called island equipment. The housing 11 may be made of a synthetic resin panel or a metal panel instead of being made of a wooden panel, or may be made of a synthetic resin material or a metal material in the form of an integral box. Good.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side when viewed from the front thereof, and the front door 12 is provided with a bearing portion 14a at a position corresponding to each support shaft 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. When the support shafts 13a and 13b are inserted into the bearings 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates around the opening/closing axis line extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a and 13b to the housing 11. It is movably supported, and the front opening side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by rotating the front door 12.

Further, a locking device 20 is provided on the back surface of the front door 12 on the opposite side of the opening/closing axis, and the front door 12 is locked by the locking device 20 so that it cannot be opened. A key cylinder 21 integrated with the locking device 20 is provided on the upper right side of the front door 12, and the lock state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21. The position where the key cylinder 20 is provided is an upper position where the wall thickness is thin in the front door 12, and as a result, a versatile key cylinder 21 having a short overall length can be adopted. In the present embodiment, as the key cylinder 21, Omlock (registered trademark) having a high unauthorized unlocking prevention function is used.

A game panel 25 is provided near the center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game state. Three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through the respective display windows 26L, 26M and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be integrated into one display window.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R that are each formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape). The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotatably supported so that the central axis thereof is the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially in the horizontal direction, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R in a one-to-one correspondence. .. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is in a visible state through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate normally, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R as if moving from top to bottom.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described. Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be rotated individually by driving the stepping motor, that is, independently of each other. .. The stepping motor is set so as to make one rotation by giving a drive signal of 504 pulses (hereinafter, also referred to as an excitation pulse), and the excitation pulse changes the rotational position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotational position of the reel. Controlled. Further, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has made one rotation is installed on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Then, when the reel index sensor detects that the reel makes one revolution, a detection signal is output to the main control device 101 described later each time it is detected. Therefore, main controller 101 determines the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be checked and corrected.

On the outer peripheral surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a plurality of patterns as identification information are drawn in the long side direction (circling direction) thereof. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 5, for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, 21 symbols are drawn at equal intervals, and three consecutive symbols are displayed on the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is configured to be visible at the upper, middle, and lower positions. Therefore, in order to switch a certain symbol at a predetermined position to the next symbol, it is necessary to output 24 pulses (=504 pulses/21 symbols) of excitation pulses. Further, the main control device 101 grasps a symbol which is in a visible state from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, and the display window, depending on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. Control such as stopping a predetermined symbol at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R can be performed.

On the lower left side of the game panel 25, a start lever 41 that is operated to start rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided. The start lever 41 is a lever that a player manually pushes when starting a game (game) (the pushing direction is not limited), and the start lever 41 is operated while a predetermined number of medals are inserted. Then, the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are started all at once (but not necessarily at the same time).

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are provided. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M and 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M and 32R to be stopped. That is, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 32R is stopped.

At this time, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, only the stop mode in which the arrival pattern reaching the base point position (lower position of each of the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R in the present embodiment) is stopped as it is Rather, a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol, a stop mode in which it is stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode by which it is stopped after sliding by three symbols, and a sliding by four symbols Five patterns are prepared, such as a stop mode in which it is stopped after being turned on. Thus, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are set to stop in a predetermined stop mode until the specified time (190 msec) elapses from the timing at which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, thereby setting the display window. It is possible to make the player feel as if the symbol arrangement (hereinafter, also referred to as a stop result) that stops in the visible range from 26L, 26M, and 26R is determined by the operation of the player. In addition, by making it possible to slide up to four symbols, a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning mode (see FIG. 7) described later that wins the lottery as much as possible within the specified time will be described later. It is possible to stop on the effective line (see FIG. 6), and it is possible to prevent the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning mode that is not won in the lottery from stopping on the effective line.

A medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M and 26R. The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by the selector 46 provided on the back surface of the front door 12 as passage switching means. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is not energized, the medals are guided to the ejection passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are switched. Is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharging passage 48 are guided to the medal receiving tray 50 from the medal discharging port 49 provided in the lower front portion of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

The storage passage 47 is provided with an inserted medal detection device (not shown) that detects passage of inserted medals. The output signal of the inserted medal detection device is input to the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 counts the number of medals based on the detection result of the inserted medal detection device. In addition, the movement of the inserted medal (the passing direction of the medal) is judged based on the detection result of the inserted medal detection device, and when the movement of the medal is different from the normal one, the main control device 101 causes the medal to be clogged, It is determined that there is a possibility that fraud such as withdrawing a medal may have occurred, and the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, the auxiliary display section 65, and the like, which will be described later, are configured to notify that a sensor error has occurred. There is.

The thrown-in medal detection device is a first thrown-in medal detection sensor 45a and a second thrown-in medal detection sensor, each of which is configured by a photocoupler having a pair of a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit (not shown) on both sides through a passing medal. 45b (see FIG. 8). The first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b are arranged side by side on the upstream side and the downstream side, respectively, in a state of being close enough to simultaneously detect one passing medal. The detection sensors 45a and 45b are set to output a "Lo" signal when receiving light and a "Hi" signal when shielding.

When the medal inserted by the player is guided to the storage passage 47 side by the selector 46, the medal passes through the inserted medal detection device. At this time, first, the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a arranged on the upstream side is in a light-shielding state first to output the "Hi" signal, and then the second inserted medal detection sensor 45a arranged on the downstream side. 45b is in a light-shielded state, outputs a "Hi" signal, and the two inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b simultaneously detect medals. Then, when the medals further proceed to the downstream side in the storage passage 47, the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a arranged on the upstream side first receives the light and outputs the “Lo” signal. The second inserted medal detection sensor 45b disposed on the downstream side becomes a light receiving state and outputs the "Lo" signal.

That is, when the medal normally passes through the inserted medal detection device, the signals output from the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b are such that the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a becomes "Hi" and then the second inserted medal. The detection sensor 45b becomes "Hi". Then, after the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b simultaneously become "Hi", the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a becomes "Lo", and finally the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b becomes "Lo". In the main controller 101, when the signals output from the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b change at such timing, it is determined that a medal has been normally inserted, and the number of inserted medals is counted. Up.

On the other hand, if the medals are jammed while passing through the inserted medal sensor device or if the medals are illegally pulled out, the signals output from the two inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b are the same as when the medals have passed normally. It changes at different timing. The main control device 101 monitors changes in the signals output from the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b, and if the changes are different from the changes when the medals normally pass through the inserted medal detection device, the medals are detected. When it is determined that there is clogging or fraud, the occurrence of a sensor error is notified to the display control device 81 described later by an error command. In the display control device 81, when the sensor error is notified from the main control device 101, the sensor error is notified from the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, and the like.

The hopper device 51 includes a storage tank 52 that stores medals, and a payout device 53 that pays out the medals to the player. The payout device 53 rotates the medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to eject the medals to the opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48, and to pay the medals to the medal tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided for avoiding that a predetermined amount or more of medals are stored in the storage tank 52. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the auxiliary tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when the medals are stored at a height higher than the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the spare tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal insertion slot 45. When the return switch 55 is operated under the condition that the medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 are clogged in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and the medals clogged in the selector 46 are medals. It is designed to be returned from the outlet 49.

A settlement switch 59 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. The slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing, as virtual medals, surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (for 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning, and the virtual medals are stored and stored. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under such a condition, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal ejection port 49 as an actual medal.

On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, a first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting three credited virtual medals as a game medium at one time is provided. Further, on the left side of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion switch 57 and a third credit insertion switch 58 are provided. The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting two virtual medals at a time, and the third credit insertion switch 58 is for inserting one virtual medal.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25, a credit display section 60 for displaying the number of credited virtual medals, and a remaining payout number for displaying the remaining number of medals to be paid out until the bonus state ends. A display unit 61 and a payout amount display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are respectively provided. Although these display units 60 to 62 are composed of 7-segment displays, they can be replaced by liquid crystal displays or the like.

On the upper part of the front door 12, an upper lamp 63 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right that emits various sound effects as the game progresses and informs the player of the game state. A speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for giving various kinds of information to the player. The auxiliary display section 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and for notifying the state when the power is turned on or when an error occurs, and is mainly used for the game by each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Since it can be considered that the display unit is used, the auxiliary display unit 65 is referred to in the present embodiment. An upper lamp 63, a speaker 64, and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display unit 65 are provided on the back surface of the auxiliary display unit 65. Details of the display control device 81 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Above the medal tray 50, a lower plate 66 on which model names, characters relating to games, etc. are displayed is attached. Further, on the left side of the medal tray 50, an invertible ashtray 69 is provided below the front side.

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11. The power supply box 70 accommodates a power supply device 91 (see FIG. 8) inside, and includes a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a starting switch for supplying power to each unit including the main control device 101 described later.

The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting various states of the slot machine 10. The slot machine 10 has a backup function for various data, and retains the status at the time of power failure even if a power failure occurs, and returns to the status at the time of power failure at the time of recovery from the power failure (power recovery). You can do it. Therefore, when the power is shut off in the normal procedure, for example, when the game hall is closed, the state before shutting off is stored and retained. However, when the power switch 71 is turned on while pressing the reset switch 72, the backup data is reset ( Is initialized). When the reset switch 72 is pressed while the power switch 71 is turned on, the error state is reset.

The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hole manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. That is, the hall manager or the like inserts the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and rotates the setting key to change the setting state of the slot machine 10 (setting of the winning probability of each winning mode) from “setting 1” to “setting 6”. Can be changed. When the setting state is set to "Setting 1", the winning mode (winning part) is selected so that the expected value of the number of paid-out medals is the lowest, and when the setting state is set to "Setting 6", The prize-winning lottery is performed so that the expected value of the number of paid-out medals is the highest. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the setting state of the slot machine 10.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 for integrally managing a game is attached to the housing 11. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 8, the main control device 101 has an MPU (Micro Processing Unit) 102 that controls the main control, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 105 that stores a game program, and a progress of the game. RAM (Random Access Memory) 106 for temporarily storing necessary data, a free-run counter 107 for generating random numbers, a port 104 for communicating with various devices, a clock used for time counting and synchronization, etc. A main substrate including the circuit 103 and the like is provided, and the main substrate is housed in a substrate box made of a transparent resin material or the like. The substrate box includes a box base having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected in a non-openable manner by a sealing unit, thereby sealing the substrate box. Note that the box base and the box cover may be connected in an unopenable manner using a key member.

Next, referring to FIG. 5, the symbols drawn on the reels 32L, 32M and 32R will be described. FIG. 5 is an array diagram showing a symbol array of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a line on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The numbers 0 to 20 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M and 32R, respectively, but these numbers are in a state in which the main controller 101 can visually recognize them from the display windows 26L, 26M and 26R. Is a number for recognizing the above, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the corresponding numbers will be used for description.

As the symbol, "7" symbol (for example, 20th on the left reel 32L), "youth" symbol (for example, 19th on the left reel 32L), "replay" symbol (for example, 18th on the left reel 32L), " "Cherry" symbol (for example, 17th on left reel 32L), "Bell" symbol (for example, 16th on left reel 32L), "Watermelon" symbol (for example, 15th on left reel 32L), "Star" symbol (for example) , The middle reel 32L, the 19th). Then, as shown in FIG. 5, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that the total of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reels can be visually recognized. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

In the slot machine 10, five combination lines are set so as to connect the positions where the symbols are visible. Here, a combination line set in the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between a symbol that can be visually recognized from each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R and a combination line.

As shown in FIG. 6, the upper line L1 connecting the upper design of the left reel 32L, the upper design of the middle reel 32M, and the upper design of the right reel 32R, the middle design of the left reel 32L, the middle design of the middle reel 32M, the right The middle line L2 connecting the middle patterns of the reel 32R, the lower pattern of the left reel 32L, the lower pattern of the middle reel 32M, the lower line L3 connecting the lower patterns of the right reel 32R, the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle reel A downward descending line L4 that connects the middle pattern of 32M and the lower pattern of the right reel 32R, and a rightward rising line L5 that connects the lower pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the upper pattern of the right reel 32R are set. ing. Then, when the symbols are stopped on the activated combination line, that is, on the activated line in a predetermined combination, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals is given as a winning combination, or a privilege of shifting a game state is given. It is supposed to be granted.

The maximum number of combined lines may be 6 or more, or less than 5. For example, a V (reverse V)-shaped line or an L-shaped line may be used as an effective line. Further, the maximum number of combined lines may be changed according to a predetermined condition.

Next, with reference to FIG. 7, a winning mode that the slot machine 10 can take, a stop symbol on the activated line that wins in each winning mode, a winning probability of each winning mode in a general game state, and The number of medals paid out when the winning is achieved in the winning mode will be described. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between a winning mode, a stop symbol, a winning probability in a normal gaming state, and a medal payout number. In FIG. 7, the winning probability when the setting state of the slot machine 10 is set to “setting 1” will be described as an example, but when the setting state is set to “setting 2” to “setting 6” In addition, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out per game from “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” while maintaining the magnitude relationship of the winning probabilities determined by each prize mode and the number of medals (bet number) inserted Each winning probability is set so that

As shown in FIG. 7, there is a BB (Big Bonus) prize as a state transition prize that gives a player a privilege of changing the game state. If the "7" symbol, the "7" symbol, and the "7" symbol are stopped along the activated line from the left, a bonus that the game state shifts to a bonus state that is a special game state is given as a BB winning. However, even if the "7" symbol is stopped on the activated line side by side with left, middle, and right, the medal is not paid out. That is, when the combination of the "7" symbols is established on the activated line, only the bonus state is entered. In other words, the “7” symbol can be said to be a state transition symbol for shifting the game state to the bonus state.

Here, the bonus state will be described. The bonus state is composed of a plurality of RB (Regular Bonus) states, and the RB state is composed of 12 JAC games. The JAC game is a game in which the probability of winning a watermelon prize and a bell prize, which will be described later, which are small winning a prizes, is very high as compared with the general gaming state. Then, if the winning is achieved eight times during the JAC game, the RB state is ended even before the JAC game is played 12 times. The bonus state ends when the number of paid out medals reaches a predetermined number (250 in this embodiment). That is, when the BB winning is established, the number of medals paid out at that time is 0, but when the gaming state of the gaming machine is shifted to the bonus state with the BB winning, 250 medals are given to the player. It is guaranteed that the payout will be made with a smaller number of inserted medals than in the normal game state. In addition, when the number of paid-out medals reaches a predetermined number in the middle of the RB state, not only the bonus state but also the RB state ends. This is a device for suppressing the player's motivation and ensuring the soundness of the game by setting an upper limit on the number of paid-out medals in the bonus state. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a combination of symbols for shifting to the RB state is not set, and the configuration is such that the symbol shifts to the RB state immediately after shifting to the bonus state and immediately after the RB state ends. Therefore, it can be said that the bonus state is a game that continuously shifts to the RB state until a predetermined number of medals are paid out.

The slot machine 10 supports the number of medals to be inserted (the number of bets) at the start of the game to be one, two, or three, and the probability of winning the BB in the normal gaming state (BB winning in one game). Probability) is set differently according to the number of inserted medals (the number of bets) inserted at the start of the game. Specifically, the probability of winning the BB prize is set to 1/65536 in the case of the one-player and the two-player, and is set to 1/256 in the case of the three-player. In this way, the probability of winning the BB prize in the normal gaming state is set lower in the case of the one-player and two-player games than in the three-player game.

Next, there are a watermelon prize and a bell prize as small prize prizes in which medals are paid out. From the left on the active line "Watermelon" design, "Watermelon" design, if you stop alongside the "Watermelon" design, the watermelon winning is established, from the left on the active line "Bell" design, "Bell" design, " If you stop alongside the "Bell" symbol, you will win the bell. Then, when the game is played with three coins, 12 medals are paid out if the watermelon prize is established, and 6 medals are paid out if the bell prize is established. In addition, when the game is executed with one or two coins, and if the watermelon prize or the bell prize is established, three medals are paid out. In addition, the winning probability of the watermelon prize in the normal game state is set to 1/65536 in the case of one-piece and two-piece multiplication, and is set to one-eighth in the case of three-piece multiplication. On the other hand, the odds of winning the bell prize in the normal gaming state are set to 1/65536 in the case of one-piece and two-pieces, and are set to about 1/1 in the case of three-piece. As described above, the watermelon prize and the bell prize are set so that the winning is easily achieved in the case of the three-piece hanging, while the winning of the winning is rarely generated in the case of the one-piece hanging or the two-piece hanging. It is set not to.

Further, the slot machine 10 is provided with a special small winning a prize that is established only when the game is played with one or two cards, or only when the game is played with one card. .. The special child winning combination includes a Cherry Bell winning and a 7 Bell winning. Of these, the Cherry Bell prize is a special small winning combination that is established only when one or two cards are stacked, and the "Cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M are on the effective line. This is true when the game stops, and three medals are paid out. In addition, the 7-bell winning is a special small winning award that is established only in the case of a single-sheet winning, and when the "7" symbol of the left reel 32L and the "bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M stop on the activated line. It will be established and two medals will be paid out.

Here, in both of the cherry bell winning and the 7 bell winning, the symbol stopped on the activated line of the right reel 32R may be any symbol. In addition, when the game is executed with three pieces, even if the "watermelon" symbol or "7" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M are stopped on the activated line, the cherry bell is won. Alternatively, the 7-bell prize is not established, and it is determined as a deviation. Similarly, when the game is executed with two sheets, even if the "7" symbol on the reel 32L and the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M are stopped on the activated line, the 7-bell prize is not established. , It is determined as out. In addition, when the game is executed with three cards, the "cherry" symbol or "7" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M are not stopped on the activated line at the same time, and the cherry prize is won. The 7-bell prize may not be established. Similarly, when the game is executed with two pieces, the "7" symbol of the left reel 32L and the "bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M are not stopped on the activated line at the same time so that the cherry prize is not established. You may comprise.

The probability of winning the Cherry Bell prize in the general gaming state is set to about 1/6.0 in the case of a one-player game, and is set to about 1.8/1.8 in the case of a two-player game. In addition, the winning probability of the 7-bell winning in the general gaming state is set to about 1/6.0 with respect to only one piece.

By the way, in the conventional slot machine, when a game is played with one or two cards, the probability that various benefits are granted is extremely low compared to when the game is played with three cards. There was also a machine for exclusive use of 3 cards that was set, or a game could not be played with 1 card or 2 cards, and a game could only be played with 3 cards. This is done as a device for increasing the operating rate of the slot machine in the hole, and is intended to allow the player to play one game with three medals as much as possible.

However, the number of medals lent out from the hall before the game is not necessarily a multiple of 3, and is generally lent out in units of 50, so there is a high probability that the player will have less than 3 medals at hand. There was a possibility of remaining. If there are less than three medals left in the hand, it is not possible to play the game with the remaining medals on the special machine for three-player, and a slot machine capable of one-player or two-player. Also in this case, since the probability that the privilege is given is low, there is a possibility that the medal may be left in the hall or the player may bring back the remaining medal. In this way, if a medal is left in the hole, the player will be defeated by the value of the medal, and if the player brings back the remaining medal, the medal lent in the hole cannot be collected, and However, there is a risk that a player may play a game using a medal brought back from another hole, which causes damage to the hole side.

On the other hand, in the present slot machine 10, when the game is played with two cards, the Cherry Bell prize is established with a high probability of about 1.8, and when the game is played with one card. With a high probability of about 1/6.0, the Cherry Bell prize is established and three medals are paid out. Therefore, in the slot machine 10, even if the probability of winning the BB prize in the case of one or two coins is extremely low, if one or two medals remain in the player's hand In addition, it is possible to allow the player to play the game with one or two coins while having an expectation that a cherry bell win in which three medals will be paid out will be established. Then, as a result of this game, if the Cherry Bell winning is established, three medals are paid out, so that the player can use the three medals under a more advantageous condition than one or two stakes. You can play the game with the expectation that the BB prize will be won. Further, even if the game is missed, the game can be ended without leaving extra tokens for the player.

Further, when the game is played with one coin, the 7-bell prize is established with a high probability of about 1/6.0, and two medals are paid out. Therefore, in the slot machine 10, when one medal is left at the player's hand, two medals are paid out together with an expectation that a Cherry Bell prize will be achieved in which three medals will be paid out. It is possible to allow the player to execute the game by multiplying by one piece while having an expectation that the 7-bell prize will be established. Then, as a result of this game, if the 7-bell prize is established, two medals are paid out, so that the player uses the two medals to pay three more medals to win the cherry bell prize. You can enjoy the game with the expectation that you will win.

In this way, even if one or two medals are left at the player's hand, the one or two medals are used to pay out three medals. It is possible to make the player play the game aiming at the 7-bell winning in which the medals are paid out. Therefore, the slot machine 10 can give the player a motivation to use up the medals without leaving extra medals.

Here, referring to FIG. 5 again, in the reels 32L and 32M of the "cherry" symbol of the left reel 32L, the "7" symbol of the left reel 32L and the "bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M where the cherry bell prize and the 7-bell prize are established, respectively. The arrangement position will be briefly described.

First, in the left reel 32L, the "cherry" symbols are arranged such that the interval between the symbol that reaches the lower stage first and the symbol that reaches the lower stage is 7 symbols. For example, the 3rd "cherry" symbol and the 10th "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L are arranged such that the interval is 7 symbols. In addition, since the 0th and 20th reels are actually arranged adjacent to each other, the 17th "cherry" symbol and the 3rd "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L have a 7-symbol spacing. ing. On the other hand, the "7" symbol of the left reel 32L is also arranged so that the interval between the symbol that reaches the lower stage first and the symbol that reaches the lower stage becomes 7 symbols. For example, the 6th "7" symbol and the 13th "7" symbol on the left reel 32L are arranged so that the interval is 7 symbols, and the 20th "7" symbol on the left reel 32L The 6th "7" symbol is also arranged so that its interval is 7 symbols.

In this way, the "cherry" symbol and the "7" symbol are arranged on the left reel 32L so that the intervals between the symbols of the same type are 7 symbols. As described above, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped after sliding up to four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 were operated. Therefore, by adopting such a symbol arrangement, even when the left stop switch 42 is operated at any timing, the "cherry" symbol or the "7" symbol can be selected when the cherry bell prize or the 7 bell prize is established. The display window 26L can be stopped at any of the upper, middle, and lower positions.

For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated when the third "cherry" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, if the left reel 32L is stopped as it is, the "cherry" symbol is stopped at the lower stage. If the left stop switch 42 is operated when the 4th "replay" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, if the left reel 32L is slid for 4 symbols and then stopped, the 10th " The "cherry" symbol can be stopped in the upper row, and when the left stop switch 42 is operated when the 5th "bell" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower row, the left reel 32L is slid by 4 symbols. If stopped later, the 10th "cherry" symbol can be stopped in the middle.

Further, if the left stop switch 42 is operated when the sixth "7" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, if the left reel 32L is stopped as it is, this "7" symbol can be stopped at the lower stage. If the left stop switch 42 is operated when the 7th "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, if the left reel 32L is slid by 4 symbols and then stopped, the 13th symbol is displayed. 7" symbol can be stopped in the upper row, and when the left stop switch 42 is operated when the "replay" symbol of number 8 on the left reel 32L reaches the lower row, the left reel 32L is slid by 4 symbols. If stopped later, the 13th "7" symbol can be stopped in the middle.

On the other hand, in the middle reel 32M, the "bell" symbols are arranged such that the interval between the symbol that reaches the lower stage first and the symbol that reaches the lower stage is 5 symbols or less. For example, the number 0 "bell" symbol and the number 5 "bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M are arranged so that the interval is 5 symbols, and the number 9 "bell" symbol of the medium reel 32M. The No. 12 "bell" symbol is arranged so that the interval is three symbols. In this way, since the "bell" symbols are arranged on the middle reel 32M so that the intervals between the same symbols are 5 symbols or less, by using such a symbol arrangement, the middle stop switch 43 is operated at any timing. Even if it is done, the "bell" symbol can be stopped at the middle position of the display window 26M when the cherry bell prize or the 7 bell prize is established.

For example, if the middle stop switch 43 is operated when the 11th "7" symbol of the middle reel 32M reaches the lower stage, if the middle reel 32M is stopped as it is, this "bell" symbol can be stopped in the middle stage. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated when the 12th "bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M reaches the lower stage, if the middle reel 32M is slid for 4 symbols and then stopped, the 17th " You can stop the "bell" pattern in the middle.

In this way, even when the stop switches 42 and 43 are operated at any timing, the "cherry" symbol or the "7" symbol can be stopped in any of the upper, middle, and lower stages of the display window 26L. It is possible to display the "bell" symbol in the middle of the display window 26M. Therefore, when the Cherry Bell prize or the 7 Bell prize is won in the prize mode lottery, the stop symbol corresponding to the Cherry Bell prize or the 7 Bell prize is dealt with regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 of the player. Since the stop symbol can be displayed on any of the middle line L2, the right downward line L4, and the right upward line L5 (see FIG. 6), it is possible to establish a cherry bell prize or a 7 bell prize without so-called “missing”. it can.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. As other winning modes that the slot machine 10 can take, a "replay" symbol, a "replay" symbol, and a replay award that is established when the slot machine 10 is stopped along with the "replay" symbol are provided on the activated line from the left. When the replay winning is established, the player can play the next game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting any medals, although no payout of medals or state transition is performed. Therefore, when the replay prize is established, the number of medals inserted in the game (the number of bets) is paid out, that is, when the number of medals is one, the number of medals is one, and when the number of medals is two, two or three. In the case of, it can be considered that three medals are paid out. In addition, the winning probability of the replay prize in the general game state is not limited to the number of inserted medals (the number of bets), and is high at about 7.3 in all cases of one coin, two coins, and three coins. It is set to probability. Since this replay prize is established with a high probability, it is desired to establish a special small part prize (cherry bell prize or 7 bell prize) when a game is played with a BB prize or with one or two coins. A great sense of challenge can be given to the player.

As shown in FIG. 5, the “replay” symbols that establish the replay prize are reels 32L and 32M such that the interval between the symbols that reach the lower stage first and the symbols that reach the lower stage is 5 symbols or less. , 32R. For example, the 8th "replay" symbol and the 11th "replay" symbol of the left reel 32L are arranged so that the intervals are 3 symbols, and the 1st "replay" symbol of the middle reel 32M and 6 The numbered "replay" symbols are arranged so that the intervals are 5 symbols. In this way, the "replay" symbols are arranged on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R such that the intervals between the symbols of the same type are 5 symbols or less. As described above, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped after sliding up to four symbols from the timing at which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. Therefore, by using such a symbol arrangement, the stop switches 42 to 44 can be stopped. The "replay" symbol can be stopped at the middle position of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R when the replay prize is established, no matter what timing is operated. For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated when the third "cherry" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, if the left reel 32L is stopped as it is, the fourth "replay" symbol is stopped in the middle stage. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated when the first "replay" symbol of the medium reel 32M reaches the lower stage, the medium reel 32M is slid by 4 symbols, and then stopped, then the sixth number is reached. The "replay" symbol of can be stopped in the middle stage. Therefore, when the player wins the replay prize, the "replay" symbol can be stopped on the middle line L2 (see FIG. 6) regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, the replay prize can be established without so-called “missing”.

In other cases, that is, when the combination of the above-mentioned symbols does not stop on the activated line, the medal payout, the transition of the game state, etc. are not performed at all, and the game is out. That is, the "youth" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the "cherry" symbol of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, and the "star" symbol of the middle reel 32M have nothing to do with winning. In other words, it can be said that each of the above-mentioned symbols is a non-privilege symbol that is unrelated to the privilege given to the player. That is, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided with a bonus symbol related to winning such as a "bell" symbol and a non-privilege symbol unrelated to winning such as a "youth" symbol. In the following, a combination of symbols corresponding to each winning combination is also referred to as a combination of winning symbols. For example, the combination of BB symbols is a combination of symbols that are a BB prize, that is, a combination of “7” symbols, “7” symbols, and “7” symbols.

As described above, in the present slot machine 10, the probability of winning the BB prize when the game is played by inserting three medals is sufficiently higher than when the game is played by inserting one or two medals. Since it is set, it is possible to make one game by inserting three medals while expecting the player that many medals will be paid out by the establishment of the BB winning. As a result, the medals are consumed quickly, and the operating rate of the slot machine in the hole can be increased.

On the other hand, when the game is played by inserting one or two medals, the Cherry Bell prize with three medals paid out is set as the winning candidate, and the winning probability is set to be high. If one or two medals remain in the player's hand, the player expects the player to get three medals when the Cherry Bell wins, and the one or two medals remaining in hand Can be thrown to play one game. As a result, if three medals are paid out due to the establishment of the Cherry Bell prize, the player can insert the three medals and play another game while expecting to achieve the BB prize. The player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals. Further, even if the result of the game played by inserting one or two medals is missed, the game can be ended without leaving any extra medals for the player. In this way, the slot machine 10 can allow the player to enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals. And the problem that the player loses by finishing the game without using the lent medal, the player can not take back the remaining medal and collect the lent medal, or bring it from another hole It is possible to avoid the problem that the hall side suffers damage when the player uses the medal.

Also, when the game is played by inserting one medal, the 7-belt winning with two coins paid out is also set as a winning candidate, and the winning probability is also set high, so that the player has If one player has one remaining medal, he expects the player to be able to win two medals if the 7-bell prize is established, and once the player has one remaining medal thrown in. Can be played. As a result, when two medals are paid out due to the establishment of the 7-bell prize, the player throws in the two medals and expects to establish the cherry bell prize in which three more medals will be paid out. , You can enjoy another game. If the Cherry Bell prize is established, the player can play the game by inserting the three medals paid out while expecting the BB prize to be established, so that the player can play the game to the end without leaving extra medals. Can be enjoyed, and even if it is missed, the medals can be used up. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the game to the end without leaving extra medals while giving the player further enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the lottery of the prize mode, when the cherry bell prize in which three medals are paid out and the 7 bell prize in which two medals are paid out are won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. , The stop symbol can be stopped on the effective line without dropping, so the result of the lottery of the game started by the player with one or two coins, the cherry bell prize or the 7 bell prize was won as a winning role. In this case, those winnings can be surely achieved without depending on the artificial operation. In addition, it is possible to allow the player to play the game while aiming for another prize (for example, a BB prize) while expecting the establishment of a cherry bell prize or a 7-bell prize.

Here, the expected value of the number of paid-out medals in the normal gaming state in the case of one-player and the two-player will be described. First of all, in the case of the one-player game, the winning probability in the general game state of the watermelon prize and the bell prize is set to 1/65536, and when one of the prizes is established, three medals are paid out. In addition, the winning probabilities in the general gaming state of the Cherry Bell prize and the 7 Bell prize are set to about 1/6.0, respectively, and when the Cherry Bell prize is established, 3 pieces and when the 7 Bell prize is established. 2 medals will be paid out. Also, the winning probability of the replay prize in the general game state is set to about 1/7.3, and when the replay prize is established, as described above, it is equivalent to one coin payout. I can think. On the other hand, the winning probability in the general gaming state of BB winning is set to 1/65536, and when the BB winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the bonus state, but the number of medals paid out is zero. Here, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out per game in the normal gaming state is equal to a value obtained by multiplying the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to each of the above-mentioned winning probabilities and adding these multiplication results, and The expected value is about 0.96. That is, in the normal game state, the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of bets (one) is about 96%, and it is expected that the medals owned by the player will decrease by about 0.04 each time one game is played. ..

In addition, in the case of two coins, the winning probability in the general game state of watermelon prize and bell prize is set to 1/65536, and when one of the prizes is established, three medals are paid out. In addition, the winning probability in the general gaming state of the Cherry Bell prize is set to about 1.8/1, and when the Cherry Bell prize is established, three medals are paid out. In addition, the winning probability of the replay prize in the general game state is set to about 1/7.3, and when the replay prize is established, as described above, it is equivalent to the one in which two medals are paid out. I can think. On the other hand, the winning probability in the general gaming state of BB winning is set to 1/65536, and when the BB winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the bonus state, but the number of medals paid out is zero. Therefore, the expected value of the number of paid-out medals per game in the general game state in which two coins are played is about 1.94. That is, in the normal game state, the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of bets (two) is about 97%, and it is expected that the medals owned by the player will decrease by about 0.06 each time one game is played. ..

In this way, in both cases of one-player and two-player, the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of bets is set to a value close to 100% without limit. If you do, the medals will be returned to the player with an expected value of almost 100%. That is, even if a player plays a game with one or two medals, the number of medals hardly decreases. Therefore, when one or two medals remain in the player's hand, the one remaining in the player's hand Alternatively, it is possible to surely make one want to play a game using two medals. Therefore, it is possible to further reduce the possibility that the player will leave the medal and finish the game.

On the other hand, when the game is played with one and two cards, it is expected that the number of medals will be reduced, though slightly, so if you repeat the game with one or two cards, the number of medals will increase. Instead of doing so, it is decreasing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from repeatedly playing the game with one piece or two pieces and aiming for an increase in medals. Therefore, when there are three or more medals, it is possible to allow the player to play the game with three coins having a high probability of winning the BB prize.

In the present embodiment, the number of medals to be paid out when the cherry bell win is achieved by playing the game with one or two coins is set to the maximum bet number of three, and the game is executed with one coin. The number of medals to be paid out when the 7-bell winning is established is set to 2, but the number of medals to be paid out when the cherry-bell winning is established is set to a multiple of 3, and the number of medals to be paid out when the 7-bell winning is established. It may be set to a multiple of 2. However, if you set the payout number to 3 or 2 when the Cherry Bell prize or 7-bell prize is established, even if the expected value of the medal payout number is set to less than 100%, each prize will be won. The winning probability of can be set high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the probability that a cherry bell prize or a 7-bell prize will be established, and it is possible to increase the probability that three or two medals will be awarded to the player, so that one or two coins will be given to the player. You can use the medals to make you want to play the game.

In FIG. 7, the winning probability when the setting state is “Setting 1” is shown, but even when the setting state is set to any one of “Setting 2” to “Setting 6”, one winning The winning probability corresponding to each winning mode in the case of two coins is set so that the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of bets is less than 100%. In addition, in the present embodiment, the winning probability corresponding to each winning mode in the case of a one-player and a two-player is changed according to the setting state (“setting 1” to “setting 6”). The winning probability of multiplying by two and winning by two may be constant regardless of the setting state. In other words, the winning probability may be changed according to the setting state only when the number of coins is three. In addition, in the case of the one-piece or two-piece arrangement, the winning probability of at least one of the BB prize, the watermelon prize, the bell prize, and the replay prize is determined according to the setting state (“setting 1” to “setting 6”). Although changed, the winning probabilities of the Cherry Bell prize and the 7-bell prize, which are special small prize prizes in the case of the one-piece and the two-piece prizes, may not be changed and may be set to a constant value.

In addition, in the slot machine 10, the winning mode is established only when the game is played with one or two cherry bells, and when the game is played with three, the left reel 32L Even if the "Bell" symbol stops on the "Cherry" symbol and the middle reel 32M, the Cherry Bell prize is not established and it is treated as an outlier. The player can be made to pay attention as a winning prize. Therefore, when the game is played with one piece or two pieces, if the symbol stops due to the stop symbol of the Cherry Bell winning, the player can be greatly delighted.

Similarly, if the 7-belt winning is established only when the game is played with one coin, and the game is played with two or three coins, the "7" symbol is displayed on the left reel 32L. Even if the "bell" symbol stops on the middle reel 32M, the 7-bell prize is not established and is treated as an outlier. It can be noticed. Therefore, when the game is played with one piece, if the symbol stops at the 7-bell winning stop symbol, the player can be greatly delighted.

Further, in the present slot machine 10, even when the game is played with one or two cards, the BB winning is set although the winning probability is extremely low. As a result, even when the game is played with one or two cards, the player can be expected to win the BB prize.

Further, in the present slot machine 10, when a game is played with one or two cards, when a watermelon prize or a bell prize, which is a normal small role prize other than the BB prize or the replay prize, is established. Also, unlike the number of medals paid out when the game is played with three coins, three medals are paid out as in the case where the Cherry Bell prize is established. The player can play one more game by inserting the three medals given, expecting the BB winning combination, and the player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals. it can. In addition, in the slot machine 10, the probability of winning the watermelon prize or the bell prize when the game is played with one or two cards is set low, while the winning probability of the cherry bell prize or the 7 bell prize is set high. Therefore, it is possible to further impress to the player that the Cherry Bell prize or the 7-bell prize is a special small prize prize with one or two coins, and one or two coins. When the game is played in, the player can be expected to win the Cherry Bell prize and the 7-bell prize.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the slot machine 10.

The main controller 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centering on the MPU 102 which is an arithmetic processing unit. In addition to the power supply device 91, a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like are connected to the MPU 102 via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as a main board built in the slot machine 10.

On the input side of the main control device 101, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R makes one rotation), and a start detection sensor that detects an operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, a first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and a second inserted medal detection sensor 45b for detecting medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45, A payout detection sensor 51a for detecting medals paid out from the hopper device 51, a credit insertion detection sensor 56a-58a for individually detecting an operation of each credit insertion switch 56-58, a settlement detection sensor 59a for detecting an operation of a settlement switch 59, Various sensors such as a reset detection sensor 72a for detecting the operation of the reset switch 72 and a setting key detection sensor 73a for detecting that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned on are connected. A signal from the sensor is output to the MPU 102 via the input/output port 104.

A power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104. The power supply device 91 is equipped with a power supply unit 91a that supplies drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b is for monitoring the power cut-off state and generating a power failure signal when the power is shut off by the power switch 71 as well as at the time of power failure. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12V output from the power supply unit 91a in this example, and determines that the power supply is cut off when the drive voltage drops to less than 10V, for example. Is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the MPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the MPU 102 recognizes the power failure signal to execute the power failure process described later. The power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 V used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main controller 101 even when the output voltage drops to less than 10 V. As the time for which the stabilized voltage is output, a time sufficient for executing the power failure process by the main control device 101 is secured.

On the output side of the main control device 101, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating each reel 32L, 32M, 32R), a medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in a selector 46, a hopper device 51, and a credit. A display unit 60, a balance payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. are connected via the input/output port 104. There is.

The display control device 81 is a control device for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 10, the MPU 181, the image controller 188, and a substrate on which various memories are integrated are provided, and after receiving a signal from the main controller 101, display control is performed. The device 81 independently drives and controls the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is a main board that controls and manages the game. The various display units 60 to 62 may also be configured to be drive-controlled by the display control device 81.

In addition, in the display control device 81, the character ROM 187 that stores various image data to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is configured by a NAND flash memory that is a low-cost memory that has a large storage capacity in a small area. .. As a result, the character ROM 187 can be easily increased in capacity, and many images can be prepared as images to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the auxiliary display unit is provided. The images displayed on the screen can be diversified and complicated. It should be noted that the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, and particularly when reading data by random access, the read speed related to the read is higher than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). And slow. Therefore, in the display control device 81, even if a memory having a slow reading speed is used as a storage unit for image data, an invention is made to display an image at a desired display time without any problem. The details will be described later with reference to FIG.

The MPU 102 described above has a ROM 105 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 105. A RAM 106 for securing and a free-run counter 107 for generating a random number are built in. Although not shown, the MPU 102 also includes various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, and various counters such as a credit counter for counting the number of credits, as is well known. It is built in.

The free-run counter 107 is a counter configured by hardware that generates and updates a random number of 0 to 65535 in a short cycle. After confirming the operation of the start lever 41 based on the output signal of the start detection sensor 41a, the MPU 102 latches the value of the free-run counter 107 by the hardware circuit and stores the latched value in the RAM 106. With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter 107 each time the start lever 41 is operated. Further, the value of the free-run counter latched and stored in the RAM 106 is used for lottery the winning mode (winning part) of the game started by the operation of the start lever 41.

The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as a storage unit, and programs for executing various processes shown in the flowcharts of FIG. 12 and subsequent figures are stored in the ROM 105 as a part of the control program. Further, the ROM 105 is provided with at least a lottery table storage area 105a for storing a lottery table used for the lottery in the winning mode.

Here, the lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a lottery table selected in the normal game state when the setting state is set to “setting 1”. (a) shows the number of inserted medals is 3 (3) Multi-drawing lottery table to be used, (b) is a 2-multiplication lottery table to be used when the number of inserted medals is 2 (2), and (c) is The drawing shows the one-drawing lottery table used when the number of inserted medals is one (one-up).

An index value IV is set in each lottery table, and each winning prize mode associated with a win is uniquely associated with each index value IV, and a point value corresponding to the winning probability corresponding to the winning mode. PV is set for each lottery table. Specifically, IV=1 is associated with a BB prize as a prize mode, IV=2 is associated with a watermelon prize, IV=3 is associated with a bell prize, and IV=4 is associated with IV=4. Is associated with the Cherry Bell prize, IV=5 is associated with the 7-bell prize, and IV=6 is associated with the replay prize.

Further, in the three-piece lottery table, as shown in FIG. 9A, PV=1256 is associated with IV=1 (BB winning) and PV=256 with IV=2 (watermelon winning). 8192 is associated, PV=12850 is associated with IV=3 (bell prize), PV=0 is associated with IV=4 (cherry bell prize), IV=5 (7 bell prize) ) Is associated with PV=0, and IV=6 (replay prize) is associated with PV=8980.

Here, the lottery method of the winning mode will be briefly described. When the random number value of the free-run counter 107 is latched by the operation of the start lever 41 and stored in the RAM 106, first, the value of the point value PV associated with IV=1 (BB winning) (FIG. 9A). 256) is added to the value of the latched random number in the lottery table shown in (4), and it is set as the determination value DV (see S304 in FIG. 14). If the determination value DV is greater than 65535, the BB winning combination is determined as the winning combination of the game (see S305 and S306 in FIG. 14), and the lottery is finished. That is, when the lottery is performed using the three-sheet lottery table shown in FIG. 9A, when the value of the latched random number is in the range of 655280 to 65535, the BB winning is determined as the winning combination. .. Therefore, the winning probability is set to 1/256 as shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the determination value DV is 65535 or less, the index value IV is incremented by 1 (see S307 in FIG. 14), and the value of the point value PV corresponding to the index value IV after the increment is added to the determination value DV. Then, the determination value DV is updated (see S304 in FIG. 14). If the updated determination value DV is greater than 65535, the winning mode corresponding to the index value IV after the advance is determined as a winning combination, the lottery is finished, and if it is 65535 or less, Further, the index value IV is further incremented by 1 to update the determination value DV (addition of the point value PV corresponding to IV after the advance) and determination of the updated determination value DV (whether or not the determination value DV is larger than 65535). ) And are repeated until the winning combination is determined or there is no more determination combination (until IV exceeds the maximum value) (see S304 to S308 in FIG. 14).

As a result, when the lottery is performed using the three-sheet multiplication lottery table shown in FIG. 9A, when the latched random number value is in the range of 57088 to 655279, the watermelon prize is determined as the winning combination, When the value of the latched random number is in the range of 44238 to 57087, the bell winning is determined as the winning combination, and when the value of the latched random number is in the range of 35258 to 44237, the replay winning is determined as the winning combination. .. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7, the winning probability of each prize mode is set to 1/8 for watermelon prize, about 1/1 for bell prize, and about 1/5 for replay prize. It will be set to 1/3.

It should be noted that in the three-sheet lottery table shown in FIG. 9A, the value of the point value PV corresponding to IV=4 (cherry bell prize) and IV=5 (7 bell prize) is set to 0. Therefore, even if the determination value DV is updated using this value, the value does not change before and after the update. Then, when the point value PV corresponding to IV=4 and IV=5 is added to the determination value DV, since the determination value DV is 65535 or less, when IV=4 and IV=5. Even if the determination of the updated determination value is performed, the determination value is not determined to be larger than 65535. Therefore, by setting the value of the point value PV corresponding to IV=4 (cherry bell prize) and IV=5 (7 bell prize) to 0, the cherry bell prize and the 7 bell prize are not selected as a winning combination. It has become.

In the two-drawing lottery table shown in FIG. 9B, PV=1 is associated with IV=1 (BB winning) and PV=1 is associated with IV=2 (watermelon winning). , IV=3 (bell winning), PV=1 is associated, IV=4 (cherry bell winning) is associated with PV=36400, and IV=5 (7 bell winning) is associated with PV. =0 is associated, and PV=8980 is associated with IV=6 (replay prize). Therefore, when a lottery is performed using the two-drawing lottery table shown in FIG. 9B, when the value of the latched random number is 65535, the BB winning is determined as the winning combination, and the latched random number is When the value is 65534, the watermelon winning combination is determined as the winning combination, and when the latched random number value is 65533, the Bell winning combination is determined as the winning combination, and the latched random number value falls within the range of 29133 to 65532. At some point, the Cherry Bell prize is determined as the winning combination, and when the value of the latched random number is in the range of 20153 to 29132, the Replay prize is determined as the winning combination. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7, the winning probabilities of the respective winning modes are set to 1/65536 for the BB winning, the watermelon winning, and the bell winning, respectively, and to about 1.8 times for the cherry bell winning. The replay prize will be set to about 1/7.3. Since the value of the point value PV corresponding to IV=5 (7-bell winning) is set to 0, the 7-bell winning is not set as a winning combination as described above.

Further, in the one-drawing lottery table shown in FIG. 9C, PV=1 is associated with IV=1 (BB winning), and PV=1 is associated with IV=2 (watermelon winning). PV=1 is associated with IV=3 (bell prize), PV=10880 is associated with IV=4 (cherry bell prize), and IV=5 (7 bell prize) is associated with IV=4 (cherry bell prize). Is associated with PV=10880, and PV=8980 is associated with IV=6 (replay prize). Therefore, when the lottery is performed using the one-time-drawing lottery table shown in FIG. 9C, when the value of the latched random number is 65535, the BB winning is determined as the winning combination, and the latched random number is When the value is 65534, the watermelon winning combination is determined as the winning combination, and when the latched random number value is 65533, the Bell winning combination is determined as the winning combination, and the latched random number value falls within the range of 54653 to 65532. One time, the Bell Bell prize is determined as the winning combination, the 7-bell prize is determined as the winning combination when the latched random number value is in the range of 43773 to 54652, and the latched random number value is 34793 to 43772. When it is within the range, the replay prize is determined as the winning combination. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7, the winning probabilities of the respective winning modes are set to 1/65536 for the BB winning, the watermelon winning, and the bell winning, respectively, and about 6.0 for the cherry bell winning and the 7 bell winning. The replay prize will be set to about 7.3.

In the lottery table storage area 105a, for each of "setting 1" to "setting 6", a one-game-drawing lottery table, a two-game-multiplication lottery table, and a three-game-multiplication lottery table for the normal gaming state are stored. There is. Further, a bonus state lottery table used when the slot machine 10 is in the bonus state is prepared for each of “setting 1” to “setting 6”. Then, a lottery table used for the lottery of the winning mode (winning combination) is set according to the setting state and the game state of the slot machine 10 and the number of inserted medals (the number of bets). That is, in the normal game state, when the bet number is 3, the three-piece lottery table corresponding to the set state of the slot machine 10 is set, and when the bet number is 2, the slot machine 10 When the bet number is one, the two-drawing lottery table corresponding to the set state is set, and the one-drawing lottery table corresponding to the set state of the slot machine 10 is set. When the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is in the bonus state, the bonus state time lottery table corresponding to the setting state of the slot machine 10 is set (see FIG. 15). Then, a lottery for winning modes is performed using the set lottery table.

As a lottery table used when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is in the bonus state, no different lottery table is provided depending on the bet number (1 to 3), but this is the bonus in the present embodiment. This is because the game is played with the bet number limited to 3 when in the state. Therefore, in the bonus state, the corresponding bonus state lottery table is simply set according to the setting states (“setting 1” to “setting 6”) of the slot machine 10.

In the present slot machine 10, when in the normal gaming state, the three-card lottery table, the two-card lottery table, and the one-card lottery table shown in FIGS. 9A to 9C are set according to the number of bets. It is possible to set the probability of winning the BB prize when the game is played by inserting three medals to be sufficiently higher than when the game is played by inserting one or two medals. .. Therefore, as described above, it is possible to insert three medals and play one game while expecting the player that many medals will be paid out by establishing the BB prize. As a result, the medals are consumed quickly, and the operating rate of the slot machine in the hole can be increased.

Further, when the game is played by inserting one or two medals, the cherry bell winning with three medals paid out can be set as the winning candidate, and the winning probability can be set high. Therefore, when one or two medals remain in the player's hand, the player expects that three medals will be paid out due to the establishment of the Cherry Bell winning, and the remaining one or two medals are expected. One medal can be played by inserting a medal. As a result, if three medals are paid out due to the establishment of the Cherry Bell prize, the player can insert the three medals and play another game while expecting to achieve the BB prize. The player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals. Further, even if the result of the game played by inserting one or two medals is missed, the game can be ended without leaving any extra medals for the player.

Further, when the game is played by inserting one medal, the 7-belt winning combination with two medal payouts can be set as a winning candidate, and the winning probability can be set high, so that the game can be played. When one player has one medal left, he expects the player to be able to pay out two medals if the 7-bell prize is won, while letting the player insert the remaining one medal. It is possible to make one game play. As a result, when two medals are paid out due to the establishment of the 7-bell prize, the player throws in the two medals and expects to establish the cherry bell prize in which three more medals will be paid out. , You can enjoy another game. If the Cherry Bell prize is established, the player can play the game by inserting the three medals paid out while expecting the BB prize to be established, so that the player can play the game to the end without leaving extra medals. Can be enjoyed, and even if it is missed, the medals can be used up. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the game to the end without leaving extra medals while giving the player further enjoyment of the game.

In this way, the slot machine 10 can allow the player to enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals.

Further, the winning probability of each winning mode can be set to the value shown in FIG. 7 by using the one-drawing lottery table or the two-drawing lottery table stored in the lottery table storage area 105a. As described above with reference to FIG. 7, the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of bets can be set to a value less than 100% and infinitely close to 100% in both cases of one-player and two-player. it can. Therefore, even if a player plays a game with one or two medals, the number of medals hardly decreases. Therefore, when one or two medals remain in the player's hand, the one remaining in the player's hand Alternatively, it is possible to surely make the player want to play the game by using two medals, and it is possible to further reduce the possibility that the player will leave the medals and finish the game. On the other hand, if the game is repeated by playing one or two, the number of medals is reduced, so that the player repeats the game with one or two and the number of medals increases. You can prevent you from aiming. Therefore, when there are three or more medals, it is possible to instruct the player to play the game with three coins with a high probability of winning the BB prize.

Also, by switching and using each lottery table according to the number of bets, the winning mode is established only when the game is played with one or two cherry bells. If it is played, it can be handled as a miss without establishing the Cherry Bell prize, so pay attention to the player as the Cherry Bell prize is a special small role prize for 1 and 2 Can be made Similarly, if the 7-belt winning is established only when the game is played with one piece, and if the game is played with two or three sheets, the 7-bell winning is not established. Since it is handled as a miss, it is possible to make the player pay attention as the 7-bell prize is a special small prize prize for exclusive use of one piece. Therefore, when the game is played with one piece or two pieces, if the symbol stops due to the stop symbol of the cherry bell prize or the 7 bell prize, it is possible to give a great joy to the player.

In addition, even if the game is played with one or two cards, it can be set so that a BB winning is achieved even though the winning probability is extremely low. Even when the game is played with, the player can be expected to have a BB prize.

Further, in the slot machine 10, the probability of winning the watermelon prize or the bell prize when the game is played with one or two cards is set low, while the winning probability of the cherry bell prize or the 7 bell prize is set high. As a result, it is possible to further impress to the player that the Cherry Bell prize or the 7-bell prize is a special small prize prize with one piece or two pieces, and one piece or two pieces. It is possible to give the player an expectation that a cherry bell prize or a 7 bell prize will be established when the game is played in a hanging manner.

In the present embodiment, the point value PV corresponding to IV=5 (7 bell winning) is set to 0 in the two-drawing lottery table, and IV=4 (cherry bell winning is set in the three-drawing lottery table. ) And IV=5 (7-bell winning), the point value PV is set to 0 so that the winning modes are selected, but the winning modes are not won. However, the winning modes are won. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the winning prize mode is not won by not setting the index value IV that becomes and not performing the lottery of those winning modes.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. The RAM 106 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 91 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the slot machine 10 is cut off. The RAM 106 has a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing a lottery result of the winning combination, and a sliding table used for controlling stop of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition to the sliding table storage area 106b for storing the, the state information storage area 106c for storing the game state such as the bonus state, etc., at least a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like (including the power cutoff by operating the power switch 71. The same applies hereinafter). When the power failure is resolved (including the power-on by operating the power switch 71. The same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power-off based on the information in the backup area. .. Writing to the backup area is executed when the power is cut off by the power failure process (see S103 in FIG. 12), and each value written in the backup area is restored in the main process when the power is turned on.

A power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 102 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt process as the power failure flag generation process is immediately executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 10, an electrical configuration of the display control device 81 of the slot machine 10 will be described. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 81. In the description of FIG. 10, the detailed description of the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 of FIG. 8 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 10, the display control device 81 is a control device for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display portion 65, and displays a microcomputer centering on the MPU 181 which is an arithmetic processing unit and an image. An image controller 188 that draws and displays the drawn image on the auxiliary display unit 65 at a predetermined timing, a character ROM 187 that stores data of the image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the like are mounted.

An input/output port 186, a character ROM 187, and an image controller 188 are connected to the MPU 181 via an internal bus, and a signal latch circuit 182 for latching a control signal such as a command transmitted from the main control device 101 and a predetermined circuit. A clock circuit 183 that outputs a rectangular wave of a frequency, and a work RAM 185 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 181, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program. Are connected.

Further, the MPU 181 is connected to the power supply device 91, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 via the input/output port 186. The power supply device 91 is configured to receive a power failure signal that is output when the drive voltage drops to less than 10 volts, for example. The MPU 181 performs various control processes based on various commands transmitted from the main control device 101, and executes drive control of the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 via the input/output port 186. Below, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are collectively referred to as an auxiliary effect section.

The MPU 181 has a built-in instruction pointer 181a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 181a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the MPU 181 can be reset by the power supply device 91. When the system reset is released, the MPU 181 is reset. The instruction pointer 181a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware. Then, the instruction pointer 181a is incremented by one each time the instruction code is fetched. When the MPU 181 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 181a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the fixed value data for driving the control program executed by the MPU 181 and the upper lamp 63 and the like is a dedicated program ROM (for example, a conventional game machine) (for example, The ROM 22) of Patent Document 1 described above is not provided and stored, but is stored in the character ROM 187 provided for storing the data of the image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 64. As described above, since the character ROM 187 is composed of the NAND flash memory 187a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. On the other hand, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing control programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 81 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged in a plurality of pages consecutively, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified to read the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a low reading speed, if the MPU 181 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 187 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the commands that form the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 181, the processing performance of the display control device 81 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when power is supplied from the power supply device 91 to the display control device 81 and the system reset is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 187a of the character ROM 187 is loaded with various data. The data is transferred to and stored in the work RAM 185 provided for temporary storage of. Then, the MPU 181 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 185. The work RAM 185 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 181 can read the commands that form the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 81, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

A 1-chip microcomputer in which the work RAM 185, the signal latch circuit 182, the clock circuit 183, etc. described above are built in the MPU may be used. The work RAM 185 may be connected to an internal bus connecting the MPU 181, the input/output port 186, the character ROM 187, and the image controller 187.

The work RAM 185 is configured by the DRAM as described above, and is provided with at least the received command storage area 185a, the bet number storage area 185b, and the program storage area 185c.

The received command recording area 185a is an area for temporarily storing various commands transmitted from the main control device 101. When the display control device 81 receives the command transmitted from the main control device 101, the received command is latched by the signal latch circuit 182 and a command interrupt signal is generated toward the MPU 181. The MPU 181 executes command interrupt processing (not shown) triggered by the generation of the command interrupt signal, and stores the command latched by the signal latch circuit 182 in the received command storage area 185a.

The received command storage area 185a is configured to operate as a ring buffer of a FIFO (First In First Out) system, and a command received from the main control unit 101 is received in the received command storage area 185a by the main processing executed by the MPU 181. If stored, the commands are read out in the order in which they are stored, and processing corresponding to each command (for example, start command processing shown in FIG. 20, lottery result command processing shown in FIG. 21, error command processing shown in FIG. 22, etc. ) Is executed.

The bet number storage area 185b is an area for storing information on the number of medals (bet number) inserted at the start of the game. In the slot machine 10, when the player operates the start lever 41 after inserting a specified number of medals, the number of medals (the number of bets) inserted by the normal processing executed by the MPU 102 of the main control device 101. A start command including information regarding the above is set (see S209 in FIG. 13), and the start command is transmitted from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 by the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the main control device 101 ( (See S110 in FIG. 12). By receiving the start command, the display control device 81 recognizes that the start lever 41 has been operated and the game start command has been generated, and executes the start command process (see FIG. 20) to set the start command. Information on the included bet number is extracted and stored in the bet number storage area 185b (see S801 in FIG. 20). The bet number storage area 185b may store the bet number information included in the start command as it is, or may store the bet number information in a format different from the bet number information included in the start command. It may be stored.

In the display control device 81, the number of medals (bet number) inserted at the start of the game is grasped based on the information stored in the bet number storage area 185b, and the auxiliary effect section is caused to execute based on the bet number. Control the presentation mode. For example, when it is determined that the game is started in the state where the bet number is 3 based on the information stored in the bet number storage area 185b, the display control device 81 causes the various commands received from the main control device 101. Based on the gaming state of the slot machine 10 or the result of the lottery (judgment of winning mode) performed based on the start command, the effect mode is selected, and the auxiliary effect unit executes various effects (FIG. 21). S902).

As the effect corresponding to the bet number of 3, for example, as a normal effect, "normal effect" in which a character performing a predetermined action is displayed on the auxiliary display portion 65, and "attend a BB prize!" Is displayed to prompt the player to align the stop symbols corresponding to the BB winning mode, "BB winning challenge production", and the auxiliary display section 65 displays the message "BB winning!" A random number counter (not shown) provided in the display control device 81 includes a lighting of 63 and a sound output from the speaker 64, and a "BB winning notification effect" that notifies that the BB winning mode is set as a winning combination. No.) or the result of lottery (judgment of winning/losing combination) grasped by a lottery result command described later received from the main control device 101, and the slot machine 10 grasped by a state command described later received from the main control device 101. Depending on the game state of the above, the effect mode to be executed by the auxiliary effect unit is determined from those effects.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game is started in the state where the bet number is one or two, it is executed by the auxiliary effector based on the result of the lottery performed based on the generation of the start command by the main control device 101. A performance mode to be performed is selected. For example, it is determined that the bet number is one, and the cherry-bell winning mode, the 7-bell winning mode or the replay winning mode is won by the lottery result command received from the main control device 101, or which winning mode is selected. If it is determined that no prize has been won, the display control device 81 causes the auxiliary display unit 65 to display a message “Challenge the cherry bell/7 bell!” and causes the speaker 64 to output a dedicated voice. The auxiliary effect control unit is controlled to execute the "cherry bell winning/7-bell winning challenge effect" in which the upper lamp 63 is turned on in a dedicated manner (see S911 in FIG. 21). Further, it is determined that the bet number is 2, and the cherry bell winning mode or the replay winning mode is won by the lottery result command received from the main control device 101, or none of the winning modes is won. When it is determined that the display control device 81 displays a message “Challenge the cherry bell!” on the auxiliary display portion 65, outputs a dedicated sound from the speaker 64, and causes the upper lamp 63 to operate in a dedicated mode. The auxiliary effect part is controlled so as to execute the "cherry bell winning challenge effect" to be turned on (see S910 in FIG. 21).

If the game is played with one coin, it is expected that 3 or 2 medals will be paid out by the establishment of the 1-bell prize or 7-bell prize mode by "Cherry Bell prize/7-bell prize challenge production" Can be strongly held by the player. In addition, when the game is played with two coins, the player can strongly expect the player to pay out three medals due to the establishment of the cherry bell prize mode by the "cherry bell prize challenge effect". .. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game by hanging one or two, and can make the player more strongly want to play the game to the end without leaving extra medals.

The "Cherry Bell prize/7-bell prize challenge effect" and the "Cherry Bell prize challenge effect" may be effect modes performed on at least one of the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65. .. In addition to these, a lamp is provided on the game panel 25, for example, if one lamp is lit, the lamp is lit in red, and if two lamps are hung, the lamp is lit in blue, so that each challenge is produced. May be configured to be performed.

Further, when it is determined that the bet number is one or two, if it is determined by the lottery result command received from the main control device 101 that the BB winning mode is won, the display control device 81 causes the BB As an effect for notifying the player that the winning mode has been set as a winning combination, a "BB winning notification effect" for displaying a message "BB winning!" on the auxiliary display portion 65 is executed (see S904 in FIG. 21). ), if it is determined that the watermelon winning mode has been won, the display control device 81 displays “Watermelon winning mode” on the auxiliary display section 65 as an effect to notify the player that the watermelon winning mode has been set as a winning combination. If it is determined that the bell prize mode has been won by executing the “watermelon prize announcement effect” that causes the message “Win!” to be displayed (see S906 in FIG. 21), the display control device 81 wins the bell prize mode. As an effect for notifying the player that the role has been set, a "bell prize notification effect" for displaying a message "Bell prize win!" on the auxiliary display unit 65 is executed (see S908 in FIG. 21).

Here, when the player starts the game by multiplying one or two, that is, when the bet number is one or two, the BB is selected by the lottery table shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C. The winning probabilities of the winning modes, watermelon winning modes, and bell winning modes are kept extremely low, while the winning probabilities of the Cherry Bell winning modes and 7-bell winning modes are set to be high, so that the player has a BB winning mode, There is a high possibility that the player will play a game with little expectation that the watermelon winning mode and the bell winning mode will be established, and conversely, the cherry bell winning mode and the 7-bell winning mode will be expected to be established. In addition, in the present slot machine 10, the cherry bell winning mode and the 7 bell winning mode are effective in the corresponding stop symbol without fail even if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at any timing once they are won as a winning combination. Since it is configured to stop on the line, the player who starts the game with one or two reels is attached to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R displayed in the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. It is highly possible that the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated without looking at the pattern.

Therefore, when the game is played with one or two pieces, even if any of the BB winning manner, the watermelon winning manner and the bell winning manner is won as a winning combination, if the player does not notice it, Since the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode are all winning modes that may be missed, there is a risk that the BB winning mode or the like may be missed. In addition, since the winning of the BB winning mode is valid over the game until the BB winning mode is established (that is, until the stop symbols corresponding to the BB winning mode are aligned on the activated line), the player is allowed to win the BB. If the game ends without noticing the winning of the winning mode, another player establishes the BB winning mode based on the winning of the BB winning mode, and the player who has won the winning of the BB winning mode As a result, there is a risk of loss.

On the other hand, in the present slot machine 10, when the game is played with one or two cards, if any of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode and the bell winning mode is won in the game, Winning is announced by the display of the auxiliary display unit 65. And, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 14, the notification is performed while the player cannot operate the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, the player can know the winning of any of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode before operating the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, when the player plays the game with one or two cards, if this notification is given by the auxiliary display section 65, the winning combination (BB winning mode, watermelon winning mode or bell winning mode) grasped by the notification is given. In order to stop the stop symbol corresponding to the mode) on the activated line, the stop switches 42 to 44 can be operated aiming at the stop symbol, so that those winning modes can be established with a higher probability. Further, when the winning of the BB winning mode is announced, even if the player fails to win the game, the player can continue to play the game until the BB winning mode is established by newly lending the medal. it can.

Note that the above notification may be performed by lighting the upper lamp 63 or outputting sound from the speaker 64. Two or more types of display, that is, the auxiliary display portion 65, lighting of the upper lamp 63, and sound output from the speaker 64, may be used. It may be performed in combination. In addition, a notification-dedicated lamp may be provided on the game panel 25, and the notification effect corresponding to each winning combination may be performed by the lighting color of the lamp.

The program storage area 185c is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 181. When the system reset is released, the MPU 181 reads the control program from the character ROM 187, transfers it to the work RAM 185, and stores it in the program storage area 185c. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 185c, the MPU 181 thereafter executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 185c. As described above, since the work RAM 185 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 187 configured by the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 81. It is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

As described above, the character ROM 187 is a memory that stores the control program executed by the MPU 181 and the data of the image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and is connected to the MPU 181 via the internal bus. After releasing the system reset, the MPU 181 directly accesses the character ROM 187 via the internal bus, and stores the control program stored in the first program storage area 187d1 and the second program storage area 187a1 of the character ROM 187, which will be described later, in the work RAM 185. Transfer to area 185c. An image controller 188 is also connected to the internal bus, and the MPU 181 directly accesses the character ROM 187 to connect image data stored in a character storage area 187a2 of the character ROM 187, which will be described later, to the image controller 188. Transfer to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190.

The character ROM 187 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 187a, a ROM controller 187b, a buffer RAM 187c, and a NOR ROM 187d.

The NAND flash memory 187a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 187, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 181 and fixed value data for driving the upper lamp 63 and the like. It has at least a second program storage area 187a1 and a character storage area 187a2 for storing image (character) data to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 187 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in the present slot machine, by using the NAND flash memory 187a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 187a2 as images to be displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 187a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 187a2 and further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 187a1. In this way, an image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 64 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM (for example, the ROM 22 of the above-mentioned Patent Document 1) like a conventional gaming machine. Since the data can be stored in the character ROM 187 provided for storing the data, the number of parts in the display control device 81 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the failure occurrence rate can be increased due to the increase in the number of parts. Can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 187b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 187. For example, the ROM controller 187b reads out the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 187a or the like based on the address transmitted from the MPU 181 via the internal bus, and the internal bus. To the MPU 181 via.

Here, due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 187a has a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 187b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 187a, or reads/writes data to/from the NAND flash memory 187a while avoiding a defective data block. Data address conversion (for example, see Patent Document 1) is executed.

The ROM controller 187b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 187a including the error bit. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 187a is used as the character ROM 187, the error data is based on erroneous data. Therefore, the MPU 181 can be prevented from performing processing, and the image controller 188 can be prevented from generating various images.

Further, the ROM controller 187b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 187a and avoids access to the defective data block. It is possible to easily access the character ROM 187 without considering Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 187a is used as the character ROM 187, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 187 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 187c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 187a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 187 is designated from the MPU 181 via the internal bus, the ROM controller 187b causes the buffer RAM 187c to store data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the designated address. To determine whether it is set to. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 187a (or NOR ROM 187d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 187c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 187b performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 181 via the internal bus.

The buffer RAM 187c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 187a can be set per bank. Then, the ROM controller 187b reads the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 181 from one bank and outputs it to the MPU 181, and the ROM controller 187b responds to the address designated next by the MPU 181 for the other bank. The process of transferring and setting one page of data including data from the NAND flash memory 187a can be performed in parallel. As a result, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 187 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 187d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 187, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 187a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 187a. ) Is configured. In the NOR ROM 187d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 187, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 187a1 of the NAND flash memory 187a, specifically, the MPU 181 first releases the system reset. A first program storage area 187d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 81 so that various controls for the auxiliary effect producing unit can be executed, and the MPU 181 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 81 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 187d1 stores a predetermined number of instructions (for example, 1024 word (1 word=2 bytes) instructions) from the instruction to be first processed by the MPU 181 after releasing the system reset in the boot program. ..

When the system reset is released, the MPU 181 is configured to set the value of the instruction pointer 181a to "0000H" by hardware and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 181a to the internal bus. Has been done. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 187b of the character ROM 187 detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the internal bus, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 187d1 of the NOR ROM 187d in the buffer RAM 187c, The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 181.

When the MPU 181 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 187, the MPU 181 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 181a, and adds the address indicated by the instruction pointer 181a to the internal bus. specify. Then, the ROM controller 187b of the character ROM 187, while the address designated by the internal bus is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 187d, selects from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 187c from the NOR ROM 187d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 187c and output to the MPU 181.

Here, in the present embodiment, not all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 187a, but a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 181 after the system reset is released in the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 187d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 187a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that, in reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the address designation to the data output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 187a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 181 via the internal bus in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 181 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 187 must read the data for one page including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 187a and set it in the buffer RAM 187c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 187a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 187c. It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 181, there arises a problem that control of the auxiliary effect part in the display control device 81 may not be immediately started.

On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, the NOR ROM 187d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 181 after releasing the system reset in the boot program. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 181 via the internal bus after the system reset is released, the character ROM 187 immediately causes the boot program stored in the first program storage area 187d1 of the NOR ROM 187d to be stored in the buffer RAM 187c. It can be set and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 181. Therefore, the MPU 181 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 181 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 187 composed of the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the display control device 81 can be immediately started.

Now, the boot program excludes a part of the control program stored in the second program storage area 187a1 of the NAND flash memory 187a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 187d1 of the NOR ROM 187d. The control program and fixed value data for driving the upper lamp 63 and the like are programmed so as to be transferred to the program storage area 185c of the work RAM 185 by a predetermined amount. Then, the MPU 181 first transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 187a1 to the program storage area 185c according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 187d1 after the system reset is released, and stores the control program. To do.

The boot program stored in the first program storage area 187d1 transfers the instruction pointer 181a in the program storage area 185c when the control program stored in the second program storage area 187a1 is transferred to the program storage area 185c by a predetermined amount. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 187a1 by the MPU 181 is transferred to the program storage area 185c by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 181a is moved to the first predetermined area of the program storage area 185c. The address is set.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 187a1 is stored in the program storage area 185c, the MPU 181 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 185c, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 181 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 187a having the second program storage area 187a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 185 having the program storage area 185c and fetches the instruction. Then, various kinds of processing will be executed. As described above, since the work RAM 185 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 187 configured by the NAND flash memory 187a having a low read speed, the MPU 181 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 187a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 187d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 187d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 187a1 to the program storage area 185c of the work RAM 185 by a predetermined amount. It is programmed so as to be included, and is programmed so that the instruction pointer 181a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 185c as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 181 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 187a1 to the program storage area 185c by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 187d1 and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs contained in the control program.

In the remaining boot programs, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 185c and the fixed value data for driving the upper lamp 63 and the like are all stored in a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 187a1. The process of transferring to 185c is performed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 181a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 185c. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initialization process (see S702 in FIG. 18) executed after the boot process (see S701 in FIG. 18) stored in the program storage area 185c by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 181 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 187a1 to the program storage area 185c. When the boot program is completely executed by the MPU 181, the instruction pointer 181a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 181 is transferred to the program storage area 185c without referring to the NAND flash memory 187a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 187 composed of the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow reading speed, the control program can be transferred to the program storage area 185c of the work RAM 185 after the system reset is released. Since the MPU 181 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 81 and use the auxiliary effect production unit. Thus, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

As described above, the NOR ROM 187d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 181 after releasing the system reset, and the remaining boot programs are Even if stored in the second program storage area 187a2 of the NAND flash memory 187a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 187a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 185c. Therefore, the character ROM 187 can start up the MPU 181 in a short time only by adding the NOR type ROM 187d having an extremely small capacity, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 187 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

The image controller 188 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the auxiliary display unit 65 at a predetermined timing, and is connected to the MPU 181 via an internal bus. Then, based on an instruction from the MPU 181, an image to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is drawn, and data (drawing image data) corresponding to the drawn image is output to the auxiliary display unit via the input/output port at a predetermined timing. By transferring the drawn image data to the auxiliary display unit 65, the drawn image data is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

A resident video RAM 189 and a normal video RAM 190 are connected to the image controller 188, and image data required for drawing an image by the image controller 188 is read from the character ROM 187 in advance by the MPU 181 before drawing, and is resident. It is transferred to the normal video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190. At this time, the MPU 181 determines which of the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190 is to be transferred (and which address is stored) based on the program or table stored in the program storage area 185c. According to.

Further, when the image controller 188 draws an image, the image data of the character ROM 187 is not used, but the image drawing process is executed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190. As a result, even if the character ROM 187 is composed of the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow reading speed, the image controller 188 uses the image data previously stored in the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 from the character ROM 187 to display an image. Since the drawing is performed, the drawing of the image can be immediately executed without being affected by the slow reading speed of the character ROM 187. Therefore, a desired image can be displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 at a desired time.

The MPU 181 stores a program as to which of the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190 stores the image data required when the image controller 188 draws an image (and at which address). The storage location of the image data (the resident video RAM 189 and normal Which video RAM 190 is stored and at which address it is stored). The image controller 188 reads out necessary image data from a predetermined address of the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 based on the instruction from the MPU 181. As a result, the image controller 188 does not need to determine the storage destination in which the necessary image data is stored, and therefore can concentrate on drawing the image.

When the image controller 188 receives an instruction to draw an image from the MPU 181, it stores the image data required for drawing (the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190 according to the type of the image required for drawing). It is also possible to determine which one is stored and which address is stored. In this case, when the MPU 181 stores image data from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, the image controller 188 causes the image type (or corresponding image) displayed by the stored image data. The address of the character ROM 187 in which the data is stored and the storage destination of the image data are determined based on the control signal from the MPU 181, and the image type (or corresponding) is stored in the RAM provided in the image controller 188. The address of the character ROM 187 in which the image data is stored) may be stored in association with the storage destination of the image data. Then, based on the information stored in the RAM, the image controller 188 may determine the storage destination of the image data required for the image. By determining the image data storage destination by the image controller 188, the processing load of the MPU 181 can be reduced.

The resident video RAM 189 is composed of a DRAM having an input/output port of 1 port (hereinafter, referred to as “1 port type”), and image data transferred from the character ROM 187 is not overwritten during power-on. Used to continue to be retained. As a result, the image data transferred from the character ROM 189 becomes resident in the resident video RAM 189. In the resident video RAM 189, of the images displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, data corresponding to the image displayed when the power is turned on, data corresponding to the frequently displayed image, and the main control device 101. Alternatively, the data corresponding to the image to be displayed immediately among the images determined to be displayed by the display control device 81 is transferred from the character ROM 187 and made resident.

On the other hand, the normal video RAM 190 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is composed of a 1-port type DRAM (Dynamic RAM). In the normal video RAM 190, when the image controller 188 draws an image to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 using image data not resident in the resident video RAM 189, the image data read from the character ROM 187 in advance. To store temporarily. The image data drawn by the image controller 188 (drawing image data) is also stored in the drawing image area (not shown) provided in the normal video RAM 190, and the image controller 188 adjusts the display timing of the auxiliary display unit 65. By transmitting the drawn image data stored in the drawn image area of the normal video RAM 190 to the auxiliary display unit 65, the image corresponding to the drawn image data is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

The resident video RAM 189 is provided with a power-on main image area 189a, a back image area 189b, a character symbol area 189c, a notification effect image area 189d, and an error message image area 189e.

The power-on main image area 189a is an area for storing data corresponding to the power-on main image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 while the display control device 81 is performing the initialization process at power-on. The power-on main image is a message image for notifying the player that initialization processing etc. accompanying power-on is being performed, and a message such as "Powering on! Please wait for a while" Is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 until the initialization process of the display control device 81 is completed.

In the display control device 81, when the power switch 71 is turned on and power is supplied from the power supply device 91 to the display control device 81, the MPU 181 directly accesses the character ROM 181 and the character ROM 181 corresponds to the power-on main image first. The data is read and transferred to the main image area 189a at power-on of the resident video RAM 189 via a buffer RAM 188a (described later) provided in the image controller 188 (see S703 and S704 in FIG. 18). When the image data is stored in the power-on main image area 189a, the MPU 181 instructs the image controller 188 to draw the power-on main image (see S705 in FIG. 18). As a result, in the image controller 188, the power-on main image is drawn using the image data stored in the power-on main image area 189a, and the drawn power-on main image is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. .. Then, the power-on main image is controlled to be displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 until the initialization process of the display control device 81 is completed.

Here, in the initialization processing of the display control device 81, other image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 189 (image data other than the main image at power-on) is read from the character ROM 187 and transferred to the resident video RAM 189. Processing is included (see S708 to S711 in FIG. 18). That is, since all the image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 189 after the power is turned on, after the initialization process is completed, the image controller 188 is used while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 189. The image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 189, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187 composed of the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the auxiliary display unit 65.

In particular, the resident video RAM 189 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 101 or the display control device 81. Even if the character ROM 187 is configured by the NAND flash memory 187a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness from the player operating the start lever 41 and the stop switches 42 to 44 to displaying an image on the auxiliary display section 65. it can.

Further, the display control device 81 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 187 to the power-on main image area 189a of the resident video RAM 189 immediately after the power is supplied, and the power is supplied without delay after the transfer is completed. After the power-on main image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, the power-on main image is controlled to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 until the initialization process of the display control device 81 is completed. The main image at power-on is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 until all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 189 after being displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is transferred from the character RO 187 to the resident video RAM 189. Continue to be done.

In the slot machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 187a is used as the character ROM 187, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 189 is stored in the character ROM 187 due to its slow reading speed. Although it takes a lot of time to transfer to the video RAM 189, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is first transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, and the main image at power-on is supplemented. Since the image data to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 189 after being displayed on the display unit 65 is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, the remaining resident image data is transferred to the resident video RAM 189. While the game is being played, a player or a person related to the hall can check the main image at power-on, which is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. Therefore, the display control device 81 can transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 over time while displaying the main image on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the power is turned on. it can. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 189. While the data is being transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation is stopped.

In addition, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored in the main image area 189a at power-on of the resident video RAM 189, so that the image data corresponding to the main image becomes resident in the resident video RAM 189 in the event of a momentary power failure. If the remaining data remains, the power-on main image can be immediately displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 by using the image data resident in the power-on main image area 189a when the power is restored.

The back image area 189b and the character design area 189c are areas for storing image data corresponding to the back image and the character design used in various effects displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, respectively. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of a main image such as a character pattern displayed on the auxiliary display unit 6.

In the display control device 81, based on the command received from the main control device 101, when it is determined that the game state of the slot machine 10 shifts to a different game state (for example, from the normal state to the bonus state), the rear image and the character pattern The back image and the character design are configured to be changed when changing or performing other various effects, and the back image and the character design are required to change immediately according to the content of the received command.

On the other hand, in the slot machine 10, in the initialization process performed in the display control device 81 when the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the rear image and the character pattern are respectively transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189. It is configured to be transferred in advance to the back image area 189b and the character pattern area 189c via a later-described buffer RAM 188a provided in the image controller 188 (see S708 to S711 in FIG. 18). Then, when the display control device 81 changes the back image or the character design based on the content of the command received from the main control device 101, instead of newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187, the resident video RAM 189. By reading the image data resident in advance in the back image area 189b and the character pattern area 189c, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 188. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187, even if the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 187, the back image and the character design can be immediately changed.

Image data corresponding to all the back images may be resident in the back image area 189b, or image data corresponding to some of the back images may be resident. Further, when the image data corresponding to a part of the rear image is made resident, at least the data corresponding to the rear image to be displayed immediately in response to the reception command from the main control device 101 may be made resident. As a result, when the back image is immediately changed by receiving the reception command from the main control device 101, the back image area 189b always contains the image data corresponding to the changed back image. An image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 188 using the image data and can be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

When the back image is scrolled and displayed over time, the image data corresponding to the entire scrolled range may be made resident in the back image area 189b, or within a predetermined time from the time when the back image is changed. The image data corresponding to the scroll range displayed in <1> may be resident in the back image area 189b. Also, for a predetermined back image such as a back image displayed after the power is turned on, image data corresponding to the entire scrolled range is resident in the back image area 189b, and for another back image, a predetermined time has elapsed since the time when the back image was changed. Image data corresponding to the scroll range displayed within may be resident in the back image area 189b. As a result, at least the image data corresponding to the scroll range displayed within the predetermined time from the time when the rear image is changed is resident in the rear image area 189b. Even if there is, the image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 188 using the image data resident in the back image area 189b and displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

Further, when changing to a back image that is scrolled and displayed, it is more preferable that the position of the back image displayed at the time of change is always started from a fixedly set initial position. .. As a result, the image data to be resident in the back image area 189b can be limited to the image data corresponding to the scroll range displayed within the predetermined time from the fixedly set initial position, and the data amount can be reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, when the image data corresponding to the scroll range displayed within the predetermined time from the time when the rear image is changed is resident in the rear image area 189b, the image controller 188 uses the image data resident in the rear image area 189b. While the image is drawn and the drawn image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, the MPU 181 reads the image data corresponding to the remaining scroll range from the character ROM 187 and transfers it to the normal video RAM 190. You may

As a result, while the back image is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 in the scroll range corresponding to the back image data resident in the back image area 189, it corresponds to the scroll range not resident in the back image area 189. Since the back image data is transferred to the normal video RAM 190, when the back image in the scroll range not resident in the back image area 189 is displayed, the back image data already stored in the normal video RAM 190 is used. Then, the image can be immediately drawn by the image controller and displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. Therefore, at the time of shifting from the display of the back image of the scroll range resident in the back image area 189b to the display of the back image of the scroll range not resident in the back image area 189b, the back image is read again from the character ROM 187. Since it is not necessary, even if the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 187, the rear image can be smoothly moved.

On the other hand, also in the character symbol area 189c, data corresponding to all the character symbols may be resident, or data corresponding to some character symbols may be resident. Further, when the data corresponding to a part of the character designs is made resident, at least the data corresponding to the character designs that should be displayed immediately in response to the command received from the main control device 101 may be made resident. As a result, when a received command is received from the main control device 101 and the character symbol is immediately changed, the image data corresponding to the changed character symbol is always resident in the character symbol area 189c. An image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 188 using the image data and can be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

The notification effect image area 189d is an area for storing image data corresponding to the notification effect displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the error message image area 189e is used when an error occurs in the slot machine 10. Is an area for storing image data corresponding to the error message displayed on the auxiliary display section 65.

For example, when the game is played with a bet number of one or two, and as a result of the lottery, any of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode is won as a winning combination, the display control device 81 In accordance with the winning combination, the auxiliary display unit 65 is configured to perform control so that the BB winning notification effect, the watermelon winning notification effect, and the bell winning notification effect are performed (see S903 to S908 in FIG. 21). In this case, in the display control device 81, the winning combination is grasped by the lottery result command received from the main control device 101, and various notification effects are performed according to the grasped winning combination, but the notification effect is It must be done before the stop switches 42-44 are operated by the player. In addition, since the lottery of the winning combination is performed after the player operates the start lever 41 by the main control device 101, the stop switches 42 to 44 can be operated by the player after the start lever 41 is operated. In a very short time until, the main control device 101 performs the lottery of the winning combination, the main control device 101 notifies the display control device 81 of the lottery result by the lottery result command, and then the display control is performed. Although the corresponding notification effect must be performed by the means 81, in the slot machine 10, in the notification effect image area 189d, image data corresponding to each of the BB winning notification effect, the watermelon winning notification effect, and the bell winning notification effect. Is previously resident, the display control device 81, based on the lottery result command received from the main control device 101, from the character ROM 187 when performing the BB winning notification effect, the watermelon winning notification effect or the bell winning notification effect. Instead of newly reading the corresponding image data, the image controller 188 can draw each notification effect image by reading the image data previously resident in the notification effect image area 189d of the resident video RAM 189. Has become. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187, even if the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 187, each announcement effect image is stopped after the lottery result command is received. The switches 42 to 44 can be displayed before they can be operated by the player.

Further, in the present slot machine 10, the main control device 101 causes the inserted medals to detect the inserted medals based on the detection result of the inserted medal detection devices (the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b). If it is determined that the card is jammed during passage or that the medal has been illegally pulled out, the main control device 101 notifies the display control device 81 of the occurrence of a sensor error by an error command, as described above. Also, when the main control device 101 detects the occurrence of another error, the main control device 101 notifies the display control device 81 of the occurrence of the error together with the content of the error by an error command. Then, when the display control device 81 receives the error command, the display control device 81 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the auxiliary display unit 65.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error. In the slot machine 10, however, the error message image area 189e is displayed. Since the image data corresponding to various error messages are previously resident, the display control device 81 newly creates the image data corresponding to the predetermined error message from the character ROM 187 based on the error command received from the main control device 101. By reading out the image data previously resident in the error message image area 189e of the resident video RAM 189, instead of reading the error message image, the image controller 188 can immediately draw each error message image. Accordingly, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 187. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 187, each error message is issued after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

The image controller 188 is provided with a buffer RAM 188a. The buffer RAM 188a functions as a buffer memory for data transfer from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, and has a storage capacity (for example, 132 blocks) of the NAND flash memory 187a provided in the character ROM 187. It is configured by an SRAM (Static RAM) having a kilobyte, and is directly accessible from the MPU 181.

When transferring image data from the character ROM 187 to the normal video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, the MPU 181 reads out one block of data from the character ROM 187, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 188a, and stores it in the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video. When the RAM 190 is unused, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 188a is transferred to the resident RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190.

If this buffer RAM 188 is not provided and the image data is directly transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, the character ROM 187 is composed of the NAND flash memory 187a, and therefore the reading speed is slow. Therefore, while the image data of a desired size is being transferred, the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 composed of the 1-port type DRAM has its 1 port occupied by the image data transfer from the character ROM 187, and the The time and other data cannot be accessed. Accordingly, during that time, the image controller 188 cannot read the image data from the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 to draw an image or transfer the drawn image data to the auxiliary display unit 65. The image display of the auxiliary display unit 65 may be delayed. Further, even when a multi-port type (type having a plurality of input/output ports) DRAM is used as the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, one port is occupied by the image data transfer from the character ROM 187. Therefore, the control using the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190 is limited in the image controller 188, and the control may be complicated.

On the other hand, in the slot machine 10, since the image controller 188 is provided with the buffer RAM 188a configured by the SRAM capable of high-speed operation, the image data read from the character ROM 187 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 188a. After being stored, the image data can be transferred from the buffer RAM 188a to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 in a short time. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to.

Note that the image display on the auxiliary display unit 65 is performed periodically at fixed time intervals (for example, about every 30 milliseconds), and the image controller 188 displays the image display timing on the auxiliary display unit 65. Accordingly, it is necessary to transfer the image drawing and the drawn image data to the auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, in order to access the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190, it is necessary to prioritize reading of image data necessary for drawing and writing and reading of drawn image data.

In the slot machine 10, the resident video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 188 is accessing (that is, being in use) the resident video RAM 189, and the image controller 188 is for normal use. The image controller 188 is provided with a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the video RAM 190 is being accessed (that is, being in use). Each of these access flags is set to ON when the image controller 188 is accessing the corresponding video RAM, and is set to OFF when not accessing. When transferring the image data from the buffer RAM 188a to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, the MPU 181 confirms the contents of the access flags corresponding to the transfer destination video RAMs 189 and 190, and reads the image data necessary for drawing. Also, in order to write or read the drawn image data, it is confirmed by the image controller 188 whether the transfer destination video RAMs 189 and 190 are in use. Then, when the transfer destination video RAMs 189 and 190 are not in use, the image data is controlled to be transferred. As a result, the image data can be transferred from the buffer RAM 188a to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 without interrupting the reading of the image data necessary for drawing and the writing or reading of the drawing image data.

Here, the display timing of an image on the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described with reference to FIG. 11. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a scanning area of the screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 and a display area in which an image is actually displayed on the screen. As shown in FIG. 11, a region larger than the display region in which the image is actually displayed is set as the scanning region, and when the image is displayed on the screen of the auxiliary display unit 65, the scanning region is Scanning is performed from left to right toward the screen and from top to bottom while driving each pixel forming the screen (so-called raster scan). At this time, since the drawn image data is actually set only in the display area in which the image is displayed, the period (so-called blank period) in which scanning is performed on the blank area which is a scanning area other than the display area is The image controller 188 does not transfer the drawn image data to the auxiliary display unit 65. That is, during the blank period, even when the image is displayed by scanning the auxiliary display unit 65, the image is not drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190. In addition, the drawn image data stored in the normal video RAM 190 is not read and transferred to the auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, during this blank period, there always exists a period during which the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190 are unused, so that the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 188a to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 is By using the unused period of each of the video RAMs 189 and 190 that occurs during the blank period, it can be surely performed.

In the MPU 181, as a method of confirming whether the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 is in use, a signal transmitted/received between the image controller 188 and the resident video RAM 189 or an image controller is used. The MPU 181 may monitor a signal transmitted and received between the 188 and the normal video RAM 190, and from the state of the signal, it may be confirmed whether the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 is in use. Further, when the image controller 188 starts or ends access to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, the MPU 181 notifies the MPU 181 of the information at any time, so that the MPU 181 can Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 is in use.

Further, when the image controller 188 scans the auxiliary display unit 65, the MPU 181 checks whether the image controller 188 is in the driving state or whether the blank period is in progress, or by the notification from the image controller 188, When the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 189 and 190 is unused. As a result, only the scanning state of the auxiliary display section 65 of the image controller 188 is confirmed and it is determined whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be made easily.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described. The processing of the MPU 102 is roughly classified into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started regularly (at a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is NMI interrupt processing that is activated in response to input. In the following, among these processes, the process relating to the progress of the game, that is, the timer interrupt process and the normal process performed in the main process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 12 to 17.

First, with reference to FIG. 12, a timer interrupt process periodically executed by the MPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. In the MPU 102 of the main control device 101, a timer interrupt is generated, for example, every 1.49 msec, and the MPU 102 executes the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 12 according to the timer interrupt.

In this timer interrupt processing, first, register saving processing is performed (S101). In this register saving process, the values of all the registers in the MPU 102 used in the normal process described later are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. Next, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set (S102). If the power failure flag is set (S102: Yes), the power failure process is executed (S103).

Here, the outline of the power failure process performed in S103 will be described.

When the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply apparatus 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main control apparatus 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area (not shown) provided in RAM 106.

In the power failure process, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission is completed. If the command transmission is not completed, this process is terminated and the timer interrupt process is resumed to terminate the command transmission. When the transmission of the command is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the MPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared and all the actuators (not shown) are turned off. This prevents the reel unit 31 from running out of control until the power is completely cut off, and prevents abnormal output from the output devices such as the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64.

Then, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the RAM 106 is normal at the time of power outage is calculated and stored in the backup area to prohibit subsequent RAM access. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the power being completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. In addition, in consideration of a case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to noise or the like, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output until the infinite loop is entered. If the power outage signal is not output, it means that the power outage has been recovered. Therefore, the writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power outage flag is reset, the timer interrupt process is restored, and the process proceeds to S104. Also, if the power failure signal is continuously output, the loop enters the infinite loop. By the way, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output even under the infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is not output, the process proceeds to the main process.

Returning to the explanation of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in the process of S102 (S102: No), various processes of S104 and thereafter are performed. That is, in the process of S104, the watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. Next, an interrupt end declaration process is performed for the MPU 102 itself so that the next timer interrupt can be set (S105), and the stepping motors, which are the respective spinning cylinder drive motors, are rotated to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Stepping motor control processing for driving the motor is performed (S106). Next, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 8) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a, the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input/output port 104 are read. At the same time, sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether or not the reading result is normal (S107).

In this sensor monitoring process, when there is an abnormality in the reading result of each sensor, for example, from the detection results of the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b, clogging of inserted medals, pulling out, etc. When the injustice is detected, it is determined that a sensor error has occurred, and in order to notify the occurrence of the sensor error from the auxiliary effect production unit (the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65), the error type is related. An error command including information is transmitted to the display control device 81.

In the subsequent processing of S108, timer calculation processing for subtracting the value of each counter or timer is performed (S108), and the bet number for outputting the bet number of medals and the result of counting the number of payouts to the external centralized terminal board 121. In/out counter processing is performed (S109).

Next, a command output process of transmitting various commands such as a start command and a lottery result command described later to the display control device 81 is performed (S110). Thereafter, a segment data setting process for setting segment data displayed on the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout amount display unit 61, and the payout amount display unit 62 is performed (S111), and then the segment set by the segment data setting process is performed. The segment data display processing of supplying the data to each of the display units 60 to 62 and displaying the corresponding numbers and symbols is performed (S112).

Then, a port output process for outputting data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104 is performed (S113), and the value of each register saved in the backup area in the previous process of S101 is stored in the MPU 102. Is restored to the corresponding register (S114). After that, an interrupt permission process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed (S115), and this series of timer interrupt processes is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13, a normal process executed by the MPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal processing.

The normal process is a process for performing the main control related to the game, and when the normal process is executed by the MPU 102, first, the interrupt permission process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed (S201), and then the game is enabled. A pre-start process for performing is performed (S202). In the pre-start processing, the display control device 81 and the like wait until the initialization is completed. Then, when the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, the game management processing shown in subsequent S203 to S213 is performed.

As the game management process, first, in the process of S203, data of various game information and the like stored in the RAM 106 (for example, a random number value used in the previous game and each winning flag indicating winning of each winning except BB winning) After clearing, the start waiting process is performed in the subsequent process of S204.

In the start waiting process of S204, it is determined whether or not a replay prize has been established in the previous game, and if the replay prize has been established, an automatic insertion process that automatically inserts the same number of virtual medals as the previous bet number. Then, the start waiting process ends. In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display unit 60. That is, when the replay prize is established in the previous game, the player can play this game without reducing the medals owned and without inserting medals.

On the other hand, if none of the replay prizes has been established, the sensor for confirming whether or not the sensor reading result of the sensor monitoring process of the timer interrupt process (see S107 of FIG. 12) is abnormal. An abnormality confirmation process is performed, and if an abnormality has occurred, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to notify the occurrence of the error. Such an error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

When the sensor reading result is normal, it is determined whether or not the settlement switch 59 is operated, and when the settlement switch 59 is operated, a medal return process for paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medal. I do. After completion of the medal return process or when the settlement switch 59 is not operated, it is determined whether or not a medal has been inserted or the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. It is determined whether or not any one of them is performed, the medal insertion process is performed, and the start waiting process is ended. If neither a medal has been inserted nor the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the present start waiting process, the start waiting process is ended.

After the start waiting process of S204 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the bet number of medals has reached the specified number (S205). If the bet number has not reached the specified number (S205: No), S204 Returning to the start waiting processing of step 1, the processing after the sensor abnormality confirmation processing of the processing is performed. In the present embodiment, the specified number of bets is set according to the gaming state of the slot machine 10.

That is, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is the general gaming state, the prescribed number is set to 1 to 3, and when it is in the bonus state, the prescribed number is set to 3. As a result, in the normal game state, the game can be started even if the bet number is not only three but also one or two. When the game is started with the bet number of one or two (one or two bets), in the lottery process (see S210) to be described later, the one-table betting lottery table or two Since the lottery table is set and the lottery of the winning mode (role) is performed, there is a high probability that the number of medals paid out is 3 when the game is played with 1 or 2 coins. It is possible to establish a prize or a 7-bell prize in which the number of paid-out medals is two. When three medals have been paid out due to the establishment of the Cherry Bell prize, the player can insert the three medals and play another game while expecting the BB prize to be established. The player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals. In addition, when two medals are paid out due to the establishment of the 7-bell prize, the player inserts the two medals and expects to establish the cherry bell prize in which three more medals will be paid out. You can enjoy another game. Then, if the Cherry Bell prize is established, the player can play the game by inserting the three medals paid out while expecting the BB prize to be established. You can enjoy Further, even if the result of the game played by inserting one or two medals is missed, the game can be ended without leaving any extra medals for the player. As described above, even if the number of bets is one or two in the normal game state, the player is updated by using the one-table-drawing lottery table and the two-table-winning lottery table set in this embodiment. It is possible to give fun of playing the game, and to enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals.

On the other hand, by setting the prescribed number of bets when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is in the bonus state to 3, in the bonus state, the player can insert three medals, and the watermelon with a large number of medals paid out. By increasing the winning probability of winning the prize or bell and setting the expected value of the number of medals paid out in one game to be high, it is possible to achieve the total number of medals paid out in the bonus state to 250 with a small number of games. Therefore, the player can receive a large number of medals in a short time, and on the other hand, on the hole side, the operating rate of the slot machine 10 can be increased.

As a result of the processing in S205, when the bet number has reached the specified number (S205: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated (S206). Then, if the start lever 41 is not operated (S206: No), the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, if the start lever 41 is operated (S206: Yes), the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated while the specified number of medals are bet on the slot machine 10. Therefore, it means that the start command is issued to start the game. Therefore, in such a case, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to the non-excited state to prohibit bet acceptance (S207). In the subsequent process of 208, a valid line setting process of setting a valid line is performed (S208). In this effective line setting process, all the combined lines of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, the lower line L3, the lower right line L4, and the upper right line L5 are set as effective lines.

Then, the start command is set (S209). Here, the start command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to know that the start command has been issued. In this normal process, information regarding the bet number (the number of inserted medals) accepted in the process of S205 is included in this start command and set. Then, the start command set here is temporarily stored in a ring buffer (not shown) that stores various commands generated in the normal processing, and is executed every 1.49 ms (see FIG. 12). It is transmitted to the display control device 81 by the process of S110 of (see). Thus, the display control device 81 can recognize that the game start command is generated by the reception of the start command, and also the number of medals (bet number) inserted by the player for the game. Therefore, various effects can be made to be executed by each auxiliary effect section (the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, the auxiliary display section 65) according to the bet number.

After that, the lottery process of S210, the reel control process of S211, the medal payout process of S212, and the bonus state process of S213 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to S203. Then, in the power interruption process (S103) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), the processes of S203 to S213 are repeatedly executed until the power switch 71 shuts off the power or enters an infinite loop due to a power failure.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the lottery process (S210) executed in the normal process (see FIG. 13) in the MPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the lottery process.

In the lottery process, first, a random number used when performing the lottery of the winning mode (winning part) is acquired (S301). In the slot machine 10, as described above, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter 107 at that time each time the start lever 41 is operated, and the latched free-run counter 107 is operated. The value of the random number used in the lottery is obtained by reading the value of the counter 107 and storing the value in a predetermined area of the RAM 106.

After the random number is obtained by the process of S301, a lottery table setting process for setting a lottery table for performing the lottery of the winning mode is performed (S302). Here, the details of the lottery table setting process in S302 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a lottery table setting process executed by the MPU 102 of the main control device 101. In the lottery table setting process, the current game state of the slot machine 10 is determined, and further, the lottery table storage area 105a is determined according to the number of inserted medals (the number of bets) and the set state set in the slot machine 10. The corresponding lottery table is set from among the plurality of lottery tables stored in.

In this process, first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is the bonus state (S401). As a result, if the gaming state is not the bonus state (S401: No), the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is the normal game. Since it is in the state, it is then determined whether or not the number of inserted medals (the number of bets) is 3 (3 coins multiplied) (S402). If the number of bets is three (S402: Yes), the six lottery tables for three-piece play are provided corresponding to the setting states of "setting 1" to "setting 6" that the slot machine 10 can take. Among them, the three-sheet multiplication lottery table corresponding to the currently set setting state is set (S403), the lottery table setting process is ended, and the process returns to the lottery process. As a result, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is the normal gaming state, when the game is started with the bet number of 3 pieces, the three-piece lottery table corresponding to the set state of the slot machine 10 is set. ..

When it is determined that the number of bets is not 3 as a result of the processing in S402 (S402: No), it is then determined whether or not the number of bets is 2 (2) (S404). If the number of bets is two (S404: Yes), the six-two-drawing lottery table provided corresponding to the setting states of “setting 1” to “setting 6” that the slot machine 10 can take, respectively. Among them, the two-sheet multiplication lottery table corresponding to the currently set setting state is set (S405), the lottery table setting process is ended, and the process returns to the lottery process. As a result, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is the normal gaming state and when the game is started with the bet number of two, the two-card lottery table corresponding to the setting state of the slot machine 10 is set. ..

If it is determined that the bet number is not two as a result of the processing in S404 (S404: No), it can be determined that the bet number is one (one bet), and thus the slot machine 10 can take “. Of the six 1-sheet lottery lottery tables provided corresponding to the setting states of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, the 1-sheet lottery lottery table corresponding to the currently set setting state is set. (S406), the lottery table setting process ends, and the process returns to the lottery process. Accordingly, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is the general gaming state, when the game is started with the bet number of one sheet, the one-drawing lottery table corresponding to the set state of the slot machine 10 is set. ..

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S401, if the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is the bonus state (S401: Yes), it is provided corresponding to each of the setting states of “setting 1” to “setting 6” that the slot machine 10 can take. Of the six bonus state lottery tables created, a bonus state lottery table corresponding to the currently set setting state is set (S407), the lottery table setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the lottery process. As a result, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is the bonus state, the bonus time lottery table corresponding to the setting state of the slot machine 10 is set.

As described above, in the lottery table setting process, the lottery table storage area 105a is stored according to the current game state of the slot machine 10, the number of inserted medals (the number of bets), and the setting state set in the slot machine 10. A corresponding lottery table is set from among the selected lottery tables.

Returning to FIG. 14, the description of the lottery process will be continued. When the lottery table setting process of S302 is completed, next, the index value IV is set to 1 (S303), and the determination value DV used when performing the lottery (winning/absence determination) of the winning mode is set (S304). In the judgment value setting process, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the current judgment value DV to set a new judgment value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random number value acquired in step S301 is set as the current determination value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to 1 which is the current index value IV is added to this random number value to obtain a new determination value DV. The determination value DV is used.

Then, in step S305, a lottery for winning modes corresponding to the index value IV is performed. In this lottery, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds 65535. When the number exceeds 65535 (S305: Yes), the winning flag of the winning mode corresponding to the index value IV at that time is set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 (S306). That is, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=1, in the process of S306, the BB winning prize flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a, and when IV=2, the determination value DV exceeds 65535. In the case of S306, the watermelon prize winning flag is set in the prize flag storage area 106a, and when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=3, in the process of S306, the bell prize winning flag is set to the winning flag. If the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when set in the storage area 106a and IV=4, in the process of S306, the cherry bell prize winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a, and determination is made when IV=5. If the value DV exceeds 65535, the 7-bell winning prize flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a in the process of S306, and if the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=6, the process of S306 is performed. The replay winning prize flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a.

By the way, if the winning flag that is set is one of the watermelon winning prize flag, the bell winning prize flag, the cherry bell winning prize flag, the 7-bell winning prize flag, and the replay winning prize flag, this winning flag is set to the corresponding winning flag. It is reset after the end of the played game (see S203 of normal processing shown in FIG. 13). On the other hand, when the set winning flag is the BB winning combination flag, the BB winning combination flag is reset under the condition that the BB winning combination is established. That is, the BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games. For example, after the BB prize-winning flag is set, if the symbols are not aligned in the stopped symbols of the BB prize-winning mode, that is, if the BB prize is not established, the BB prize-winning flag is not reset and carried over to the next game. Be done.

In the process of S306 in the state where the BB prize winning flag is carried over, if the current index value IV is 1, the BB prize winning flag is not set, and if the current index value IV is 2 to 6, the index value is The winning flag corresponding to IV is set. That is, in a game in which the BB prize winning flag is carried over, the corresponding winning flag is set when the winning mode other than the BB winning is won, while the corresponding BB winning flag is set when the BB winning is won. Do not set.

In the process of S305, when it is determined that the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 (S305: No), it means that the winning mode corresponding to the index value IV is deviated. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 (S307), and then it is determined whether or not there is a winning mode corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination role that should be selected by lottery (judgment). S308). Specifically, it is determined whether the index value IV added by 1 has exceeded the maximum value of the index values IV set in the lottery table. If there is a winning combination to be judged (S308: Yes), the process returns to S304 and the winning/non-winning judgment of the winning mode is continued. At this time, in the process of S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the determination value DV (that is, the current determination value DV) used for determining whether the winning combination of the previous winning combination is valid or not, and a new determination value DV is obtained. In the process of S305, the winning/non-winning determination of the winning mode is performed based on the determination value DV.

Here, by the lottery table setting process of S302, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is in the general gaming state, the three-game multi-use lottery table, the two-game multi-use lottery table, and the one-game multi-use lottery for the normal game state Since the lottery table to be used is set from the table according to the bet number, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 9, the winning probability of the BB winning is 1 when the game is played by inserting three medals. The prize-winning lottery is carried out after the game is set sufficiently higher than when the game is played by inserting one or two medals. Therefore, as described above, it is possible to insert three medals and play one game while expecting the player that many medals will be paid out by establishing the BB prize. Therefore, the medals are consumed quickly, and the operating rate of the slot machine in the hall can be increased.

In addition, when the game is played by inserting one or two medals, the Cherry Bell prize with three medals payout is set as the winning candidate and the winning probability is set to be high. Since a lottery will be held, if one or two medals remain in the player's hand, if the Cherry Bell prize is established, three medals can be paid out with a high probability that the BB prize will be achieved. While expecting a player, it is possible to insert one or two medals remaining in the hand and play one game. Further, when the game is played by inserting one medal, the 7-belt winning with the number of payouts of two medals is also set as the winning candidate and the winning probability is set to be high, and then the lottery in the winning mode is performed. Since it will be played, even if the player expects that if one medal remains in the player's hand, if the 7-bell prize is established, two medal payouts that can aim for the Cherry Bell prize again can be obtained, It is possible to play one game by inserting the remaining one medal. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals.

In addition, when the one-drawing lottery table or the two-drawing lottery table is set and the lottery in the winning mode is performed, as described above with reference to FIG. Also in this case, the prize-winning lottery can be performed by setting the ratio of the number of paid-out medals to the bet number to less than 100% and as close as possible to 100%. Therefore, even if you play a game with one or two medals, the number of medals is hardly reduced. If one or two medals remain in the player's hand, use the one or two medals. You can be sure that you want to play a game. On the other hand, the number of medals is reduced if the game is repeated by multiplying by one or two, so that the player cannot aim to increase the number of medals by repeating the game by multiplying by one or two. If there are three or more medals, it is possible to instruct the player to play the game with three coins with a high probability of winning the BB prize.

In addition, by switching each lottery table according to the bet number and then performing the lottery of the winning mode, as described above with reference to FIG. 7 and FIG. 9, the cherry bell wins by one or two. The prize mode is established only when the game is played, and when the game is played with three cards, it can be handled as a misalignment without establishing the Cherry Bell prize. It is possible to make the player pay attention as a special small winning a prize only for hanging and double-hanging. Similarly, if the 7-belt winning is established only when the game is played with one piece, and if the game is played with two or three sheets, the 7-bell winning is not established. Since it is handled as a miss, it is possible to make the player pay attention as the 7-bell prize is a special small prize prize for exclusive use of one piece. Therefore, when the game is played with one piece or two pieces, if the symbol stops due to the stop symbol of the cherry bell prize or the 7 bell prize, it is possible to give a great joy to the player.

In addition, even when the game is played with one or two cards, it is possible to carry out the lottery in the winning mode by setting so that the BB prize is established although the winning probability is extremely low. It is possible to give the player an expectation that a BB winning will be achieved when the game is played with one or two.

Also, while the probability of winning the watermelon prize or the bell prize when the game is played with one or two coins is reduced, the probability of winning the cherry bell prize or the 7 bell prize is set to be high, and the prize mode lottery is performed. Since it is possible to perform, it is possible to further impress to the player that the cherry bell prize or the 7-bell prize is a special small role prize with one or two coins. When the game is played with two cards, it is possible to give the player an expectation that a cherry bell prize or a 7 bell prize will be established.

After the winning flag is set in the process of S306, or when it is determined in the process of S308 that there is no determination role to be drawn (S308: No), it means that the lottery in the winning mode is completed. In such a case, the lottery result command is set (S309). Here, the lottery result command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the result of the winning/non-winning judgment of the winning combination, and the winning mode corresponding to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. The lottery result command is generated so as to include information indicating that the player is a winning combination. Therefore, if not only the winning flag set by the lottery of the current game but also the winning flag of the BB winning combination carried over from the past games and stored in the winning flag storage area 106a, the BB winning mode is also a winning combination. This is suggested by the lottery result command. If the winning flag is not set in the winning flag storage area 106a, the lottery result command suggests that there is no winning combination and the player is out.

Like the start command, the lottery result command set here is temporarily stored in a ring buffer (not shown) that stores various commands generated in the normal processing, and is executed every 1.49 ms. It is transmitted to the display control device 81 by the process of S110 of the interrupt process (see FIG. 12). Upon receiving the lottery result command, the display control device 81 executes drive control of the upper lamp 63 and the auxiliary display unit 65 to suggest a winning combination, for example.

In the present embodiment, the lottery result command is set after the lottery of the winning mode and before the reel control process (S211 of FIG. 13) for controlling the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The lottery result command is transmitted to the display control device 81 within about 1.5 ms at the latest after the command is set (that is, after a time lag until the command is transmitted by the timer interrupt processing). Since the display control device 81 is configured to execute the lottery result command processing (see FIG. 21) described later without delay when receiving the lottery result command, after the player operates the start lever 41. While the stop switches 42 to 44 are inoperable, it is possible to cause the auxiliary effect section (the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, the auxiliary display section 65) to perform an effect or the like suggesting a winning combination. Therefore, the player can grasp the winning combination suggested by the effect before operating the stop switches 42 to 44, and the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the grasped winning combination. Can be adjusted.

Next, a sliding table setting process for setting a sliding table (stop table) for reel stop control is performed (S310), and the lottery process ends. Here, the sliding table is a table in which it is determined how much the reels 32L, 32M, 32R should be slid (rotated) and then stopped from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. That is, the sliding table is an arrival pattern (arrival pattern) that has reached the base point position (lower position of each of the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R in the present embodiment) when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed. No.), and a stop data group capable of deriving the relationship between the stop symbol (stop symbol number) that is actually stopped at the base point position.

As described above, in the present slot machine 10, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated as a stop mode for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the reaching symbol reaching the base point position is stopped as it is. Stop mode, stop mode to stop after sliding the corresponding reel for one symbol, stop mode to stop after sliding for 2 symbols, stop mode to stop after sliding for 3 symbols, and 4 symbols Five patterns of stopping modes are prepared, which is a stopping mode of stopping after sliding. In the sliding table, for each symbol number of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the stop mode to be set when the symbol indicated by the symbol number becomes the reaching symbol is defined from the above 5 patterns. Several sliding tables are prepared for each winning mode.

By setting this sliding table, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is set to stop in a predetermined stop mode until the specified time (190 msec) elapses from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. It is possible to make the player have an impression as if the symbol arrangement (stop result) that stops in the visible range from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is determined by the operation of the player.

Then, in the sliding table setting process of S310, the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is confirmed, and the sliding table uniquely corresponding to the set winning flag is set to the sliding table storage area of the RAM 106. Set to 106b. As a result, it is possible to stop the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning mode (see FIG. 7), which is won in the lottery as much as possible within the specified time, on the activated line (see FIG. 6), It is possible to prevent the symbol combination corresponding to the winning mode that is not won in the lottery from stopping on the activated line.

Here, as described above, the BB prize-winning flag is configured to be carried over to the next game until the BB prize is established, so that the lottery performed in one game is performed. The winning flag corresponding to any of the watermelon prize, the bell prize, the cherry bell prize, the 7-bell prize, and the replay prize, which are set as a result, and the carried-over BB prize winning flag are simultaneously set in the prize flag storage 106a. There is a case. In this case, instead of the BB prize, the sliding table corresponding to the watermelon prize, the bell prize, the cherry bell prize, the 7 bell prize or the replay prize with the winning flag set is set in the sliding table storage area 106b. Done. As a result, the winning flag is cleared for each game, and if the winning combination is not established, the winning position will be lost. Watermelon prize, Bell prize, Cherry Bell prize, 7 Bell prize, Replay prizes can be achieved more reliably. Then, the BB prize-winning flag corresponding to the BB prize which has not been established here is continuously maintained and carried over to the next game.

Now, in the sliding table setting process of S310, if the cherry bell winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a, the cherry bell winning sliding table is stored in the sliding table storage area 106b. Here, the "cherry" symbol, which is the stop symbol of the left reel 32L when the cherry bell winning is established, is arranged on the left reel 32L so that the intervals between the symbols of the same kind are 7 symbols, and thus, the above-mentioned description is given. As described above, even when the left stop switch 42 is operated at any timing, the "cherry" symbol can be stopped at any of the upper, middle, and lower positions of the display window 26L. Further, the "bell" symbol, which is the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M when the cherry bell winning is established, is arranged on the middle reel 32M such that the interval between the symbols of the same kind is 5 symbols or less, and thus, it is described above. Thus, the "bell" symbol can be stopped at the middle position of the display window 26M regardless of the timing of the operation of the middle stop switch 43.

Therefore, in the Cherry Bell winning slip table, no matter what symbol has arrived at the base position when the left stop switch 42 is pressed (that is, whatever symbol number has been reached), in the display window 26L. A stop mode in which the "cherry" symbol can be stopped is set at any of the upper, middle, and lower positions, and no matter what symbol has reached the base point position when the middle stop switch 43 is pressed (that is, , Whatever reaching symbol number), a stop mode in which the "bell" symbol can be stopped is set at the middle position in the display window 26M. As a result, when the Cherry Bell prize-winning flag is set, the stop symbols corresponding to the Cherry Bell prize are displayed on the middle line L2 by the cherry-bell prize sliding table regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 by the player. , Right downward line L4 or right upward line L5 (see FIG. 6). Therefore, it is possible to achieve the cherry bell prize without so-called omission.

When the 7-belt winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a, the 7-bell winning slip table is stored in the sliding table storage area 106b. Then, the "7" symbol, which is the stop symbol of the left reel 32L when the 7-bell winning is realized, is arranged on the left reel 32L so that the interval between the same symbols is 7 symbols, like the "cherry" symbol. Also, the "bell" symbol, which is the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M when the 7-bell winning is established, is arranged on the middle reel 32M so that the interval between the same symbols is 5 symbols or less as described above. Has been done.

Therefore, even in the 7-bell winning sliding table, like the cherry-bell winning sliding table, no matter what symbol has arrived at the base position when the left stop switch 42 is pressed (that is, what reaching symbol number ), the stop mode in which the "7" symbol can be stopped is set at any of the upper, middle, and lower positions in the display window 26L, and when the middle stop switch 43 is pushed Even if the symbol has arrived (that is, regardless of the arrival symbol number), a stop mode in which the "bell" symbol can be stopped is set at the middle position in the display window 26M. As a result, when the 7-bell winning flag is set, the stop symbol corresponding to the 7-bell winning is displayed on the middle line L2 by the 7-bell winning sliding table regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 by the player. , Right downward line L4 or right upward line L5 (see FIG. 6). Therefore, it is possible to achieve a 7-bell prize without so-called omission.

In this way, when the cherry bell prize in which three medals are paid out and the 7 bell prize in which two medals are paid out are won in the lottery in the prize mode, the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44. Regardless of the timing, it is possible to display the stop symbol corresponding to the Cherry Bell prize or the stop symbol corresponding to the 7-bell prize on any of the middle line L2, the right downward line L4, and the right upward line L5 (see FIG. 6). Therefore, it is possible to establish a cherry bell prize or a 7 bell prize without so-called omission. Therefore, when the player starts the game with one or two coins, it is possible to surely establish the cherry bell prize or the 7-bell prize without depending on an artificial operation. In addition, while aiming for a stop symbol of other prizes (for example, BB prize), it is possible to play the game while expecting the establishment of the Cherry Bell prize or the 7-bell prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the reel control process which is the process of S211 of the normal process (see FIG. 13) will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the reel control process executed by the MUP 102 of the main control device 101.

In the reel control process, first, a rotation start process for starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed (S501). In the rotation start process, it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the reel started to rotate in the previous game, and if not, the wait time has elapsed. Wait until you do. When the wait time has elapsed, the wait time for the next game is reset and the motor control initialization process of setting the rotation start information in the motor control storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 106 is executed. To do. By performing such processing, the stepping motor control processing (see S106 in FIG. 12) of the timer interrupt processing starts the acceleration processing of the stepping motor, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets a specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stand by until they rotate at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and the rotation start processing ends. Further, the MPU 102 is able to generate a stop command by illuminating and displaying a lamp (not shown) of each of the stop switches 42 to 44 when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a constant speed. Is notified to the player or the like.

After the rotation start process of S501, the pre-stop process is then performed by the processes of S502 to S505. In this pre-stop processing, it is first determined whether or not any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated (S502). Then, when none of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated (S502: No), the process of S502 is repeatedly executed to wait until one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated (S502: Yes), the process proceeds to S503, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel is operated, that is, the stop command. It is determined whether or not has occurred (S503). When the stop command has not been issued (S503: No), the process returns to S502 and waits until one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. As a result, when the stop switch corresponding to the reel that is not rotating is operated, it is ignored.

On the other hand, if the stop command is issued (S503: Yes), then whether or not the current stop command is the third stop command, that is, whether or not the stop switch is operated while only one reel is rotating. It is determined (S504). Then, if the current stop command is the third stop command (S504: Yes), the process of the following S505 is skipped, the pre-stop process is terminated as it is, and the process proceeds to S506. On the other hand, in the case of the first stop command generated when all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating or the second stop command generated when two reels are rotating (S504: Yes), The process proceeds to S505, the sliding table first changing process is performed, and the pre-stop process is ended. Then, the process proceeds to S506.

Here, the sliding table first changing process is a process of changing the sliding table stored in the sliding table storage area 106b of the RAM 106 before stopping the reel corresponding to the stop command. In the sliding table first changing process, the sliding table is changed, for example, when the stop switches 43 and 44 other than the left stop switch 42 are operated to generate the first stop command.

Now, when the pre-stop processing of S502 to S505 is completed, it means that the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel is operated to advance the game, and the stop command is generated. In such a case, the stop control process shown in S506 to S512 is then performed to stop the spinning reel.

First, in S506, the symbol number of the reaching symbol reaching the lower stage at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input confirms the symbol number of the reaching symbol reaching the lower stage. Then, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated from the data of the symbol number corresponding to the reached symbol in the sliding table set in the sliding table storage area 106b (S507). After that, the calculated sliding number is added to the symbol number of the reaching symbol to determine the symbol number of the stopped symbol which is actually stopped in the lower stage (S508). Then, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the reaching symbol of the reel to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stopped symbol are equal (S509), and if they are not equal (S509: No), the process of S509 is repeatedly executed. If they are equal to each other (S509: Yes), reel stop processing for stopping the rotation of the reel is performed (S510). Then, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped (S511). If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have not stopped (S511: No), the sliding table second changing process is performed. Perform (S512). Then, the process returns to S502, and the pre-stop process is executed again.

Here, the sliding table second changing process is a process of changing the sliding table stored in the sliding table storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second sliding table changing process, the sliding table is changed based on the winning flag that has been set and the stop result of the reel that has stopped. For example, when only the bell winning flag is set, if the "bell" symbols of the left reel 32L number 12 and the middle reel 32M number 12 are stopped in the middle row, the left reel 32L is in the upper row. No. 13 and the No. 13 “7” symbol of the middle reel 32M are stopped, so the sliding table is changed to avoid the establishment of the BB winning.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S511 that all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped (S511: Yes), a payout determination process is performed (S513), and this process is ended. The payout determination process is a process of setting the payout number of medals under one of the conditions that the winning symbol combinations are lined up on the activated line.

In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on each activated line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped at the lower stages of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and whether or not the winning is achieved on the activated line. To judge. When the winning combination is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination combination matches the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination is matched with the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in the payout information storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, when the winning combination is not in agreement with the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of the error is performed. Such an error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. When the payout determination is completed for all the activated lines, the payout determination processing is ended.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in S212 of the normal process (see FIG. 13) will be described. In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area (not shown) in the payout determination process of S513 of the reel control process (see FIG. 16) is zero. When the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process (see S513 in FIG. 16) that the payout of medals has not been established. In such a case, it is determined whether or not the replay prize is established based on the winning combination combination set in the payout determination process. If the replay prize is not established, the medal payout process is ended as it is, and if the replay prize is established, the replay state setting process for setting the game state to the replay state is performed, and the medal payout process is ended. To do. In the start waiting process (see S204 of FIG. 13) executed in the normal process described above, the automatic insertion process is performed when it is determined that the current game state is the replay state.

On the other hand, when the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is ended. Regarding payout of medals, specifically, when the count value of the credit counter has not reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50), the payout number is added to the count value of the credit counter and the value after the addition is added. The credit is displayed on the credit display unit 60. If the count value of the credit counter has reached the upper limit, or if the count value has reached the upper limit during the addition of the number of payouts, the medal payout rotating plate is driven to eject the medals from the hopper device 51. The medal tray 50 is paid out through the outlet 49. In the medal payout process, a process of changing the payout amount displayed on the payout amount display section 62 in accordance with the medal payout is also performed. When the current game state is the bonus state, the number of payouts is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout number counter, which will be described later, and the number of remaining payouts displayed on the remaining payout number display unit 61 is also subtracted. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 17, a bonus state process executed in S213 of the normal process (see FIG. 12) will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a bonus state process executed by the MPU 102 of the main control device 101.

First, the outline of the bonus state process will be described. In the bonus state processing, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is in the bonus state, a game in which the game state is continuously shifted to the RB state until the payout number of medals reaches a predetermined number (250 in this embodiment). is there. Then, when the JAC game is played 12 times in one RB state and the winning is achieved 8 times during the JAC game, the RB state is ended even before the JAC game is played 12 times. The bonus state is ended when the number of paid-out medals reaches a predetermined number, and when the number of paid-out medals reaches the predetermined number in the middle of the RB state, not only the bonus state but also the RB state is ended.

Next, the details of the bonus state process will be described. In the bonus state processing, first, it is determined whether the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is the bonus state (S601), and when it is not the bonus state (S601: No), the BB determination processing shown in S602 to S605 is executed.

In this BB determination processing, first, it is confirmed whether or not the BB winning combination winning flag is set in the winning flag storing area 106a (S602), and when the BB winning combination winning flag is set (S602: Yes), the reel control is performed. Based on the winning combination combination set in the payout determination process executed in the process of S513 of the process (see FIG. 16), it is confirmed whether or not the BB prize is established (S603).

In the processing of S603, when the BB winning is established (S603: Yes), the BB start processing is executed (S604). In the BB start process, the BB prize winning flag stored in the winning flag storage area 106a is reset, the setting flag stored in the state information storage area 106c is cleared, and then the BB setting flag is set to the state information storage area 106c. To be a BB game, which is one type of bonus game. Further, a process of setting 250 in the remaining payout number counter provided in the state information storage area 106c for counting the number of remaining medals that can be paid out during the BB game, and displaying 250 in the remaining payout number display unit 61. I do. Incidentally, the determination as to whether or not the current game state is the bonus state (see S601) is made based on whether or not the BB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c.

Subsequently, in the processing of S605, the RB start processing is executed (S605). In the RB start process, the remaining JAC prize counter for counting the number of JAC prizes that can be established is set to 8, and the remaining JAC game counter for counting the number of remaining JAC games is set to 12. Each counter such as the remaining JAC winning counter and the remaining JAC game counter is provided in the state information storage area 106c. Further, in the RB start processing, the RB command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to recognize that the RB game is started is also set.

Next, in the processing of S606, the status command is set (S607). Here, the state command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the current game state. That is, when it is determined in the process of S602 that the BB winning combination flag is not set (S602: No), a state command meaning a normal game is set, and the BB winning is established in the process of S603. If it is determined that the game has not been performed (S603: No), a state command that means a BB carryover game is set, and if the RB command has been set in the processing of S605, it means that it is a BB game. Set status commands.

Then, after the processing of S607, the game number display processing is performed (S607), and the present processing ends. In the game number display process, when the current game state is not a BB game (RB game), a process of clearing the display of the remaining payout amount display unit 61, the payout amount display unit 62, or the like is performed.

Further, in the processing of S601, when the game state is the bonus state (S601: Yes), based on the winning combination combination set in the payout determination processing executed in the processing of S513 of the reel control processing (see FIG. 16), It is confirmed whether or not a watermelon prize or a bell prize, which is a winning combination, has been established (S608). In the processing of S608, when the watermelon prize or the bell prize is established (S608: Yes), the value of the remaining JAC prize counter is decremented by 1 (S609), and the value of the remaining JAC game counter is further decremented by 1 (S610). When the watermelon prize and the bell prize are not established (S608: No), it means that one JAC game has been consumed, so the value of the remaining JAC game counter is decremented by 1 without performing the process of S609 ( S610).

Subsequently, in the processing of S611, it is confirmed whether or not either the remaining JAC winning counter or the remaining JAC game counter has become 0 (S611). In the processing of S611, when either one is 0, that is, when the JAC winning is achieved 8 times or the JAC game is exhausted 12 times (S611: Yes), it means that the ending condition of the RB game is satisfied. In order to do so, the RB end process of resetting the values of the remaining JAC winning counter and the remaining JAC game counter is executed (S612). As a result, the JAC game can be played 12 times in one RB state, and if the winning is achieved 8 times during the JAC game, the RB state can be ended even before the JAC game is played 12 times.

Then, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the remaining payout number counter is 0 (S613), and if it is not 0 (S613: No), the number of medals paid out during the BB game has not reached the predetermined number. , Which means that the ending condition of the BB game is not satisfied, the RB start process described above is executed (S614). After that, a state command indicating that the game is a BB game is set (S606), a game number display process is executed (607), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the processing of S611, when neither the value of the remaining JAC prize counter nor the value of the remaining JAC game counter is 0, that is, when the JAC prize has not been established 8 times and the JAC game has not been exhausted 12 times. (S611: No), it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the balance payment number counter is 0 (S615). In the process of S615, if the counter value is not 0 (S615: No), it means that the number of medals paid out during the BB game has not reached the predetermined number, and the ending condition of the BB game is not satisfied. Since it means, a state command indicating that the game is a BB game is set (S606), a game number display process is executed (S607), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S615, if the count value of the remaining payout amount counter is 0 (S615: Yes), it means that the ending condition of the BB game is satisfied. Therefore, the bonus state ending process shown in S616 to S617. To execute. In the bonus state ending process, first, the RB ending process described above is executed (S616), and then the BB ending process for clearing the data in the state information storage area 153b is executed (S617). Further, even when the count value of the remaining payout amount counter is 0 in the processing of S613 described above (S613: Yes), it means that the BB game ending condition is satisfied, so the BB ending processing of S617 is executed. To do. After the BB end process is performed, a state command indicating that the game is a normal game (that is, a normal game state) is set (S606), a game number display process is performed (S607), and this process is ended. As a result, the bonus state can be ended when the number of paid-out medals reaches 250. Further, when the number of paid-out medals reaches 250 in the middle of the RB state, not only the bonus state but also the RB state can be ended by the processing of S616.

Next, each control process executed by the display control device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 22. The processing of the MPU 181 is roughly classified into a display main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a display timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 1 msec), and a command input from the main control device 101. Command interruption processing for starting the received command and storing the received command in the received command storage area 185a. The command stored in the received command storage area 185a is checked in the display main process, and various processes are performed according to the content of the command. Hereinafter, a display main process, a start command process that performs a process for a start command of the commands stored in the received command storage area 185a, a lottery result command process that performs a process for a lottery result command, and a process for an error command The error command processing will be described.

First, the display main process executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the display main process. This display main processing is executed when power is turned on by recovery from a power failure or turning on the power switch 71, and the initial stage of various devices such as the display control device 81 and the auxiliary effect control unit controlled by the display control device 81. Processing, check processing of commands received from the main control device 101, power failure processing when a power failure occurs, and the like. Further, the transfer processing of the resident image data from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 is also executed by the display surface processing as one processing of the initialization processing.

The activation of the display main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the display control device 81 is powered on from the power supply circuit 91 and the system reset is released, the MPU 181 sets the instruction pointer 181a provided in the MPU 181 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , Address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 181a is designated to the internal bus. When the ROM controller 187b of the character ROM 187 detects that the address designated to the internal bus is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 187d1 of the NOR ROM 187d in the buffer RAM 187c, The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 181. Then, the MPU 181 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 187, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the display main processing.

If the boot program first processed by the MPU 181 after the system reset is released is stored in the NAND flash memory 187a, the character ROM 187 detects that the address designated by the internal bus is "0000H". Then, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 187a and set in the buffer RAM 187c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 187a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 187c. Therefore, the MPU 181 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 181, there arises a problem that control of the auxiliary effect part in the display control device 81 may not be immediately started.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 187d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 181 after the system reset is released in the NOR ROM 187d. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 181 via the internal bus after the system reset is released, the character ROM 187 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 187d1 of the NOR type ROM 187d. The boot program thus generated can be set in the buffer RAM 187c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 181. Therefore, since the MPU 181 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 181 can start the display main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 187 composed of the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the display control device 81 can be immediately started.

When the display main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S701), and the display control device 81 is activated so that various controls for the auxiliary effect production unit can be executed. To do. Here, the boot process (S701) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S701) executed in the display main process in the MPU 181 of the display control device 81.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 181 and the fixed value data for driving the upper lamp 63 and the like are stored in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine (for example, the above-mentioned patent documents). The first ROM 22) is not provided and stored, but is stored in the character ROM 187 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the auxiliary display section 64. Since the character ROM 187 is composed of the NAND flash memory 187a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored, while the control There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 81 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a low read speed particularly when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 181 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 187a, Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 91 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in the present boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 187a1 of the NAND flash memory 187a are transferred to the program storage area 185c provided in the work RAM 185 configured by DRAM. Execute the process to store.

Specifically, first, based on the operation by the hardware of the MPU 181 and the character ROM 187 described above, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 187d1 of the NOR ROM 187d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 187c, Of the control programs stored in the 2 program storage area 187a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 185c (S731). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 187d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 181a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 185c, that is, the leading address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 185c (S732). As a result, the MPU 181 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 185c by the processing of S731.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 181a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 185c by the processing of S732, the MPU 181 can execute various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 185c of the work RAM 185. become. That is, the MPU 181 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 187a having the second program storage area 187a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 185 having the program storage area 185c and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 185 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 187 configured by the NAND flash memory 187a having a low read speed, the MPU 181 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 181a is set by the process of S732, the instruction pointer 181a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 187a of the NAND flash memory 187a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 181a. The remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 185c and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 185c by a predetermined amount (S733). Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S734), the instruction pointer 181a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 185c, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S701 of FIG. 18). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S702 of FIG. 18) (S735), the execution of the boot program is completed, and this boot process is completed.

As described above, by executing the boot process (S701), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 187a1 of the NAND flash memory 187a are all stored in the work RAM 185 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 185c. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 181a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 181 loads the control program transferred to the program storage area 185c without referring to the NAND flash memory 187a. Various processes are executed by using.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 187 composed of the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow reading speed, the control program can be transferred to the program storage area 185c of the work RAM 185 after the system reset is released. Since the MPU 181 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 81 and use the auxiliary effect production unit. Thus, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

On the other hand, the NOR ROM 187d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 181 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 187a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 187a2, the control program stored in the second program storage area 187a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 185c. Therefore, the character ROM 187 can start up the MPU 181 in a short time only by adding the NOR type ROM 187d having an extremely small capacity, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 187 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

In the boot process shown in FIG. 19, the control program of the predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 185c by the process of S731 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 187d1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 185c by the processing of S731 is a boot program that executes the boot processing that should be processed following the processing of S732. May be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 185c by a predetermined amount, and further, by this, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 185c is the instruction pointer. It may execute the process set in 181a. Then, the processes of S733 to S735 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 185c.

The boot program transferred by the processing of S731 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 185c by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, by this, the top of the boot program stored in the program storage area 185c. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 181a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 185c by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 185c by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, to the program storage area 185c. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 181a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 185c by a predetermined amount and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 185c in the instruction pointer 181a is performed in S731. Alternatively, the processing of S733 to S735 may be executed after repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S732 and S732.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 187d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 185c at one time, the MPU 181 is already stored in the program storage area 185c. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 185c.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 181 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 187d1 has been described. It may be stored in the one program storage area 187d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 181 may execute the processes of S733 to S735 without performing the processes of S731 and S732. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 185c, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 187 or the program storage area 185c is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the MPU 181 which can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

Returning to FIG. 18, the description of the display main process is continued. When the boot process of S701 is completed, the initialization process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 185c of the work RAM 185 (S702). In this initialization processing, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 181, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 181 and the I/O device are performed. Then, the process proceeds to S703, and as one process of the initialization process, the processes of S703 to S711 are executed, and the images to be resident in the resident video RAM 189, that is, the main image at power-on, the rear image, and the character pattern , Image data corresponding to each image such as a notification effect image and an error message image are read from the character ROM 187 and transferred to the resident video RAM 189.

Specifically, first, the main image data at power-on is read from the character ROM 187, and the data is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 188a (S703). When the power-on main image data is stored in the buffer RAM 188a, the power-on main image data stored in the buffer RAM 188a is then transferred to the resident video RAM 189 and stored in the power-on main image area 189a. (S704). If the data capacity of the main image data at power-on is less than or equal to the capacity (for example, 132 kilobytes) of one block of the NAND flash memory 187a, which is also the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 188a, by one processing of S703 and S704, When the power is turned on, all of the main image data is transferred to the resident video RAM, so the process directly proceeds to S705. If the data capacity of the main image data at power-on is larger than the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 187a, all the main image data at power-on are in the power-on main image area of the resident video RAM 189. The processes of S703 and S704 are repeatedly executed until the data is stored in 189a, and then the process proceeds to S705.

Then, in the process of S705, the image controller 188 is instructed to draw the main image at power-on (S705). As a result, the image controller 188 reads the power-on main image data stored in the power-on main image area 189a of the resident video RAM 189, draws the power-on main image, and renders the drawn power-on main image. After the corresponding drawn image data is temporarily stored in the normal video RAM 190, a process of transferring it to the auxiliary display unit 65 is executed at the display timing of the auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, the main image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the power is turned on, and in this display, other image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 189, and a normal image is drawn by the process of S712 described later. Will be continued until instructed to.

In the slot machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 187a is used as the character ROM 187, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 189 is stored in the character ROM 187 due to its slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time before it is transferred to the video RAM 189. Therefore, as in the main display processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image is first transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, and the power-on main image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. By doing so, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 189, a player or a person related to the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. ..

Therefore, the display control device 81 can transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 over time while displaying the main image on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the power is turned on. it can. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 189. While the data is being transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation is stopped.

Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, so that it is immediately confirmed that the slot machine 10 has started its operation without any problem by power-on. The use of the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 187 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from being deteriorated.

After the processing of S705, it is then confirmed whether or not the system state is a voltage drop state, that is, whether or not the drive voltage has dropped to a predetermined voltage (less than 10 V in this embodiment) (S706), and the system state is the voltage. If it is in the lowered state (S706: Yes), it is determined that the power is cut off, and the power outage process is executed (S707).

On the other hand, in the processing of S706, if the system state is not the low voltage state (S706: No), then the image data of the resident object except the main image data at power-on is sequentially stored in the NAND flash memory 187a from the character ROM 187. One block is read out and once stored in the buffer RAM 188a (S708). When one block of image data is stored in the buffer RAM 188a, the resident video RAM 189 determines whether or not the resident video RAM 189 is being used by reading the main image when the power is turned on (S709). While the video RAM 189 is in use (S709: Yes), the process of S709 is repeatedly executed to wait for the process. Then, when it is determined that the resident video RAM 189 is unused (S709: No), the image data stored in the buffer RAM 188a is transferred to the resident video RAM 189, and the area corresponding to the image data, that is, the rear image. It is stored in any of the area 189b, the character pattern area 189c, the notification effect image area 189d, and the error message image area 189e (S710).

In this way, when the image data is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, the buffer RAM 188a formed by the SRAM is used on the way to allow the time from the character ROM 187 formed by the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow reading speed. The image data read out by multiplying is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 188a, and when the resident video RAM 189 becomes unused, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 188a to the resident video RAM 189 in a short time. You can As a result, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, the resident video RAM 189 can be prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. The data stored in the resident video RAM 189 at the time of image drawing can be read without delay, the image to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 can be drawn without delay, and the drawn image data can be transferred to the auxiliary display unit 65. You can

After the processing of S710, it is determined whether or not all the image data that is the resident target has been transferred to the resident video RAM 189 (S711), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S711: No). , S706, the processes of S706 to S711 are executed again, and the process of transferring one block of image data from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 is performed. Here, every time one block of image data is transferred by the processing of S706, it is determined whether or not the system state is a voltage drop state. As a result, even if the resident image data is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 over a long period of time, even if the system state becomes a voltage drop state, the state can be surely grasped. it can.

When it is determined that all the image data to be resident has been transferred to the resident video RAM 189 by the processing of S711 (S711: Yes), then, it is displayed at the normal time (when the special effect is not displayed). The image controller 188 is instructed to draw a normal image (S711). As a result, the image controller 188 reads the back image and the character design stored in the back image area 189b and the character design area 189c of the resident video RAM 189, draws a normal image, and temporarily renders the drawn image data. After being stored in the RAM 190, a process of transferring to the auxiliary display unit 65 at the display timing of the auxiliary display unit 65 is executed. Therefore, the normal image is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the player or the hall related person can recognize that the initialization of the display control process is completed.

Further, by the processing of S703 to S711, all the image data to be made resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 189 in the initialization processing immediately after the power is turned on. Therefore, after the initialization processing is completed, the resident video RAM 189 is stored. An image drawing process can be performed by the image controller 188 while using the resident image data. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 189, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187 composed of the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the auxiliary display unit 65.

In particular, the resident video RAM 189 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 101 or the display control device 81. Even if the character ROM 187 is configured by the NAND flash memory 187a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness from the player operating the start lever 41 and the stop switches 42 to 44 to displaying an image on the auxiliary display section 65. it can.

Then, the interrupt mode which permits the command interrupt process and the display timer interrupt process is set (S713), the series of initialization processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to S714. In the processing of S714, it is confirmed whether or not the system state is a voltage drop state, that is, whether or not the drive voltage has dropped to a predetermined voltage (less than 10 V in the present embodiment) as in the processing of S706 (S714). When the system state is the low voltage state (S714: Yes), it is determined that the power supply is cut off, and the power outage process is executed (S715).

On the other hand, in the process of S714, if the system state is not the low voltage state (S714: No), then it is determined whether the display timer interrupt process is performed (S716), and the display timer interrupt process is performed. In the case of (S716: Yes), drive data output processing for outputting drive data to the auxiliary effect part is executed (S717). As a result, the output of the drive data to the auxiliary effect production unit is controlled so as to be executed in a cycle of 1 msec in which the display timer interrupt process is performed. The determination whether the display timer interrupt process is performed is turned on each time the display timer interrupt process is executed, and is turned off each time the drive data output process is executed. (Not shown) is provided in the work RAM 185, and this is performed by detecting the value of this interrupt processing execution flag. That is, if the interrupt process execution flag is ON, it is determined that the display timer interrupt process has been performed (S716: Yes), and the drive data output process is executed (S717).

In the process of S716, it is determined that the display timer interrupt process is not executed (S716: No), or when the process of S717 is completed, then an unprocessed received command is stored in the received command storage area 185a. It is determined whether or not (S718). If there is an unprocessed received command (S718: Yes), the received command check process is executed (S719), the received command stored in the received command storage area 185a is analyzed, and the received command is responded to. The process is executed (S720). For example, if the received command is a start command, start command processing (see FIG. 20) is executed, if it is a lottery result command, lottery result command processing (see FIG. 21) is executed, and if it is an error command, error command processing (see 22) is executed. Details of each command process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In the process of S718, it is determined that there is no unprocessed received command in the received command storage area 185a (S718: No), or when the process of S719 is completed, next, a random number value used when selecting an auxiliary effect is selected. The update process is executed (S720), the process returns to S714, and then the processes of S714 to S720 are repeatedly executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the start command processing executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the start command processing. This start command process is a process executed when the start lever 41 is operated and a start command indicating that there is a game start command is received from the main control device 101. The MPU 181 stores the command received from the main control device 101 in the received command storage area 185a of the work RAM 185 in the received command check process of the display main process (see S719 in FIG. 18), and this command is the start command. If it is determined that this start command processing is executed.

In this start command processing, first, information about the bet number included in the start command is extracted, and the extracted information about the bet number is stored in the bet number storage area 185b of the work RAM 185 (S801). As described above in the description of S209 in FIG. 13, the bet number suggested by the information included in the start command is the medal inserted by the player for the game in which the start command is indicated by the start command. The display control device 81 stores the information on the bet number in the bet number storage area 185b to assist the game to be started in accordance with the bet number put in the game. The control can be performed by the effect production unit (the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65).

Then, in the start command processing, other processing corresponding to the start command is executed, such as performing control for causing the auxiliary effect production section to execute various effects in response to the game start command grasped by receiving the start command (S802). ), and ends this processing. As a result, it is possible to cause the auxiliary effect unit to perform various effects at the start of the game.

Next, the lottery result command processing executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the lottery result command processing. The lottery result command process receives from the main control device 101 a lottery result command indicating the result of the lottery (judgment of winning/losing combination) performed by the main control device 101 in response to a game start command by operating the start lever 41. This is the process executed when The MPU 181 stores the command received from the main controller 101 in the received command storage area 185a of the work RAM 185 in the received command check process of the display main process (see S719 in FIG. 18), and the command is the lottery result command. When it is determined that there is, this lottery result command processing is executed.

In the lottery result command processing, first, the information regarding the bet number stored in the bet number storage area 185b is confirmed, and whether the number of bets multiplied by the start command indicated by the start command is three or not. It is determined whether or not (S901). Then, when the bet number is 3 (S901: Yes), the effect corresponding to the bet number of 3 is started in the auxiliary effect section (the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, the auxiliary display section 65). The setting is made (S902), and the lottery result command processing is ended. As a result, by the drive data output process of the display main process (S717 of FIG. 18), each auxiliary effect part is driven so that the effect set is executed.

At this time, based on another command received from the main control device 101, when changing the back image and the character design to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, the back image area 189b and the character design area 189c of the resident video RAM 189 are supported. If the back image or the image data of the character pattern is resident, the image controller 188 reads the image data corresponding to the back image or the character pattern from the resident video RAM 189 and draws the image. As a result, the time required to newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187 configured by the NAND flash memory 187a having a long read time can be omitted, so that the image controller 188 can immediately draw and generate a predetermined image. .. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 187, the back image and the character design can be changed immediately.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S901, when it is determined that the bet number is not 3 (S901: No), the bet number applied to the game whose start command is indicated by the start command is 1 or 2 You can understand that it is a sheet. Therefore, next, it is determined whether or not the winning combination grasped by the lottery result command, that is, the winning combination of the game started by the start command is in the BB winning mode (S903). When the BB winning mode is the winning combination (S903: Yes), a message "BB winning!" is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 to inform the player that the winning combination is the BB winning mode. The "BB winning notification effect" is set (S904), and the lottery result command is ended. As a result, by the drive data output process of the display main process (S717 of FIG. 18), each auxiliary effect part is driven so that the BB winning notification effect is executed.

If the winning combination is not in the BB winning mode as a result of the process of S903 (S903: No), then the winning combination grasped by the lottery command, that is, the winning combination of the game started by the start command is the watermelon winning combination. It is determined whether it is a mode (S905). Then, if the watermelon winning mode is the winning combination (S905: Yes), a message “Watermelon winning prize!” is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 to inform the player that the winning combination is the watermelon winning mode. The “watermelon prize notification effect” is set (S906), and the lottery result command is ended. As a result, by the drive data output process of the display main process (S717 of FIG. 18), each auxiliary effect part is driven so that the watermelon winning award notification effect is executed.

If the winning combination is not the watermelon winning mode as a result of the processing in S905 (S905: No), then the winning combination grasped by the lottery command, that is, the winning combination of the game started by the start command is the bell winning combination. It is determined whether or not it is a mode (S907). When the bell winning mode is the winning combination (S907: Yes), the message "Bell winning!" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 to inform the player that the winning combination is the bell winning mode. "Bell winning notification effect" is set (S908), and the lottery result command is ended. As a result, by the drive data output process of the display main process (S717 of FIG. 18), each auxiliary effect part is driven so that the bell winning notification effect is executed.

In this way, by the processing of S903 to S908, the winning combination by the lottery (judgment of winning combination) in the game in which the bet number is set to 1 or 2 is one of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode. In that case, the auxiliary production unit can be caused to execute a BB winning award notification effect, a watermelon winning award notification effect, and a bell award notification effect that notify the player that the winning combination has been won.

Here, as described above, when the number of bets is one or two, the winning probability of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode is kept extremely low, so that the player has the BB winning mode. It is highly likely that a game is played with little expectation of establishment of the watermelon winning mode and the bell winning mode, and conversely, expecting the establishment of the cherry bell winning mode and the 7-bell winning mode. In addition, when the cherry bell winning mode or the 7-bell winning mode is a winning combination, the winning combination can be achieved without fail even if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at any timing. It is highly possible that the player who has started the game by playing two cards operates the stop switches 42 to 44 at arbitrary timing. Therefore, if any of the BB prize mode, the watermelon prize mode and the bell prize mode is won as a winning combination, if the player does not notice it, the BB prize mode, the watermelon prize mode and the bell prize mode are all missed. Since this is a winning mode, there is a risk that the winning combination will be missed. In addition, since the winning of the BB winning mode is valid across the games until the BB winning mode is established, when the player finishes the game without noticing the winning of the BB winning mode, another player May establish the BB winning mode based on the winning of the BB winning mode, and the player who has won the winning of the BB winning mode may lose as a result.

On the other hand, in the game in which the bet number is set to 1 or 2 by the processing of S903 to S908, if any of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode and the bell winning mode is won, the winning Is announced by a BB prize notification effect, a watermelon prize notification effect, and a bell prize notification effect. Since the notification is made without delay in accordance with the reception of the lottery result command transmitted from the main control device 101, as described above, it is performed while the player cannot operate the stop switches 42 to 44. Be seen. Therefore, the player can know the winning of any of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode before operating the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, when the player plays the game with one or two cards, if this notification is given by the auxiliary display section 65, the winning combination (BB winning mode, watermelon winning mode or bell winning mode) grasped by the notification is given. In order to stop the stop symbol corresponding to the mode) on the activated line, the stop switches 42 to 44 can be operated aiming at the stop symbol, so that those winning modes can be established with a higher probability. Further, when the winning of the BB winning mode is announced, even if the player fails to win the game, the player can continue to play the game until the BB winning mode is established by newly lending the medal. it can.

Further, when the BB winning mode is carried over from the past game and a plurality of winning combinations are set in addition to the winning combination in the lottery of this game, the sliding table setting process executed by the MPU 102 of the main control device 101. In (S310 of FIG. 14), a sliding table corresponding to a winning combination other than the BB winning mode is set, but in this lottery result command processing, when the bet number is set to 1 or 2 The winning combination determined by the result command is determined from the BB winning mode (see S903). As a result, if the winning combination for which the sliding table is set is the watermelon winning mode or the bell winning mode, the winning combination may be missed, but if the BB winning mode is set as the winning combination, Since the BB winning notification effect is preferentially performed, the player can be surely ascertained that the more advantageous BB winning mode for the player is the winning combination.

As described above, in the lottery result command process, the command received from the main control device 101 is stored in the received command storage area 185a of the work RAM 185 by the main process executed by the MPU 181, and the command is the lottery result. It is executed when it is determined to be a command. Then, the lottery result command is a reel control process (S211 in FIG. 13) for controlling the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R after the lottery (judgment of winning/winning combination) associated with the game start command is completed in the main control device 101. (Refer to S309 in FIG. 14) and then within about 1.5 ms at the latest (that is, after a time lag until the command is transmitted by the timer interrupt processing), the lottery result command is displayed and controlled. Sent to the device 81.

Further, in the display control device 81, image data corresponding to the image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in various notification effects such as BB prize notification effect, watermelon prize notification effect, and bell prize notification effect is notified in the resident video RAM 189. Since it is previously resident in the effect image area 189d, the display control device 81 performs the BB winning notification effect, the watermelon winning notification effect, and the bell winning notification effect based on the lottery result command received from the main control device 101. In the case of determining, the corresponding image data is not newly read from the character ROM 187, but the image data pre-resident in the notification effect image area 189d of the resident video RAM 189 is read, so that the image controller 188 can read the image data. Each announcement effect image can be drawn. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187, even if a NAND flash memory 187a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 187, each announcement effect image is immediately output after the lottery result command is received. It is possible to display those notification effect images on the auxiliary display section 65.

Therefore, during the period from the player operating the start lever 41 to the operation of any of the stop switches 42 to 44 to stop the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, a notice effect of the winning combination is assisted. It can be executed by the production unit (upper lamp 63, speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65). Therefore, the player can grasp the winning combination before operating any of the stop switches 42 to 44, and thus the grasped winning combination (BB winning mode, watermelon winning mode or bell winning mode) is established. Can be surely aimed at by the player.

As a result of the processing in S907, when the winning combination is not the bell winning mode (S907: No), if the bet number is 2, the cherry bell winning mode or the replay winning mode is set as the winning combination, or the winning combination is If it can be understood that it is not set (that is, it is out), and if the number of bets is 1, the cherry bell winning mode, the 7 bell winning mode or the replay winning mode is set as a winning combination, It can be understood that the winning combination is not set (that is, the winning combination is out). Therefore, next, the information regarding the bet number stored in the bet number storage area 185b is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the bet number multiplied by the start command indicated by the start command is two. The determination is made (S909).

If the bet number is 2 (S909: Yes), a message "Challenge the cherry bell!" is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, a dedicated voice is output from the speaker 64, and the upper lamp 63 is exclusively used. The "cherry bell winning challenge effect" to be turned on is set (S910), and the lottery result command processing is ended. As a result, by the drive data output process of the display main process (S717 of FIG. 18), each auxiliary effect part is driven so that the cherry bell winning challenge effect is executed. If the number of bets is not two (S909: No), it can be understood that the number of bets is one. Therefore, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the message "Challenge cherry bell/7 bells!" The "cherry bell winning/7-bell winning challenge effect" that causes the speaker 64 to output a dedicated sound and turn on the upper lamp 63 in a dedicated manner is set (S911), and the lottery result command processing is ended. As a result, each auxiliary effect unit is driven so that the cherry bell winning/7-bell winning challenge effect is executed by the drive data output process of the display main process (S717 of FIG. 18).

By the processing of S910, the "Cherrybell winning a prize challenge effect" is executed in the auxiliary effecting unit. Therefore, when the game is played with two coins, it is expected that three medals will be paid out by the establishment of the cherrybell winning mode. It is possible to give the player a strong feeling. In addition, because the processing of S911, "the cherry bell winning/7 bell winning challenge production" is executed in the auxiliary production section, when the game is played with one sheet, the cherry bell winning or 7 bell winning mode It is possible to strongly give the player a sense of expectation that three or two medals will be paid out by the establishment. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game by hanging one or two, and can make the player feel more strongly that he wants to play the game to the end without leaving extra medals.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the error command processing executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process is a process for informing the auxiliary detection unit of an error detected by the main control device 101. If the command received from the main control device 101 is stored in the received command storage area 185a, and the command is determined to be an error command, this error command processing is executed.

In this error command processing, first, information about the error type included in the error command is extracted (S951). Then, the display of an error message corresponding to the extracted error type is set (S952), and this error command processing is terminated. As a result, the drive data output process of the display main process (S717 in FIG. 18) causes the auxiliary display unit 65 to display a corresponding error message, blink the upper lamp 63, and cause the speaker 64 to emit an alarm sound. Each auxiliary production section is driven.

Here, as described above, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoints of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against the error. Since the image data corresponding to various error messages is previously resident in the message image area 189e, the display control device 81 reads the resident image data based on the error command received from the main control device 101. Thus, the image controller 188 can immediately draw each error message image. Therefore, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 187, even if the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 187, each error message is immediately output after the error command is received. Can be displayed on.

As described above, according to the slot machine 10 of the first embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 181 and the fixed value data for driving the upper lamp 63 and the like are dedicated as in the conventional gaming machine. The program ROM (for example, the ROM 22 of Patent Document 1 described above) is not provided and stored, but a small area and a large capacity are provided for the purpose of storing data of many images to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 64. It is stored in the character ROM 187 constituted by the NAND flash memory 187a capable of being designed. As a result, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing control programs and the like, so that it is possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 81, reduce the manufacturing cost, and increase the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts. Can be suppressed.

The control program stored in the NAND flash memory 187a (second program storage area 187a1) is transferred to the program storage area 185c provided in the work RAM 185 when the MPU 181 executes the boot process, and the MPU 181 stores the program. Various processes are executed with reference to the control program and the like stored in the storage area 185c. That is, the MPU 181 does not directly read the control program or the like from the NAND flash memory 187a having a low read speed, but reads the control program or the like from the work RAM 185 configured by a DRAM capable of high-speed read operation to perform various controls. You can Therefore, even when the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 187 configured by the NAND flash memory 187a, if the high-performance MPU 181 is used without being limited by the reading speed of the NAND flash memory 187a, The display control device 81 can maintain high processing performance. Therefore, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the auxiliary effect unit.

Further, in the slot machine 10, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 181 in the boot program after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 187d, and after the system reset is released from the MPU 181 via the internal bus. When the address "0000H" is specified by the character ROM187, the character ROM 187 immediately sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 187d1 of the NOR ROM 187d in the buffer RAM 187c, and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 181. Output. Since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, the MPU 181 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" within a short time after designating the address "0000H". .. Therefore, since the display main process can be started in the MPU 181 in a short time, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 187 configured by the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow reading speed, the auxiliary effect in the display control device 81 is achieved. Control of the department can be started immediately.

Further, according to the slot machine 10, all the image data to be made resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 189 in the initialization process immediately after the power is turned on. An image drawing process can be performed by the image controller 188 while using the image data resident in the. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 189, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187 composed of the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the auxiliary display unit 65. In particular, since the image data of the image frequently displayed and the image data of the image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 101 or the display control device 81 are made resident in the resident video RAM 189, It is possible to maintain high responsiveness from the operation of the start lever 41 or the stop switches 42 to 44 by a person to the display of any image on the auxiliary display section 65.

Further, in the slot machine 10, since the NAND type flash memory 187a is used as the character ROM 187, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 189 is transferred from the character ROM 187 due to its slow reading speed. Although it takes a lot of time to transfer to the resident video RAM 189, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image is first transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, and the power-on main image is transferred. By displaying on the auxiliary display unit 65, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 189, the player or the hall-related person can display the main power-on time displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. You can check the image.

Therefore, the display control device 81 can transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 over time while displaying the main image on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the power is turned on. it can. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 189. While the data is being transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation is stopped. Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, so that it is immediately confirmed that the slot machine 10 has started its operation without any problem by power-on. Can be confirmed. Therefore, by using the NAND flash memory 187a having a low reading speed for the character ROM 187, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from being deteriorated.

Next, the slot machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the slot machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the NOR ROM 187d is provided in the character ROM 187 composed of the NAND flash memory 187a, and most of the control program and fixed value data are stored in the NAND flash memory 187a. In addition, the NOR ROM 187d stores a part of the boot program that is first executed in the MPU 181 of the control program after the system reset is released, and the system reset is released so that the MPU 181 sets the address "0000H" to the internal bus. When the designation is made, the ROM controller 187b of the character ROM 187 sets a part of the boot program stored in the NOR ROM 187d in the buffer RAM 187c, and then outputs the instruction code of the designated address to the MPU 181.

On the other hand, in the slot machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the display control device 81 is provided with a character ROM 191 instead of the character ROM 187 according to the first embodiment described above. Regarding other configurations and various processes executed by the MPU 102 of the main control device 101 (see FIGS. 12 to 17) and various processes executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81 (see FIGS. 18 to 22), It is the same as the slot machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

The character ROM 191 has a NAND flash memory 191a, a ROM controller 191b, and a buffer RAM 191c as shown in FIG. Is connected to an internal bus.

Of these, the buffer RAM 191c has the same configuration and function as the buffer RAM 187c of the character ROM 187 in the first embodiment, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

The NAND flash memory 191a is a non-volatile memory provided as a storage unit in the character ROM 191. Like the NAND flash memory 187a in the first embodiment, the NAND flash memory 191a has at least a character storage area 191a2 for storing data of an image (character) to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. Then, as in the first embodiment, the MPU 181 directly accesses the character ROM 191 and transfers predetermined image data among the image data stored in the character storage area 191a2 of the character ROM 191 to the resident video RAM 189 at the time of initialization processing. When using image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 189 or is not resident in the resident video RAM 189, the image data is transferred to the normal video RAM 190 and stored in advance before being used.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area. For example, by using the NAND flash memory 191a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, an image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is displayed. As a result, many images can be stored in the character storage area 191a2. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 can be diversified and complicated. On the other hand, since the image data used for the drawing process is made resident in the resident video RAM 189 and stored in the normal video RAM 190 in advance, the character ROM 191 composed of the NAND flash memory 191a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. It is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the auxiliary display unit 65.

Further, the NAND flash memory 191a is provided with a program storage area 191a in place of the second program storage area 187a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 187a of the first embodiment. The program storage area 191a stores all control programs executed by the MPU 181 and fixed value data for driving the upper lamp 63 and the like. That is, in the first embodiment, among the control programs, a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 181 after releasing the system reset is stored in the NOR ROM 187d, and the other control programs and fixed value data are stored in the NAND flash memory. Although stored in 187a, in the second embodiment, all the control programs and fixed value data are stored in the NAND flash memory 191a. Since the contents of the control program and the contents of the fixed value data are the same as those in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

Here, since the NAND flash memory 191a can easily achieve a large capacity in a small area as described above, in the state in which a large amount of image data is stored in the character storage area 191a2, further, all the control can be performed. A program and fixed value data can be stored in the program storage area 191a1. In this way, an image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 64 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM (for example, the ROM 22 of the above-mentioned Patent Document 1) like a conventional gaming machine. Since the data can be stored in the character ROM 187 provided to store the data, the number of components in the display control device 81 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the components can be reduced as in the first embodiment. It is possible to suppress an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number.

Further, the character ROM 191 in the second embodiment does not require the NOR type ROM 187a1 as compared with the character ROM 187 in the first embodiment, so that the cost of the character ROM 191 itself can be reduced by omitting the NOR type ROM 187a1. Besides, the reliability of the character ROM 191 itself can be improved by reducing the number of parts.

The ROM controller 191b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 191 similarly to the ROM controller 187b of the character ROM 187 in the first embodiment, and, for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 181 via the internal bus, The corresponding data is read from the NAND flash memory 191a and output to the MPU 181 via the internal bus. At this time, the ROM controller 191b performs publicly known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 191a, and reads/writes data to/from the NAND flash memory 191a while avoiding a defective data block. Data address conversion (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

As a result, even if the NAND flash memory 191a in which error bits are likely to occur is used as the character ROM 191, the MPU 181 performs processing based on incorrect data, and the image controller 188 generates various images. Can be suppressed. Further, since the ROM controller 191b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 191a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 181 determines that the address position of the defective data block is different in each NAND flash memory 191a. It is possible to easily access the character ROM 191 without considering. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 191a is used as the character ROM 191, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 191 from becoming complicated.

Here, when the ROM controller 187b of the character ROM 187 in the first embodiment detects that the MPU 181 specifies the address "0000H" on the internal bus after the system reset is released, a part of the boot program stored in the NOR ROM 187d. Is set in the buffer RAM 187c, and the instruction code of the designated address is output to the MPU 181. On the other hand, the ROM controller 191b of the character ROM 191 according to the second embodiment, when power is supplied from the power supply device 91 to the display control device 81, immediately after power is turned on in the MPU 181 from the program storage area 191a of the NAND flash memory 191a. First, a part of the boot program executed first is read, and a part of the read boot program is set in the buffer RAM 191c.

That is, the ROM controller 191b is configured so that the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 191a is automatically set by the hardware immediately after the power is turned on. The NAND flash memory 191a is driven so as to read data (instruction code) for two pages. Then, by writing the data (instruction code) read from the NAND flash memory 191a to the buffer RAM 191c, a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 181 is set in the buffer RAM 181c.

Then, after a part of the boot program is set in the buffer RAM 181c, when the ROM controller 191b detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the internal bus by the MPU 181 in association with the system reset release, the ROM controller 191b responds from the buffer RAM 191c. The instruction code of the address to be output is output to the MPU 181. The MPU 181 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 187 and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the display main processing shown in FIG. 18 and starting the processing. In the display main process, as shown in FIG. 18, first, the boot process (S701) shown in FIG. 19 is executed.

As described above, in the slot machine 10 according to the second embodiment, when power is supplied from the power supply device 91, the ROM controller 191b in the character ROM 191 first automatically releases the system reset from the NAND flash memory 191a to the MPU 181. A part of the boot program to be executed first later is read and a part of the read boot program is set in the buffer RAM 191c. Therefore, at the stage where the address “0000H” is designated to the internal bus by the MPU 181, the NAND flash Either a process of reading a part of the boot program from the memory 191a has been started, or a part of the boot program has already been set in the buffer RAM 191c.

Therefore, if a part of the boot program is already set in the buffer RAM 191c when the MPU 181 specifies the address "0000H" on the internal bus when the system reset is released, the character ROM 191 stores the data (command code) of the specified address. ) Can be immediately read from the buffer RAM 191c. Further, even when a part of the boot program is not set in the buffer RAM 101c at the stage when the MPU 181 specifies the address “0000H” on the internal bus, the part of the boot program is already read from the NAND flash memory 191a. Since the processing has been started, the MPU 181 uses the internal bus as compared with the case where the reading of a part of the boot program from the NAND flash memory 191a is started in response to the designation of the address "0000H" on the internal bus. The time from when the address "0000H" is designated to the character ROM 191 until a part of the boot program is set in the buffer RAM 191c and the data (instruction code) at the designated address is output from the buffer RAM 191c to the MPU 181. Can be shortened.

Therefore, since the MPU 181 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is designated, the MPU 181 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 187 composed of the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the display control device 81 can be immediately started.

In addition, the slot machine 10 according to the second embodiment can achieve the same effects as the slot machine 10 according to the first embodiment based on the same components as those of the slot machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the slot machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. In the slot machine 10 of the third embodiment, a character ROM 192 is provided in the display control device 81 instead of the character ROM 187 of the first embodiment described above. Regarding other configurations and various processes executed by the MPU 102 of the main control device 101 (see FIGS. 12 to 17) and various processes executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81 (see FIGS. 18 to 22), It is the same as the slot machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

The character ROM 192 has a NAND flash memory 192a, a ROM controller 192b, and a buffer RAM 192c, as shown in FIG. Is connected to an internal bus.

Among them, the NAND flash memory 192a, the second program storage area 192a1 and the character storage area 192a2 and the buffer RAM 192c provided in the NAND flash memory 192a are the NAND flash memory 187a of the character ROM 187 in the first embodiment, The NAND flash memory 187a has the same configuration and function as the second program storage area 187a1 and the character storage area 187a2 and the buffer RAM 187c provided in the NAND flash memory 187a. The data stored in the second program storage area 192a1 and the character storage area 192a2 are the same as the data stored in the second program storage area 187a1 and the character storage area 187a2. Therefore, these descriptions will be omitted below.

Like the ROM controller 187b of the character ROM 187 in the first embodiment, the ROM controller 192b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 192, and, for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 181 via the internal bus, The corresponding data is read from the NAND flash memory 192a and output to the MPU 181 via the internal bus. At this time, the ROM controller 192b performs publicly known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 192a, and reads/writes data to/from the NAND flash memory 192a while avoiding a defective data block. Data address conversion (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

As a result, even if the NAND flash memory 192a in which error bits are likely to occur frequently is used as the character ROM 192, the MPU 181 performs processing or the image controller 188 generates various images based on incorrect data. Can be suppressed. Further, since the ROM controller 192b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 192a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 181 determines that the address position of the defective data block is different in each NAND flash memory 192a. It is possible to easily access the character ROM 192 without considering. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 192a is used as the character ROM 192, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 192 from becoming complicated.

On the other hand, the ROM controller 192b in the third embodiment differs from the ROM controller 187b of the character ROM 187 in the first embodiment in that it has a first program storage area 192d. The first program storage area 192d is composed of a small capacity ROM built in the ROM controller 192b, and the program stored in the first program storage area 187d1 of the NOR ROM 187d in the character ROM 187 in the first embodiment. That is, a part of the boot program that is first executed in the MPU 181 after releasing the system reset is stored in the first program storage area 192d in the third embodiment.

When the ROM controller 192b detects that the MPU 181 has designated the address "0000H" on the internal bus after the system reset is released, it sets a part of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 192d in the buffer RAM 192c. And outputs the instruction code of the designated address to the MPU 181. The MPU 181 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 192 and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the display main processing shown in FIG. 18 and starting the processing. In the display main process, as shown in FIG. 18, first, the boot process (S701) shown in FIG. 19 is executed.

In general, since the built-in ROM can shorten the connection wiring, the parasitic capacitance applied to the wiring can be reduced. As a result, the wiring delay that occurs in signal propagation can be reduced, and the data read time can be shortened. In addition, the built-in ROM can be designed with its data bus width freely according to the individual hardware specifications. Therefore, if the data bus width is set wide, it is possible to read many data at once. Is.

Therefore, if the first program storage area 192d is configured by such a built-in ROM, a part of the boot program first executed by the MPU 181 after the system reset is released is read from the first program storage area 192d at high speed, The data (instruction code) corresponding to the address designated on the internal bus can be output to the MPU 181 from the set program in the buffer RAM 192c. Therefore, since the MPU 181 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is designated, the MPU 181 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 187 composed of the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the display control device 81 can be immediately started.

In addition, the slot machine 10 according to the third embodiment can achieve the same effects as the slot machine 10 according to the first embodiment based on the same components as those of the slot machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, a slot machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described. In the slot machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, a character ROM 193 is provided in the display control device 81 in place of the character ROM 187 of the above-described first embodiment, and the display control device 81 has the MPU 181, the input/output port 186, and the image controller. The NOR type ROM 194 is connected to an internal bus connecting the 188 and the character ROM 193. Regarding other configurations and various processes executed by the MPU 102 of the main control device 101 (see FIGS. 12 to 17) and various processes executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81 (see FIGS. 18 to 22), It is the same as the slot machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

The character ROM 193 has a NAND flash memory 193a, a ROM controller 193b, and a buffer RAM 193c, as shown in FIG. Is connected to the internal bus.

Among them, the NAND flash memory 193a, the second program storage area 193a1 and the character storage area 193a2 and the buffer RAM 193c provided in the NAND flash memory 193a are the NAND flash memory 187a of the character ROM 187 in the first embodiment, The NAND flash memory 187a has the same configuration and function as the second program storage area 187a1 and the character storage area 187a2 and the buffer RAM 187c provided in the NAND flash memory 187a. The data stored in the second program storage area 193a1 and the character storage area 193a2 are the same as the data stored in the second program storage area 187a1 and the character storage area 187a2. Therefore, these descriptions will be omitted below.

The ROM controller 193b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 193, like the ROM controller 187b of the character ROM 187 in the first embodiment, and, for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 181 via the internal bus, The corresponding data is read from the NAND flash memory 193a and output to the MPU 181 via the internal bus. At this time, the ROM controller 193b performs publicly known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 193a, and reads/writes data to/from the NAND flash memory 193a while avoiding a defective data block. Data address conversion (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

As a result, even if the NAND flash memory 193a in which error bits are likely to occur frequently is used as the character ROM 193, the MPU 181 performs processing based on incorrect data, and the image controller 188 generates various images. Can be suppressed. Further, the ROM controller 193b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 193a and avoids access to the defective data block. It is possible to easily access the character ROM 193 without considering the above. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 193a is used as the character ROM 193, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 193 from becoming complicated.

On the other hand, when the ROM controller 187b in the first embodiment detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the internal bus, it reads a part of the boot program first executed by the MPU 181 after releasing the system reset from the NOR ROM 187d. However, even if the ROM controller 193b in the fourth embodiment detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the internal bus, such operation is not executed. This is different from the ROM controller 187b in the first embodiment.

Further, when the address of the internal bus is designated as the control program stored in the NOR type ROM 194 described later, that is, the address corresponding to a part of the boot program first executed in the MPU 181 after releasing the system reset, the ROM The controller 193b is different from the ROM controller 187b in the first embodiment in that data output to the internal bus is set to a high impedance state and data is not output.

As a result, when the MPU 181 specifies an address corresponding to a part of the boot program to be executed first after releasing the system reset on the internal bus, the data output of the character ROM 193 is in a high impedance state, and as described later, Data (instruction code) corresponding to the address designated on the internal bus can be reliably output from the NOR RAM 194 to the MPU 181. Further, in this case, since unnecessary operation is not executed in the character ROM 193, it is possible to suppress wasteful power consumption in the character ROM 193.

The NOR ROM 194 is an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) non-volatile memory connected to the internal bus connecting the MPU 181, the input/output port 186, the image controller 188, and the character ROM 193, as described above. This NOR type ROM 194 has a first program storage area 194a. In this first program storage area 194a, the same control program as the first program storage area 187d1 of the NOR type ROM 187d in the first embodiment, that is, , MPU 181 stores a part of the boot program that is first executed after the system reset is released.

In this NOR type ROM 194, the address designated by the MPU 181 on the internal bus is an address (for example, “0000H” to “0400H”) corresponding to a part of the boot program to be executed first by the MPU 181 after releasing the system reset. When this is detected, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address is read from the first program storage area 194a and output to the MPU 181.

At this time, since the data output of the character ROM 193 is set to the high impedance state as described above, the data output from the NOR ROM 194 is surely output to the MPU 181. On the other hand, the address specified on the internal bus is different from the control program stored in the NOR ROM 194, that is, the address corresponding to a part of the boot program to be executed first by the MPU 181 after releasing the system reset. If the addresses are different, the NOR ROM 194 sets the data output to the high impedance state. As a result, when such an address is set, the data read from the memory (resident video RAM 189, normal video RAM 190, character ROM 193, etc.) corresponding to the address is surely output to the internal bus. You can

Here, as in the first embodiment, when the system reset is released, the MPU 181 sets the value of the instruction pointer 181a to "0000H" by hardware and indicates the instruction pointer 181a to the internal bus. The designated address "0000H" is designated. On the other hand, when the NOR-type ROM 194 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the internal bus, as described above, the NOR-type ROM 194 reads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 194a of the NOR-type ROM 194 and responds to it. The data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 181.

Then, the MPU 181 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 187, and starts execution of processing in accordance with the fetched instruction, thereby activating the display main processing shown in FIG. 18 and starting the processing. In the display main process, as shown in FIG. 18, first, the boot process (S701) shown in FIG. 19 is executed.

Since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, the NOR ROM 194 stores a part of the boot program to be executed first by the MPU 181 after releasing the system reset, and By connecting the NOR ROM 194 to the internal bus, a part of the boot program can be read from the NOR ROM 194 at high speed and output to the MPU 181. Therefore, the MPU 181 can immediately fetch the instruction code of the boot program that is read at high speed, so that the display main process can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 193 composed of the NAND flash memory 193a having a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the display control device 81 can be immediately started.

Further, in the display control device 81 in the fourth embodiment, since the NOR type ROM 194 is connected to the internal bus, the number of parts is increased as compared with the first embodiment, but in the NOR type ROM 194, the MPU 181 resets the system. It is provided to store a part of the boot program to be executed first after the cancellation, and as the capacity thereof, an extremely small capacity can be used as described above. Therefore, the increase in cost due to the provision of the NOR ROM 194 can be suppressed.

In addition, the slot machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment can achieve the same effects as the slot machine 10 according to the first embodiment based on the same components as those of the slot machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 26 to 66, as a fifth embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 200 will be described. FIG. 26 is a front view of the pachinko machine 200 in the fifth embodiment, FIG. 27 is a front view of the game board 213 of the pachinko machine 200, and FIG. 28 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 200.

As shown in FIG. 26, the pachinko machine 200 has an outer frame 211 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 211 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 211. And an inner frame 212 that is openably and closably supported. In order to support the inner frame 212, metal hinges 218 are attached to the outer frame 211 at upper and lower two positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 26), and the side provided with the hinge 218 is used as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 212 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 213 (see FIG. 27) having a large number of nails, winning holes 263, 264, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 212 from the back side. A ball game is performed by the ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 213. In addition, in the inner frame 212, a ball launch unit 312a (see FIG. 30) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 213 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 312a to the front area of the game board 213. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 212, a front frame 214 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 215 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 214 and the lower plate unit 215, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 26), and the side provided with the hinges 19 is used as an opening/closing shaft. The lower plate unit 214 and the lower plate unit 215 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The inner frame 212 and the front frame 214 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 221 of the cylinder lock 220 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 214 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, or the like, and has a window portion 214c having a substantially elliptical opening formed in a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 216 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 214, and the front surface of the game board 213 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 200 via the glass unit 216.

On the front frame 214, an upper plate 217 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with its upper surface opened and the front plate 217 is discharged. The bottom surface of the upper plate 217 is formed so as to descend and tilt to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 26), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 217 is guided to the ball firing unit 312a by the tilt. A frame button 222 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 217. The frame button 222 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 281 (FIG. 27) described later or when changing the effect contents of super reach. ..

The stage is a production mode in which various productions displayed on the third pattern display device 281 are made uniform, and in the pachinko machine 200, there are three stages of “a town stage”, an “empty stage”, and an “island stage”. There are two stages. Then, various effects such as a variation effect and a reach effect, which are performed along with the entry into the first entry port 264 (starting prize), which will be described later, are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been done. The change of the stage is performed when the player operates the frame button 222 during a period in which no change effect is performed or during high-speed change. Every time the frame button 222 is operated, the “town stage”→“empty stage” is performed. ”→“Island stage”→“City stage”→... Immediately after the power is turned on, the "town stage" is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, the third symbol display device 281 is configured to display a selection screen of the effect mode of super reach during normal reach, and while the selection screen is displayed, the frame button 222 is displayed on the player. When it is operated to, the effect contents at the time of super reach are changed.

The front frame 214 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 214 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 214c, there are provided electric decoration portions 229 to 233 having a light emitting means such as an LED built therein. In the pachinko machine 200, these electric decoration parts 229 to 233 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, each of the electric decoration parts 229 to 233 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is in progress, or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. Further, a display lamp 234 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and capable of displaying during payout of an award ball and when an error occurs is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 214 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 26).

In addition, a small window 235 is formed on the lower side of the right illuminated portion 232 by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 214 can be visually recognized, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 213 (see FIG. The certificate or the like attached to (see 27) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 200. Further, in the pachinko machine 200, a plating member 236 made of ABS resin plated with chrome is attached to a region around the electric decorations 229 to 233 in order to bring out more glitter.

A ball rental operation unit 240 is disposed below the window 214c. The ball lending operation unit 240 is provided with a frequency display unit 241, a ball lending button 242, and a return button 243. When the ball rental operation unit 240 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 200, the ball lending unit 240 operates in accordance with the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 241 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 242 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 217 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 243 is operated when requesting return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 240 is unnecessary in a pachinko machine, which is a cash machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 217 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 240 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 215 located below the upper plate 217, a lower plate 250 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 217 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 215 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 250, an operation handle 251 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 213 is provided, and inside the operation handle 251, the driving of the ball firing unit 312a is permitted. Sensor 251a for pressing, a push-button stop switch 251b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 251 by the change of the electric resistance. (Not shown) and are built in. When the operation handle 251 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 251a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, and the rotation amount of the operation handle 251 is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes as a result, and thereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 213 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 251 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 251a and the stop switch 251b are off.

At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 250, a ball removing lever 252 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 250 are discharged downward is provided. The ball-pulling lever 252 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 250 opens, and The ball spontaneously falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 252 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as “thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 250 is placed below the lower plate 250. The operation handle 251 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 250 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 250.

As shown in FIG. 27, the game board 213 has a wooden base plate 260 that is cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and has a large number of nails for guiding balls, windmills and rails 261, 262, a general winning opening 263, and a first prize. The ball entrance 264, the variable winning device 265, the variable display device unit 280 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 212. The general winning opening 263, the first winning opening 264, the variable winning device 265, and the variable display device unit 280 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 260 by router processing, and wood screws are applied from the front side of the game board 213. It is fixed by etc. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 213 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 212 through the window portion 214c (see FIG. 26) of the front frame 214. The configuration of the game board 213 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG. 27.

On the front surface of the game board 213, an outer rail 262 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 262, a strip-shaped metal plate is formed like the outer rail 262. The arc-shaped inner rail 261 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 261 and the outer rail 262 surround the outer circumference of the front surface of the game board 213, and the front and rear surfaces are surrounded by the game board 213 and the glass unit 216 (see FIG. 26). A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area formed by partitioning the two rails 261 and 262 and the arc member 270 on the front surface of the game board 213 (where a winning opening or the like is provided, and a shot ball is It is the area that flows down.

The two rails 261 and 262 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 312a (see FIG. 30) to the upper part of the game board 213. A return ball prevention member 268 is attached to the tip end portion of the inner rail 261 (upper left portion of FIG. 27) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 213 from returning to the ball guide passage again. To be done. At the tip of the outer rail 262 (upper right part in FIG. 27), a return rubber 269 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a force of a predetermined amount or more hits the return rubber 269 to give a force. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center. Further, between the lower right end of the inner rail 261 and the upper right end of the outer rail 262, a resin arc member 270 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 260.

A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 237a and a 7-segment display 237b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side in the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 27). A display device 237 is provided. The first symbol display device 237 is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 310 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 200. The plurality of LEDs 237a perform a variation display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not the variation is performed with the entry into the first entry port 264 (starting winning), or a stop symbol after the variation ends. As a result, a symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery performed for the starting winning is shown by a lighting state, and among the balls entered in the first entrance port 264, the fluctuation of which has not been executed (holding ball). The number of reserved balls, which is a number, is indicated by a lighting state. The 7-segment display 237b is for displaying the number of rounds in a big hit and an error. The LEDs 237a are configured so that the respective LEDs emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emitted colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 200 with a small number of LEDs.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 200, in the lottery performed for the entrance into the first entrance 264, whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is determined, and when the jackpot is determined, the jackpot type is also determined. .. As the types of jackpots determined here, 15R certainty variation jackpots, 2R certainty variation jackpots, and time saving jackpots are prepared. The LED 237a not only indicates whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of fluctuation, but when it is a big hit, a symbol according to the jackpot type is shown.

Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum round number shifts to a high probability state after the 15 rounds jackpot, and the “2R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 2 rounds. It is a probability change jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, the “time saving jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot with the maximum round number of 15 rounds and is in a shortening state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

Also, the "high probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability increases after the jackpot as an added value, that is, when the probability is changing (probably changing), in other words, a game that easily transitions to a special game state. It is the state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of hitting a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and the ball easily enters the first entrance 264. On the other hand, the "low-probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of change is not in progress, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the probability of jackpot is lower than that in the probability change. In addition, the time saving state (time saving time) in the "low probability state" is a state where the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to the first entrance port. A game state in which a ball easily enters 264. In addition, instead of changing the winning probability of the second symbol, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 200, the time for which the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entrance 264 is opened or once. The number of times the electric accessory is opened may be changed depending on the hit.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 263 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 280 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 280 is a liquid crystal display that performs variable display of the third symbol while synchronizing with the variable display of the first symbol display device 237, triggered by the entry into the first entry port 264 (starting winning). (Hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") composed of a third symbol display device 281 and a second LED configured to variably display the second symbol triggered by passage of the ball through the second entrance 267. A symbol display device 283 is provided.

The third symbol display device 281 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and by the display contents being controlled by a display control device 314 described later, for example, three symbol columns of left, middle, and right. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are laterally scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 281.

Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 281 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 281, and FIG. 29(a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 29B is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9". Each main symbol is formed by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are attached to the front of the wooden box with attached designs that imitate characters such as plane, furoshiki, and helmet. An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached design, and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached design.

Further, in the pachinko machine 200 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 310 (see FIG. 30) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the variable display is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the end. When transitioning to a high-probability state (probability change state) after the jackpot ends, a variable display in which main symbols (corresponding to "high-probability symbols") to which odd numbers are added are displayed. On the other hand, when transitioning to the low-probability state after the end of the big hit, a variable display in which the main symbols (corresponding to the “low-probability symbol”) to which an even number is added are arranged is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 29(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 281 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, other than that. The upper one-third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, center, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed on the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from the top to the bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol column Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol column Z2 and the right symbol column Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle and lower three rows for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol column Z1, the right symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of the jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols in the present embodiment) is arranged on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) for which fluctuation has not been executed among the balls entered into the first entrance 264, and the small area Ds2. And Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 29B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that it is easier to make a transition to the big hit than usual. In the central small area Ds2, usually, a predetermined character (a boy with a hachimaki in the present embodiment) performs a predetermined motion, sometimes performs a special motion different from the predetermined motion, or another character appears. A notice production is performed by putting it out.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 264 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 281 (first symbol display device 237), the number of times of entry is up to 4 times. Suspended, the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 237, and is also shown in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved sphere number pattern is displayed for each one reserved sphere number, and the number of reserved spheres is displayed according to the displayed number of the reserved sphere number patterns. That is, when one reserved sphere number design is displayed in the small area Ds1, it is indicated that the number of reserved spheres is one sphere, and when four reserved sphere count designs are displayed, the number of reserved spheres is It shows that it is four balls. If the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entrance 264 is configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and is three times. The number may be set to the number below or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is a number on a part of the third symbol display device 281, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 237, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Further, the variable display device unit 280 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in a lighting state.

27, the description will be continued. The variable display device unit 280 is provided with a center frame 286 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 281. In the third symbol display device 281 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 310 is performed on the first symbol display device 237, while the first symbol display device 237 is displayed. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 281.

The second symbol display device 283 displays a variable display in which the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as display symbols (second symbol) are alternately turned on each time the ball passes through the second entrance 267. It is something to do. In the pachinko machine 200, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 283 is stopped with a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the first entrance 264 is activated for a predetermined time (open). Is configured). The number of times the ball has passed through the second ball entrance 267 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 237 described above and is also lit and displayed in the second symbol reserve lamp 284. Two second symbol holding lamps 284 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 281.

The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 283 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol. You may make it perform using a part of display device 281. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 284 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 281. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing through the second entrance 267 is not limited to 4 as in the case of the first entrance 264, and is not more than 3 times or not less than 5 times (for example, , 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 237, it is possible not to perform the lighting display by the second symbol reservation lamp 284.

Below the variable display device unit 280, a first ball entrance 264 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entrance 264, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 213 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is made in the main control device 310, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 237a of the first symbol display device 237. Further, the first ball entrance 264 is also one of the prize holes through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

A variable winning device 265 is disposed below the first ball entrance 264, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 265a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 200, when the lottery in the main control device 310 becomes a big hit, the LED 237a of the first symbol display device 237 is turned on so that a big hit stop symbol is obtained after a predetermined time (variation time) has passed, and The stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and the occurrence of the big hit is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 265a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 265a is closed after a predetermined time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 265a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 265a can be repeated 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of award balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

The variable winning device 265 is, specifically, a horizontally elongated rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 265a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening/closing on the front side with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. It has and. The specific winning opening 265a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower side of the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the specific winning opening 265a, and the open state and the normally closed state. The state and the state operate alternately.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 265a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 237a corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display device 237 is turned on, the specific winning opening 265a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning is performed. During the opening of the mouth 265a, when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 265a, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 265a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times as a special gaming state. It may be formed.

Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 213. It can be seen through the small window 235 (see FIG. 26).

Further, the game board 213 is provided with an outlet 266. Balls that have not entered any of the winning ports 263, 264, 265a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 266. On the game board 213, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 28, control board units 290 and 291 and a back pack unit 294 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 200. The control board unit 290 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 310), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 313), and a display control board (display control device 314). The control board unit 291 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 311), a firing control board (launch control device 312), a power supply board (power supply device 315), and a card unit connection board 316.

In the back pack unit 294, a back pack 292 forming a protective cover portion and a payout unit 293 are unitized. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

The main control device 310, the audio lamp control device 313, the display control device 314, the payout control device 311, the firing control device 312, the power supply device 315, and the card unit connection board 316 are housed in the board boxes 300 to 304, respectively. .. Each of the board boxes 300 to 304 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 300 (main controller 310) and the board box 302 (payout controller 311 and launch controller 312), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) in an unopenable manner (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 300 and 302, or if the board boxes 300 and 302 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and to. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 300 and 302 have been opened.

The payout unit 293 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 294 and opens upward, a tank rail 331 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 330 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 331. A case rail 332 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 333 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 332 and performing a payout of a ball by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 416 (see FIG. 30). ing. The tanks 330 are sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 333. A vibrator 334 for applying vibration to the tank rail 331 is attached to the tank rail 331.

Further, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 320, the firing control device 312 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 321, and the power supply device 315 is provided with a RAM erase switch 322. The state return switch 320 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 416 (see FIG. 30). The operation knob 321 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 322 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 200 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 200 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 200.

The main control unit 310 is equipped with an MPU 401 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 401 includes a ROM 402 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 401 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 402 is executed. A certain RAM 403 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 310 to the sub control device by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 311 and the voice lamp control device 313 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 310 to the sub control device in only one direction.

In the main control device 310, main processing of the pachinko machine 200 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol display device 281, and lottery of display result on the second symbol display device 283 is executed. The RAM 403 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 31, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 403 of the main control device 310 will be described. These counters and the like, in order to perform jackpot lottery, setting of the display of the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol display device 281, and lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 283, the MPU 401 of the main control device 310. Used in.

To set the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol display device 281, the first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol The stop pattern selection counter C3, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for fluctuation pattern selection are used. The second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 283, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

For example, each counter is updated at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 46). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 403. The RAM 403 is provided with a holding ball storage area including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored according to the ball entry timing.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899) and reaches 0 after reaching a maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 46).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 403 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 264. Stored in. The value of the random number to be a big hit is set by a big hit random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 402 of the main controller, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is set by the big hit random number table. When it matches the value of the random number that is a big hit, it is determined as a big hit. In addition, this jackpot random number table is divided into two types, one for low probability (period during which the probability is not changing) and one for high probability (during probability changing) with a higher probability of being a jackpot than that for low probability. The number of included jackpot random numbers is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between low probability and high probability.

The first hit type counter C2 is for determining the display mode of the first symbol display device 237 at the time of a big hit, and is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 9), and the maximum value (for example, , A counter that can take values from 0 to 9 reaches 9) and then returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the reserved ball is stored in the RAM 403 at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 264. Stored in the area.

Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the reserved sphere storage area is not a big random number, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the range, in the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 237. The corresponding display mode is the one at the time of disconnection.

On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the holding sphere storage area is a big hit, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 237 is that of the big hit. Becomes In this case, the concrete display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same reserved ball storage area.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 200 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In the first random number counter C1, the number of random number values that are a big hit at a low probability is 3, and the value "7,307,582" is stored in the low probability big hit random number table. On the other hand, the number of random number values that are a big hit at a high probability is 30, and the values are “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448. , 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892" are stored in the high probability big hit random number table.

In the present embodiment, the values of the random numbers that are jackpots stored in the low probability jackpot random number table and the values of the random numbers that are jackpots stored in the high probability jackpot random number table are duplicate values. The value of the random number that is a big hit for each is set so that it does not occur. Here, if there is a value that is always used as the value of the random number that is a big hit regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 200, that value may be input from the outside, and the big hit may be apt to be illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by changing the value of the random number to be a big hit depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 200 is in the high probability state or the low probability state), Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the value of the random number, it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 200 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-9. In the first hit type counter C2, when the value of the random number is "6, 7, 8, 9", the jackpot type is "15R definite change that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot with the maximum round number of 15 rounds. On the other hand, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "4,5", the jackpot type is "2R probability variation that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is two rounds. In the case of "big hit" and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0, 1, 2, 3", the big hit type shifts to a low probability state after the big round with a maximum round number of 15 rounds. At the same time, it is a “time saving jackpot” that is a time saving state for 100 fluctuations.

As described above, the pachinko machine 200 of the present embodiment is configured such that three types of hit types (15R certainty variation jackpot, 2R certainty variation jackpot, time saving big hit) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. Has been done.

The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop pattern at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. Stop before and after "reach out of front and back" (for example, 98, 99), and after the same reach occurs, "reach other than out of front and back" (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol, Three stop (effect) patterns of "complete disengagement" (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not reach are selected. The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 403 at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 264. Is stored.

Further, a plurality of tables (not shown) having different ranges of random number values for which stop patterns are selected are provided in the ROM 402 corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3. This is because the selection ratio of the stop pattern is changed depending on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 200 is the high probability state or the low probability state.

For example, in the high-probability state, a large table is selected such that the range of random number values corresponding to the stop pattern of "complete deviation" is 0 to 89 so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. It is easy to select "Completely missed". In this table, the "front and rear outreach" is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the "reach other than front and rear outreach" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, and it is difficult to select "rear and front outreach" or "reach other than front and rear outreach". Further, in the low probability state, a table with a narrow range of random values 0 to 79 corresponding to the “completely missed” stop pattern is selected in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 264. This makes it difficult to select “Completely off”. In this table, the range of the random number values corresponding to the stop pattern of "reach other than out-of-front/back" is as wide as 80 to 97, and "reach other than out-of-front-rear" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, since many reach displays having a long effect time can be performed, it is possible to secure a ball entry time into the first entry port 264, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 281 continues. Easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop pattern of "out-of-front-rear reach" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 421 and the display control device 314 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third display device 281. .. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 46) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). In addition, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed the second entrance (through gate) 267 on either the left or the right. Is obtained when The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. That is, when the value of the acquired second per random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-153", it is determined as a winning, and the symbol "○" as the stop symbol (second symbol) on the second symbol display device 283. Is displayed and the first entrance 264 is opened for a predetermined time. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value=0 to 250), and once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40). It is updated and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 46).

As described above, the RAM 403 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 310, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol display device 281 are performed according to the value of the counter or the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 200 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 283 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 30, the description will be continued. The RAM 403 includes, in addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 31, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 401 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 401 are stored, various flags and counters, I/O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored. The RAM 403 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 315 even after the power of the pachinko machine 200 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 403 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 403 stores the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on by elimination of power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 200 is restored to the state before the power-off based on the information stored in the RAM 403. Writing to the RAM 403 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 46) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 403 is executed by the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 45). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 401 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 452 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 401. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 44) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

The RAM 403 further includes a reserved ball number counter 403a. The hold ball number counter 403a holds the variable display (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 281) on the first symbol display device 237 based on the entry (starting winning) into the first inlet 264. This is a counter that counts the number of balls (number of waiting times) up to four times. The on-hold ball number counter 403a has an initial value set to zero, and 1 is added to the maximum value of 4 every time a ball enters the first ball entrance 264 and the number of held balls in the variable display increases. (See S1403 in FIG. 43). On the other hand, the pending ball number counter 403a is decremented by 1 each time the variable display based on the entry into the first entry port 264 (starting winning) is executed (see S1205 in FIG. 41).

The value of the hold ball number counter 403a (that is, the hold ball number) is notified to the voice lamp control device 313 by the hold ball number command (see S1406 in FIG. 43). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 310 to the voice lamp control device 313 every time the ball is inserted into the first ball entrance 264 and the reserved ball number counter 403a is incremented by one.

The voice lamp control device 313 uses the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 310 every time the hold ball number counter 403a is incremented by 1, and the value of the variable display hold ball number itself held in the main control device 310. Can be obtained. As a result, the variable display holding ball number managed by the hold ball number counter 423a of the voice lamp control device 313 deviates from the actual variable display holding ball number held in the main control device 310 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it happens, the deviation can be corrected by the next command of the number of reserved balls to be received.

The voice lamp control device 313 manages the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls, and the display holding device for notifying the display control device 314 of the number of reserved balls every time the number of reserved balls changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 314 displays the reserved sphere number pattern in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 281 based on the reserved sphere number notified by the display reserved sphere number command.

On the other hand, the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 310 to the voice lamp control device 313, together with the holding ball number, is RAM403 in accordance with the ball entry timing (starting winning timing) into the first ball entry port 264. The respective values of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired from the counter buffer are also included and notified to the voice lamp control device 313.

When the hold lamp count command is received by the voice lamp controller 313, the voice lamp controller 313 operates the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 included in the hold ball count command. From each value, the stop display mode when the corresponding variable effect based on the winning prize is performed is estimated, and the estimated stop display mode and the value of the number of reserved balls at that time indicated by the number of reserved balls Therefore, it is determined whether or not to perform a series of continuous notice effects for the variable effect that is being held at that time.

The continuous announcement effect is a type of announcement effect that suggests that the result of the lottery that accompanies the starting winning is likely to be a big hit (notice), and all the variable effects (variable display) that are held at the time of winning the prize. ), the same or related symbols are displayed on the third symbol display device 281 together with the variation effect. For example, over all the pending variable effects, by displaying the "bubble" image on the third symbol display device 281 immediately after the stop display of the variable effects, the jackpot symbol does not appear as the stop symbol of the variable effects. Even if the jackpot is not a big hit, the player continuously sees the "bubble" images immediately after the fluctuation stops over a plurality of fluctuation displays, so that the jackpot is given to the player after the continuous notice production is finished. The obtained expectation can be given and the player can be motivated to continue the game.

In addition, "Egg" is displayed during the first fluctuation effect, "Chick" is displayed during the second fluctuation effect, "Chick" is displayed during the third fluctuation effect, and during the fourth fluctuation effect. Display "chicken group" (however, if the number of holding balls at the time the continuous notice effect is set is 3 or less, display "chicken group" in the last fluctuating effect for which continuous notice effect is set) As a result, the symbol displayed by the continuous notice effect is changed gradually (step up) every time the variable effect is performed on the third symbol display device 281, so that the player gradually changes the symbol. By seeing, when the chicken group is displayed, the player can be expected to be a big hit in the variation effect in which the chicken group is displayed.

In addition, when the variation effect for which the continuous notice effect is set is 3, the continuous notice effect is performed in the order of "egg" → "chick" → "chicken group", and the variation effect for which the continuous notice effect is set is 2. In some cases, the continuous notice effect is performed in the order of “egg”→“chicken group”, and when the variable effect in which the continuous notice effect is set is 1, “chicken group” is suddenly displayed. In this way, when the number of variable effects for which the continuous notice effect is set is 3 or less, the symbols in the middle are skipped and the chicken group is displayed suddenly, so that the player can change the suddenly displayed chicken group. Looking at it, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that is a big hit in the variation effect in which the chicken group is displayed.

In the pachinko machine 200, in the main controller 310, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired at the time of winning the start prize are controlled by the voice lamp controller by the reserve ball number command. 313, and the voice lamp control device 313 determines the start of the continuous notice effect and sets the mode of the continuous notice effect on the basis of the values of the various counters and the values of the number of hold balls notified by the hold number command. To do. As a result, the processing in the main control device 310 can be concentrated on the lottery processing, which is the most important processing of the pachinko machine 200, that is, the game state to be transitioned based on the entrance into the first entrance 264. On the other hand, if the MPU 421 having a high processing capability is used for the voice lamp control device 313, the execution condition of the continuous announcement effect can be set in various modes.

Further, the number of reserved balls and the values of various counters can be transmitted from main controller 310 to voice lamp controller 313 with one reserved ball number command. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 313, it is possible to accurately grasp the correspondence between the values of the various counters acquired along with the start winning and the number of reserved balls at the time when the start winning is detected. When the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, the number of reserved balls to which the continuous announcement effect is added can be accurately grasped. Therefore, compared with the case where the number of holding balls and the values of various counters are transmitted from main controller 310 to voice lamp controller 313 by another command, control by voice lamp controller 313 is facilitated. be able to.

An input/output port 405 is connected to the MPU 401 of the main controller 310 via a bus line 404 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 405 has a payout control device 311, a voice lamp control device 313, a first symbol display device 237, a second symbol display device 283, a second symbol holding lamp 284, and a lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 265a. Is connected to a solenoid 409 including a large opening solenoid for opening/closing driving forward and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 401 sends various command and control signals to them via an input/output port 405. To send.

Further, the input/output port 405 is connected with various switches 408 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown), and a RAM erase switch circuit 453 described later provided in the power supply device 315, and the MPU 401 is output from the various switches 408. Various processing is executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 453.

The payout control device 311 drives the payout motor 416 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 411, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 412 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 411, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 413 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 413 of the payout control device 311 is, like the RAM 403 of the main control device 310, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 411 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 411 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O, and the like are stored in a work area (work area). The RAM 413 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 315 and data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 200 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 413 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 401 of the main control device 310, the NMI terminal of the MPU 411 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 452 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input. When input to the MPU 411, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 44) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 415 is connected to the MPU 411 of the payout control device 311 via a bus line 414 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 310, the payout motor 416, the firing controller 312, etc. are connected to the input/output port 415. Although not shown, the payout control device 311 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 311, but not to the main control device 310.

The firing control device 312 controls the ball firing unit 312a so that when the main control device 310 issues an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 312a has a launch strength corresponding to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 251. The ball firing unit 312a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 251a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 251, and the stop switch 251b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is not operated. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of 251 and a ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 251.

The voice lamp control device 313 outputs voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 426, outputs and turns off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 229 to 233 and the display lamp 234), and produces a variation (variation). Display) and continuous advance notice effects such as setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 281 performed by the display control device 314 are controlled. The MPU 421, which is a computing device, has a ROM 422 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 421, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 423 that is used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 425 is connected to the MPU 421 of the audio lamp control device 313 via a bus line 424 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main controller 310, a display controller 314, a voice output device 426, a lamp display device 427, a vibration sensor 428, a frame button 222, etc. are connected to the input/output port 425, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 313 monitors the input from the frame button 222, and when the frame button 222 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 426 and the lamp display device 427 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 314 is instructed. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image according to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 281, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 314. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

Further, the vibration sensor 428 is attached to the back surface of the game board 213. In the pachinko machine 200, since the ball entering the ball entrance is an important factor that determines the game state, the flow of the ball is changed by vibration to prevent the ball from intentionally entering the ball entrance. There is a need. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 428 that the pachinko machine 200 is vibrated by a player or the like, an error command for notifying the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 314. In addition, the voice lamp control device 313 determines an error in accordance with the command from the main control device 310 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 313, and issues an error command including the error type. It is transmitted to the display control device 314. In the display control device 314, control for displaying an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 281 without delay is performed.

The RAM 423 of the voice lamp control device 313 is provided with at least a reserved ball number counter 423a. The holding ball number counter 423a is a variable effect (variation display) performed on the first symbol display device 237 (and the third symbol display device 281), like the holding ball number counter 403a of the main control device 310. It is a counter that counts the number of balls (waiting number) reserved for the variable effect suspended in the control device 310 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 313 cannot directly access the main control device 310 to acquire the value of the pending ball number counter 403a stored in the RAM 403 of the main control device 310. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 313 counts the number of reserved balls based on the command transmitted from the main control device 310, and the reserved ball number counter 423a manages the number of reserved balls.

Specifically, when the voice lamp control device 313 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 310 when the hold ball number of the variable display is added by entering the first ball entrance 264. The value of the holding ball number counter 403a of the main control device 310 (that is, the variable display holding ball number held in the main control device 310) included in the holding ball number command is stored in the holding ball number counter 423a ( (See S2007 in FIG. 50).

Further, the voice lamp control device 313 receives the variation pattern command which is the instruction command of the variation display from the main control device 310, and when the variation display mode in the third symbol display device 281 is set in accordance with the receipt, The value of the sphere counter 423a is decremented by 1 (see S2105 in FIG. 51). In this way, the value of the reserved ball number counter 423a is updated according to the command transmitted from the main control device 310, so that the value can be updated in synchronization with the reserved ball number counter 403a of the main control device 310. ..

The value of the reserved ball number counter 423a is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 281. That is, the voice lamp control device 313 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the holding ball number counter 423a in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, or the holding ball number counter 423a in response to receiving the variation pattern command. At the timing of updating the value of, the display reservation device 314 sends a display reservation device 314 command in order to notify the display control device 314 of the value of the stored or updated reservation ball counter 423a.

In the display control device 314, when receiving this display holding sphere number command, the value of the holding sphere number indicated by the command, that is, the holding sphere number symbol for the value of the holding sphere number counter 423a of the voice lamp control device 313 is displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so as to be displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 281 (see S2751 of FIG. 61A). As described above, the value of the hold ball number counter 423a is changed in synchronization with the hold counter 403a of the main control device 310. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 281 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the holding counter 403a of the main control device 310. Therefore, the third symbol display device 281 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

The RAM 423 also indicates a command storage area (not shown) in which a command received from the main control device 310 is temporarily stored until a process corresponding to the command is performed, and whether or not variable display should be started. It has a fluctuation start flag (not shown) and the like. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 50) of the voice lamp processing device 313 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination processing causes The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed. The fluctuation start flag is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 310 is received (see S2002 in FIG. 50), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set in the third symbol display device 281. (See S2102 in FIG. 51).

The display control device 314 is connected to the voice lamp control device 313 and the third symbol display device 281, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 313, a variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 281 (variation). (Production) and continuous notice production are controlled. Details of the display control device 314 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 315 is provided with a power supply unit 451 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 200, a power failure monitoring circuit 452 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 322 (see FIG. 28). And an erase switch circuit 453. The power supply unit 451 is a device that supplies an operating voltage required for each of the control devices 310 to 314 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline thereof, the power supply unit 451 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 408, solenoids such as solenoid 409, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 310 to 314 as necessary.

The power failure monitoring circuit 452 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 401 of the main control device 310 and the MPU 411 of the payout control device 311 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 452 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 451, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 310 and the payout control device 311. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 310 and the payout controller 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. It should be noted that the power supply unit 451 outputs the voltage of 5 V, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 310 and the payout controller 311 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 44).

The RAM erase switch circuit 453 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main control device 310 when the RAM erase switch 322 (see FIG. 28) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 200 is powered on, the main control device 310 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 311 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 311.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, an electrical configuration of the display control device 314 will be described. FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 314. The display control device 314 includes an MPU 431, a work RAM 433, a character ROM 434, a resident video RAM 435, a normal video RAM 436, an image controller 437, an input port 438, an output port 439, and bus lines 440 and 441. have.

The input side of the input port 438 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 313, and the output side of the input port 438 is connected to the MPU 431, the work RAM 433, the character ROM 434, and the image controller 437 via the bus line 440. .. The resident video RAM 435 and the normal video RAM 436 are connected to the image controller 437, and the output port 439 is connected via the bus line 441. Further, the third symbol display device 281 is connected to the output side of the output port 439.

It should be noted that the pachinko machine 200 is a model having the same specifications as the symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 281 even if it is a different model having a different winning probability for the jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot. Therefore, the display control device 314 is made into a common component to reduce the cost.

Hereinafter, the MPU 431, the character ROM 434, the image controller 437, the resident video RAM 435, and the normal video RAM 436 will be described first, and then the work RAM 433 will be described.

First, the MPU 431 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 281 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 313. The MPU 431 incorporates an instruction pointer 431a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 431a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure. The same applies hereinafter) to the MPU 431, a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 315. When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 431a. Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 431. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 431a is incremented by one. When the MPU 431 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 431a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 431 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM (for example, a conventional game machine) (for example, The ROM 22 of Patent Document 1 described above is not provided and stored, but is stored in the character ROM 434 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

As described above, the character ROM 434 is composed of the NAND flash memory 434a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. Therefore, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. On the other hand, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 314 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged in a plurality of pages consecutively, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified to read the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow reading speed, if the MPU 431 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 434 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the commands constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 431, the processing performance of the display control device 314 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 431 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 434a of the character ROM 434 is transferred to the work RAM 433 provided for temporary storage of various data. To store. Then, the MPU 431 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 433. The work RAM 433 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 431 can read out the instructions that form the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 314, and by using the third symbol display device 281, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 434, the image controller 437, the resident video RAM 435, and the normal video RAM 436 are all the character ROM 187, the image controller 188, and the resident video RAM 189 provided in the display control device 314 of the slot machine 10 according to the first embodiment. It has the same configuration or function as the normal video RAM 190.

That is, the character ROM 434 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 431 and the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 281, as described above, and is connected to the MPU 431 via the bus line 440. ing. The MPU 431 directly accesses the character ROM 434 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 440, and executes the control program stored in the first program storage area 434d1 and the second program storage area 431a1 of the character ROM 434, which will be described later, as a program of the work RAM 433. The data is transferred to the storage area 433a. An image controller 437 is also connected to the bus line 440, and the image controller 437 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 434a2 of the character ROM 434, which will be described later, to a resident video RAM 435 connected to the image controller 437. Transfer to the normal video RAM 436.

The character ROM 434 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 434a, a ROM controller 434b, a buffer RAM 434c, and a NOR ROM 434d.

The NAND flash memory 434a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 434, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 431 and fixed value data for driving the upper lamp 63 and the like. It has at least a second program storage area 431a1 and a character storage area 434a2 for storing data of an image (character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 434 can be easily increased in capacity. Thereby, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 434a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 434a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, in the NAND flash memory 434a, a large amount of image data can be stored in the character storage area 434a2, and further, a control program and fixed value data can be stored in the second program storage area 431a1. In this way, the control program and the fixed value data are displayed on the third symbol display device 281 without storing the special program ROM (for example, the ROM 22 of the above-mentioned Patent Document 1) provided like the conventional game machine. Since the data of the image to be displayed can be stored in the character ROM 434 provided for storing, the number of parts in the display control device 314 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be reduced. Can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 434b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 434, and, for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 431 or the image controller 437 via the bus line 440, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 434a or the like. Is read out and output to the MPU 431 or the image controller 437 via the bus line 440.

Here, due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 434a has a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 434b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 434a, and reads/writes data to/from the NAND flash memory 434a while avoiding defective data blocks. Data address conversion (for example, see Patent Document 1) is executed.

The ROM controller 434b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 434a including the error bit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 431 from performing processing and the image controller 437 from generating various images.

Further, since the ROM controller 434b analyzes a defective data block of the NAND flash memory 434a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 431 and the image controller 437 cause the defective data blocks of different NAND flash memories 434a to differ. The character ROM 434 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 434a is used as the character ROM 434, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 434 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 434c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 434a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 434 is designated from the MPU 431 or the image controller 437 via the bus line 440, the ROM controller 434b includes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. Data is set in the buffer RAM 434c. If not set, one page (eg, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 434a (or NOR ROM 434d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 434c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 434b performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 431 or the image controller 437 via the bus line 440.

The buffer RAM 434c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 434a can be set per bank. Then, the ROM controller 434b reads the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 431 from one bank and outputs the data to the MPU 431, and the address corresponding to the address designated next by the MPU 431 for the other bank. The process of transferring and setting one page of data including data from the NAND flash memory 187a can be performed in parallel. As a result, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 434 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 434d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 434, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 434a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 434a. ) Is configured. In the NOR ROM 434d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 434, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 431a1 of the NAND flash memory 434a, specifically, the MPU 431 first releases the system reset. A first program storage area 434d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 314 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 281 can be executed, and the MPU 431 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. This allows the display control device 314 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 434d1 stores a predetermined number of instructions (for example, 1024 word (1 word=2 bytes) instructions from the instruction to be first processed by the MPU 431 after releasing the system reset in the boot program. ..

When the system reset is released, the MPU 431 sets the value of the instruction pointer 431a to "0000H" by hardware and also designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 431a to the bus line 440. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 434b of the character ROM 434 detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the bus line 440, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 434d1 of the NOR ROM 434d in the buffer RAM 434c. , And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 431.

When the MPU 431 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 434, the MPU 431 executes various processes in accordance with the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 431a by 1, and adds the address indicated by the instruction pointer 431a to the bus line 440. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 434b of the character ROM 434, while the address designated by the bus line 440 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 434d, selects from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 434c from the NOR ROM 434d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 434c and output to the MPU 431.

Here, in the present embodiment, not all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 434a, but a predetermined number of commands from the first command to be processed by the MPU 431 after the system reset is released in the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 434d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 434a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that, in reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the address designation to the data output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 434a, the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 431 via the bus line 440 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 431 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 434 must read the data for one page including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 434a and set it in the buffer RAM 434c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 434a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it to the buffer RAM 434c. It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 431, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 281 in the display control device 314 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 431 in the boot program after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 434d. By doing so, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 431 via the bus line 440 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 434 immediately causes the boot program stored in the first program storage area 434d1 of the NOR ROM 434d to be stored in the buffer RAM 434c. , And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 431. Therefore, the MPU 431 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, and the MPU 431 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 434 composed of the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 281 in the display control device 314 can be immediately started.

Now, the boot program excludes a part of the control program stored in the second program storage area 431a1 of the NAND flash memory 434a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 434d1 of the NOR ROM 434d. A control program and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, an additional data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in a predetermined amount in the program storage area 433a or the data table storage area 433b of the work RAM 433. It is programmed to transfer. Then, the MPU 431 first transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 431a1 to the program storage area 433a in accordance with the boot program read from the first program storage area 434d1 after the system reset is released, and stores the control program. To do.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 434d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 431a1 to the program storage area 433a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 431a in the program storage area 433a is transferred. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 431 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 431a1 to the program storage area 433a by a predetermined amount after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 431a causes the first predetermined storage area of the program storage area 433a to move. It is set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 431a1 is stored in the program storage area 433a, the MPU 431 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 433a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 431 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 434a having the second program storage area 431a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 433 having the program storage area 433a and fetches the instruction. Then, various kinds of processing will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 433 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 434 configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a low read speed, the MPU 431 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 431a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 434d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 434d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 431a1 to the program storage area 433a of the work RAM 433 by a predetermined amount. It is programmed so as to be included, and is programmed so that the instruction pointer 431a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 433a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 431 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 431a1 to the program storage area 433a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 434d1 and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 433a and the fixed value data (for example, display data table, additional data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are all A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 431a1 to the program storage area 433a or the data table storage area 433b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 431a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 433a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initialization process (see S2202 in FIG. 52) executed after the boot process (see S2201 in FIG. 52) stored in the program storage area 433a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 431 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 431a1 to the program storage area 433a or the data table storage area 433b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 431, the instruction pointer 431a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 431 is transferred to the program storage area 433a without referring to the NAND flash memory 434a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 434 configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a low read speed, the control program can be transferred to the program storage area 433a of the work RAM 433 after the system reset is released. Since the MPU 431 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls, the display control device 314 can maintain high processing performance and the third symbol display device. It is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using 281.

As described above, the NOR ROM 434d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 431 after releasing the system reset, and the remaining boot programs are stored as follows. Even if stored in the second program storage area 187a2 of the NAND flash memory 434a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 431a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 433a. Therefore, the character ROM 434 can start up the MPU 431 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 434d having an extremely small capacity, and thus the cost increase of the character ROM 434 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

The image controller 437 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 281 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 437 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 39) to be described later transmitted from the MPU 431, and selects one frame of the first frame buffer 436b and the second frame buffer 436c to be described later. While expanding the image drawn in the buffer, by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 281, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. .. The image controller 437 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame for the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 281 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 437 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 431 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 431 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 431 executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 53) and instructs the image controller 437 to draw the image for the next one frame. By this instruction, the image controller 437 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 281.

In this way, the MPU 431 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 437 and gives the image controller 437 a drawing instruction, so that the image controller 437 draws and displays the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 431 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 437 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process or the display process has not been completed, so that the drawing of a new image may be started during the drawing of an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer that stores the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 437 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 431 or the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Note that the image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 435 and the normal video RAM 436. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 based on an instruction from the MPU 431 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a slower reading speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 314, the MPU 431 instructs the image controller 437 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 after the power is turned on. Is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 435 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the initialization process, the image controller 437 can perform the image drawing process while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 435. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 435, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 434 composed of the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. , The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 281.

In particular, the resident video RAM 435 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main controller 310 or the display controller 314. Even if the character ROM 434 is configured by the NAND flash memory 434a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

In addition, when the display control device 314 draws an image using image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435, the display control device 314 needs to draw from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 431 is configured to instruct the image controller 437 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 436 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 434a with a slow reading speed is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 434 constituted by, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 281. it can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 436 as well, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 435, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 435. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 435 can be suppressed.

Like the buffer RAM 188a provided in the image controller 188 in the first embodiment, the image controller 437 has a buffer RAM 437a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 434a. There is.

The MPU 431 gives an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 437 based on a transfer instruction or transfer data information of a drawing list, and the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 434 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 435 and the normal video RAM 436 is transferred), and the start of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 435 or normal video RAM 436) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 437 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 435 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 437a according to this transfer instruction in accordance with various information. The image data stored in the RAM is transferred to the resident RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred to the storage source end address.

Thereby, the image data read from the character ROM 434 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 437a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 437a to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 in a short time. You can Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436, the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 435 and the normal video RAM 436 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, these video RAMs 435 and 436 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image drawing and the image drawing can be completed by the required time. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 281 from being delayed.

The image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 437a to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 by the image controller 437. The unused period for the display process on the device 281 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 435 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 434 is maintained without being overwritten during power-on, similarly to the display control device 81 in the first embodiment. A time main image area 435a, a back image area 435c, a character symbol area 435e, an error message image area 435f are provided, and at the same time, a power-on variation image area 435b and a third symbol area 435d are provided.

The power-on main image area 435a is similar to the power-on main image area 189a of the first embodiment, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 while the display control device 314 is performing the initialization process at power-on. This is an area for storing data corresponding to the main image at power-on to be displayed. Further, in the power-on fluctuation image area 435b, a game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and the entry into the first entrance 164 is detected. This is an area for storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the lottery result in the main control device 310 by the fluctuation effect when it is performed.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 451 is started, the MPU 431 first transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 434 to the power-on main image area 435a. Then, the transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 437 (see S2203 and S2204 in FIG. 52).

Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 shows that the display control device 314, immediately after turning on the power, turns on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 281 while transferring the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 435 from the character ROM 434. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 314 first transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 434 to the power-on main image area 435a, and then the resident video RAM 435. The remaining image data to be stored in the RAM is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 314 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 435a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

At this time, when the display variation pattern command, which is the variation start instruction command, is received from the voice lamp control device 313, the display control device 314 displays the power-on main image on the display screen as shown in FIG. The power-on stop image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position toward the screen, and the power-on stop of the "x" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol, as shown in FIG. 33(c). The image and the image are displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 310 is judged from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command from the voice lamp control device 313, and in the case of a "big hit", FIG. 33(b). The image shown in (3) is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped, and when it is “out”, the image shown in FIG. 33C is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped.

The MPU 431 used the image data stored in the power-on main image area 435a for the image controller 437 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 was transferred to the resident video RAM 435. Instruct to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 435, the player and persons involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 281. it can. Therefore, the display control device 314 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 281. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 at the time of power-on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 435. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without any fear that the operation is stopped.

Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 281, so that the third symbol display device 281 starts its operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It is possible to immediately check that the operation check efficiency is deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 434.

Further, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and a ball is detected at the first entrance ball 264, a fluctuation image area at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 435b, and the images shown in FIGS. 33(b) and 33(c) are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 281. As described above, since the MPU 431 instructs the image controller 437, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect by using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple change effect even while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 435b, so power-on. When an entry ball is detected in the first entrance ball 264 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, it is possible to immediately display the corresponding variation effect on the third symbol display device 281. it can.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are stored in the power-on main image area 435a and the power-on fluctuation image area 435b of the resident video RAM 435, a momentary power failure occurs. If the data resident in the resident video RAM 435 remains when the power failure occurs, the power supply is performed using the image data resident in the power-on main image area 435a and the power-on fluctuation image area 435b when the power is restored. It is possible to immediately display the turning-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image on the third symbol display device 281.

32, the description will be continued. The rear surface image area 435c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear surface image displayed on the third symbol display device 281 similarly to the rear surface image area 189b of the first embodiment. Here, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 435c in the back image will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. 34 and 35 are explanatory diagrams for explaining three types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 for each back image, and FIG. Is for the back surface A corresponding to the “town stage”, FIG. 34(b) is for the back surface B corresponding to the “empty stage”, and FIG. 35 is for the back surface C corresponding to the “island stage”. Are shown respectively.

Of the rear faces A to C, the rear face images corresponding to the rear faces A and B are, as shown in FIG. 34, images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 281. It is prepared in the ROM 434. The image controller 437 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 while horizontally scrolling the image from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as “scrolling images”) are configured such that the back images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 as a display area, and then the image between the positions a and a′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 as a display region, the third symbol display device 281 is smoothly displayed. The back image is scrolled and displayed with such a connection.

When the frame button 222 is operated by the player to change the stage, the MPU 431 first sets a position between the position a and the position a′ as the initial position of the display area, and the image at the initial position is the third symbol display device. The image controller 437 is controlled so as to be displayed at 281. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 437 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and further the display is performed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 437 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 281 as the image from the position a to the position a′. Therefore, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection on the third symbol display device 281 so as to flow toward the left.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 35, the rear surface image on the rear surface C is displayed on the third display in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(a)→... It is displayed on the device 281. Specifically, the back surface C is an image of a mountain rising over the island, an image of a sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island, with the displayed position fixed, the third pattern. It is displayed on the display device 281. On the other hand, the color tone of the image of the sky that spreads over the mountains changes over time.

When the stage is changed to the “island stage” by the player's operation of the frame button 222, the rear surface image shown in FIG. 35(a) is displayed as the initial rear surface image of the rear surface C. In the rear image shown in FIG. 35(a), an orange sky indicating a morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 35(b) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 35B, a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black with the lapse of time, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, the rear image shown in FIG. 35(c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 35C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and then changes to orange. Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. 35(a) is returned to and the back images of FIGS. 35(a) to 35(c) are displayed again on the third symbol display device 281.

Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 435c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 34A, the rear surface A corresponding to the town stage which is the initial stage has the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 435. It is stored in the image area 435c. Usually, since the game is often played without changing the stage while the town stage, which is the initial stage, is displayed, all the image data of the back face A corresponding to the town stage that is frequently displayed is displayed in the back image area. By making the character ROM 434 resident, the number of times of data access to the character ROM 434 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 314 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the rear surface B corresponding to the empty stage, as shown in FIG. 34B, has only a partial area of the rear surface, that is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b, the resident video RAM 435. In the back image area 435c. Also, the back surface C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 35(a), and the image data corresponding to the back images between FIGS. 35(a) and 35(b) excluding FIG. Is stored in the rear-side image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 during the startup processing of the above, and is made resident.

Here, since the operation of the frame button 222 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the player's intention, even if the frame button 222 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to change the back image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data of all the back images resident in the resident video RAM 435. A large capacity RAM must be used, which may increase the cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 200, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a′ or the range of FIGS. 35(a) to (b). The image data corresponding to the image between the positions a and b including the initial position or the image between FIGS. 35(a) and 35(b) is fixed and stored in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. Therefore, even if the character ROM 434 is configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow reading speed, when the stage is changed at any timing by the operation of the frame button 222 by the player, the rear image area of the resident video RAM 435 is displayed. By using the image data resident in 435c, the initial position of the back surface B or the back surface C is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and is also displayed while scrolling or changing the color tone over time. be able to. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the back surface B and the back surface C, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 435 and suppress an increase in cost.

After the image at the initial position is displayed, the rear surface B scrolls the range from the position a to the position b from left to right by using the image data resident in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b′ to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal RAM 436 while the operation is being performed. As a result, the image data from the position b′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 436 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 436 without delay, the range from the position b′ to the position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 281.

Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the rear surface C, the images of FIGS. 35( a) and (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 435 c of the resident video RAM 435. The ranges in FIGS. 35A and 35B are set so that the transfer from the character ROM 434 to the normal RAM 436 can be completed while the character ROM 434 is in progress. As a result, while displaying the images of FIGS. 35A to 35B, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 35B to 35C and FIGS. Since the image data shown in FIGS. 35(a) and 35(b) is displayed by using the image data resident in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, the images are stored in the normal video RAM 436 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the back image, the images of FIGS. 35(b) to (c) and FIGS. 35(c) to (a) can be sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 281 with the passage of time. it can.

The image data stored in the normal video RAM 436 on the rear surface B and the rear surface C is stored in a sub-image dedicated sub area provided in the image storage area 436a (see FIG. 32) of the normal video RAM 436. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, and thus the back image can be displayed reliably.

In the rear surface B, the image data stored in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 436 correspond to the image corresponding to the image between the position b′ and the position b. Data is stored redundantly. Then, by the control of the image controller 437 by the MPU 431, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 by using the image data stored in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b′ on the third symbol display device 281 by using the image data stored in the RAM 436, the back image is scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 281 with a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 431 controls the image controller 437 so that the image between the positions c and d is displayed as the display area on the third symbol display device 281 by using the image data of the normal video RAM 436, and then, The MPU 431 controls the image controller 437 so that the image between the position a and the position a′ is displayed as the display area on the third symbol display device 281 by using the image data of the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. To do. As a result, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection on the third symbol display device 281 so as to flow toward the left.

32, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 435d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281. That is, in the third symbol area 435, the image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 29) with the numbers “0” to “9” being the third symbols are resident. As a result, when performing the variation effect on the third symbol display device 281, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 187 one by one, so even if the NAND flash memory 187a is used for the character ROM 187, the third symbol display device 281 can be used. The variation production can be started quickly. Therefore, even after the entry into the first entry slot 264 occurs, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 281 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 237. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

Further, in the third symbol area 435d, as the main symbols to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, the main symbols composed of the rear symbols such as a wooden box, the rear symbols and the planer, the furoshiki, the helmet character, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even after a lapse of a predetermined time after one variable effect is stopped. To be As a result, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, the main symbol without a number as the third symbol is displayed in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 200 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 281.

The character symbol area 435e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 281 as in the first embodiment. In this pachinko machine 200, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and display control is performed by resident data corresponding to these characters in the character symbol area 435e. When changing the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the main controller 313, the device 314 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 434, but preliminarily stores it in the character symbol area 435e of the resident video RAM 435. By reading out the resident image data, the image controller 437 can draw a predetermined image. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 434, the character pattern can be immediately changed even if the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 434.

Like the error message image area 189e of the first embodiment, the error message image area 435f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 200. In the pachinko machine 200, when the voice lamp control device 313 detects vibration from the output of the vibration sensor 428 attached to the back surface of the game board 213, the voice lamp control device 313 displays the occurrence of a vibration error by an error command display control device. Notify 314. Further, even when the voice lamp control device 313 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 313 notifies the display control device 314 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. Then, when the display control device 314 receives the error command, it is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 281.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoints of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 200, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is previously resident in the error message image area 435f, the display control device 314 causes the error message of the resident video RAM 435 to be based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in advance in the image area 435f, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 437. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 435, even if the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 434, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

Like the normal video RAM 190 of the first embodiment, the normal video RAM 436 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and the image storage area 436a, the first frame buffer 436b, and the second frame buffer 436c. Is provided at least.

The image storage area 436a is an area for storing image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 281. The image storage area 436a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435, the MPU 431 stores the image data necessary for subsequent image drawing in the sub area provided in the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436 from the character ROM 434. , The image controller 437 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area in which the image data is stored. As a result, the image controller 437 reads the image data designated by the MPU 431 from the character ROM 434, and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 436a via the buffer RAM 437a.

The image data transfer instruction is performed by the MPU 431 including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list instructing the image controller 437 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 431 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction by simply transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 437, and thus the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 436b and the second frame buffer 436c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281. The image controller 437 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 431 to either one of the first frame buffer 436b and the second frame buffer 436c, thereby writing the one-frame image in the frame buffer. While developing the image, while developing the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for the one frame previously developed is read from the other frame buffer, and together with the drive signal, to the third symbol display device 281. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 281 executes the process of displaying the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing the first frame buffer 436b and the second frame buffer 436c as the frame buffers, the image controller 437 develops the image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers and at the same time. It is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 281.

Then, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading out the image information for one frame to display the image on the third pattern display device 281 are the drawing processing of the image for one frame. The MPU 431 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 436b or the second frame buffer 436c every 20 milliseconds to complete.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 436b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 436c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame, thereby When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 436c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 436b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 436b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 436c. R.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 436b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 436c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 436b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 436c. It After that, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 436b or the second frame buffer 436c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, the display processing of the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image of one frame.

The work RAM 433 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 434, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 431. Composed. The work RAM 433 includes a program storage area 433a, a data table storage area 433b, a simple image display flag 433c, a display data table buffer 433d, an additional data table buffer 433e, a transfer data table buffer 433f, a pointer 433g, a drawing list area 433h, a clock counter. 433i, a stored image discrimination flag 433j, and a drawing target buffer flag 433k.

The program storage area 433a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 431. When the system reset is released, the MPU 431 reads the control program from the character ROM 434, transfers it to the work RAM 433, and stores it in the program storage area 433a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 433a, the MPU 431 subsequently executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 433a. As described above, since the work RAM 433 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 434 configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow read speed, the display control device 314 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 281. By using, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 433b is a display data table in which the display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 are described with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 310, and the main control. For the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in addition to one effect based on the command from the device 310, an additional data table describing the display content to be displayed with the passage of time, and the display data table are displayed. This is an area for storing transfer data information of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 435 among the image data used in one rendering and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 434a of the character ROM 434, and are stored according to the boot program executed by the MPU 431 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 434 to the work RAM 433 and stored in the program storage area 433a. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 433b, the MPU 431 thereafter executes various controls using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 433b. As described above, since the work RAM 433 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 434 configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 314 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device. It is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using 281.

Hereinafter, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281 based on a command from the main control device 310, and for example, a variable effect and a demonstration effect. Display data tables corresponding to the fixed display effect and the restart effect are prepared.

As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 when the next variation effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect was stopped. This is a presentation effect, and the third symbol, which is the main symbol to which the numbers “0” to “9” are not added, is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, a player or a person related to the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 200 is not playing a game.

Further, the final display effect is the third symbol display device when the stop symbol is finalized by receiving the final command (display final command) from the main control device 310 via the voice lamp control device 313 after the variable effect. It is an effect displayed in 281. For example, when the stop symbol is a detached symbol, an effect of emphasizing the detachment is performed, and when the stop symbol is one of 15R probability jackpot, 15R normal jackpot and 2R probability variation jackpot, each jackpot is highlighted. The performance is performed. By visually recognizing the finalized display effect, the player can easily determine the game value given by the content of the stop symbol.

Further, the restart effect vibrates the third symbol when the confirmation command transmitted from the main control device 310 is not received even after a lapse of a predetermined time after the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variable effect. This is an effect of displaying the image on the third symbol display device 281. In the third symbol display device 281, the player visually recognizes that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the variation of the third symbol is stopped and displayed, and that the stopped symbol is not fixed at that time. Can be recognized.

The data table storage area 433b stores one display data table each corresponding to the demonstration effect, the fixed display effect, and the restart effect. Further, as for the variation display data table which is the display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set, one table for one variation effect pattern, that is, 32 tables in total are prepared.

Further, in the variation display data table, when the variation effect pattern instructed by the main control device 310 via the voice lamp control device 313 and the stop design to be displayed at the time of the stop display of the variation effect do not match, for example, the variation A display pattern table for special variation is also provided, which is used when the main control device 310 gives an instruction for a stop symbol when the effect pattern is a variation effect pattern for winning. This special variation causes the third symbol to be variably displayed at high speed until the confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 310 via the voice lamp control device 313 is received, and the confirmation command is received. In accordance with the above, a special stop symbol (for example, a symbol displayed as “3” “4” “1” from the left column in order) is fixed as a stop symbol.

When the variation effect pattern instructed by the main control apparatus 310 via the voice lamp control apparatus 313 does not match the stop design to be displayed when the variation effect is stopped and displayed, the display control apparatus 314 executes the line in the main control apparatus 310. There is a possibility that it is not possible to correctly reflect the result of the drawn lottery and perform the variable effect and the fixed display effect. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 200, the special variation effect is performed in such a case, and after the variation display, the special stop symbol indicating the special deviation is definitely displayed on the third symbol display device 281, so the main control device Even if the result of the lottery in 310 is off, it is possible to prevent the third symbol display device 281 from accidentally performing the jackpot confirmed display effect. Even if the special stop symbol is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 281, if the lottery result in the main control device 310 is a big hit, the gaming state in the actual pachinko machine 200 shifts to the special gaming state, so the game The player can continue playing the game without anxiety. Furthermore, by making the confirmation display a special stop design, it is possible to suggest to the player that the pachinko machine 200 may be in the jackpot state even if the confirmation display is off. Even if the confirmation display is off, the pachinko machine 200 is in a big hit state, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display data table for change in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

For the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third pattern display device 281 such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 281 which should display the sprite. The magnifying power is information for designating a magnifying power with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnifying power. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for identifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

In the variation table display data table, one back image, nine third designs (design 1, design 2,...) As the drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, in that image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect expressing light insertion and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the rear surface image, the display position is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 281, the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information, as time passes. Since the display data table for change is fixed, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined. This back surface type displays one of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (any one of the “town stage”, the “empty stage”, and the “island stage”) selected by the player, or the back surface A to Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, the back surface type also includes information that specifies which back surface image to display when specifying that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed.

When it is specified by this back surface type to display any of the back surfaces A to C, the MPU 431 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back surfaces A to C as a drawing target. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface image to be displayed is specified based on the back surface type.

In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the backside type is defined as the drawing content of the backside image in the display data table, but instead of this, the backside type and the range of the backside image corresponding to the backside type The position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position. In this case, the MPU 431 identifies the range of the back surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time after the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from when the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 281) is started. In this case, the MPU 431 is displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 281) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 281) indicated by the position information is started.

Furthermore, the position information is, in accordance with the back surface type, drawing of an image based on the information indicating the time elapsed after the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the display database (or the third symbol display device 281). Display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back surface type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time after the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 281) is started. Information indicating whether or not) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect of the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 310 via the voice lamp control device 313. Enter the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 310.

Since a unique number is attached to each of the third symbols, the variation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 310 are the third symbols. It is possible to easily identify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information by managing the number attached to the symbol and displaying the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined symbol is changed from the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect that is currently performed, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. The time is set to be displayed. While the third symbol is displayed at high speed, since the third symbol is invisible to the player, during that time, the symbol offset information of the variable effect stop symbol that was previously performed is displayed. Even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted by switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect that is being performed this time, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" that is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 36) is the data table. The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect to be defined in the display data table is Have been described.

The MPU 431 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the voice lamp control device 313, reads it from the data table storage area 433b, and displays it in a work RAM 433 described later. The data is stored in the data table buffer 433d and a pointer 433g, which will be described later, is initialized to 0. Then, the pointer 433g is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 433g in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433d, By specifying the image content to be drawn, creating a drawing list (see FIG. 39) described later, and sending the drawing list to the image controller 437, the drawing instruction of the image is performed. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 433g, and the image as specified by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 200, in the display control device 314, the program to be executed by the MPU 431 is not changed in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the voice lamp control device 313. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 433d.

Here, like the conventional pachinko machine, when it is configured to activate the program executed by the MPU 431 every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is changed, with the diversification of the effect image. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of complicated and enormous programs, the processing capability of the display control device 314 is limited, which may limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 200, since the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 433d, the display is performed. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 314, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 281.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This is because, in the pachinko machine 200, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the performance. In this manner, a display data table is prepared for each effect, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. Can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 200 is configured to preliminarily determine the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

Next, details of the additional data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the additional data table. As described above, the additional data table describes the display contents to be displayed with the passage of time for the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in addition to the one effect based on the command from the main control device 310. It was done. Here, “adding to one effect” means changing the display content of one effect based on a command from the main control device 310, for example, displaying an image that is not normally displayed in one effect. Then, it includes the concept of superimposing another effect on the one effect, changing part or all of the tone in the one effect, and changing the image displayed in the one effect. ..

That is, the additional data table is a drawing content necessary for adding and displaying an image that is not normally displayed to one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 310. Or the drawing content required to change a part or all of the color tone in the one effect, and the drawing content necessary to change and display the image displayed in the one effect Is.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the continuous notice additionally displayed to the variation effect displayed by the variation display data table selected based on the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) from the main control device 310. A case where the display content for displaying the effect is defined by the additional data table will be described.

That is, the additional data table is prepared corresponding to, for example, the continuous announcement effect additionally set for the variable effect, and specifically, "foam" and "egg" which are the display modes of the continuous announcement effect. , Additional data tables corresponding to "chick", "chicken", and "chicken group" are stored in the data table storage area 433b.

In this additional data table, the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address is defined in detail in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object to be additionally displayed in the image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, Drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 281 to draw a sprite, such as a translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

For example, in the example of FIG. 37, the two effects (effect 1, effect 2) and the two characters (character 1, character 2) are respectively associated with the address “0097H” defined in the display data table. Sprite type (effect type, character type), display position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. On the other hand, when there is no display object to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, it means that there is no display object to be added corresponding to the address in the additional data table. None data is defined (corresponds to the address “0001H” in FIG. 37).

It should be noted that, as in the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the additional data table, and the last address of the additional data table (in the example of FIG. 37, "00FDH") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect to be defined in the additional data table is Have been described.

When the MPU 431 receives the continuous notice command from the voice lamp control device 313, the MPU 431 reads the additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice mode indicated by the continuous notice command from the data table storage area 433b, and the additional data table of the work RAM 433 described later. It is stored in the buffer 433e. Then, every time the pointer 433g is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 433g is displayed from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 433e. After that, the image content to be drawn next is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 39) described later is created.

For example, in the example of FIG. 37, when the pointer 433g becomes “0097H”, the MPU 431 is defined in various sprites defined in the display data table address “0097H” and in the additional data table address “0097H”. The effect 1, effect 2, character 1, and character 2 sprites are added to create a drawing list, and the image controller 437 is instructed to draw the image. On the other hand, when the pointer 433g is "0001H", since None data is defined in the address "0001H" of the additional data table, it is determined that there is no display object to be added, and the address "0001H" of the display data table is displayed. A drawing list is generated based on various sprites defined in “0001H”.

Then, by sending the drawing list to the image controller 437, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing content specified in the display data table is specified in accordance with the update of the pointer 433g, and the drawing content specified in the additional data table is added. The image as defined is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 200, in the display control device 314, an effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the voice lamp control device 313. When, for example, another effect image (for example, a continuous notice effect image) is displayed in addition to (for example, a variable effect image), an additional data table corresponding to the other effect image to be additionally displayed is added to the additional data table buffer. By setting it to 433e, the effect image can be easily added to the base effect image and displayed. Thereby, for example, when there are 32 types of original effect images and 5 types of other effect images to be additionally displayed, a display in which an image in which other effect images are superposed is defined for each original effect image. If a data table is separately prepared, a display data table of 32×5=160 types must be prepared. However, like the pachinko machine 200, a data table corresponding to another effect image is separately defined as an additional data table. By doing so, it is sufficient to prepare 32+5=37 types of displays and additional data tables, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 433b. Therefore, it is possible to store a data table corresponding to various types of effects in the capacity prepared in the data table storage area 433b, and it is possible to easily further diversify the effect images.

Further, like the present pachinko machine 200, by defining another effect image to be additionally displayed as an additional data table, after setting the display data table corresponding to the original effect image in the display data table buffer 433d, Even when the display of another effect image to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to another effect image is added without changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433d. Only by setting in the data table buffer 433e, other effect images to be additionally displayed can be added to the original effect image and easily displayed.

Further, since the additional data table has the same data structure as the display data table, the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 433e and the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 433e are set. From the table, it is possible to easily specify the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer while updating the pointer 433g at each time, and to easily create one drawing list corresponding to one frame from these. Can be generated. Therefore, even when the display performed in addition to the effect performed based on the command from the main control device 310 is determined by the voice lamp control device 313 or the like, the effect to be additionally displayed is determined. By defining the display content with the additional data table, it is possible to easily perform a variety of effect displays from a small number of data tables.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of the sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 435 from the character ROM 434 to the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 435 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 435, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 433b.

The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”) at which transfer is to be started at a time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 38). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 436a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data table is set, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in the transfer data table in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data to start the transfer does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data to start the transfer corresponding to the address does not exist. None data that means that is defined (corresponds to the address "0002H" in FIG. 38).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 434 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 436) start address. Is included.

Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the additional data table, and the last address of the additional data table (in the example of FIG. 38, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data that should be defined in the transfer data table. Is listed.

The MPU 431 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the voice lamp control device 313, and when a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table exists, the selection is performed. The transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 433b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 433f of the work RAM 433 described later. Then, every time the pointer 433g is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 433g is displayed from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 433e. Transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite that should be specified at that time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 433f while creating a drawing list (see FIG. 39) described later. And add the transfer data information to the created drawing list.

For example, in the example of FIG. 38, when the pointer 433g becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 431 transfers the transfer data information defined at the address of the transfer data table to the display data table and the additional data table. It is added to the drawing list created based on the above, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 437. On the other hand, when the pointer 433g is "0002H", since None data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data for which transfer should be started, and it is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 437 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 431, the image controller 437 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 434 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 436a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 436a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 434 to the image storage area 436a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 436a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 436a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 434 is composed of the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 434 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 436. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436.

Further, in the pachinko machine 200, the display control device 314 is configured to set the display data table in the display data table buffer 433d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the voice lamp control device 313. Then, since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table 344d, the sprite image data used in the display data table is surely transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 at a desired timing. Can be transferred.

In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 in units of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433d, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 436. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 434 is configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow read speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 281. be able to.

The simple image display flag 433c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 33A to 33C on the third symbol display device 281. It is a flag that indicates. This simple image display flag 433c is an image for displaying the power-on main image on the third symbol display device 281 in the initialization process of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 431 after the power is turned on. When the controller 437 is instructed to draw the main image when the power is turned on, the controller 437 is turned on (see S2205 in FIG. 52). Then, by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 435, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 281, It is set to OFF (see S3105 in FIG. 64B).

The simple image display flag 433c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 431 every time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 437 is detected (see S2401 in FIG. 53), and the simple image display flag is displayed. If 433c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2408 of FIG. 53(b)) and a simple display setting process (FIG. 53(b) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. ) S2409) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 433c is off, command determination processing (see FIGS. 54 to 58) and display are performed so that various images are displayed in accordance with the command received from the voice lamp control device 313. The setting process (see FIGS. 59 to 63) is executed.

When the simple image display flag 433c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 431 in the V interrupt process (see S3001 in FIG. 64A), and the simple image display flag 433c is on. Has resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 435. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 64B) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 is executed. If the simple image display flag 433c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 65) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 is executed.

The display data table buffer 433d is a buffer for storing a display data table corresponding to an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 according to a command or the like from the voice lamp control device 313. The MPU 431 determines an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 based on a command from the voice lamp control device 313, selects a display data table corresponding to the effect from the data table storage area 433b, and The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 433d. Then, the MPU 431 adds the pointer 433g one by one, and on the basis of the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 433g in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433d, the image controller 437 is added for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 39) in which the instruction contents of the image drawing for the is described is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433d is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

The additional data table buffer 433e is displayed in addition to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433d in response to a command or the like from the voice lamp control device 313. It is a buffer for storing an additional data table corresponding to effects (continuous notice effects, etc.). The MPU 431 writes None data, which means that there is no display object to be additionally displayed in the additional data table buffer 433e, at the same time as storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 433d. Clear the contents.

After that, the MPU 431, based on the command from the voice lamp control device 313, etc., of the effect to be displayed in addition to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433d. When there is an effect to be additionally displayed by determining the presence or absence, an additional data table corresponding to the effect is selected from the data table storage area 433b and the selected additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 433e. To do.

Then, the MPU 431 adds the pointer 433g one by one, and stores in the additional data table buffer 433e the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 433g in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433d. In the additional data table, a drawing list (see FIG. 39) to be described later, which describes the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 437, is generated for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 433g. .. As a result, the effect corresponding to the additional data table is additionally displayed on the effect corresponding to the display data table on the third symbol display device 281. Further, when the additional data table is not stored in the additional data table buffer 433e, None data is stored in the additional data table buffer 433e, so that the third symbol display device 281 has the effect corresponding to the display data table. Is displayed as is.

The transfer data table buffer 433f is a buffer for storing a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433d in response to a command or the like from the voice lamp control device 313. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 433d, the MPU 431 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 433b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 433f. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433d is stored in the resident video RAM 435, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 431 clears the contents by writing None data, which means that there is no transfer target image data, to the transfer data table buffer 433f.

Then, the MPU 431 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined in the address indicated by the pointer 433g in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 433f while adding the pointer 433g one by one. If so (that is, if the None data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 39) that describes the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 437 generated for each frame. to add.

Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 431, the image controller 437 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 434 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 436a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 436a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 434 to the image storage area 436a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 can always be stored in the image storage area 436a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 434 is composed of the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 434 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 436. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436.

The pointer 433g corresponds to the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image from the display data table, the additional data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 433d, the additional data table buffer 433e and the transfer data table buffer 433f. This is for designating an address from which data transfer data information should be acquired. The MPU 431 temporarily initializes the pointer 433g to 0 in accordance with the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 431 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 437 completes the drawing process of the image for one frame (S2403 in FIG. 53). (Refer to S2711 in FIG. 59), the value of the pointer 433g is incremented by one.

Every time such updating of the pointer 433g is performed, the MPU 431 selects the address indicated by the pointer 433g from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 433e. A drawing list (see FIG. 39) which will be described later is created by specifying the drawing contents specified in the above, and a predetermined sprite that should start the transfer at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 433f. The transfer data information of the image data is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

As a result, when the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433d is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and the additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 433e, that effect is displayed. The effect corresponding to the additional data table can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Therefore, by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433d or the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 433e, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be easily changed. .. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 433f is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table until the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 436a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 434 is composed of the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 434 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 436. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436.

The drawing list area 433h is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433d, the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 433e, and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 433e. This is an area for storing a drawing list for instructing the image controller 437 to draw an image for one frame.

Here, details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 437 to draw an image of one frame, and as shown in FIG. 39, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, Design 2,...), effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), character (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball count symbol 1, Reserved ball count symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 437 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436.

In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, information indicating a RAM type (resident video RAM 435 or normal video RAM 436) in which image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and The address is described, and the image controller 437 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the magnification ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucent value. Processing is performed, composite processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the method specified by that information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 437 into either the first frame buffer 436b or the second frame buffer 436c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 433k.

The MPU 431, in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 433e, draws the content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 433g and other images to be drawn. Based on the contents of (for example, a hold image that displays the number of held balls, a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame ) Is generated and the detailed information is rearranged for each sprite to create a drawing list.

Here, of the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are specified from the sprite type specified in the display data table and the additional data table, and other image contents. Generated according to the sprite type. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 435 in which the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub area of the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436 is fixed, so the MPU 431 determines the sprite type according to the type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 431 displays a display data table and additional data regarding other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy the information specified in the table as is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 431 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and draws detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) , Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of the character (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2,..., Error pattern).

The image controller 437 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 433f includes transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 433g, the MPU 431 transfers the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 434 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 436a in which the transfer target image data are to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 437 displays an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 434 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436.

The clock counter 433i is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433d. The MPU 431 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table, in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 433d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 281 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 431 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 437 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed (see FIG. 53). Each time the display setting process is executed, the clock counter 433i is decremented by 1 (see S2713 in FIG. 59). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 433i becomes 0 or less, the MPU 431 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433d has ended, and performs the same when the effect ends. Performs various processing that should be performed.

For the stored image discrimination flag 433j, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 435, is the image data corresponding to that sprite stored in the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436? It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not.

The stored image discrimination flag 433j is generated by the initial setting process (see S2202 in FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 431 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image discrimination flag 433j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage states for all the sprites are not stored in the image storage area 436a.

Then, the stored image discrimination flag 433j is updated when the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 65) executed by the MPU 431. .. In this update, the storage state corresponding to the one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "ON" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 436a. Further, the image data of other sprites to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 436a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Further, the MPU 431 refers to the stored image determination flag 433j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436, and refers to the image of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the data has already been stored in the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 435 (see S3212 in FIG. 65). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 436a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3213 in FIG. 65). The image controller 437 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 434 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 436a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 436a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. This can prevent wasteful transfer from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436, and can reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 314 and the traffic on the bus line 440. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 433k is a frame buffer that expands an image drawn by the image controller 437 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 436b and the second frame buffer 436c) (hereinafter, referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 433k is 0, the first frame buffer 436b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 436c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 437 together with the drawing list (see S3302 in FIG. 66).

As a result, the image controller 437 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 437 reads the drawn image information that has been developed in advance from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 281 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 281 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 433k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 437 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 433k, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 436b and the second frame buffer 436c each time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 431 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 437 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 53) is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 66).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 436b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 436c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame, thereby When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 436c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 436b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 436b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 436c. R.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 436b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 436c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 436b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 436c. It After that, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 436b or the second frame buffer 436c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, the display processing of the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image of one frame.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 401 in the main control device 310 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 40 to 46. The process of the MPU 401 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is regularly (in this embodiment, 2 ms cycle) started. There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of description, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 401 in the main control device 310. The timer interrupt process is a regular process that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S1101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 310 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 403. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 403.

Further, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are updated (S1103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 899, 9, 99, 250), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 403.

Next, the process for displaying by the first symbol display device 237 and the variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 281 are executed (S1104), and then the first entrance opening The start winning process associated with the winning of H.264 is executed (S1105). The details of the variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 41 and 43, respectively.

After the start winning process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S1106), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S1107), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 251 with the touch sensor 251a, and that the hit switch 251b for stopping the firing is not operated, and the ball is fired. Is a process for determining whether to turn on or off. The main controller 310 instructs the launch controller 312 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

Next, the fluctuation process (S1104) executed by the MPU 401 in the main control device 310 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this variation processing (S1104). This variation process (S1104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40), and controls the variation display performed by the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol display device 281.

In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made (S1201). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 281 and the first symbol display device 237 during the jackpot and the predetermined time period after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is in the midst of hitting (S1201: Yes), this processing is ended as it is.

If it is not a big hit (S1201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 237 is changing (S1202), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 237 is not changing. (S1202: No), then, after the variable display on the first symbol display device 237 is stopped, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has passed (S1203). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S1203: No), the present process ends. Thereby, the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol display device 281 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S1204, if the predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S1203: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 403a (the variable display reserved ball number N reserved in the main control device 310). Is greater than 0 (S1204), and the value of the reserved ball number counter 403a (reserved ball number N) is not 0 (S1204: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 403a (reserved ball number) N) is subtracted by 1 (S1205), and the data stored in the reserved ball storage area is shifted (S1206). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the holding ball storage area to the execution area side, and the holding first area→the execution area, the holding second area→ The data in each area is shifted such as the first reserved area, the third reserved area→the second reserved area, the fourth reserved area→the third reserved area. After the data shift process, the variation start process of the first symbol display device 237 is executed (S1207). The fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

In the process of S1204, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved balls counter 403a (the number of reserved balls N) is 0 (S1204: No), the state where the demonstration effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 281, that is, It is determined whether or not the demonstration is in progress (S1208). In this determination processing, after the demo command is transmitted to the display control device 314 via the voice lamp control device 313, it is determined that the value of the hold ball number counter 403a (hold ball number N) is greater than 0. It is determined that the period is being demonstrated.

If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S1208: No), a demo command is set (S1212), the present process is terminated, and if it is determined that the demo is in progress (S1208: Yes), This processing is ended as it is. The demo command set in the process of S1212 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 403, and in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 46) described later that is executed by the MPU 401. , To the voice lamp control device 313. The voice lamp control device 313 transmits this demo command to the display control device 314 as it is, and the display control device 314 controls the third symbol display device 281 to display a demonstration effect in accordance with this demo command.

Here, as described above, the demo command is set when there is no holding ball when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation stop. Therefore, when the variable display is not started after the lapse of a predetermined time after the variable stop, the demo command can be set and the demonstration effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

In the process of S1202, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 237 is changing (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether the changing time has elapsed (S1210). The display time during change of the first symbol display device 237 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counter CS1 (determined according to the change pattern command), and this change time elapses. If not (S1210: No), the display of the first symbol display device 237 is updated (S1211), and this processing ends.

In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 237a of the first symbol display device 237, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED. If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

The variation process is executed every 2 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 200, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 237 has elapsed (S1210: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 237 is set (S1212). The stop symbol is set in advance by a variation start process (S1207) described later with reference to FIG. That is, by the process of S1206, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit according to the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, and when it is a big hit, the first hit type counter Depending on the value of C2, it will be a pattern that will be a 15R probability variation jackpot after the jackpot (probability variation jackpot that the maximum number of rounds will shift to a high probability state after 15 rounds jackpot) or a 2R probability variation jackpot (the maximum round number will be a high probability state after two rounds of jackpots) It is determined whether the symbol is a probability variation jackpot to be transferred or a short-time jackpot (a jackpot that shifts to a low-probability state after the jackpot of maximum 15 rounds).

In the present embodiment, the blue LED is turned on when the 15R probability variation jackpot is hit after the jackpot, the red LED is turned on when the 2R probability variation jackpot is hit, and the red LED and the blue LED are turned on when the time saving jackpot is achieved. Turn on the LED and. Further, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. It should be noted that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

When the display mode of the first symbol display device 237 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S1212, the stop symbol of the variation effect of the third symbol display device 281 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED on the first symbol display device 237. A confirmation command is set in order to confirm (S1213), and this processing ends. Upon receiving this confirmation command, the voice lamp control device 313 transmits the confirmation command to the display control device 314 as it is. The third symbol display device 281 stops the variation when the variation time elapses, and by receiving the confirmation command, the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 281 is determined.

Next, the fluctuation start process (S1207) executed by the MPU 401 in the main controller 310 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process (S1207). This variation start processing (S1207) is executed in the variation processing (see FIG. 41) of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40), and based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, The lottery of “big hit” or “out” is performed (judgment determination), and the effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed on the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol display device 281 is determined.

In the variation start process, first, a lottery (win/win determination) process for determining whether or not it is a big hit based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is performed (S1301). Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, when the state (mode) that the pachinko machine 200 can take is a normal low probability, “7,307,582” of the numerical values 0 to 899 of the first random number counter C1 becomes the winning value, and the pachinko machine 200 has a winning value. When the possible states (modes) have a high probability, “28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298,322,354,390,420,448,486,506,534,567,596 , 618,656,681,716,750,772,809,836,866,892" is the winning value. In the process of S1301, the values of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved sphere storage area are compared with these hit values, and when they match, it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit. ..

Then, as a result of the processing in S1301, if it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit (S1301: Yes), a big hit display based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. The mode is set (S1302). In this processing, the jackpot type set by the first hit type counter C2, that is, the 15R probability variation jackpot in which the maximum round number shifts to a high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots, or the maximum round number has a high probability after 2 rounds of jackpots The display mode of the first symbol display device 237 (lighting state of the LED 237a) is set based on whether the 2R certainty variation jackpot to shift to the state or the short-time jackpot to shift to the low-probability state after the jackpot of maximum 15 rounds. To be done. Further, based on the transition state after the jackpot, in order to stop and display jackpot symbols corresponding to various jackpots on the third symbol display device 281, the jackpot type (15R certainty variation jackpot, 2R certainty variation jackpot, time saving jackpot) is the stop type. Is set. In addition, among the numerical values 0 to 9 of the first hit type counter C2, in the case of "0, 1, 2, 3", after that, the state shifts to the low probability state (time saving, big hit), and in the case of "4,5". After that, it shifts to a high-probability state (2R probability variation big hit), and in the case of "6, 7, 8, 9", it shifts to a high probability state (15R probability variation big hit) thereafter.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined (S1303). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1303, the display time of the first symbol display device 237 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the big symbol symbol stops on the third symbol display device 281 is determined. It At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 403 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

When it is determined in the process of S1301 that the jackpot is not the big hit (S1301: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S1304). In the process of S1304, while setting the display mode of the first symbol display device 237 to the display mode corresponding to the deviation symbol, based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, As the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281, it is set whether it is a front/rear outreach, a reach other than front/rear outreach, or a complete outreach. In the present embodiment, as described above, the table is set such that the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 differs depending on whether the state is the high probability state or the low probability state. There is.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of disengagement is determined (S1305), the display time of the first symbol display device 237 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the symbol comes off on the third symbol display device 281. Is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S1303, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 403 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To decide.

When the process of S1303 or the process of S1305 ends, next, a variation pattern is determined, and a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 314 of the variation pattern type is set (S1306). The fluctuation pattern is selected from a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) stored in the ROM 402 according to the result of the lottery in S1301 and the fluctuation time determined in the process of S1303 or S1305.

In the fluctuation pattern table, for example, as fluctuation patterns for disengagement, "disconnection (for long time)", "disconnection (for short time)", "disconnection normal reach", "disconnection super reach", "disconnection special reach", etc. "Various patterns are defined, as 15R fixed jackpot/short-time jackpot common variation patterns, "15R shared normal reach" types, "15R shared super reach" types, "15R shared special reach" types are defined. As a pattern, various kinds of "15R probability variable special reach", various "special fluctuation" are defined as fluctuation patterns for 2R probability variable big hit, and "common normal reach" various, "shared supermarket" Various "reach" and "common special reach" are stipulated. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, a fluctuation pattern is selected according to the result of the lottery in S1301 and the fluctuation time determined in the processing of S1303 or S1305.

Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 314 of the stop type set in the processing of S1302 or S1304 is set (S1307). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 403, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp controller 313 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 46). R. The voice lamp control device 313 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 314. When the process of S1307 ends, the process returns to the fluctuation process.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43, the start winning processing (S1105) executed by the MPU 401 in the main control device 310 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process (S1105). This start winning process (S1105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (starting prize) in the first ball entrance 264, and if there is a starting prize. From the value indicated by the held random number counter and the value indicated by the various random number counters, the permission determination process for starting the continuous notice effect in the third symbol display device 281 is executed.

When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 264 (starting prize) (S1401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 264 is detected over the three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 264 (S1401: Yes), the value of the number-of-holding-balls counter 403a (the number N of balls to hold the variable effect that is held in the main controller 310) is It is determined whether it is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S1402). Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball entrance 264 (S1401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 264, if the number N of operation-holding balls is not N<4 (S1402: No) , Return to timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 264 (S1401: Yes) and the number of reserved balls N<4 (S1402: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 403a (the number of reserved balls N) is set. 1 is added (S1403), and the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 updated in step S1103 are stored in the empty holding area of the holding ball storage area of the RAM 403. The first area is stored (S1404).

Next, the number N of reserved balls updated by the process of S1403 and the respective values of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area by the process of S1404 are set. The included reserved ball number command is created (S1405), the created reserved ball number command is set (S1406), the start winning process is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. This reserved ball number command is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 403, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 313 in the processing of S1701 of the main processing (FIG. 46). The voice lamp control device 313 manages the number of holding balls in the voice lamp control device 313 based on the number N of holding balls included in the number-of-holding-balls command, and controls various counters included in the number-of-holding-balls command. Based on the value, it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect is executed.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 401 in the main control device 310. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 401 of the main control device 310 when the power of the pachinko machine 200 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 403. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 200 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 452 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 401 in the main control device 310. Then, the MPU 401 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 403 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1501), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 311, and the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 413 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 200 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 452 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 411 in the payout control device 311 and the MPU 411 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a startup process executed by the MPU 401 in the main control device 310 when the main control device 310 is powered on will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1601). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Next, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 313 and the payout control device 311) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1602). Then, access to the RAM 403 is permitted (S1603).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 322 (see FIG. 28) provided in the power supply device 315 is turned on (S1604), and if it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process proceeds to S1611. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 322 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 403 (S1605), and if not stored (S1605: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally, the process proceeds to S1611 in this case as well.

If the power failure information is stored in the RAM 403 (S1605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1606), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1607: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, and in such a case, the process proceeds to S1611. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 403, as described later in the processing of S1712 of FIG. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 403 is correctly stored.

In the process of S1611, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 311 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1611). When the payout control device 311 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 413, sets the initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 310 executes initialization processing (S1612, S1613) of RAM 403.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 200, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 322. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 322 is pressed at the time of executing the startup process, the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S1612, S1613) of the RAM 403 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization processing (S1612, S1613), the used area of the RAM 403 is cleared to 0 (S1612), and then the initial value of the RAM 403 is set (S1613). After the initialization process of the RAM 403 is executed, the process proceeds to S1610.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 322 is not turned on (S1604: No), the information on occurrence of power failure is stored (S1605: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S1607: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 403 is held (S1608). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. When the payout control device 311 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 311 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 413.

In the process of S1610, the interrupt is permitted (S1610). Then, the process shifts to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a main process executed by the MPU 401 in the main control device 310 after the startup process described above will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As its outline, each processing of S1701 to S1705 is executed as a regular processing of a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter updating processing of S1708 and S1709 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 234 is transferred to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device). External output processing to be transmitted to () (S1701). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S1101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 40) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the payout control device 311 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the number-of-holding-balls command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 43) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 313. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command and the like necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 281 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 313. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 312.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 403.

When the change type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 are read (S1703), and then, in the case of a jackpot state, the specific winning opening (large opening) of the variable winning device 265. A large opening mouth opening/closing process for opening or closing the mouth) 265a is executed (S1704). That is, the specific winning opening 265a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 265a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 265a. Then, when any of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 265a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 265a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, a symbol of "O" or "x") by the second symbol display device 283 is executed (S1705). Briefly speaking, on condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 267, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball is passed, and the second symbol display device 283 is also acquired. The variable display of the second symbol is carried out. And the lottery of the second symbol is carried out by the value of the second hit random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is hit, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 264 is opened for a predetermined time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 403 (S1706). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 403 (S1706: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 452 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main processing (S1707). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1707: Yes), the process proceeds to S1701 and the above-described processes after S1701 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main processing (S1707: No), the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing, The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1708, S1709).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1708). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 or 250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 403, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1702 (S1709).

Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1701 to S1705 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the processing of S1706, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 403 (S1706: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 452 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 44 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1710 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1710), and a power-off command indicating that the power supply has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 311 and voice lamp control device 313). And transmits (S1711). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1712), access to the RAM 403 is prohibited (S1713), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 403 that are backed up.

Note that the processing of S1706 is at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1701 to S1705 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1708 and S1709 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 310, since the power-off occurrence information is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. The process can be started from S1701. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S1701 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup processing. Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 401 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the power-off process, the stack pointer is not saved in the initial setting process (S1601). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1701 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 310 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing malfunction or runaway of the main control device 310.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 421 in the audio lamp control device 313 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 51. The processes of the MPU 421 are roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

First, with reference to FIG. 47, a startup process executed by the MPU 421 in the voice lamp control device 313 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1801). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S1917 is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous stop”) in the startup processing of this time (see FIG. 48). ) Is started during the execution of () is determined (S1802). As described later with reference to FIG. 48, when the voice lamp control device 313 receives the power-off command from the main control device 310 (see S1914 in FIG. 48), the power-off process of S1917 is executed. The power-off processing in progress flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing in-process flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1917 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1802: No), the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off in S1917 is performed. It may be started after completing the execution of the process, or may be started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control unit 310) only on the MPU 421 of the voice lamp control unit 313 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether the data in the RAM 423 is destroyed (S1803).

The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 423 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 423 by the process of S1806. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 423, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction of the RAM 423. If the data destruction of the RAM 423 is confirmed (S1803: Yes), the process proceeds to S1804 and the initialization of the RAM 423 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 423 is not confirmed (S1803: No), the process proceeds to S1808.

If the power-on process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 423 (the memory of the RAM 423 is lost due to power off). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 423 has been destroyed (S1803: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1804. On the other hand, the startup process this time was started after the momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off process of S1917 was completed, or only the MPU 421 of the audio lamp control device 313 was reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 423, the data of the RAM 423 is determined to be normal (S1803: No), and the process proceeds to S1808.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S1802: Yes), the startup processing of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S1917, the voice lamp control device 313 is executed. The MPU 421 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 423 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, and therefore the process proceeds to S1804, and initialization of the RAM 423 is started.

In the process of S1804, the entire storage area of the RAM 423 is checked (S1804). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, and it is confirmed whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read/write check of the RAM 423, all the storage areas of the RAM 423 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 423 (S1805: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 423 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1806). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 423. On the other hand, if a read/write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 423 (S1805: No), the abnormality of the RAM 423 is notified (S1807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 423 is notified by the display lamp 234. The voice output device 426 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 423, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 314 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 281. You may

In the process of S1808, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S1808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1917 is executed (see S1916 in FIG. 48). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1917 is executed, the process of S1808 with the power-off flag turned on is that the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure has occurred and the processing is started in a state where the execution of the power-off processing in S1917 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1808: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 313 (S1809), the initial value of the RAM 423 is set (S1810), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1811), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 423 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 310.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1808 is reached in the state where the power-off flag is off is that the present startup process is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the process of S1804 to S1806 is performed. This is the case when the processing has been started, or only the MPU 421 of the audio lamp control device 313 has been reset (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 310) and started due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1808: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 423, S1809, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1810, the initial value of the RAM 423 is set (S1810), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1811), the process proceeds to the main process.

It should be noted that the clear processing of S1809 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 423 have already been cleared by the processing of S1804 when the processing of S1808 is reached through the processing of S1804 to S1806. When only the MPU 421 of the voice lamp control device 313 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 423 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, a main process executed by the MPU 421 in the audio lamp control device 313 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 313 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S1901 was executed last time (S1901), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1901: No), the process proceeds to S1912 without performing S1902 to S1911. In the processing of S1901, it is the processing related to display (effect) in S1902 to S1911 that determines whether or not 1 ms has elapsed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display process of (1) and the command determination process of S1913 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1913 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of the command transmitted from the main control device 310, and by executing the process of S1912 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to make the setting regarding the variation effect without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1901 (S1901: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 314 set by the processes of S1903 to S1913 are transmitted to the display control device 314. Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 234 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1909 described later (S1903), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1904). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 426 or the lamp display device 427. Be seen. In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 314 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 281. If it is not when the power is turned on, the process proceeds to S1905 without performing the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1905, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the retained quantity display updating process is executed (S1906). In the customer waiting production, when the pachinko machine 200 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the display of the third symbol display device 281 is switched to the title screen, and the setting is performed as a command by the display control device. Sent to 314. In the retained quantity display updating process, a process of turning on the retaining lamp 285 according to the value of the retaining sphere number counter 423a is performed.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1907). In this frame button input monitoring/production process, the input of whether or not the frame button 222 operated by the player in order to enhance the production effect is monitored and the input of the frame button 222 is confirmed is dealt with. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this processing, when the player's operation of the frame button 222 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 314 that the frame button 222 has been operated is set.

Also, when the frame effect 222 is pressed during the period when the variation effect is not executed or during the high-speed variation period, the stage changing process is performed and the rear image changing command for the display control device 314 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in this back image change command, the display control device 314 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 281 as an image according to the stage. The process of changing to. In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of variable display, pressing the frame button 222 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to the current change, and pressing the frame button 222 during the reach production displays the expectation for the jackpot. It is also possible to change to an effect that can be held or to use the frame button 222 as an enter button for selecting one reach effect from among a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 222 is not provided, the process of S1907 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect process ends, the vibration sensor input monitoring process is performed (S1908). The vibration sensor input monitoring process is a process of monitoring an input signal from the vibration sensor 428 and detecting whether or not vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 200.

Here, the details of the vibration sensor input monitoring processing (S1908) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1908) executed by the MPU 421 in the voice lamp control device 313.

In the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1908), first, the output value (vibration level) of the vibration sensor 428 is read from the vibration sensor 428 (S1951), and it is determined from the read output value whether the vibration level is equal to or higher than a predetermined level. (S1952). As a result, if the vibration level is lower than the predetermined level (S1952: No), the vibration sensor input monitoring process is ended and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 48).

On the other hand, if the vibration level is equal to or higher than the predetermined level (S1952: Yes), it is determined that the pachinko machine 200 is vibrated, and the audio output device 426 is set to output an alarm sound (S1953) and displayed. An error command for notifying the occurrence of a vibration error is set to the control device 314 (S1954), and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 48). Thereby, in the display control device 31, a process of displaying an error message image notifying a vibration error on the third symbol display device 281 is performed.

Returning to FIG. 48, the description of the main process is continued. When the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1908) is completed, then the ramp edit process is executed (S1909), and then the sound edit/output process is executed (S1910). In the lamp editing process, the lighting pattern of the illumination portions 229 to 233 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 281. In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the audio output device 426 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 281, and the sound is output from the audio output device 426 according to the setting. Further, when the output of the alarm sound is set by the vibration sensor input monitoring processing (see FIG. 49) (see S1953), the output pattern of the alarm sound is set by the sound editing/output processing, and the alarm sound is output. It is output from the output device 426.

After the process of S1910, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1911), and the process proceeds to S1912. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 281 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 310. The lamp edit process of S1909 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing/output processing of S1910 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 281.

In the process of S1912, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 281, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 310, and the command is displayed on the display control device 314. A variable display process that is a process set for transmission is executed. Details of this variable display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variable display process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 310 is performed (S1913). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the processing of S1913 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power RAM occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 433 (S1914). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 310. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1914 (S1914: Yes), the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are both turned on (S1916), and the power-off processing is executed (S1917). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1918), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 426 and the lamp display device 427 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1914 (S1914: No), it is determined whether the RAM 423 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 423 (S1915), and the RAM 423 is destroyed. If not (S1915: No), the process returns to S1901, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 423 has been destroyed (S1915: Yes), the processing is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 281 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and thus can call a store clerk or the like in the hall and request the pachinko machine 200 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 423 has been destroyed, the voice output device 426 and the lamp display device 427 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, a command determination process (S1913) executed by the MPU 421 in the voice lamp control device 313 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1913). This command determination process (S1913) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 48) performed by the MPU 421 in the voice lamp control device 313, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 310. .. In addition, this process also determines the start of the continuous announcement effect by the third symbol display device 281 when the number of reserved balls command is received from the main control device 310.

In the command determination process, first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 310 is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 423, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 310. It is determined whether or not (S2001). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command is received (S2001: Yes), the fluctuation start flag provided in the RAM 423 is turned on (S2002), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S2003). , Return to the main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 423, and in a variation display process (see FIG. 51) described later, a variation pattern for display that notifies the display control device 314 of the start of variation effect and the variation pattern type. Used when setting a command.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S2001: No), then it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 310 (S2004). Then, if it is determined that the stop type command is received (S2004: Yes), the display stop type command is set to directly transmit the stop type command to the display control device 314 (S2005).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S2004: No), then it is determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 310 (S2006). When it is determined that the hold ball number command is received (S2006: Yes), the value of the hold ball number counter 403a of the main control device 310 included in the hold ball number command (that is, the hold ball number is held by the main control device 310). The number of reserved balls of the variation effect is extracted and stored in the reserved ball number counter 423a of the voice lamp control device 313 (S2007).

Here, since the number of reserved balls command is transmitted from the main control device 310 when the balls win the first ball entrance 264 (start prize), every time there is a start prize, the process of S2008 is executed. The value of the reserved ball number counter 423a of the voice lamp controller 313 can be matched with the value of the reserved ball number counter 403a of the main controller 310. Therefore, even if the value of the hold ball number counter 423a of the voice lamp control device 313 deviates from the value of the hold ball number counter 403a of the main control device 310 due to the influence of noise or the like, the voice lamp control device 313 detects a start winning. The value of the reserved ball number counter 423a can be modified to match the value of the reserved ball number counter 403a of the main controller 310.

Further, after the processing of S2007, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 314 of the value of the reserved ball number counter 423a updated by the processing of S2007 is set (S2008). Thereby, in the display control device 314, processing is executed so that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

Then, the continuous notice determination process is executed (S2009), and the process returns to the main process. In this continuous notice determination process, the value of the number of reserved balls received from the main control device 310 by the number of reserved balls command and the values of the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 It is determined whether or not to perform the continuous notice effect in which the notice effect images are continuously displayed over the variable effect held at the time point. Further, when the continuous notice effect is performed, is the same notice type continuous notice effect mode in which the same image (for example, “bubble” image) is displayed over a plurality of variable effects as the continuous notice effect mode? , Related images are displayed in order each time a fluctuating effect is performed (for example, each image is displayed in the order of "egg" → "chick" → "chicken" → "chicken group") Step-up type continuous notice effect It decides whether to make it an aspect.

Specifically, the determination as to whether or not to perform the continuous announcement effect is made based on the values of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 at the time when the number of reserved balls command is transmitted. The result of the lottery carried out corresponding to the reserved ball held in No. 2 and the stop type after the variable effect are estimated, and the result is based on the estimation result and the number of reserved balls held at that time. For example, when it is estimated that the stop type after the fluctuating effect is the 15R probability change jackpot or the out-of-front/rear reach, it may be determined that the continuous notice effect is performed with a predetermined probability. Further, in this case, the larger the number of reserved balls, the higher the probability that the continuous announcement effect may be performed.

In addition to this, when the estimated lottery result is a big hit, continuous notice production may be performed with a predetermined probability regardless of the stop type, or the result of the lottery is off. However, if the stop type is reach, that is, if it is estimated that the reach is out of front/rear and reach other than out of front/rear, the continuous announcement effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. As described above, the condition for determining the continuous announcement effect may be set as appropriate according to the playability of the pachinko machine 200.

Further, as the continuous notice effect mode, the condition of the same effect type or the step-up type may be appropriately set. For example, a random number counter may be provided inside the voice lamp control device 313, and the continuous notice presentation mode may be determined according to the value of the random number counter.

In the pachinko machine 200, in the main controller 310, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired at the time of winning the start prize are controlled by the voice lamp controller by the reserve ball number command. 313, and the voice lamp control device 313 determines the start of the continuous notice effect and sets the mode of the continuous notice effect on the basis of the values of the various counters and the values of the number of hold balls notified by the hold number command. To do. As a result, the processing in the main control device 310 can be concentrated on the lottery processing, which is the most important processing of the pachinko machine 200, that is, the game state to be transitioned based on the entrance into the first entrance 264. On the other hand, if the MPU 421 having a high processing capability is used for the voice lamp control device 313, the execution condition of the continuous announcement effect can be set in various modes.

Further, the number of reserved balls and the values of various counters can be transmitted from main controller 310 to voice lamp controller 313 with one reserved ball number command. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 313, it is possible to accurately grasp the correspondence between the values of the various counters acquired along with the start winning and the number of reserved balls at the time when the start winning is detected. When the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, the number of reserved balls to which the continuous announcement effect is added can be accurately grasped. Therefore, compared with the case where the number of holding balls and the values of various counters are transmitted from main controller 310 to voice lamp controller 313 by another command, control by voice lamp controller 313 is facilitated. be able to.

As a result of the processing in S2006, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S2006: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing according to the received command is executed. (S2010), the process proceeds to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 313, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 423, and if the command is used by the display control device 314, the command is displayed. The command is set so as to be transmitted to the device 314. The demo command and the confirmation command received from the main control device 310 are set as the display demo command and the display confirmation command by the processing of S2010, and are transmitted to the display control device 314.

Next, the variable display processing (S1912) executed by the MPU 421 in the audio lamp control device 313 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this variable display processing (S1912). This fluctuation display process (S1912) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 421 in the voice lamp control device 313, and as described above, the fluctuation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. In order to do so, the fluctuation pattern command for display is generated based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 310, and the fluctuation display process, which is the process set to transmit the command to the display control device 314, is executed. In addition, the value of the reserved sphere number counter 423a is updated along with the display of the variation effect, and the display reserved sphere number command is set and generated to notify the display control device 314 of the updated reserved sphere number. When it is decided to perform the continuous announcement effect for the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281 by the display variation pattern command, the continuous announcement command is set after the display variation pattern command.

In the fluctuation display process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag provided in the RAM 423 is on (S2101). If it is determined that the variation start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S2101: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 310. The process ends and returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is on (S2101: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S2102), and then extracted from the fluctuation pattern command in the process of S2003 of the command determination process (see FIG. 50). The variation pattern type in the generated variation effect is acquired from the RAM 423 (S2103).

Then, a variation pattern command for display for notifying the display control device 314 of the obtained variation pattern type is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 314 (S2104). In the display control device 314, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, the variation pattern of the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, The display control of the variation effect is started.

Next, with the setting of the display variation pattern command, the value of the pending ball number counter 423a is decremented by 1 as the pending ball is consumed (that is, the variable display corresponding to the pending ball is set). (S2105), a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 314 of the reserved ball number indicated by the value of the updated reserved ball counter 423a is set (S2106). The display control device 314 executes a process of causing the third symbol display device 281 to display the number of holding sphere numbers corresponding to the number of holding spheres indicated by the holding sphere number command for display. Therefore, the player can recognize the number of balls held by counting the number of holding ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

Next, it is determined whether or not it is determined to perform the continuous notice presentation by the processing of S2009 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 50) for the variation presentation corresponding to the display variation pattern command set by the processing of S2104. (S2107), if it is determined to perform the continuous announcement effect (S2107: Yes), the continuous announcement command for notifying the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set to the display control device 314 (S2108). , This process ends and returns to the main process. On the other hand, in the process of S2107, when the decision to perform the continuous announcement effect has not been made (S2107: No), the variable display process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

Here, the continuous notice command set by the process of S2108 is additionally displayed with respect to the variable effect according to the continuous notice effect mode determined by the process of S2009 of the command determination process (see FIG. 50). The type of continuous notice image (any one of “bubble”, “egg”, “chick”, “chicken” and “chicken group”) is included. When the display control device 314 receives the continuous notice command, the variation effect performed based on the previously received display variation pattern command is added to the continuous notice image of the type indicated by the continuous notice effect command to add the third symbol. The processing is executed so that the display device 281 displays it.

Next, each control executed by the MPU 431 of the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 66. The processing of the MPU 431 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 313, and one frame of the image controller 437. There is V interrupt processing executed when the MPU 431 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 431 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 313 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

First, with reference to FIG. 61, main processing executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

The activation of the main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the display control device 314 is powered on from the power supply circuit 315 and the system reset is released, the MPU 431 sets the instruction pointer 431a provided in the MPU 431 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 431a is designated to the bus line 440. When the ROM controller 434b of the character ROM 434 detects that the address designated on the bus line 440 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 434d1 of the NOR ROM 434d in the buffer RAM 434c. , And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 431. Then, the MPU 431 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 434, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main processing.

Here, if the boot program first processed by the MPU 431 after the system reset is released is all stored in the NAND flash memory 434a, the character ROM 434 confirms that the address specified in the bus line 440 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 434a and set in the buffer RAM 434c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 434a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 434c. Therefore, the MPU 431 designates the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 431, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 281 in the display control device 314 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR type ROM 434d stores a predetermined number of instructions in the boot program from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 431 after the system reset is released, so that the NOR type ROM operates at high speed. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 431 via the bus line 440 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 434 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 434d1 of the NOR ROM 434d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 434c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 431. Therefore, since the MPU 431 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, the MPU 431 can activate the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 434 composed of the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 281 in the display control device 314 can be immediately started.

When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S2201), and the display control device 314 is configured so that various controls for the third symbol display device 281 can be executed. To start. The boot process executed here is the same as the boot process executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81 of the slot machine 10 according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 19), and therefore its illustration and description are omitted. However, in the pachinko machine 200 according to the fifth embodiment, the control program and a part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 433a of the work RAM 433 in the boot process shown in FIG. The various data tables (display data table, additional data table, transfer data table) are stored in the data table storage area 433b.

Here, as described above, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 431 and the fixed value data are provided with a dedicated program ROM (for example, the ROM 22 of the above-mentioned Patent Document 1) like a conventional gaming machine. Instead of storing it, the character ROM 434 provided for storing the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is stored. Since the character ROM 434 is composed of the NAND flash memory 434a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 314 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a low read speed particularly when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 431 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 434a, Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 91 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in the present boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 434a1 of the NAND flash memory 434a are stored in the program storage area 433a and the data table provided in the work RAM 433 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 434b and storing is executed. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 431a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 431 does not refer to the NAND flash memory 434a and the control program transferred to the program storage area 433a or the like. Various processes are executed using the data table storage area 433b.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 434 configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow reading speed, the control program and the like are transferred to the program storage area 433a of the work RAM 433 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 431 can read the control program and the like from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls, and thus can maintain high processing performance in the display control device 314. By using the symbol display device 281, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

On the other hand, the NOR ROM 434d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 431 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 434a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 434a2, the control program stored in the second program storage area 434a1 can be surely transferred to the program storage area 433a. Therefore, the character ROM 434 can start up the MPU 431 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 434d having an extremely small capacity, and thus the cost increase of the character ROM 434 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

When the boot process is completed, next, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 433a of the work RAM 433 (S2202). Specifically, processing such as initializing the MPU 431 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 433, the resident video RAM 435, and the normal video RAM 436 is performed. Further, the work RAM 433 is provided with various flags, and an initial value is set to each flag. Note that “OFF” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 437, the image drawing is performed on the image controller 437 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 281. And instructing execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 281. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 281 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, immediately after the power is turned on, by checking whether the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, the pachinko machine 200 is It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation has started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 435a of the resident video RAM 435 (S2203). The transfer instruction includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 434 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 435), and the transfer destination. The start address of the power-on main image area 435a is included, and the image controller sends image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 434 to the power-on main image of the resident video RAM 435 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the area 435a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 437 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 431. The MPU 431 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction is completed by receiving the transfer end signal. When the image controller 437 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, it transfers transfer end information indicating the end of transfer to a register provided inside the image controller 437 or a partial area of the internal memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 431 reads the information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 437, thereby recognizing that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do it.

The image data transferred to the main image area 435a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 435a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 437 by the processing of S2203, the power-on fluctuation image is then generated. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the power-on variation image area 435b of the resident video RAM 435 (S2204). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 434 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 435). , The start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 435b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller, in accordance with this transfer instruction, outputs image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 435b. The image data transferred to the power-on variable image area 435b is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 435b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 437 by the processing of S2204, then the simple image display flag 433c is used. Is turned on (S2205). Thus, while the simple image display flag 433c is on, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 64(a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 434 to transfer the image is executed (see S3002 in FIG. 64A).

Further, the simple image display flag 433c indicates that all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 434 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. Accordingly, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 53B), the simple command is executed so that the image-on-image (image-on-main image or image-on-variant image) shown in FIG. 33 is drawn. The determination process (see S2408 in FIG. 53B) and the simple display setting process (see S2409 in FIG. 53B) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 200, since the NAND type flash memory 434a is used as the character ROM 434, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 435 due to the slow reading speed, It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 281, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 435, the player or a person related to the hall, when turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 281. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 314 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 314. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 when the power is turned on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 435. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without any fear that the operation is stopped.

Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 281, so that the third symbol display device 281 starts its operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It is possible to immediately check that the operation check efficiency is deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 434.

Further, in the display control device 314 of the pachinko machine 200, the power-on main image is also transferred to the resident video RAM 435 from the character ROM 434 together with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 281, there is a ball (start winning) in the first ball entrance 264, and the start instruction of the variation effect is voice lamp control from the main controller 310. If it is through the device 313, that is, if the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. 33B and 33C is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, A simple variable effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple change effect even while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281, but the character ROM 434 is displayed. Since it is composed of the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data, so that the main image continues to be displayed at the time of power-on after power-on. However, in the pachinko machine 200, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 435 after power-on, immediately after power-on, for example, power failure recovery. Immediately after that, even when the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S2205, the interrupt permission is set (S2206), and thereafter, the main process executes the infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2206, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 431 of the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 314, the MPU 431 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 433 (S2301), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 431 of the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 39) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 437, the image controller 437 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 437 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated by the image controller 437 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 431. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 437 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 437 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process or the display process has not been completed, so that the drawing of a new image may be started during the drawing of an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer that stores the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 53B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 433c is turned on (S2401), and the simple image display flag 433c is not turned on, that is, If it is off (S2401: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 435 has been completed, so that it is not the power-on image shown in FIG. 33 but the normal effect. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 281, a command determination process (S2402) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2403) is executed.

In the command determination processing (S2402), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 313 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing is analyzed, and the processing according to the command is executed and the display demo command and When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 433d, and the display data table is opposed to the set display data table. The transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 433f. If the continuous notice command is stored, the continuous notice additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice image type is set in the additional data table buffer 433e.

In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 millisecond. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 310, when it is determined to start the variation effect, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the stop type command, the continuous notice command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode of the variation effect or the continuous notice effect selected by the main control device 310 or the voice lamp control device 313, and the effect image according to the mode. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to display on the third symbol display device 281. Details of this command interrupt processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 54 to 58.

In the display setting process (S2403), in the third symbol display device 281 based on the contents of the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 433d and the additional data table buffer 433e by the command determination process (S2402) and the like. The content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specifically specified. Further, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is determined according to the processing situation and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect is set in the display data table buffer 433d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 59 to 63.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2404). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third display device 281 that is specified by the display setting process (S2403) or the simple display setting process (S2409). The type of sprite (display object) is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2405). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 433c is on, the image controller 437 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 from the character ROM 434 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 435. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 433b is off, predetermined image data from the character ROM 434 for normal use is sent to the image controller 437 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 433f. When a transfer instruction for transferring to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 436a of the video RAM 436 is set, and even when a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 313, the image controller 437 is continuously operated. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the preview production or the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 434 to the predetermined sub area of the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S2406). In this drawing process, from the types of various sprites that form one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S2404), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2405). , The drawing list shown in FIG. 39 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 437 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 437 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 66.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display device 314 is executed (S2407). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2407, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 433, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, time saving jackpot, front/rear outreach, reach other than front/rear outreach). , Complete disengagement) is compared with the stop type table corresponding to the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2401, if it is determined that the simple image display flag is ON (S2401: Yes), it means that transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 has not been completed. , In order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 33 on the third symbol display device 281, a simple command determination process (S2408) is executed, then a simple display setting process (S2409) is executed, and the process of S2404. Move to.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 54 to 58, details of the above-described command determination processing (S2402) which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 431 of the display control device 314 will be described. First, FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 54, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2501), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2501: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2403) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2502), and then the command The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2503).

Then, first of all the unprocessed commands, it is determined whether or not there is a display reserved ball count command (S2504), and if there is a display reserved ball count command (S2504: Yes), the reserved ball count command processing is performed. Is executed (S2505), and the process returns to S2501.

Here, the details of the reserved ball number command processing (S2505) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55A is a flow chart showing the reserved ball number command processing. This reserve ball number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display reserve ball number command received from the voice lamp control device 314.

In the hold ball number command processing, first, a new hold ball number command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S2403) that the display hold ball number command has been processed is turned on (S2601), and then the display hold command is executed. Information on the number of reserved balls included in the number-of-balls command is acquired (S2602). In the process of S2602, if two or more display reserved ball number commands are stored in the command buffer area, the reserved ball number information is acquired from the last stored display reserved ball number command. Thereby, the latest information on the number of reserved balls can be acquired.

Then, among the number determination flags provided for each number of retained balls, the number determination flag corresponding to the number of retained balls acquired in the process of S2602 is turned on, and the number determination flags corresponding to the other number of retained balls are turned off. (S2603), the process returns to the command determination process.

Thereby, in the display setting process, when the new holding sphere number command flag is on, by referring to the number determination flag, the number of holding spheres for the number of holding spheres corresponding to the number determination flag that is set to ON The reserved image data is expanded so that is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

Returning to FIG. 54, if it is determined in the process of S2504 that there is no display reserved ball count command (S2504: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display commit command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display confirmation command (S2506) (Yes in S2506), the confirmation command process is executed (S2507) and the process returns to S2501.

Details of the confirmation command process (S2507) will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 55B is a flowchart showing the confirmation command process. This confirmation command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display confirmation command received from the voice lamp control device 314.

In the confirmation command processing (S2507), the confirmation command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S2403) that the display confirmation command has been received in the ON state is set to ON (S2611), this processing is terminated, and the command determination is executed. Return to processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, the state of the confirmation command flag is monitored, and when the flag is turned on, the display of the confirmation display effect is started on the third symbol display device 281 so that the display of the confirmation display effect is started. To execute. Further, when the display setting of the variable effect is processed, the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 if the confirmed command flag is not turned on even after the effect time set for the variable effect is elapsed. The display setting process is executed so that the display is set.

Returning to FIG. 54, if it is determined in the process of S2506 that there is no display confirmation command (S2506: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display demo command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is a display demo command (S2508: Yes), the demo command process is executed (S2509) and the process returns to S2501.

Details of the demo command process (S2509) will be described below with reference to FIG. 55(c). FIG. 55C is a flowchart showing the demo command processing. This demo command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display demo command received from the voice lamp control device 314.

In the demo command process (S2509), first, a demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is selected from the data table storage area 433b and set in the display data table buffer 433d (S2621). Next, it is necessary to write the None data in the additional data table buffer 433e to clear its contents, and in the demonstration display data table, it is necessary to newly transfer the image data necessary for drawing from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436. Since the drawing of the image is regulated so as not to exist, since the corresponding transfer data table is not prepared in the data table storage area 433b, the None data is also written in the transfer data table buffer 433f to clear the contents (S2622). ).

Next, the time data corresponding to the demo display is set in the clock counter 433i (S2623), and the pointer 433g is initialized to 0 (S2624). Then, the demo display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is displayed in the ON state on the third symbol display device 281 is set to ON, and the final display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in the ON state. The fixed display flag shown is set to OFF, and the fixed display flag indicating that the fixed display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to OFF (S2625), the demo command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this demo command process, in the display setting process, the pointer 433g initialized by the process of S2624 is updated, while the demo display data table set in the display data table buffer 433d by the process of S2621 is updated. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 433g is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 281 is specified. In the display setting process, the time for the demonstration effect defined by the demo display data table is measured using the time counter 433i in which the time data corresponding to the demo display is set in the process of S2623, and the process of S2625 is performed. Based on the states of the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag set by, the display setting control timing counter 433i timed, when it is determined that the demonstration effect in the demonstration display data table is finished, the effect to be displayed next As a result, control is performed so that the demonstration effect is displayed again.

Returning to FIG. 54, if it is determined in the process of S2508 that there is no display demo command (S2508: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands. (S2510), if there is a display variation pattern command (S2510: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S2511), and processing returns to S2501.

Details of the variation pattern command processing (S2511) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 314.

In the variation pattern command processing (S2509), first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 433b. And sets it in the display data table buffer 433d (S2631).

Here, since the judgment of the start of fluctuation is always made in the main control device 310 for several seconds or more, no more than two fluctuation pattern commands for display are received within 20 milliseconds. It is not possible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area when executing, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is erroneously displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2631, in the case where it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the variation display data corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. The table is set in the display data table buffer 433d.

If a display data table for change corresponding to a change pattern having a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 433d, the change control having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually the main control. When instructed by the device 310, while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 281, a confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 310. ) Is received, and the changing third symbol is suddenly stopped and displayed, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, by setting the display data table for change corresponding to the change pattern having the shortest change time in the display data table buffer 433d, it is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuating effect having the fluctuating time is instructed by the main control device 310, as will be described later, after the fluctuating effect according to the display data table buffer 433d ends, the confirmation command from the main control device 310. The display of the third symbol display device 281 is controlled by the display setting process so that the restart effect is displayed until the (display confirmation command) is received, so that the player changes the restart effect. It can be visually recognized as a part of the effect, and the variation of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 281 can be continuously observed without a feeling of strangeness until the stop display of the third symbol is confirmed.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2631 is determined, read from the data table storage area 433b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 433f (S2632). Then, the contents are cleared by writing the None data in the additional data table buffer 433e (S2633).

After that, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the process of S2631 is turned on, and other The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variable display data table is set to OFF (S2634). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set in the process of S2634, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 433d corresponds to. Can be judged. Then, in the display setting process, it is determined whether or not there is a contradiction between the fluctuation pattern of the set fluctuation display data table and the stop design set by the display stop type command received later, and if there is a contradiction As will be described later, the display data table corresponding to the special variation is set in the display data table buffer 433d.

Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 433d by the process of S2631, time data representing the variation time is set in the clock counter 433i (S2635), The pointer 433g is initialized to 0 (S2636). Then, the confirmation command flag, the demo display flag, and the confirmation display flag are all set to OFF (S2637), and further, the restart timer counter used in the display setting process is initialized to 0 (S2638), and the variation pattern command is set. Ends and returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 433g initialized by the processing of S2636 is updated, while the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 433d by the processing of S2631. From the drawing, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 433g is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 281 is specified, and at the same time, it is defined at the address indicated by the pointer 433g. The image controller 437 is configured to extract the transferred transfer data information and transfer the necessary sprite image data in the set display data table for fluctuation from the character ROM 434 to the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436 in advance. Control.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 433i in which the time data corresponding to the demo display is set in the process of S2635 is used to measure the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table, and the fluctuation display data is displayed. When it is determined that the fluctuating effect in the table has ended, when the confirmation command (display confirming command) from the main control device 310 is received, the fixed display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 and predetermined after the fluctuating effect ends. If the confirmation command (display confirmation command) cannot be received within the time, the display setting is controlled so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

Here, if both the confirmation command for display and the variation pattern command for display are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if the process corresponding to the confirmation command for display is prioritized, Since the variation effect accompanying the variation pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to prioritize the processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command. On the other hand, in this command determination process, since the presence/absence of the display confirmation command is determined first, the confirmation command process that is a process corresponding to the display confirmation command is always executed first, while the display command is displayed. The process corresponding to the display variation pattern command is executed later, and like the process of S2637, the confirmation command flag set by the display confirmation command can be turned off by overwriting. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display confirmation command, and the variation effect accompanied by the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

Similarly, if both the display demo command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if the processing corresponding to the display demo command is given priority, Since the variation effect associated with the variation pattern command will not be performed, it is necessary to prioritize the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display. On the other hand, in this command determination process, since the presence/absence of the display demo command is determined first, the demo command process, which is the process corresponding to the display demo command, is always executed first, while the display command Processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command is executed later, and the display data table for demonstration set in the display data table buffer 433d by the display demonstration command is overwritten to the display data table for variation by overwriting as in the processing of S2631. You can Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display demo command, and the variation effect associated with the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

Returning to FIG. 54, if it is determined in the process of S2510 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2510: No), then it is determined whether or not the unprocessed command includes a display stop type command. If there is a display variation type command (S2512) (S2511: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S2513), and the process returns to S2501.

Here, details of the stop type command processing (S2513) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 314.

In the fluctuation type command processing, first, a stop corresponding to the stop type information (either 15R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, time saving big hit, front-rear reach, non-front-rear reach, complete disconnection) indicated by the display stop type command The type table is determined (S2641), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 53B) is executed, and the third symbol The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the display device 281 is finally set (S2642).

Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2642 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. It is set to OFF (S2643).

Here, as described above, in the display data table for change, after the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the change based on the data table, type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281. As, offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2642 is described. In the above-described task process (S2404), after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2642 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2643, and the specified stop The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 435d of the resident video RAM 435 as described above.

After the process of S2643, the comparison flag is then turned on (S2644), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process. By turning on this comparison flag, in the display setting process, there is no contradiction between the variation pattern of the variation display table set by the variation pattern command setting process and the stop symbol set by the process of S2642. If there is a contradiction, the display data table corresponding to the special fluctuation is set in the display data table buffer 433d as described later.

It should be noted that the main controller 310 always determines the start of the fluctuation at a time of several seconds or more, so that no two or more display stop type commands are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is not possible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command erroneously stops display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2641, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type is stopped. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set by the process of S2642.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is set, the jackpot stop symbol will be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 even if the jackpot is actually off. There was a risk that the pachinko machine 200 was mistaken for the gaming state and the reliability of the pachinko machine 200 was reduced. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set, and in fact, if it is a big hit, the complete disengagement stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Also, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 200 shifts to the jackpot state, it is possible to please the player.

Returning to FIG. 54, if it is determined in the process of S2512 that there is no display stop type command (S2512: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a continuous notice command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is a continuous announcement command (S2514) (S2514: Yes), the continuous announcement command process is executed (S2515), and the process returns to S2501.

Here, the details of the continuous notice command process (S2515) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57(a) is a flowchart showing the continuous notice command processing. This continuous advance notice command process executes a process corresponding to the continuous advance notice command received from the voice lamp control device 314.

In the consecutive notice command processing, first, a new consecutive notice command flag that notifies the transfer setting processing (S2405) that the consecutive notice command is processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2651). Next, determine the additional data table for continuous notification corresponding to the continuous notification image type (either "bubble", "egg", "chick", "chicken", or "chicken group") indicated by the continuous notification command. The determined additional data table for continuous notice is read from the data table storage area 433b and set in the additional data table buffer 433e.

Thus, in the display setting process, for the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433d, the continuous notification corresponding to the continuous notice additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 433e by the process of S2652. The display content of the image for the next one frame in the third symbol display device 281 is specified so that the notice effect is additionally displayed.

After that, among the continuous notice image determination flags provided for each continuous notice image type, the continuous notice determination flag corresponding to the continuous notice image type included in the continuous notice command is turned on, and the continuous notice image types corresponding to other continuous notice image types are turned on. The advance notice determination flag is set to OFF (S2652), the continuous advance notice command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the transfer setting process, when it is detected that the new consecutive notice command flag set by the process of S2651 is turned on, it is determined that the predetermined notice additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 433e by the consecutive notice command process. The determination is made, and the continuous notice type corresponding to the continuous notice additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 433e is specified from the continuous notice determination flag set in the process of S2652. Then, the image controller 437 is instructed to transfer the image data necessary to display the specified continuous notice type.

Returning to FIG. 54, if it is determined in the process of S2514 that there is no continuous advance notice command (S2514: No), then it is determined whether or not the unprocessed command includes a back image change command (S2516). ), if there is a back image change command (S2516: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S2517), and the process returns to S2501.

Here, the details of the back image change command process (S2517) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57B is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the voice lamp control device 314.

In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag for notifying the transfer setting process (S2405) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S2661). Then, among the back surface image discrimination flags provided for each back surface image type (back surface A to C), the back surface image discrimination flag corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on, and other back surface images The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S2662), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S2661 is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the back image determination flag set by the process of S2662. When the specified back image type is the back image B or the back image C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 437 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the predetermined sub area of the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed depending on the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, the rear surface image determination flag set in S2662 indicates that The type of the back image to be displayed at the time point is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored (resident Video RAM 435 or normal video RAM 436) and the address of that RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 222 within 20 milliseconds or less, there is no reception of two or more back surface image change commands within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination processing is executed. If there are two or more backside image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some commands may change due to the effects of noise, and another command may change the backside image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2662, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. It is also possible to extract any one back image change command and turn on the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 200, it is preferably set appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 200.

Returning to FIG. 54, if it is determined in the process of S2516 that there is no back image change command (S2516: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a frame button operation command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is a frame button operation command (S2518: Yes), the frame button operation command process is executed (S2519) and the process returns to S2501.

Here, details of the frame button operation command process (S2519) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58A is a flowchart showing the frame button operation command processing. The frame button operation command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the frame button operation command received from the voice lamp control device 314.

In the frame button operation command, the frame button operation flag indicating that the frame button has been operated in the ON state is set to ON (S2671), this process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, based on the frame button operation flag set by the process of S2671, the frame button was operated while the super reach selection screen was displayed on the third symbol display device 281 according to the variable display data table. When is detected, a process for updating the type of super reach to be displayed later is executed. This allows the player to select a desired super reach effect.

Returning to FIG. 54, if it is determined in the process of S2518 that there is no frame button operation command (S2518: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2520). If there is an error command (S2520: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2521) and the process returns to S2501.

Here, details of the error command processing (S2521) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process is to execute a process corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 314.

In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S2681). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are turned off (S2682), and the error command The process ends and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2681, the error type generated is judged from the error determination flag set by the process of S2682, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process in S2682 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 281, so that the player or the person related to the hall can correctly understand the error occurrence status.

Returning to FIG. 54, when it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2520 (S2520: No), the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2522), and the process returns to S2501.

In the processing of S2501 which is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes). ), and the processes of S2502 to S2522 are executed again. Then, the processes of S2501 to S2522 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2501 that there are no unprocessed new commands, this command determination The process ends.

The simple command determination process (S2408) executed when the simple image display flag 433c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 53B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination processing, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 33, that is, the display table confirmation command and the display variation pattern. Only the command and the stop type command for display are extracted, and the process corresponding to each command is the fixed command process (see FIG. 55B), the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 56A), and the stop type. The command process (see FIG. 56(c)) is executed, and other commands are discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 56A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on becomes the display data table buffer 433d in the processing of S2631. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 435a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 435b of the resident video RAM 435. Therefore, in the process of S2632, the process of writing the None data in the transfer data table buffer 433b and clearing its contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 to 63, the details of the above-described display setting process (S2403) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 431 of the display control device 314 will be described. First, FIGS. 59 and 60 are flowcharts showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 59, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S2701), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if the new command flag is off (S2701: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, the processes of S2702 to S2710 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2711. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S2701: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the new command flag is set to off (S2702), and then S2703 to S2710. The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process of.

In the process of S2703, it is determined whether or not the new reserved sphere number command flag is on (S2703), and if the new reserved sphere number command flag is on (S2703: Yes), it is displayed in the previous command determination process. It is determined that the number of reserved balls command has been processed, and the reserved image setting process is executed (S2704).

Here, details of the held image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61A is a flowchart showing the reserved image setting process. This hold image setting process causes the third symbol display device 281 to display the number of holding balls corresponding to the number of holding balls notified from the voice lamp control device 313 in accordance with the fact that the display holding ball number command is processed. This is a process for expanding image data.

In the reserved image setting process, first, the number determination flag is referred to, and the number of holding balls corresponding to the number determination flag that is set to ON is set to the number of holding balls, which is the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 281 (see FIG. 29). The reserved image data to be displayed in () is expanded (S2751). In the task processing, based on this expanded reserved image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the reserved image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various parameters required.

In the hold image setting process, after the process of S2751, the new hold number command is set to OFF (S2752), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Returning to FIG. 59, after the reserved image setting process (S3104) or in the process of S2703, if it is determined that the new reserved sphere number command flag is not on, that is, is off (S2703: No), then It is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S2705). If the error occurrence flag is on (S2705: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S2706).

Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61B is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 281, first referring to the error determination flag, and determining all the errors that are set to ON. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 281 is expanded (S2761).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various parameters required.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S2761, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S2762), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Returning to FIG. 59, after the warning image setting process (S2706) or in the process of S2705, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S2705: No), then the frame button It is determined whether or not the operation flag is ON (S2707). If the frame button operation flag is on (S2707: Yes), frame button operation processing is executed (S2708).

Here, details of the frame button operation process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61B is a flowchart showing the frame button operation processing. In this process, when the player operates the frame button 222 while the selection screen for selecting the display mode of the super reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, the super reach to be displayed is displayed according to the operation. This is a process for selecting a mode.

In the frame button operation processing, first, after setting the frame button operation flag to OFF (S2771), it is determined whether or not the super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 (S2772). This super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in accordance with the display data table for change set in the display data table buffer 433d, and the set change is made in the V interrupt process executed last time. When the image controller 437 is instructed to draw the sprite for the super reach selection screen based on the display data table for use, it is determined that the super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

Then, in the process of S2772, if it is determined that the super reach selection screen is not displayed on the third symbol display device 281 (S2772: No), the frame button operation process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the display setting process. On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S2772, if it is determined that the super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 (S2772: Yes), the super reach type flag provided for each display mode of the super reach is set. Among them, according to a predetermined order, only the super-reach type flag corresponding to one display mode is turned on, and the other super-reach type flags are updated so as to be turned off (S2773), Return to the display setting process.

In the present embodiment, when defining the display of the super reach of the mode selected by the player in the variable display data table, the drawing content corresponding to the display mode of each super reach is defined for each address. In the display setting process, when the contents of the display data table are expanded in the process of S2712 described later, only the drawing contents corresponding to the display mode of the super reach in which the super reach type flag is turned on are extracted. As a result, in the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) corresponding to the display mode of the selected super reach is specified, and for each sprite, it is necessary to draw the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle. Since various parameters are set, the super reach effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in the selected display mode.

Returning to FIG. 59, after the frame button operation process (S2708) or in the process of S2707, if it is determined that the frame button operation flag is not on, that is, it is off (S2707: No), then the comparison is performed. It is determined whether the flag is on (S2709). If the comparison flag is on (S2709: Yes), the comparison process is executed (S2710).

Here, details of the comparison process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the comparison process. This process is based on the variation pattern command for display, when the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 433d and the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command are inconsistent, the variation In order to change the effect to a special variation effect in which the third symbol is variably displayed at high speed until the confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 310 via the voice lamp control device 313 is received. Processing.

In the comparison process, first, of the data table discrimination flags, the data table discrimination flag set to the ON state is specified, and the fluctuation stored in the display data table buffer 433b is determined from the specified data table discrimination flag. The type of the display data table for use is specified (S2781). Next, of the stop symbol determination flags, the stop symbol determination flag that is set to the ON state is specified, and the set stop symbol is specified from the specified stop symbol determination flag (S2782).

Then, it is determined whether or not the type of the variable display data table identified by the process of S2781 and the stop symbol identified by the process of S2782 match (S2783). As described above, the fluctuation display data table is prepared for each fluctuation pattern. For each fluctuation pattern, there is a deviation, 15R confirmed big hit/time saving big hit common use, 15R certainty big jackpot, 2R certainty big jackpot ··and so on. Therefore, in the process of S2783, for example, when the stop symbol is set to the jackpot symbol, it is determined that these do not match, although the variation display data table corresponds to the variation pattern for deviation. ..

In the process of S2783, if it is determined that the matches (S2783: Yes), the process proceeds to S2788, the comparison flag is set to OFF (S2788), and the process returns to the display setting process. On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not match (S2783: No), first, the display data table for special variation in which the special variation is defined is set in the display data table buffer 433d, and the additional data table buffer 433e and the transfer data table are set. By writing the None data to the buffer 433f, their contents are cleared (S2784).

Then, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the special stop symbol (for example, the symbols displayed as "3", "4", and "1" from the left column) is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to other stop symbols Is set to off (S2785), and time data corresponding to the effect time of the special variation effect is set to the clock counter 433i (S2786). As described above, the special variation effect changes the third symbol at high speed until the confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 310 via the voice lamp control device 313 is received. Since it is displayed, the effect time is set to a long time (for example, 3 minutes). Therefore, 3 minutes (180000 milliseconds)/20 milliseconds=9000 is set in the clock counter 433i as time data corresponding to the effect time of the special variation effect.

Then, the pointer 433g is initialized to 0 (S2787), the comparison flag is set to OFF (S2788), and the process returns to the display setting process.

In this way, based on the variation pattern command for display, the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 433d and the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command are inconsistent Since the display data table for change is set in the display data table buffer 433d, the special change effect in which the third symbol continues to change at high speed is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Since a special stop symbol is set as the stop symbol, when a confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 310 via the voice lamp control device 313 is received, the special stop symbol is received. Can be confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display 281.

Here, when the variation effect pattern instructed by the main control apparatus 310 via the voice lamp control apparatus 313 does not match the stop design to be displayed when the variation effect is stopped and displayed, the display control apparatus 314 uses the main control apparatus. There is a possibility that it is not possible to properly reflect the result of the lottery performed in 310 to perform the variation effect and the fixed display effect. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 200, the special variation effect is performed in such a case, and after the variation display, the special stop symbol indicating the special deviation is definitely displayed on the third symbol display device 281, so the main control device Even if the result of the lottery in 310 is off, it is possible to prevent the third symbol display device 281 from accidentally performing the jackpot confirmed display effect. Even if the special stop symbol is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 281, if the lottery result in the main control device 310 is a big hit, the gaming state in the actual pachinko machine 200 shifts to the special gaming state, so the game The player can continue playing the game without anxiety. Furthermore, by making the confirmation display a special stop design, it is possible to suggest to the player that the pachinko machine 200 may be in the jackpot state even if the confirmation display is off. Even if the confirmation display is off, the pachinko machine 200 is in a big hit state, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy.

Returning to FIG. 59, after the comparison process (S2708) or in the process of S2709, when it is determined that the comparison flag is not on, that is, it is off (S2709: No), the process proceeds to S2711. To do.

In S2711, pointer update processing is executed (S2711). Details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer updating process is performed by the corresponding drawing content or transfer from the display data table, the additional data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 433d, the additional data table buffer 433e and the transfer data table buffer 433f. This is a process of updating the pointer 433g that specifies the address from which the transfer data information of the target image data should be acquired.

In this pointer updating process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 433g (S2791). That is, in principle, the pointer 433g is updated so that 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is defined after the address “0001H”, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 433g is initialized to 0 while being stored in the data table buffer 433e, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process, so that the value is updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 433g by the process of S2791, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 433g in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433d is End information. Is determined (S2792). As a result, if it is End information (S2792: Yes), it means that the pointer 433g has been updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433d past the address at which the actual data is described.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433d is the demo display data table or the restart display data table (S2793), and the demo display data table or the restart display data is determined. If it is a table (S2793: Yes), the pointer is set to 1 (S2794), and the time corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 433d. The data is set in the clock counter 433i (S2795), and the process proceeds to S2797. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table, and therefore the demonstration effect or the restart effect is repeated on the third symbol display device 281. Can be displayed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2793, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433d is neither the demonstration display data table nor the restart display data table (S2793: No), the pointer 433g The value is subtracted by 1 (S2796), and the process proceeds to S2797. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table and the restart display data table, for example, the variable display data table or the confirmed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 433d, , Since the drawing content of the immediately preceding address in which the End information is described is always expanded, the third symbol display device 281 displays the final image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. be able to.

When it is determined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433d that the data at the address indicated by the pointer 433g updated by the processing in S2791 is not End information as a result of the processing in S2792, S2793 to S2795. The processing in step S29 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to step S2797.

In the process of S2797, it is determined whether or not the confirmation command flag is ON (S2797). If the confirmation command flag is OFF but not ON (S2797: No), the pointer update process is terminated and the display setting is performed. Return to processing. On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is on (S2797: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the main control device 310 via the voice lamp control device 313, and thus the display data table buffer. The value of the pointer 433g is set to the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the end position address where the End information is stored in the display data buffer set to 433d (S2798), and the value of the clock counter is also set to 1. (S2799), the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, when the confirmation command is received, in the display setting process, the drawing content defined at the end of the set display data table can be expanded and the start of the confirmed display effect can be controlled.

Returning to FIG. 59, after the pointer updating process, the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 433d and the additional data table buffer 433e are used to change the address indicated by the pointer 433g updated by the pointer updating process. The drawing contents are expanded (S2712). In the task processing, the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the processing of S2712 along with the pending image and the warning image that were previously developed, and for each sprite. , Various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined. When None data is described in the additional data table, the subsequent processing is executed assuming that there is no sprite to be added. When the additional data table buffer 433e is cleared with the None data, the None data is always expanded from the additional data table buffer 433e.

Then, the value of the clock counter g is decremented by 1 (S2713), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 433i after the subtraction is 0 or less (S2714). Then, when the value of the clock counter 433i is 1 or more (S2714: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 433i is 0 or less (S2714: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433d has elapsed. At this time, if the display data table for change is set in the display data table buffer 433d, a finalizing command (display finalizing command) from the main control device 310 via the voice lamp control device 314 is performed at the end of the effect. ) Is to be transmitted, it is confirmed in the subsequent processing of S2715 whether the confirmation command flag is ON (S2715).

As a result, if the confirmation command flag is on (S2715: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the main control device 310 via the voice lamp control device 314. The display data table is set in the display data table buffer 433d, and the None data is written in each of the additional data table buffer 433e and the transfer data table buffer 433f to clear their contents (S2716). Next, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the fixed display is set in the clock counter 433i (S2717), and the value of the pointer 433g is further initialized to 0 (S2718). Then, the confirmation command flag is set to OFF (S2719), and then the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the 0 state is set to ON (S2720), and the content of the stop symbol determination flag is kept as it is in the work RAM 433. Is copied to the previously stopped symbol determination flag provided in (S2721), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, in the case where the display data table for variation is set in the display data table buffer 433d, etc., the confirmation command (display confirmation When the command) is received, the drawing content can be set so that the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b to the fixed display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 431 is not heavily loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 314, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 281.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S2721 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in the variation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating effect is changed in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed immediately before, and in the fluctuating display data table, fluctuation based on the data table is performed. From the start of until a predetermined time elapses, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2404), until the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of variation, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S2721, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S2715, if the confirmation command flag is OFF instead of ON (S2715: No), the process proceeds to S2721 shown in FIG. 60, and it is determined whether or not the confirmation display flag is ON (S2722). ). If the confirmed display flag is on (S2722: Yes), the result of the determination in the process of S2714 (S2714: Yes) means that the confirmed display effect has ended, so the confirmed display flag is set to off. After that (S2723), the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 433d (S2724), and then time data corresponding to the presentation time of the data display is set in the clock counter 433i (S2725). Then, the pointer 433g is initialized to 0 (S2726), the demo display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is in the ON state is set to ON (S2727), and the V interrupt processing ends.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display demonstration effect command indicating the start of the demonstration effect is not received by the end of the fixed display effect, automatically, The drawing content can be set so that the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

It is to be noted that the branch condition of S2722: Yes is satisfied when the fixed display effect is performed, and in this case, the contents of both the additional data table buffer 433e and the transfer data table buffer 433f are processed by the processing of S2717. It has been cleared. Therefore, in the process of S2724, the clearing process of those data table buffers is omitted. As a result, the processing load on the MPU 431 can be reduced.

In the process of S2722, if the confirmed display flag is not on but on (S2722: No), then it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (S2728). If the demo display flag is on (S2728: Yes), the result of the determination in the process of S2714 (S2714: Yes) means that the demonstration effect has ended, so the display setting process is terminated and V Return to interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

On the other hand, in the process of S2728, when the demo display flag is not on but on (S2728: No), the determination result (S2714: Yes) in the process of S2714 means that the variable effect has ended. Therefore, if the confirmation command is not received within a predetermined time after the variation effect is finished, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect is set in the display data table buffer 433d in order to start the restart effect. In response to this, 1 is added to the restart timer counter initialized to 0 (S2729), and it is determined whether or not the value of the restart timer counter after addition has reached a predetermined value (S2730).

Then, when the restart timer counter is not the predetermined value (S2730: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. If the restart timer counter has a predetermined value (S2730: Yes), the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 433d, and the None data is stored in the additional data table buffer 433e and the transfer data table buffer 433f, respectively. Are written to clear their contents (S2731). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time of the restart effect is set in the clock counter 433i (S2732), the value of the pointer 433g is further initialized to 0 (S2732), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, in the display control device, even if a predetermined time elapses after the third symbol is stopped and displayed due to the end of the fluctuating effect, the confirmation command (transmitted from the main control device 310 via the voice lamp control device 313 ( If the display confirmation command) is not received, the drawing content can be set so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Then, as described above, the restart effect is an effect in which the image in which the third symbol is vibrated is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, so the player uses the third symbol on the third symbol display device 281. When it is visually recognized that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the fluctuation of is stopped and displayed, it can be recognized that the stopped symbol is not fixed at that time.

After the last drawing content defined by the restart display data table is expanded, the drawing content is expanded from the beginning of the restart display data table again by the pointer updating process described above. Therefore, the restart effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 281 until a display confirmation command is received from the voice lamp control device 313 or a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S2409) executed when the simple image display flag 433c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 53B) is the same as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, when the confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the main control device 310 via the voice lamp control device 313 after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image is finished, It is specified that one of the power-on fluctuation images (one of FIG. 33(b) and (c)) corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time is stopped and displayed. A process of setting the display data table in the display data table buffer 433i is performed. In addition, when the confirmation command (display confirmation command) to be originally received from the main control device 310 via the voice lamp control device 313 is not accepted after the production time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends. The process of setting the display data table that defines restarting the variation effect of the variation image at power-on in the display data table buffer 433d is performed.

Further, in the comparison process, the variation pattern instructed by the display variation pattern command is compared with the stop type instructed by the display stop type, and if they do not match, the symbol is a disengagement symbol as a stop symbol (see FIG. 33 ( Set c)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 64 and FIG. 65, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2405) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 431 of the display control device 314 will be described. First, FIG. 64A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 433c is on (S3001). If the simple image display flag 433c is on (S3001: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 has not been transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, so the resident image transfer setting is performed. The process is executed (S3002), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the main process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 is set to the image controller 437. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3001, if the simple image display flag 433c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3001: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 is stored in the resident video from the character ROM 434. It has been transferred to the RAM 435. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S2603), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the main process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 434 is performed to the normal video RAM 436. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3002), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2405) executed by the MPU 431 of the display control device 314, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3002).

In the resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer image data that has not been transferred is issued to the image controller 437 (S3101), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3101: Yes). ) Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 437 is completed (S3102). In the process of S3102, when the image controller 437 is instructed to transfer the image data and then a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 437, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. If it is determined by the processing in S3102 that the transfer processing has not ended (S3102: No), the image transfer processing is being continued in the image controller, so this resident image transfer setting processing ends. To do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3102: Yes), the process proceeds to S3103. Further, as a result of the processing of S3101, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 437 (S3101: No), the processing proceeds to S3103.

In the process of S3103, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 has been transferred (S3103). A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 437 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 (S3104), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 437 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 437 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 437 to the resident video RAM 436. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 434 in which the resident image data is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 435), and transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 435 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 437 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 434, and transfers it to the specified address of the specified video RAM. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 431.

If all the resident target image data have been transferred as a result of the processing in S3103 (S3103: Yes), the simple image display flag 433c is set to OFF (S3105), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 54B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2408 of FIG. 54B) and the simple display setting process (see S2409 of FIG. 54B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 54 to 58) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 59 to 63) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 281 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 434 is performed on the normal video RAM 436 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 65) (see S3001: No in FIG. 64(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 431 should be resident in the resident video RAM 435 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435. Then, the MPU 431 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 435 is retained without being overwritten during power-on. Accordingly, the image data transferred to the 435 by the resident video RAM 435 becomes resident in the resident video RAM 435 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 is transferred to the resident video RAM 435, the display control device 314 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 435 while using the image controller. At 437, an image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 435, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 434 composed of the NAND flash memory 434a whose reading speed is slow at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 282.

In particular, in the resident video RAM 435, image data of frequently-displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main controller 310, a sound lamp controller 313, and a display controller 314 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 434 is configured with the NAND flash memory 434a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing are performed. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, a normal image transfer setting process (S3003) that is one process of the transfer setting process (S2405) executed by the MPU 431 of the display control device 314 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3003).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, with the pointer 433g updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 433f by the pointer updating process (S2711) of the previously executed display setting process (S2403). The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3201). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3202), and if it is transfer data information (S3202: Yes), the character ROM 434 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Of the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address), and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 436) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 433 ( In step S3203, the transfer start flag indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3204), and the process proceeds to step S3205.

In the process of S3202, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but None data (S3202: No), the processes of S3203 and S3204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3205. In the process of S3205, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction of image data is set to the image controller 437 after the previous transfer process is completed (S3205), and if the transfer instruction is set (S3205: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 437 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3206).

In the process of S3206, after the transfer instruction of the image data is set to the image controller 437, and when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 437, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. If it is determined by the process of S3206 that the transfer process is not completed (S3206: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed by the image controller 437, and thus the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3206: Yes), the process proceeds to S3207. Further, as a result of the process of S3205, even when the image data transfer instruction is not set to the image controller 437 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3205: No), the process proceeds to S3207.

In the process of S3207, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3207). If the transfer start flag is on (S3207: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3208), the image data indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3203 is set as the transfer target image, and the process proceeds to S3216. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but on (S3207: No), then it is determined whether or not the new continuous notice command flag is on (S3209).

If the new continuous notice command flag is on (S3209: Yes), it means that the continuous notice command is processed and the continuous notice additional data table for the continuous notice effect is set in the additional data table buffer 733c. Therefore, after the new continuous notice command flag is set to OFF (S3210), the image data of the continuous notice image corresponding to the continuous notice determination flag in the ON state among the continuous notice determination flags provided for each continuous notice image type. The start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 434 in which is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 436) are specified (S3211), and the specified various types are specified. After the image data indicated by the information is set as the transfer target image, the process proceeds to S3216.

In the process of S3209, if the new continuous notice command flag is not on but on (S3209: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S3212). If the back image change flag is on (S3212: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S3212), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Of the discrimination flags, the start address (storage source top address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 434 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer The start address of the destination (normal video RAM 436) is specified (S3214), the image data indicated by the specified various pieces of information is set as the transfer target image, and the process proceeds to S3216.

If the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back image A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, and therefore, the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 436. There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S3214, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back face A, the normal image transfer process is ended as it is.

In the process of S3216, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image is already stored in the normal video RAM 436 (S3216). The determination in the process of S3216 is performed by referring to the stored image determination flag 433j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image is read from the stored image determination flag 433j, and if the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is stored in the normal video RAM 436. It is determined that the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is not stored in the normal video RAM 436 if the storage state is “OFF”.

Then, as a result of the processing in S3216, if the transfer target image is stored in the normal video RAM 436 (S3216: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436. The normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is. This can prevent wasteful transfer from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436, and can reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 314 and the traffic on the bus line 440. it can.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S3216, if the transfer target image is not stored in the normal video RAM 436 (S3216: Yes), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image is set (S3217). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 437 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image, and the image controller 437 uses the transfer data information described in the drawing list as the basis. In addition, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 437 to the normal video RAM 436. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 434 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 436), and transfer destination (transfer here). The sub address provided in the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436 for storing the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 437 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 434, and transfers it to the specified address of the specified video RAM. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 431.

After the processing of S3217, the stored image discrimination flag 433j is updated (S3218), and this normal transfer setting processing is ended. As described above, the stored image discrimination flag 433j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image to “on”, and also in the sub area of the same image storage area 436a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored to "off".

As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process for the continuous notice command is executed in the previously executed command determination process and corresponds to the continuous notice image indicated by the continuous notice command. When the additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 433e, the image data of the continuous notice image used in the additional data table can be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, if the back image of the resident video RAM 435 is included in the image data used for the back image. Image data not stored in the image area 435c can be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is set in the display data table buffer 433d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the voice lamp control device 313, and the display data table Since the corresponding transfer data table is set in the transfer data table 344d, the sprite image data used in the display data table can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 at a desired timing.

Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 436a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the image storage area 436a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 436a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 434 is composed of the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 434 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 436. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436.

In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 in units of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, details of the above-described drawing process (S2406) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 431 of the display control device 314 will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S2404) and the parameters (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) necessary for drawing each sprite. , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2405), the drawing list shown in FIG. 39 is generated (S3301). That is, in the process of S3301, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites that form one frame determined in the task process. The parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of sprites to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image for one frame, and the sprite order after the rearrangement is set to the detail for each sprite. As the detailed drawing information (detailed information), the drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. Further, when a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process, the start address and the end address of the character ROM 434 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information are stored at the end of the drawing list. The (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 436) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 435 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 431 is According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 433k are transmitted to the image controller (S3302). Here, if the drawing target buffer flag 433k is 0, and if the drawing target buffer flag 433k is 1 including the information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 436b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 436c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 431, the image controller 437 draws images in order from the sprite described at the beginning of the drawing list, and develops the images by overwriting in the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list includes transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 434 in which the transfer target image data is stored are calculated from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 436) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address are sequentially read from the character ROM 434 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 437a. After that, when the normal video RAM 436 is in the unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 437a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 436. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 436 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 431 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 437 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and outputs the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 281. Send to. Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 281, and the drawing process and the display process can be simultaneously processed in parallel. You can

In the drawing process, after the process of S3302, the drawing target buffer flag 433k is updated (S3303). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 433k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and setting it to "0" when it is "1". Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 436b and the second frame buffer 436c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 431 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 437 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process is executed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 53) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 436b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 436c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 436c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed The first frame buffer 436b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 436b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 436c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 436b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 436c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 436b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 436c. .. After that, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 436b or the second frame buffer 436c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, the display processing of the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image of one frame.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 200 of the fifth embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 431 and the fixed value data are stored in the dedicated program ROM (for example, the above-mentioned patent A NAND type capable of achieving a large capacity in a small area for the purpose of storing data of many images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 instead of providing and storing the ROM 22) of Reference 1. It is stored in the character ROM 434 constituted by the flash memory 434a. As a result, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing control programs and the like, so that the number of parts in the display control device 314 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the failure occurrence rate can be increased due to the increase in the number of parts. Can be suppressed.

Further, fixed value data such as control programs and various data tables stored in the NAND flash memory 434a (second program storage area 434a1) is stored in the program storage area 433a provided in the work RAM 433 when the boot process is executed by the MPU 431 or Transferred to the data table storage area 433b, the MPU 431 executes various processes by referring to the control program and the like stored in the program storage area 433a and the like. That is, the MPU 431 does not directly read the control program or the like from the NAND flash memory 434a having a low read speed, but reads the control program or the like from the work RAM 433 configured by the DRAM capable of high-speed read operation to perform various controls. You can Therefore, even when the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 434 configured by the NAND flash memory 434a, if the high-performance MPU 431 is used without being limited by the reading speed of the NAND flash memory 434a, The display control device 314 can maintain high processing performance. Therefore, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the auxiliary effect unit.

In the pachinko machine 200, the NOR ROM 434d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 431 in the boot program after the system reset is released. After the system reset is released, the MPU 431 sends the instruction via the internal bus. When the address “0000H” is designated by the character ROM 434, the character ROM 434 immediately sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 434d1 of the NOR ROM 434d in the buffer RAM 434c, and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 431. Output. Since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, the MPU 431 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" within a short time after designating the address "0000H". .. Therefore, since the display main process can be activated in the MPU 431 in a short time, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 434 including the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow reading speed, the auxiliary effect in the display control device 314 can be achieved. Control of the department can be started immediately.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 200 of the fifth embodiment, the display control device 314 selects the display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the voice lamp control device 313. Then, it is read from the data table storage area 433b, stored in the display data table buffer 433d, and the pointer 433g is initialized to 0. Then, the pointer 433g is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 433g in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433d, By specifying the image content to be drawn, creating a drawing list (see FIG. 39) described later, and sending the drawing list to the image controller 437, the drawing instruction of the image is performed. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 433g, and the image as specified by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 200, in the display control device 314, the program to be executed by the MPU 431 is not changed in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the voice lamp control device 313. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 433d.

Here, like the conventional pachinko machine, when it is configured to activate the program executed by the MPU 431 every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is changed, with the diversification of the effect image. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of complicated and enormous programs, the processing capability of the display control device 314 is limited, which may limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 200, since the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 433d, the display is performed. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 314, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 281.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This is because, in the pachinko machine 200, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content cannot be predicted momentarily based on the user's operation, so the display content cannot be predicted, and thus It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each of such effects. In this manner, a display data table is prepared for each effect, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. Can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 200 is configured to preliminarily determine the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 200, in the display control device 314, an effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 (for example, according to a command from the voice lamp control device 313 (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like (for example, , When the other effect image (for example, the continuous notice effect image) is displayed in addition to the variable effect image, the additional data table corresponding to the other effect image additionally displayed is displayed in the additional data table buffer 433e. By setting the effect image, the effect image can be easily added to the base effect image and displayed. Thereby, for example, when there are 32 types of original effect images and 5 types of other effect images to be additionally displayed, the display data defined by adding another effect image for each original effect image. If a table is prepared separately, a display data table of 32×5=160 types must be prepared, but like the pachinko machine 200, a data table corresponding to another effect image is separately defined as an additional data table. Therefore, it is only necessary to prepare 32+5=37 types of displays and additional data tables, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 433b. Therefore, it is possible to store a data table corresponding to various types of effects in the capacity prepared in the data table storage area 433b, and it is possible to easily further diversify the effect images.

Further, like the present pachinko machine 200, by defining another effect image to be additionally displayed as an additional data table, after setting the display data table corresponding to the original effect image in the display data table buffer 433d, Even when the display of another effect image to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to another effect image is added without changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433d. Only by setting in the data table buffer 433e, other effect images to be additionally displayed can be added to the original effect image and easily displayed.

Further, since the additional data table has the same data structure as the display data table, the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 433e and the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 433e are set. From the table, it is possible to easily specify the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer while updating the pointer 433g at each time, and to easily create one drawing list corresponding to one frame from these. Can be generated. Therefore, even when the display performed in addition to the effect performed based on the command from the main control device 310 is determined by the voice lamp control device 313 or the like, the effect to be additionally displayed is determined. By defining the display content with the additional data table, it is possible to easily perform a variety of effect displays from a small number of data tables.

Further, in the pachinko machine 200, all the image data to be made resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 435 during the initialization process immediately after the power is turned on. Therefore, after the initialization process is completed, the resident video RAM 435 becomes resident. An image drawing process can be performed by the image controller 437 while using the generated image data. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 435, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 434 composed of the NAND flash memory 434a whose reading speed is slow at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device. In particular, image data of an image that is frequently displayed and image data of an image that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 310, the audio lamp control device 313, the display control device 314, and the like are displayed on the resident video. Since it is made resident in the RAM 435, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness from various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing to displaying an image on the third symbol display device 281.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 200, when the display data table to be used is selected according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the voice lamp control device 313, the display data table is used in the effect specified by the display data table. Of the sprite image data to be transferred, transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 435 from the character ROM 434 to the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 435, and transfer data defining transfer timing thereof. The table is set in the transfer data table buffer 433f, and every time the pointer 433g is updated, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite which is specified by the address indicated by the pointer 433g and at which the transfer should be started is acquired. Then, the transfer data information is transmitted to the image controller 437 by a transfer instruction or a drawing list.

Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 431, the image controller 437 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 434 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 436a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 436a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the image storage area 436a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 436a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 434 is composed of the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 434 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 436. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433d, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 436. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 434 is configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow read speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 281. be able to.

Further, in the pachinko machine 200, since the NAND type flash memory 434a is used as the character ROM 434, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 435 is transferred from the character ROM 434 due to its slow reading speed. It takes a long time to transfer to the resident video RAM 435, but after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is first transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, and the main image at power-on is transferred. By displaying on the 3rd symbol display device 281, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 435, the player and persons related to the hall are displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 281. The main image can be checked when the power is turned on.

Therefore, the display control device 310 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 281. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 when the power is turned on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 435. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without any fear that the operation is stopped. Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third display device 218, so that it is confirmed that the pachinko machine 200 has started its operation without any problem when the power is turned on. You can check immediately. Therefore, by using the NAND flash memory 434a having a low reading speed for the character ROM 434, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from being deteriorated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, a pachinko machine 200 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 200 according to the above-described fifth embodiment, the NOR ROM 434d is provided in the character ROM 434 configured by the NAND flash memory 434a, and most of the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the NAND flash memory 434a. In addition, the NOR ROM 434d stores a part of the boot program that is first executed in the MPU 431 after releasing the system reset in the NOR ROM 434d. Is specified, the ROM controller 434b of the character ROM 434 sets a part of the boot program stored in the NOR ROM 434d in the buffer RAM 434c, and then outputs the instruction code of the specified address to the MPU 431.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 200 according to the sixth embodiment, the display control device 81 is provided with a character ROM 534 instead of the character ROM 434 of the fifth embodiment described above. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 401 of the main control device 310 (see FIGS. 40 to 46), various processes executed by the MPU 421 of the audio lamp control device 313 (see FIGS. 47 to 51), and display control. Various processes (see FIGS. 52 to 66) executed by the MPU 431 of the device 314 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 200 in the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the fifth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 67, the character ROM 534 has a NAND flash memory 534a, a ROM controller 534b, and a buffer RAM 534c, and is connected to the bus line 440 like the character ROM 434 of the fifth embodiment.

Of these, the buffer RAM 534c has the same configuration and function as the buffer RAM 434c of the character ROM 434 in the fifth embodiment, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

The NAND flash memory 534a is a non-volatile memory provided as a storage unit in the character ROM 534. Like the NAND flash memory 434a in the fifth embodiment, the NAND flash memory 534a has at least a character storage area 534a2 for storing image (character) data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281. There is. Then, as in the fifth embodiment, the image controller 437 transfers predetermined image data out of the image data stored in the character storage area 534a2 of the character ROM 534 to the resident video RAM 435 at the time of the initialization processing, or becomes resident, When using image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435, it is transferred to and stored in the normal video RAM 436 in advance before the image data is used.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area. For example, by using the NAND flash memory 534a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, it is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Many images can be stored in the character storage area 534a2 as the images to be displayed. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be diversified and complicated. On the other hand, since the image data used for the drawing process is made resident in the resident video RAM 435 and stored in the normal video RAM 436 in advance, the character ROM 534 composed of the NAND flash memory 534a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. It is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, the drawn image can be immediately displayed and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

Further, the NAND flash memory 534a is provided with a program storage area 534a instead of the second program storage area 434a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 434a of the fifth embodiment. The program storage area 534a stores all control programs executed by the MPU 431 and fixed value data used in the control programs. That is, in the fifth embodiment, of the control programs, a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 431 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 434d, and the other control programs and fixed value data are stored in the NAND flash memory. Although stored in the memory 434a, in the sixth embodiment, all the control programs and fixed value data are stored in the NAND flash memory 534a. Since the contents of the control program and the contents of the fixed value data are the same as those in the fifth embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

Here, since the NAND flash memory 534a can be easily increased in capacity with a small area as described above, in the state in which a large amount of image data is stored in the character storage area 534a2, all the control operations are further performed. The program and fixed value data can be stored in the program storage area 534a1. In this way, the control program and the fixed value data are displayed on the third symbol display device 281 without storing the special program ROM (for example, the ROM 22 of the above-mentioned Patent Document 1) provided like the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 534 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed, the number of parts in the display control device 314 can be reduced and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as in the fifth embodiment. It is possible to suppress an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts.

Further, since the character ROM 534 in the sixth embodiment does not require the NOR ROM 434a1 as compared with the character ROM 434 in the fifth embodiment, the cost of the character ROM 534 itself can be reduced by omitting the NOR ROM 434a1. In addition, the reliability of the character ROM 534 itself can be improved by reducing the number of parts.

Like the ROM controller 434b of the character ROM 434 in the fifth embodiment, the ROM controller 534b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 534, and is transmitted from the MPU 431 or the image controller 437 via the bus line 440, for example. Based on the address, the corresponding data is read from the NAND flash memory 534a and output to the MPU 431 and the image controller 437 via the bus line 440. At this time, the ROM controller 534b performs publicly known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 534a, and reads/writes data to/from the NAND flash memory 534a while avoiding a defective data block. Data address conversion (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

As a result, even if the NAND flash memory 534a in which error bits are likely to occur frequently is used as the character ROM 534, the MPU 431 performs processing based on incorrect data, and the image controller 437 generates various images. Can be suppressed. Further, since the ROM controller 534b analyzes a defective data block of the NAND flash memory 534a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 431 and the image controller 437 cause the NAND flash memory 534a to have different defective data. The character ROM 534 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 534a is used as the character ROM 534, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 534 from becoming complicated.

Here, the ROM controller 434b of the character ROM 434 in the fifth embodiment detects one of the boot programs stored in the NOR ROM 434d when detecting that the MPU 431 has designated the address "0000H" on the bus line 440 after the system reset is released. The unit is set in the buffer RAM 4434c, and the instruction code at the designated address is output to the MPU 431. On the other hand, the ROM controller 534b of the character ROM 534 in the sixth embodiment releases the system reset in the MPU 431 from the program storage area 534a of the NAND flash memory 534a when power is supplied from the power supply device 315 to the display control device 314. A part of the boot program that is first executed later is read, and a part of the read boot program is set in the buffer RAM 534c.

That is, the ROM controller 534b is configured such that the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 534a is automatically set by the hardware immediately after the power is turned on. The NAND flash memory 534a is driven so as to read data (instruction code) for two pages. Then, by writing the data (instruction code) read from the NAND flash memory 534a to the buffer RAM 534c, a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 431 is set in the buffer RAM 534c.

Then, after a part of the boot program is set in the buffer RAM 534c, when the ROM controller 534b detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 440 by the MPU 431 in association with the system reset release, the ROM RAM 534c reads the data from the buffer RAM 534c. The instruction code at the corresponding address is output to the MPU 431. The MPU 431 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 534 and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby starting the main processing shown in FIG. 52 and starting the processing. Then, in the main process, as shown in FIG. 52, first, the boot process (S701) shown in FIG. 19 is executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 200 according to the sixth embodiment, when the power is supplied from the power supply device 315, the ROM controller 534b in the character ROM 534 first automatically releases the system reset from the NAND flash memory 534a in the MPU 431. A part of the boot program executed first later is read and a part of the read boot program is set in the buffer RAM 534c. Therefore, at the stage where the address “0000H” is designated by the MPU 431 on the bus line 440, the NAND type Either a process of reading a part of the boot program from the flash memory 534a has been started, or a part of the boot program has already been set in the buffer RAM 534c.

Therefore, if a part of the boot program is already set in the buffer RAM 534c at the stage when the MPU 431 specifies the address "0000H" on the bus line 440 in response to the system reset release, the character ROM 534 stores the data (command The code) can be immediately read from the buffer RAM 534c. Even when a part of the boot program is not set in the buffer RAM 101c at the stage when the MPU 431 specifies the address “0000H” on the bus line 440, the part of the boot program from the NAND flash memory 534a has already been written. Since the reading process has been started, the MPU 431 is more likely to start reading a part of the boot program from the NAND flash memory 534a in response to the designation of the address “0000H” on the bus line 440. After the address "0000H" is designated on the bus line 440, the character ROM 534 sets a part of the boot program in the buffer RAM 534c, and outputs the data (instruction code) at the designated address from the buffer RAM 534c to the MPU 431. It is possible to shorten the time until.

Therefore, since the MPU 431 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is designated, the MPU 431 can activate the main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 514 composed of the NAND flash memory 514a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 281 in the display control device 314 can be immediately started.

In addition, the pachinko machine 200 according to the sixth embodiment can achieve the same operational effects as the pachinko machine 200 according to the fifth embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 200 according to the fifth embodiment.

Next, a pachinko machine 200 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 68. In the pachinko machine 200 in the seventh embodiment, a character ROM 634 is provided in the display control device 314 instead of the character ROM 434 in the fifth embodiment described above. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 401 of the main control device 310 (see FIGS. 40 to 46), various processes executed by the MPU 421 of the audio lamp control device 313 (see FIGS. 47 to 51), and display control. Various processes (see FIGS. 52 to 66) executed by the MPU 431 of the device 314 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 200 in the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the fifth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 68, the character ROM 634 has a NAND flash memory 634a, a ROM controller 634b, and a buffer RAM 634c, and is connected to the bus line 440 similarly to the character ROM 434 of the fifth embodiment.

Among these, the NAND flash memory 634a, the second program storage area 634a1 and the character storage area 634a2 and the buffer RAM 634c provided in the NAND flash memory 634a are the NAND flash memory 434a of the character ROM 434 in the fifth embodiment, The NAND flash memory 434a has the same configuration and function as the second program storage area 434a1 and the character storage area 434a2 and the buffer RAM 434c provided in the NAND flash memory 434a. The data stored in the second program storage area 634a1 and the character storage area 634a2 are the same as the data stored in the second program storage area 434a1 and the character storage area 434a2. Therefore, these descriptions will be omitted below.

The ROM controller 634b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 634 similarly to the ROM controller 434b of the character ROM 434 in the fifth embodiment, and is transmitted from the MPU 431 or the image controller 437 via the bus line 440, for example. Based on the address, the corresponding data is read from the NAND flash memory 634a and output to the MPU 431 and the image controller 437 via the bus line 440. At this time, the ROM controller 634b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 634a, and to read/write data from/to the NAND flash memory 634a while avoiding defective data blocks. Data address conversion (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

As a result, even if the NAND flash memory 634a in which error bits are likely to occur frequently is used as the character ROM 634, the MPU 431 performs processing or the image controller 437 generates various images based on incorrect data. Can be suppressed. Further, since the ROM controller 634b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 634a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 431 and the image controller 437 cause the defective data blocks of different NAND flash memories 634a to differ. The character ROM 634 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 634a is used as the character ROM 634, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 634 from becoming complicated.

On the other hand, the ROM controller 634b in the seventh embodiment differs from the ROM controller 434b of the character ROM 434 in the fifth embodiment in that it has a first program storage area 634d. The first program storage area 634d is composed of a small-capacity ROM built in the ROM controller 634b, and the program stored in the first program storage area 434d1 of the NOR ROM 434d in the character ROM 434 in the fifth embodiment. That is, a part of the boot program executed first in the MPU 431 after releasing the system reset is stored in the first program storage area 634d in the seventh embodiment.

When the ROM controller 634b detects that the MPU 431 has designated the address "0000H" on the bus line 440 after releasing the system reset, it sets a part of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 634d in the buffer RAM 634c. Then, the instruction code of the designated address is output to the MPU 431. The MPU 431 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 634, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby starting the main processing shown in FIG. 52 and starting the processing. Then, in the main process, as shown in FIG. 52, first, the boot process (S2201) shown in FIG. 19 is executed.

In general, since the built-in ROM can shorten the connection wiring, the parasitic capacitance applied to the wiring can be reduced. As a result, the wiring delay that occurs in signal propagation can be reduced, and the data read time can be shortened. In addition, the built-in ROM can be designed with its data bus width freely according to the individual hardware specifications. Therefore, if the data bus width is set wide, it is possible to read many data at once. Is.

Therefore, if the first program storage area 634d is configured by such a built-in ROM, a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 431 is read from the first program storage area 634d at high speed, Data (instruction code) corresponding to the address designated on the bus line 440 can be output to the MPU 431 from the set program in the buffer RAM 634c. Therefore, since the MPU 431 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is designated, the MPU 431 can activate the main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 434 composed of the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 281 in the display control device 314 can be immediately started.

In addition, the pachinko machine 200 according to the seventh embodiment can achieve the same operational effects as the pachinko machine 200 according to the fifth embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 200 according to the fifth embodiment.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, a pachinko machine 200 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 200 according to the eighth embodiment, a character ROM 734 is provided in the display control device 314 instead of the character ROM 434 according to the fifth embodiment described above, and in the display control device 314, a NOR ROM 735 is connected to the bus line 440. Has been done. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 401 of the main control device 310 (see FIGS. 40 to 46), various processes executed by the MPU 421 of the audio lamp control device 313 (see FIGS. 47 to 51), and display control. Various processes (see FIGS. 52 to 66) executed by the MPU 431 of the device 314 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 200 in the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the fifth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 69, the character ROM 734 includes a NAND flash memory 734a, a ROM controller 734b, and a buffer RAM 734c, and is connected to the bus line 440 like the character ROM 434 of the fifth embodiment.

Among them, the NAND flash memory 734a, the second program storage area 734a1 and the character storage area 734a2 and the buffer RAM 734c provided in the NAND flash memory 734a are the NAND flash memory 434a of the character ROM 434 in the fifth embodiment, The NAND flash memory 434a has the same configuration and function as the second program storage area 434a1 and the character storage area 434a2 and the buffer RAM 434c provided in the NAND flash memory 434a. The data stored in the second program storage area 734a1 and the character storage area 734a2 are the same as the data stored in the second program storage area 434a1 and the character storage area 434a2. Therefore, these descriptions will be omitted below.

Like the ROM controller 434b of the character ROM 434 in the fifth embodiment, the ROM controller 734b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 734, and is transmitted from the MPU 431 or the image controller 437 via the bus line 440, for example. Based on the address, the corresponding data is read from the NAND flash memory 734a and output to the MPU 431 and the image controller 437 via the bus line 440. At this time, the ROM controller 734b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 734a, and reads/writes data to/from the NAND flash memory 734a while avoiding a defective data block. Data address conversion (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

As a result, even if the NAND flash memory 734a in which error bits are likely to occur frequently is used as the character ROM 734, the MPU 431 performs processing or the image controller 437 generates various images based on incorrect data. Can be suppressed. Further, since the ROM controller 734b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 734a and avoids the access to the defective data block, the MPU 431 and the image controller 437 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 734a. The character ROM 734 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 734a is used as the character ROM 734, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 734 from becoming complicated.

On the other hand, when the ROM controller 434b according to the fifth embodiment detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 440, the ROM type controller 434d causes the NOR ROM 434d to copy a part of the boot program that is first executed in the MPU 431 after the system reset is released. Although it was configured to read out and set in the buffer RAM 434c, even if the ROM controller 734b in the eighth embodiment detects that the address "0000H" is designated in the bus line 440, such an operation is performed. It is different from the ROM controller 434b in the fifth embodiment in that it is not executed.

Further, when the address of the bus line 440 is designated as a control program stored in a NOR ROM 735 described later, that is, an address corresponding to a part of a boot program first executed in the MPU 431 after the system reset is released, The ROM controller 734b differs from the ROM controller 434b in the fifth embodiment in that the data output to the bus line 440 is set to a high impedance state and the data is not output.

As a result, when the MPU 431 specifies the address corresponding to a part of the boot program to be executed first after the system reset is released on the bus line 440, the data output of the character ROM 734 becomes a high impedance state. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the address designated on the bus line 440 can be reliably output from the NOR RAM 735 to the MPU 431. Further, in this case, since unnecessary operation is not executed in the character ROM 734, it is possible to suppress wasteful power consumption in the character ROM 734.

The NOR type ROM 735 is an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) nonvolatile memory connected to the bus line 440 as described above. This NOR type ROM 735 has a first program storage area 735a. In this first program storage area 735a, the same control program as the first program storage area 434d1 of the NOR type ROM 434d in the fifth embodiment, that is, , MPU 431 stores a part of the boot program that is first executed after the system reset is released.

In this NOR type ROM 735, the address designated by the MPU 431 on the bus line 440 corresponds to a part of the boot program to be executed first after the MPU 431 releases the system reset (for example, “0000H” to “0400H”). When it is detected that the address is present, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address is read from the first program storage area 735a and output to the MPU 431.

At this time, since the data output of the character ROM 734 is set to the high impedance state as described above, the data output from the NOR ROM 735 is surely output to the MPU 431. On the other hand, the address specified in the bus line 440 is different from the control program stored in the NOR ROM 735, that is, the address corresponding to a part of the boot program to be executed first by the MPU 431 after releasing the system reset. If it is a different address, the NOR ROM 735 sets its data output to a high impedance state. Thus, when such an address is set, the data read from the memory (resident video RAM 435, normal video RAM 436, character ROM 734, etc.) corresponding to the address is surely output to the bus line 440. be able to.

Here, as in the fifth embodiment, when the system reset is released, the MPU 431 sets the value of the instruction pointer 181a to "0000H" by hardware, and also uses the instruction pointer 181a to the bus line 440. It is configured to specify the indicated address "0000H". On the other hand, when the NOR-type ROM 735 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 440, the NOR-type ROM 735 reads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 735a of the NOR-type ROM 735 and responds as described above. Output data (command code) to the MPU 431.

Then, the MPU 431 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 434, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main processing shown in FIG. 52 and starting the processing. Then, in the main process, as shown in FIG. 52, first, the boot process (S701) shown in FIG. 19 is executed.

Here, since the NOR ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, the NOR ROM 735 stores a part of the boot program to be executed first after the MPU 431 releases the system reset, and By connecting the NOR ROM 735 to the bus line 440, a part of the boot program can be read from the NOR ROM 735 at high speed and output to the MPU 431. Therefore, since the MPU 431 can immediately fetch the instruction code of the boot program that is read at high speed, the main process can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 734 composed of the NAND flash memory 734a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 281 in the display control device 314 can be immediately started.

Further, in the display control device 314 according to the eighth embodiment, since the NOR type ROM 735 is connected to the bus line 440, the number of parts is increased as compared with the fifth embodiment, but the NOR type ROM 735 is a system in which the MPU 431 is used. It is provided in order to store a part of the boot program to be executed first after the reset is released, and its capacity can be extremely small as described above. Therefore, the increase in cost due to the provision of the NOR ROM 735 can be suppressed.

In addition, the pachinko machine 200 according to the eighth embodiment can achieve the same operational effects as the pachinko machine 200 according to the fifth embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 200 according to the fifth embodiment.

The "drawing content" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "drawing information" described in the claims, and the "sprite type", "back surface type", "symbol type offset" described in the above embodiment "Corresponds to "specific information" described in the claims, "drawing list" described in the above embodiments corresponds to "instruction information" described in the claims, and described in the above embodiments The “storage RAM type and address of data of sprite (display object)” of “corresponding to “image instruction information” described in the claims, and the “transfer data information” described in the above embodiment is It corresponds to the “transfer instruction information” described in the range. Further, the "variation effect", "demo effect", "confirmed display effect", and "restart effect" described in the above embodiment correspond to the "display type" described in the claims, The "variable effect" described corresponds to the "dynamic display effect" described in the claims, and the "continuous notice effect" described in the above embodiment is the "second display type" described in the claims. The “display data table” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “first prescribed information” described in the claims, and the “additional data table” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the It corresponds to the “second regulation information” described in the range, and the “transfer data table” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “third regulation information” described in the claims. Further, the “third symbol” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “identification information” described in the claims, and the “15R certainty variation jackpot”, “2R certainty variation jackpot”, “time saving” described in the above embodiment. The “big hit” corresponds to the “predetermined game value” described in the claims. Further, the "confirmation command" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "first command" described in the claims, and the "fluctuation pattern command" described in the above embodiments is described in the claims. The "stop command" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "third command" in the claims. The "boot program" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "startup program" described in the claims.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

For example, in the above-described first to fourth embodiments, the MPU 181 directly accesses the character ROMs 187, 191, 192, 193, reads image data from the character ROMs 187, 191, 192, 193, and the resident video RAM 189 or normal video. The case of transferring to the RAM 190 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 181 transmits an image data transfer command to the image controller 187, and the image controller 181 receives the transfer command and sends an image from the character ROM 187, 191, 192, 193 to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190. You may perform the process which transfers data. In this case, the addresses of the character ROMs 187, 191, 192, 193 in which the image data to be transferred are stored, the transfer destination video RAM (resident video RAM 189 or normal video RAM 190), and the transfer destination video RAM. The address to store the image data in is specified in the transfer command transmitted by the MPU 181, and the image controller 188 is stored in the address position of the character ROM 187, 191, 192, 193 specified by this transfer command. The read image data may be stored in the specified address area of the specified transfer destination video RAM. Further, in this case, the image controller 188 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROMs 187, 191, 192, 193 in the buffer RAM 188a, and when the image controller 188 does not use the transfer destination video RAM, the buffer is used. The image data stored in the RAM 188a may be stored in the transfer destination video RAM.

On the other hand, in the fifth to eighth embodiments, the case where the image controller 437 transfers the image data from the character ROMs 434, 534, 634, 734 to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the MPU 431 may directly access the character ROMs 434, 534, 634, 734, read image data from the character ROMs 434, 534, 634, 734, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436. In this case, the MPU 431 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROMs 434, 534, 634, 734 in the buffer RAM 437a, and then the MPU 431 does not use the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 of the transfer destination. If it is not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 437a to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 of the transfer destination.

In this case, whether or not the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 of the transfer destination is unused is determined by the image controller 437 accessing the resident video RAM 435 (that is, being in use). And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 437 is accessing the normal video RAM 436 (that is, in use). ) May be provided in the image controller 437, and the MPU 431 may check the access flag corresponding to the buffer RAM of the transfer destination.

Alternatively, the MPU 431 monitors a signal transmitted/received between the image controller 437 and the resident video RAM 435 or a signal transmitted/received between the image controller 437 and the normal video RAM 436, and from the state of the signal, the resident It may be confirmed whether the video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 437 starts to access the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 or ends the access, the MPU 431 is notified of the information from the image controller 437 at any time. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 is unused.

Alternatively, when the image controller 437 scans the third symbol display device 281, whether the scanning is during the blank period (see FIG. 11), the MPU 431 confirms the driving state of the image controller 437, or the image By grasping the notification from the controller 437 and if the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that the video RAMs 435 and 436 are not in use. As a result, only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 281 of the image controller 437 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be performed easily.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPUs 181 and 431 do not manage the respective video RAMs using the addresses of the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 and the normal video RAMs 190 and 436, respectively. In the address system commonly used by the normal video RAMs 190 and 436, different address areas may be assigned to the respective video RAMs to manage the respective video RAMs. In this way, the MPUs 181 and 431 do not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 189 or 435 or normal video RAM 190 or 436) to be accessed to the image controllers 188 and 437, but simply specify the address. By simply designating, the image controllers 188, 437 can determine whether the area designated by the address is for the resident video RAMs 189, 435 or the regular video RAMs 190, 436. That is, when designating the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM from the MPU 181, 431 to the image controller 188, 437, simply specify the address set in the common address system. Since it suffices to simplify the configuration of the instruction for specifying the instruction. For example, in the fifth to eighth embodiments, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 431 to the image controller 437, the storage RAM type is not included as the information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data, and only the common address system is used. Since it suffices to specify the storage destination address using the address set in, the configuration of the drawing list can be simplified.

In each of the above embodiments, when the character ROMs 187, 191, 192, 193, 434, 534, 634, 734 are directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 440) to which the MPU 181, 431 and the image controllers 188, 437 are connected. However, the character ROMs 187, 191, 192, 193, 434, 534, 634, 734 may be directly connected to the image controllers 188, 437. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input/output specifications of the character ROMs 187, 191, 192, 193, 434, 534, 634, 734 into the input/output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROMs 187, 191, 192 are provided via the bridge circuit. , 193, 434, 534, 634, 734 may be connected to the internal bus (bus line 440) or the image controllers 188, 437.

By providing the bridge circuit, the existing image controllers 188 and 437 designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM or the internal bus (bus line 440) is used as it is, and the NAND flash memory is used. Character ROMs 187, 191, 192, 193, 434, 534, 634, 734 configured by 187a, 191a, 192a, 193a, 191a, 192a, 193a, 434a, 534a, 634a, 734a can be connected. Even when the character ROMs 187, 191, 192, 193, 434, 534, 634, 734 are connected via the image controllers 188, 437 and the bridge circuit, the character ROMs 187, 191, 192 to the character ROMs 187, 191, 192. It may be configured to directly access 193, 434, 534, 634, 734.

In each of the above embodiments, the character ROMs 187, 191, 192, 193, 434, 534, 634, 734 are composed of NAND flash memories 187a, 191a, 192a, 193a, 191a, 192a, 193a, 434a, 534a, 634a, 734a. Although the case has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and may be configured by a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage unit such as a hard disk. Although such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow reading speed, by configuring the display control devices 81 and 314 as described in each of the above embodiments, it is possible to display an image at a desired time. Can be displayed without.

In the first and fifth embodiments, NOR ROMs 187d and 434d are provided in the character ROMs 187 and 434, and a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 181 in the first program storage areas 187d1 and 434d1 thereof. Although the case of storing has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first program storage area is provided in the memory configured by the non-volatile storage medium capable of reading out at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 191a. In that area, a part of the boot program which is first executed in the MPU 181 after the system reset is released may be stored. For example, instead of the NOR ROMs 187d and 434d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM) or PRAM (Phase change RAM) is provided in the character ROMs 187 and 434, and the first program storage area is provided in the MPU 181. A part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released may be stored.

In the fourth and eighth embodiments, the NOR type ROMs 194 and 735 connected to the internal bus (bus line 440) are provided with the first program storage areas 194a and 735a, and the MPU 181 is first provided with the first program storage areas 194a and 735a. The case of storing a part of the boot program executed in the above has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is configured by a non-volatile storage medium that can perform a read operation faster than the NAND flash memory 191a. The memory is connected to the internal bus (bus line 440), a first program storage area is provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 181 is stored in the area. Good. For example, instead of the NOR ROMs 194 and 735, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided on the internal bus (bus line 440), and a first program storage area is provided on it. , MPU 181 may store a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released.

In the first, third, fifth and seventh embodiments, when the ROM controller 187b, 192b, 434b, 634b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 440) is designated as "0000H", The boot programs stored in the 1 program storage areas 187d1, 192d, 434d1, 634d are set in the buffer RAMs 187c, 192c, 434c, 634c, and the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is stored in the buffer RAMs 187c, 192c. , 434c, 634c, and outputs to the MPU 181, 431 via the internal bus (bus line 440). On the other hand, when the ROM controllers 187b, 192b, 434b, 634b detect that power is supplied from the power supply devices 91, 315, the ROM controllers 187b, 192b, 434b, 634b cause the first program storage areas 187d1, 192d, 434d1. , 634d are stored in the boot programs stored in the buffer RAMs 187c, 192c, 434c, 634c, and then the addresses of the internal bus (bus line 440) are set to "0000H" in the ROM controllers 187b, 192b, 434b, 634b. When the designation is detected, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAMs 187c, 192c, 434c, 634c and output to the MPUs 181 and 431 via the internal bus (bus line 440). Good. In this case, when the MPUs 181 and 431 specify the address “0000H” for the internal bus (bus line 440) after the system reset is released, the first program storage areas 187d1, 192d, 434d1, and the buffer RAMs 187c, 192c, 434c, 634c have already been stored. Since the boot program stored in 634d is set or is in the process of being set, the character ROMs 187, 192, 434, 634 respond with less delay after the address "0000H" is designated by the MPU 181, 431. The data (instruction code) to be output can be output. Therefore, the MPUs 181 and 431 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" within a short time after the address "0000H" is designated, and thus the MPUs 181 and 431 can start the display main process in a short time. You can As a result, even if the control programs are stored in the character ROMs 187, 192, 434, 634 configured by the NAND flash memories 187a, 192a, 434a, 634a having a low read speed, the auxiliary effect units in the display control devices 81, 314 or The control of the third symbol display device 281 can be immediately started.

Further, the ROM controllers 187b, 192b, 434b, 634b specify the control programs whose addresses specified by the internal bus (bus line 440) are stored in the first program storage areas 187d1, 192d, 434d1, 634d. When it is detected that the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is directly read from the first program storage areas 187d1, 192d, 434d1, 634d, the data is read to the MPU 181 via the internal bus (bus line 440). You may make it output. This allows the MPUs 181 and 431 to receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" within a short time after designating the address "0000H". be able to. As a result, even if the control programs are stored in the character ROMs 187, 192, 434, 634 configured by the NAND flash memories 187a, 192a, 434a, 634a having a low read speed, the auxiliary effect units in the display control devices 81, 314 or The control of the third symbol display device 281 can be immediately started. Further, in this case, the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage areas 187d1, 192d, 434d1, 634d may not be set in the buffer RAM 634c. Since unnecessary operations are not executed in the character ROMs 187, 192, 434, 634, it is possible to suppress wasteful power consumption in the character ROMs 187, 192, 434, 634.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the resident video RAMs 189, 435 are connected to the image controllers 188, 437 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. , 434, 534, 634, 734 and the image controllers 188, 437 may be directly connected to an internal bus (bus line 440). When the character ROMs 187, 191, 192, 193, 434, 534, 634, 734 are connected to the internal bus (bus line 440) or the image controllers 188, 437 via the bridge circuit, they are resident in the bridge circuit. The video RAMs 189 and 435 may be connected and provided. If the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 are configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the existing image controllers 188 and 437 or the internal bus (bus line 440) are not configured to directly connect the resident video RAMs 189 and 435. However, the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 can be easily provided in the display control devices 81 and 314.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where one resident video RAM 189, 435 and one normal video RAM 190, 436 are provided in the display control device 81, 314 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is limited to this. However, more video RAMs may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, and image data corresponding to images according to various modes may be resident in each, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

Although the resident video RAMs 189, 435 and the normal video RAMs 190, 436 are each configured by a 1-port type DRAM (the input/output port is 1 port) in each of the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead, a multi-port RAM may be used.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 and the normal video RAMs 190 and 436 are configured by different memories has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto and one RAM is a resident area. May be divided into a normal area and a normal area, and the same contents as the resident video RAMs 189, 435 and the normal video RAMs 190, 436 may be stored in the respective areas. When the resident area and the normal area are configured by one RAM, the I/O port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by the read or write processing by one of the resident area and the normal area. It is desirable to use a multi-port RAM.

The types of image data stored in the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 in each of the above embodiments are examples, and the types are appropriately set according to the contents of images displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the third symbol display device 281. It may be done. In this case, an image corresponding to the image to be displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the third symbol display device 281 immediately in response to a received command received from the main control device 101 or the voice lamp control device 313 or other input from the outside. Preferably, the data resides in at least resident video RAM 189,435.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which a part of the image data stored in the character ROMs 187, 191, 192, 193, 434, 534, 634, 734 is transferred to the resident video RAMs 189, 435 and made resident. All the image data stored in the character ROMs 187, 191, 192, 193, 434, 534, 634, 734 may be transferred to the resident video RAMs 189, 435. In this case, since there is no image data stored in the non-resident character ROMs 187, 191, 192, 193, 434, 534, 634, 734 in the resident video RAMs 189, 435, the normal video RAMs 190, 436 are the image controllers 188. , 437 may be used as a dedicated memory for storing drawn image data.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 are retained without being overwritten during power-on has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main control unit 101 or the audio lamp is not limited thereto. Based on a command received from the control device 313, image data to be made resident in the resident video RAMs 189, 435 based on a predetermined trigger, such as when the images to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the third symbol display device 281 are greatly different. May be overwritten and updated. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as the transition period while changing the image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the third symbol display device 281. The image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 when the power is turned on, and is retained in the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 without being updated when the other resident images are updated. You may leave it to continue. Also, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 181, 431 directly accesses the character ROMs 187, 191, 192, 193, 434, 534, 634, 734 to read out image data to be newly resident, and read out the data. The image data may be transferred via the buffer RAMs 188a and 437a while the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 are unused (that is, during a period in which the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). .. Alternatively, while the transition image is displayed, the MPUs 181 and 431 send a transfer command (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controllers 188 and 437, and the image controllers 188 and 437 In accordance with the transfer command (transfer data information), the image data to be resident is read from the character ROMs 187, 191, 192, 193, 434, 534, 634, 734, and stored in the resident video RAMs 189, 435 via the buffer RAMs 188a, 437a. The transfer may be performed during unused (that is, during a period in which the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read).

When updating the resident video RAMs 189 and 435, the image data corresponding to the transition image is previously transferred from the character ROMs 187, 191, 192, 193, 434, 534, 634 and 734 to the normal video RAMs 190 and 436. Alternatively, the transition image may be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the third symbol display device 281 by using the image data stored in the normal video RAMs 190 and 436. Then, while the transition image is displayed, the MPUs 181 and 431 directly access the character ROMs 187, 191, 192, 193, 434, 534, 634 and 734 to read out image data to be newly made resident, and The read image data may be transferred via the buffer RAM 188a. Alternatively, the image controller 188, 437 which has received the transfer instruction of the image data to be made resident from the MPU 181, 431 accesses the character ROMs 187, 191, 192, 193, 434, 534, 634, 734, and newly makes an image to be resident. The data may be read and the read image data may be transferred via the buffer RAM 188a. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 189 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 189 can be updated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the buffer RAMs 188a and 437a are provided inside the image controllers 188 and 437 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be provided outside the image controllers 188 and 437. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 440). Further, when the character ROMs 187, 191, 192, 193, 434, 534, 634, 734 are connected to the internal bus (bus line 440) or the image controllers 188, 437 via the bridge circuit, buffers are provided in the bridge circuit. RAM may be provided. Further, the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, the image data is transferred from the character ROMs 187, 191, 192, 193, 434, 534, 634, 734 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAMs 189, 435 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit. Therefore, the transfer can be efficiently performed without being affected by the internal bus (bus line 440) that exchanges data signals frequently.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAMs 188a and 437a is set to one block of the NAND flash memories 187a, 191a, 192a, 193a, 191a, 192a, 193a, 434a, 534a, 634a, 734a has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set appropriately. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen included in the auxiliary display unit 65 or the third symbol display device 281, a period during which scanning is performed on a blank region that is a scanning region other than the display region where the actual image is displayed (blank period The storage capacity of the buffer RAMs 188a and 437a may be a data capacity enough to complete the transfer of image data from the buffer RAMs 188a and 437a to the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 or the normal video RAMs 190 and 436. As a result, the transfer of image data from the buffer RAMs 188a, 437a to the resident video RAMs 189, 435 or the normal video RAMs 190, 436 uses the unused periods of the video RAMs 189, 190, 435, 436 that occur during this blank period. By doing so, it can be surely performed.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where one buffer RAM 188a, 437a is provided has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROMs 187, 191, 192, 193, 434, 534, 634, 734 is stored in one buffer RAM, the resident video RAMs 189, 435 are stored in the other buffer RAMs. Alternatively, the image data stored in the normal video RAMs 190 and 436 may be transferred. Further, the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM, and the image data read from the character ROMs 187, 191, 192, 193, 434, 534, 634, 734 is stored in one area. During this period, the image data may be transferred from another area in which the image data is stored to the resident video RAMs 189, 435 or the normal video RAMs 190, 436. In any case, the image data read from the character ROMs 187, 191, 192, 193, 434, 534, 634, 734 is written in the buffer RAM, and the image data written in the buffer RAM is resident. Since the transfer to the video RAMs 189 and 435 or the normal video RAMs 190 and 436 can be processed in parallel, the time required for the processing can be shortened.

In the above-described first to fourth embodiments, a case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROMs 187, 191, 192, 193 to the power-on main image area 189a of the resident video RAM 189 after power-on Although described, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on may be transferred from the character ROMs 187, 191, 192, 193 to the normal video RAM 190 after power-on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal-use video RAM 190 is used to display the power-on main image on the auxiliary display section 65 while the character ROMs 187, 191, 192, and 193 are resident. It is possible to transfer the image data to be resident in the video RAM 189 for use. Since image data is not read from the resident video RAM 189 during this period, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 189. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

Similarly, in the fifth to eighth embodiments, when the power-on main image and the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image are turned on, the resident video RAM 435 is turned on from the character ROMs 434, 534, 634, 734. Although the case of transferring to the main image area 435a and the power-on fluctuation image area 435b has been described, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the character ROMs 434, 534, 634, 734 after power-on. May be transferred to the normal video RAM 436. Thereby, while using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image stored in the normal video RAM 436, the character ROM 434, while displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 281. Image data to be resident can be transferred from the 534, 634, 734 to the resident video RAM 435. Since image data is not read from the resident video RAM 435 during this period, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 435. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

In the first to fourth embodiments, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROMs 187, 191, 192, 193 to the power-on main image area 189a of the resident video RAM 189 via the buffer RAM 188a. Although the case has been described, since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 189 while the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is stored in the character ROM 187. , 191, 192, 193 may be directly transferred to the main image area 189a at power-on of the resident video RAM 189 without passing through the buffer RAM 188a. Further, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROMs 187, 191, 192, 193 to the normal video RAM 190 after power-on, and the image corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 190 is transferred. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROMs 187, 191, 192, 193 to the resident video RAM 189 by displaying the main image on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the power is turned on by using the data, the resident video RAM 189 is operated. When the image data is not read out, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROMs 187, 191, 192, 193 to the resident video RAM 189 without passing through the buffer RAM 188a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without going through the buffer RAM 188a.

Similarly, in the fifth to eighth embodiments, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are supplied from the character ROMs 434, 534, 634, 734 to the resident video RAM 435 via the buffer RAM 437a. The case of transferring to the power-on main image area 435a and the power-on fluctuation image area 435b has been described, but while the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred, the resident video RAM 434 is operated. Since the image data is not read out, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the power-on fluctuation image is supplied from the character ROMs 434, 534, 634, 734 to the resident video RAM 435 without powering the buffer RAM 437a. It may be directly transferred to the main image area 435a and the power-on fluctuation image area 435b. Further, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on are transferred from the character ROMs 434, 534, 634, 734 to the normal video RAM 436 after power-on, and are stored in the normal video RAM 436 at power-on. By displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 281 by using the image data corresponding to the main image and the power-on variation image, the character ROM 434, 534, 634, 734 is resident in the resident video RAM 435. When the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 435 while the image data to be transferred is transferred, the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 434, 534, 634, 734 without passing through the buffer RAM 437a. It may be directly transferred to the resident video RAM 435. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without using the buffer RAM 437a.

In the above-described first to fourth embodiments, the case where the display control device 81 changes the rear image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 101 has been described. In addition to this, or separately from this, an operation button that allows the player to change the rear image of the auxiliary display portion 65 is provided in the slot machine 10, and when the player operates the operation button, the rear image is changed. It may be configured as follows. Specifically, when the player operates the operation button, an output signal output from the operation button is input to the input/output port 186 of the display control device 81, and the MPU 181 receives the input from the operation button. When it is confirmed that the operation button has been operated by the player, the change of the rear image is determined, and the image data corresponding to the rear image to be displayed after the change stored in the rear image area 189b of the resident video RAM 189 is determined. The image controller 188 may be instructed to draw an image by using the image. As a result, after the player operates the operation button, the changed rear image is immediately displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 by using the image data stored in the rear image area 189b of the resident video RAM 189. be able to. Therefore, even if the character ROMs 187, 191, 192, and 193 are configured by using the NAND flash memories 187a, 191a, 192a, and 193a whose reading speed is slow, the auxiliary display is immediately responded to the operation of the player. The changed rear image can be displayed on the section 65.

On the other hand, in the fifth to eighth embodiments, when the player operates the frame button 222, the voice lamp control device 313 generates a rear image change command and a frame button operation command, and the display control device 314 generates the rear image change command and the frame button operation command. The case of changing the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 281 or the effect mode of super reach based on the rear image change command or the frame button operation command has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the voice lamp control device 313 grasps the game state of the gaming machine 200 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 310, and according to the game state, for example, in accordance with the change of the game state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. As a result, the display control device 314 can change the rear image and the effect mode of super reach according to the game state based on the rear image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 314 may directly grasp the game state of the gaming machine 200, and change the rear image and the production mode of the super reach according to the game state. If the rear image after the change or the image data corresponding to at least a part of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the changed presentation mode is resident in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. From the resident range, the back image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 435c.

Further, the display control device 314 may not only change the back image based on the back image changing command, but also change the back image according to the display data table or the transfer data time table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed rear image is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 434, 534, 634, 734 to the normal video RAM 436 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table. Good. Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, a new rear image is stored in the sub area of the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436 in which the rear images A to C are stored. The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be defined so that the sub-images are stored in the transfer data table. The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be defined so that the back image is stored. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. It is possible to suppress an increase in load.

In the first to fourth embodiments, when the output signals of the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b are input to the main control device 101 and the main control device 101 detects a sensor error. By transmitting an error command to the display control device 81, the display control device 81 immediately displays an error message to the auxiliary display unit 65 using the image data resident in the error message image area 189e of the resident video RAM 189. Although the case of displaying is described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the output signals of the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b are input to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 uses the output signals. It is configured to detect the presence or absence of a sensor error, and when a sensor error is detected by the display control device 81, the image data resident in the error message image area 189e of the resident video RAM 189 is used to immediately display the auxiliary display unit 65. May display an error message. As a result, it becomes unnecessary to send and receive the error command from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81, so that the error message can be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 earlier.

In the fifth to eighth embodiments, the output signal of the vibration sensor 428 is input to the voice lamp controller 313, and when the voice lamp controller 313 detects a vibration error, an error command is displayed on the display controller 314. The case in which the display control device 314 causes the third symbol display device 281 to immediately display the warning image by transmitting to the above has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor 428 is mainly controlled. Input to the device 310, the main control device 310 detects a vibration error, and an error command for notifying the error is transmitted from the main control device 310 to either the voice lamp control device 313 or the display control device 314. May be. When the error command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 313, the voice lamp control device 313 receives the error command and further transmits the error command to the display control device 314 to notify the error. May be.

On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor 428 may be input to the display control device 314, and the display control device 314 may be configured to detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. When the vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 59) by turning on the error occurrence flag and further turning on the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error. When it is determined that the warning image is set, the warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 281 by executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 61B). In this case, this eliminates the need to send and receive the error command from the voice lamp control device 313 to the display control device 314, so that the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 earlier.

Further, in the fifth to eighth embodiments, the case where the vibration sensor 428 is attached to the back surface of the game plate 213 has been described, but instead of the vibration sensor 428, or together with the vibration sensor 428, the magnet sensor is used as a game. It may be attached to the back surface of the plate 213. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of the sphere from being changed by the magnetic field of a magnet or the like and to intentionally enter the ball entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main controller 310, the audio lamp controller 313, and the display controller 314. Then, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 310, when it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 213 by the main controller 310 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is output. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 310 to the display control device 314 via the voice lamp control device 313 or directly. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 313, when it is determined that the voice lamp control device 313 applies a magnetic field to the game board 213 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field An error command for notifying an error may be transmitted from the voice lamp controller 313 to the display controller 314. Then, in the error message image area 435f of the resident video RAM 435 of the display control device 313, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 218 is made resident. In the above configuration, the display control device 313 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 218 when receiving an error command that conveys a magnetic field error from the main control device 310 or the voice lamp control device 313. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 310, when it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 213 by the display control device 314 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 313. May turn on the error occurrence flag and turn on the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to display the warning image on the third symbol display device 218. Accordingly, when the display control device 314 receives the error command from the main control device 310 or the voice lamp control device 313 or grasps the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the character ROM 434, Even when the NAND flash memories 434a, 534a, 634a, 734a are configured as the 534, 634, 734, the error message image resident in the error message image area 435f of the resident video RAM 425 is used without delay. An error message image notifying a magnetic field error can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the third symbol display device 281, so that an illegal action is given to the player. Can be deterred.

In the first to fourth embodiments, the case where the upper lamp 63 and the speaker 64 are driven by the display control device 81 has been described. It may be configured to be driven by an audio lamp control device provided separately from the display control device 81 that drives the unit 65. In this case, the command transmitted from the main control device 101 is received by the voice lamp control device, and the display control device 81 is based on the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device based on the command from the main control device 101. The auxiliary display unit 64 may be controlled. Further, the command transmitted from the main control device 101 may be received by the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 may transmit the command to the audio lamp control device in accordance with the received command. By separately providing the display control device 81 that drives the auxiliary display unit 65 and the audio lamp control device that drives the upper lamp 63 and the speaker 64, the display control device 81 can concentrate on the drive control of the auxiliary display unit 65. In the auxiliary display section 65, more diverse and complicated image display can be executed, and the player's interest can be enhanced.

In the above-described first to fourth embodiments, the configuration having only one type of BB winning is described as the winning mode in which the privilege of shifting to the bonus state is provided when the winning is achieved, but a plurality of types of state shifting winnings It may be configured to have a role. Further, the total number of paid-out medals in the bonus state may be set to different values depending on the winning combination in which the winning state is achieved. That is, in the process of S604 of the bonus state process (see FIG. 17), the value set in the remaining payout amount counter may be changed according to the state transition winning combination in which the winning is achieved. Further, in the process of S606 of the bonus state process (see FIG. 17), when the state command which means the BB game is set, the type of the state transition winning combination in which the winning is achieved is also set. May be. As a result, in the display control device 81, the effect produced by the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, and the upper lamp 63 can be changed in accordance with the winning state transition winning combination.

In the above-described first to fourth embodiments, a case has been described in which the total number of medals to be paid out in the bonus state that shifts when the BB winning is established is set to 250 (the number of remaining payments in S604 of FIG. 17). However, the number set as the medal payout total number (remaining payout number) may be any number within the range specified by law or the like.

In the above-described first to fourth embodiments, in the JAC game performed when the gaming state is in the bonus state, the winning probabilities of the watermelon prize and the bell prize, which are small wins, are set to be higher than those in the general gaming state. Although the case has been described, the winning probability of either the watermelon prize or the bell prize may be set higher than that in the normal gaming state. Further, the respective winning probabilities in the bonus state may be determined so that the degree of increase in the winning probability of the watermelon winning with a large number of paid-out medals is larger than that of the bell winning. As a result, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out per game can be increased, so that the player can receive a large number of medals with a small number of medals. In addition, since the medal payout of the total number of medal payouts can be performed in a short time, the operating rate of the slot machine 10 can be increased even for the hall side. In addition, a bonus-only prize mode that is established only when the gaming state is in the bonus state is provided, and the number of medals to be paid out is set to be large, and in the bonus state, the winning probability of the bonus-only prize mode is set to be higher than other prize modes. It may be configured to be performed. Further, the winning of the bonus-only winning mode may be performed only when three coins are played. As a result, even when the bonus game can be played with one or two cards, the player can play the bonus game with three cards.

In the first to fourth embodiments, the special small winning combination is won only when the game is played with one or two medals inserted, that is, when the game is played with one or two medals. Although the case where the lottery table is set so that the Cherry Bell winning is established has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and when the game is played with the number of inserted medals being three, that is, the game is multiplied by three. The lottery table may be set so that the Cherry Bell winning is achieved even when the game is performed. When the game is played with three coins and the Cherry Bell winning is established, the number of paid-out medals may be three or any other number. In addition, the winning probability of the cherry bell prize when the game is played with three cards may be set by a lottery table so as to be smaller than other BB prizes, watermelon prizes, bell prizes, and replay prizes. As a result, it is difficult for the cherry bell prize to be achieved when three coins are hung, and it is possible to make the player easily recognize that it is a special small winning combination.

Similarly, in the above-described first to fourth embodiments, the case where the lottery table is set so that the 7-bell prize, which is the special small winning a prize, is established only when the game is played with one piece, has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the lottery table may be set so that the 7-bell prize is established even when the game is played with two or three cards. When the game is played with two or three coins and the 7-bell prize is achieved, the number of paid-out medals may be two or any other number. It is more preferable to set the number of paid-out medals to 3 when the 7-bell winning is achieved in the case of 2 coins. This is because the player can play another game by using the three medals, so that the player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals. .. In addition, the winning probability of the 7-bell prize when the game is played with three cards may be set by a lottery table so as to be smaller than other BB prizes, watermelon prizes, bell prizes, and replay prizes. As a result, the 7-bell prize is less likely to be established when three coins are applied, so that the player can easily recognize that it is a special small winning combination. On the other hand, the odds of winning a 7-bell prize when a game is played with 2 coins are set so that the expected value of the number of medals paid out in one game is less than 2 coins, together with other prizes including the Cherry Bell prize. It is preferable that it is set by a lottery table.

In the above-described first to fourth embodiments, when the game is played with one or two coins and the normal small win prize, that is, the watermelon prize or the bell prize is established, the respective medal payout numbers are three coins. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and other medal payout numbers may be set. In this case, the number of medals to be paid out for the watermelon prize and the number of medals to be paid out for the bell prize may be set to be different. In addition, the number of medals to be paid out for the watermelon prize or the bell prize when one or two is multiplied is set to be larger than the maximum bet number (3 in the first to fourth embodiments). Good. This allows the player to play the game while expecting the establishment of a watermelon prize or a bell prize in which many medals are paid out when the game is played with one or two coins. In addition, a multiple of the maximum bet number (3 in the above-described first to fourth embodiments) may be set as the number of medals to be paid out for a watermelon prize or a bell prize when one or two coins are multiplied. .. As a result, if a watermelon prize or a bell prize is established, it is expected that a large number of medals can be expected to be paid after the BB prize is established. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals. Further, as the number of medals to be paid out for the watermelon prize or the bell prize at the time of hanging one or two, 12 and 6 may be set as in the case of hanging three. As a result, it is not necessary to change the number of paid-out medals according to the bet number, so that it is possible to suppress an increase in processing load. Further, the number of paid-out watermelon medals may be set to different numbers depending on whether it is a one-sheet or two-sheet arrangement. In some cases, the number of medals paid out for the bell prize may be set to be different. Further, the number of medals to be paid out for at least one of the watermelon prize and the bell prize may be set to two when one is hung. As a result, the player can enjoy another game while expecting the establishment of the Cherry Bell winning combination in which the two medals are inserted and three more medals are paid out. The winning probability of each winning mode is set by the lottery table so that the ratio of the expected value of the number of medals paid out in one game to the number of medals inserted is less than 100% in the case of one-player or two-player. desirable. The ratio is more preferably less than 100% and close to 100%.

In the above-described first to fourth embodiments, the case has been described in which the game is played with one piece or two pieces, and three medals are paid out when the cherry bell prize is established. However, the number of medals to be paid out in this case is not limited to this, and a multiple (for example, 6 or 9) of the maximum bet number (3 in the first to fourth embodiments) is set. You may comprise. Also by this, if the Cherry Bell winning is achieved, the player can spend the medals only by playing the game (the game with three coins) in which the maximum number of bets that can be expected in the establishment of the BB winning is established. You can enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals. On the other hand, the number of medals to be paid out may be set to two when the cherry bell winning is achieved when one coin is hung. As a result, the player can enjoy another game while expecting the winning of the Cherry Bell winning by inserting the two medals and paying out three more medals, without leaving extra medals. You can enjoy the game until the end. Even in these cases, it is desirable to set the winning probability of each winning mode by the lottery table so that the ratio of the expected value of the number of medals paid out in one game to the number of medals inserted is less than 100%. The ratio is more preferably less than 100% and close to 100%.

In the above-described first to fourth embodiments, the case has been described in which the game is played with one coin and two coins are paid out when the 7-bell winning is achieved, but this is not always the case. The number of medals to be paid out in this case is not limited, but a multiple (for example, 3, 6, 9, etc.) of the maximum bet number (3 in the first to fourth embodiments) is set. You may comprise. As a result, if the 7-belt winning is established, the medals are consumed only by playing a game (game with three coins) in which the maximum number of bets that can be expected to be obtained by winning the BB winning is obtained. As a result, the player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals. Also in this case, it is desirable that the winning probability of each winning mode is set by the lottery table so that the ratio of the expected value of the number of medals paid out in one game to the number of medals inserted is less than 100%. The ratio is more preferably less than 100% and close to 100%.

In the above-described first to fourth embodiments, when the game is played with one piece, the winning or non-winning of the cherry bell prize or the 7 bell prize is drawn as a candidate for the winning combination, and when the cherry bell prize is established, three pieces are won. The case has been described in which two medals are paid out when the medals are paid out and the 7-bell prize is achieved, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the cherry bell prize is achieved. May be configured to pay out two medals, and pay out three medals when a 7-bell prize is established. As a result, when the Cherry Bell prize is achieved, two medals are paid out, so the player inserts the two medals and expects to achieve the Cherry Bell prize in which another three medals are paid out. However, you can enjoy another game and enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals. When the 7-bell prize is won, three medals are paid out. Therefore, the player can insert the three medals and play another game while expecting to win the BB prize. You can enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals. On the other hand, when the game is played with one sheet, only the cherry bell winning may be determined. As a result, in the case where the number of bets is one to three, the 7-bell winning is not included as a winning combination, so that the index value IV=5 can be omitted from the lottery table and the lottery table is stored. It is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the table storage area 105a and the processing load of the lottery processing. Further, in this case, if the number of medals to be paid out when the Cherry Bell prize is established is set to 3, three medals to be paid out when the Cherry Bell prize is established are inserted, and the player Furthermore, while expecting to win the BB prize, another game can be played, and the game can be enjoyed to the end without leaving extra medals. Further, if the number of medals to be paid out when the Cherry Bell winning is established is set to two, the two medals to be paid out when the Cherry Bell winning is established are inserted, and the player further pays three coins. You can enjoy another game while expecting the winning of the Cherry Bell prize, in which medals are paid out, and you can enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals. Even in these cases, it is desirable to set the winning probability of each winning mode by the lottery table so that the ratio of the expected value of the number of medals paid out in one game to the number of medals inserted is less than 100%. The ratio is more preferably less than 100% and close to 100%. For example, in the case where the 7-bell prize is not included as a special child winning combination in a single coin and only the cherry bell winning is supported and the number of medals paid out in the cherry bell winning is set to 3, the winning probability is about 3 The winning probability may be set to about 1/2.6, or when the number of medals to be paid out in the cherry bell winning is set to two.

In the first to fourth embodiments, in the lottery table, any one of BB prize, watermelon prize, bell prize, cherry bell prize, 7 bell prize and replay prize is assigned as the prize mode corresponding to the index value IV. In the lottery for winning modes, the case where any one of these winning modes is set as a winning combination has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and these winning modes are related to one index value IV. If a plurality of winning modes are assigned and the winning is confirmed for the one index value IV, the plurality of winning modes assigned to the one index value IV may be simultaneously set as a winning combination. For example, a BB prize and a bell prize may be simultaneously set as a winning combination by assigning a BB prize and a bell prize to one index value IV, or a watermelon prize and a replay prize may be set to one index value IV. By assigning, the watermelon prize and the replay prize may be simultaneously set as the winning combination. Here, when a BB prize carried over to the next game when the winning is not established and another winning mode (for example, a bell winning) which is not carried over to the next game are simultaneously set as a winning combination, the next game is played. The sliding table corresponding to another winning mode (bell winning) that cannot be carried over may be preferentially stored in the sliding table storage area 106b. As a result, it is possible to establish the winning establishment in the other winning modes, and it is possible to carry over the BB winning to the next game and establish the winning establishment. In addition, if a watermelon prize and a replay prize are set as a winning combination at the same time, we will prepare a sliding table stipulated that either the watermelon prize or the replay prize will stop on the active line, and this will be the sliding table. You may make it store in the storage area 106b. As the sliding table, the stop pattern corresponding to the watermelon winning that is more advantageous to the player than the replay winning can be stopped from the reaching symbol that has reached the base position when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. In the case, the stop mode is defined to stop with the stop symbol corresponding to the watermelon prize, and if the stop symbol corresponding to the watermelon prize cannot be stopped, stop to stop with the stop symbol corresponding to the replay prize. It is preferable to use the one whose mode is defined. As a result, while the watermelon prize that is more advantageous to the player than the replay prize is established as much as possible, the replay prize can be established when the watermelon prize cannot be established. Then, in this case, the player can be replayed without inserting medals.

In the above-described first to fourth embodiments, when the game is played with one coin and the 7-bell winning is achieved and two medals are paid out, the gaming state of the slot machine 10 remains the general gaming state. However, the game state of the slot machine 10 may be shifted to the special game state when two cards are played when the game is played with one card and the 7-bell prize is established and two medals are paid out. Then, when the special game state when playing with two cards is entered, the lottery table is configured so that the winning probability of the cherry bell winning mode when playing with two cards is set higher than that in the general gaming state. Good. As a result, when two medals are paid out due to the establishment of a 7-bell prize when one coin is hung, the player inserts the two medals and pays out three medals. You can enjoy another game with a sense of expectation.

In the first to fourth embodiments, when in the general game state, the prescribed number of bets on medals is set to 1 to 3 and the number of medals can be multiplied by 1 or multiplied by 2. Correspondingly, the case where the game is configured to start has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the prescribed number of bet numbers of medals is set to one and three, and one is multiplied by one. The game may be started in response to only three cards. As a result, when two medals remain in the player's hand, the player expects that three coins will be paid out due to the establishment of the Cherry Bell prize, while letting each player insert the remaining medals one by one. You can entertain the game at least twice in total.

In addition to the normal game state, the specified number of bets for medals is set to 1 to 3 even in the bonus state, and it can be used for one-piece, two-piece, or three-piece multiplication. Then, the game may be started. Alternatively, even in the bonus state, the prescribed number of bet numbers of medals may be set to one and three, and the game may be started in response to one and three bets. .. If the game is played with one or two cards in the bonus state, the lottery table is configured so that the winning probability of the Cherry Bell winning and the 7 Bell winning is set low or the winning probability is set to zero. Good. In addition, the lottery table may be configured such that the winning probability of the watermelon prize or the bell prize in the one-piece and two-piece games is higher than the winning probability in the normal gaming state. Further, the number of medals to be paid out for the watermelon prize or the bell prize for the one-piece and two-piece arrangements may be set to be larger than the number of medals to be paid out (3 pieces) in the normal gaming state. However, the odds of winning in each winning mode and the number of medals paid out are set so that the expected value of the number of medals paid out per game in the one-player and two-player games in the bonus state is smaller than the expected value in the three-player game May be set. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the bonus game by multiplying by three as much as possible. In addition, the winning probability and the number of paid-out medals corresponding to each winning mode when the game is played with one and two in the bonus state may be set to be the same as in the normal gaming state. In this case, the ratio of the expected value of the number of medals paid out per game to the number of bets is less than 100% for both 1 and 2 coins, so if the game is repeated by 1 or 2 coins, the number of medals However, it will decrease. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the bonus game with three coins.

In the above-described first to fourth embodiments, a case is explained in which the game can be played by not only the remaining number of medals at the player's hand but also one or two medals in a general game state. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and only when the number of virtual medals stored and stored by the credit function is less than three, the first to fourth embodiments are performed by the one- and two-card multiplication. The game may be played according to the winning mode, the winning probability, and the number of medals paid out. For example, in the process of S205 of the normal process (see FIG. 13), when it is determined whether or not the bet number is the specified number, the value of the credit counter that counts the number of virtual medals is checked, and the value is 3 If the above value is set, the specified number of bets is set to three so that the game can be played only by three cards. If the value of the credit counter is less than 3, the specified number of bets is set to one. By setting the number of coins to two, the player may be allowed to play the game with the prize mode, the winning probability, and the number of medals paid out in the first to fourth embodiments by the one-player and the two-player. As a result, when there are three or more virtual medals, the game can always be played with only three medals, so that the medals are consumed quickly and the operating rate of the slot machine in the hole can be reliably increased. .. On the other hand, when the number of virtual medals is less than 3, one or two medals are used to win a cherry bell prize in which three medals are paid out or a seven bell prize in which two medals are paid out. Since it is possible to aim and make the player play the game, the slot machine 10 can give the player the motivation to use up the medals without excess.

In the first to fourth embodiments, not only the remaining number of medals at the player's hand, but also the winning mode, the winning probability, and the medal payout of the game performed by one- and two-player in the general game state. The case where the number of sheets is fixed has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the process of S206 of the normal process (FIG. 13), when it is determined that there is a start command, the value of the credit counter (that is, the number of virtual medals) immediately before the start command is temporarily stored in the RAM 106. Every time, in the lottery table setting process (see FIG. 15), when setting the one-drawing lottery table (see S406) or the two-drawing lottery table (see S405), or in the reel control process (see FIG. 16), the payout determination When the processing (see S513) is performed and the number of temporarily stored virtual medals immediately before the start command is three or more, payout of medals per game by one or two coins The prize mode, the winning probability, and the medal payout number are set so that the expected value of the number becomes smaller than the expected value obtained by the prize mode, the winning probability, and the medal payout number shown in FIGS. 7 and 9. You may comprise. In this case, the expected value may be reduced by setting the winning probability of the Cherry Bell winning or the 7 Bell winning when the game is played with one or two coins. As a result, when there are three or more virtual medals, it is possible to play the game under the condition of playing three games with a much more advantageous condition than when playing the game with one game or two games. The player starts playing the game with three coins, and the medals are consumed quickly. Therefore, it is possible to reliably increase the operating rate of the slot machine in the hall. On the other hand, when the number of temporarily stored virtual medals immediately before the start command is less than 3, the winning mode shown in FIGS. The winning probability and the number of paid-out medals may be set. As a result, when the number of virtual medals is less than 3, one or two medals are used and a cherry bell prize is paid out in which three medals are paid out or a seven bell prize is paid in which two medals are paid out. Since it is possible to cause the player to play the game aiming at, the slot machine 10 can give the player the motivation to use up the medals without excess.

Further, in addition to the above two modified examples, or in addition to the above two modified examples, when the number of virtual medals stored and stored by the credit function is two, the above-mentioned FIG. The game may not be played with the winning mode, the winning probability, and the number of medals paid out as shown in FIG. In this case, the game may be configured such that the game with one coin is not played at all, and the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out per game with one coin is the winning mode shown in FIG. 7 or 9. The winning mode, the winning probability, and the number of medals paid out may be set so as to be smaller than the expected value obtained by the winning probability and the number of medals paid out. In the former case, in the process of S205 of the normal process (see FIG. 13), when it is determined whether or not the bet number is the prescribed number, the value of the credit counter for counting the number of virtual medals is confirmed, and the value is checked. If 2 is 2, the prescribed number of bets may be set to 2 so that the game cannot be played with one bet. In the latter case, when it is determined that there is a start command in the process of S206 of the normal process (FIG. 13), the value of the credit counter immediately before the start command (that is, the number of virtual medals) is temporarily stored in the RAM 106. In the lottery table setting process (see FIG. 15), the one-piece-placing lottery table (see S406) is set, and the payout determination process (see S513) is performed in the reel control process (see FIG. 16). In this case, when the number of temporarily stored virtual medals immediately before the start command is two, the expected value of the number of paid-out medals per one-game multiplying game is shown in FIG. The winning mode, the winning probability, and the number of medals paid out may be set so as to be smaller than the expected value obtained by the winning mode, the winning probability, and the number of medals paid out. As a result, when only two virtual medals remain, the player can play the game with two medals. Therefore, it is possible to settle whether or not three medals are paid out in one game.

In the above-described first to fourth embodiments, even if the game is played with one piece or two pieces when the BB prize winning flag is carried over, the winning of the game executed by the one piece or two pieces multiplication The case where the mode and the winning probability are configured to be the same as when the BB winning flag is not carried over has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the lottery table setting process (see FIG. 15), when setting the one-drawing lottery table (see S406) or the two-drawing lottery table (see S405), carry over from the previous game to the winning flag storage area 106a. If the winning BB winning flag is set, the lottery table may be set so that the probability of being missed is high. As a result, if the result of the lottery is missed, only the carried-over BB winning prize flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a. Therefore, the sliding table setting executed in S310 of the lottery process (see FIG. 14). In the processing, the slip table corresponding to the BB winning can be stored. Therefore, it is possible to increase the probability of winning the BB prize.

In the above-described first to fourth embodiments, the case where the information regarding the bet number is included in the start command and transmitted from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the start command Alternatively, the main controller 101 may transmit the information about the bet number to the display controller 81 by another command. For example, the information regarding the bet number may be transmitted by a dedicated command (hereinafter, referred to as a “bet number notification command”), or may be included in the lottery result command and transmitted. When the bet number notification command is prepared, the command received from the main control device 101 is stored in the received command storage area 185a in the main processing executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81, and the command is the bet number notification. If the command is a command, the bet number notification command process is executed, and by the bet number notification command process, the information about the bet number included in the bet number notification command is extracted, and the information about the extracted bet number is stored in the bet number storage area. You may make it store in 185b. When the lottery result command includes information on the bet number, the bet number information is extracted from the lottery result command and stored in the bet number before the processing of S901 in the lottery result command process (see FIG. 21). It may be stored in the area 185b. When the information about the bet number is transmitted from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 by a command different from the start command and the lottery result command, the transmission timing of the command is the lottery result command after the start command is transmitted. Prior to the transmission of. As a result, in the display control device 81, based on the number of bets placed on the game started by the operation of the start lever 41 and the result of the lottery performed for the game, the auxiliary effect production section (upper lamp 63, It is possible to determine the form of various effects produced by the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display unit 65), and the player can play the game with various expectations depending on the effects of the auxiliary effect unit.

In the first to fourth embodiments, in the lottery result command process executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81, the winning combination notified by the lottery result command when the bet number is 1 or 2 is BB. When there are a plurality of winning combinations including the winning mode, the auxiliary performance unit (the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, the auxiliary system) is used so as to start the BB winning notification effect informing that the BB winning mode is the winning combination. The case of controlling the display unit 65) has been described (see S903 and S904 in FIG. 21). However, when the winning combination notified by the lottery result command is the BB winning mode and the watermelon winning mode, the BB winning mode is selected. The auxiliary production unit may control to start "BB winning/watermelon winning award notification effect" that notifies that two modes, a watermelon winning mode, are set as a winning combination. Further, when the winning combination notified by the lottery result command is the BB winning mode and the Bell winning mode, the BB winning mode and the Bell winning mode are both announced as the winning combination. The BB winning/bell winning notification effect" may be controlled to start in the auxiliary effecting unit. As a result, when the "BB prize/watermelon prize announcement effect" or "BB prize/bell prize announcement effect" is executed in the auxiliary effector, the player simultaneously performs the BB prize mode and the watermelon prize mode or bell prize mode. It can be understood that the winning combination has been set. Therefore, with respect to the game in which the notification effect is performed, it is possible to instruct the player to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 to establish the watermelon winning mode or the bell winning mode, and the BB winning mode in the subsequent games. It is possible to allow the player to continue the game with a sense of expectation that is satisfied.

In the first to fourth embodiments, in the lottery result command process executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81, the winning combination notified by the lottery result command when the bet number is 1 or 2 is BB. In the case of the winning mode, the case of performing the BB winning notification effect informing that the BB winning mode is the winning combination has been described, but as a candidate for the winning combination when the bet number is 1 or 2, When a plurality of types of state transition winning combinations for granting a privilege to transition to the gaming state are provided, in the lottery result command process executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81, the winning combination notified by the lottery result command is selected. If it is determined that a predetermined state transition winning combination is included, a notification effect for notifying that the predetermined state transition winning combination is a winning combination is provided as an auxiliary production unit (upper lamp 63, speaker 64, auxiliary display unit). 65) may be controlled to execute. It should be noted that the predetermined state transition winning combination for which the notification effect is performed may be a part of the plurality of types of state transition winning combinations, or all winning combinations.

Further, in the first to fourth embodiments, in the lottery result command process executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81, the winning combination notified by the lottery result command when the bet number is 1 or 2 If is the watermelon prize mode or the bell prize mode, the case of performing the watermelon prize notification effect or the bell prize notification effect informing that the watermelon prize mode or the bell prize mode is the winning role has been described. If there are other winning combinations that may be missed depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 by the player as a candidate for the winning combination when the number is one or two, the display control device In the lottery result command process executed by the MPU 181 of 81, if it is determined that the winning combination notified by the lottery result command is a winning combination that may be missed, it is determined that the winning combination is a winning combination. It may be controlled so that the notification effect to be notified is executed by the auxiliary effect section (the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, the auxiliary display section 65). If there are multiple winning combinations that may be missed, the announcement effect may be executed only when some of the winning combinations become winning combinations. Alternatively, when the winning combination is achieved, the notification effect may be executed.

The stop symbols of the respective winning patterns in the first to fourth embodiments are examples, and the present invention is not limited to the stop symbols. However, it is desirable that the stop symbols for the cherry bell prize and the 7-bell prize are set to have no missing symbols.

The probability of winning in each of the winning modes in the first to fourth embodiments is an example, and is not limited to the above winning probability. Further, the number of medals paid out for the watermelon prize and the bell prize in the first to fourth embodiments is an example, and the number of medals paid out is not limited to the above. However, it is desirable to set the probability of winning the Cherry Bell prize or the 7-bell prize to be higher than that of the other prize modes in the one-piece or two-piece arrangement. In addition, the winning probability and the number of medals paid out in each winning mode are set so that the ratio of the expected value of the number of medals paid out to the number of bets is less than 100% and close to 100% in the case of one-shot or two-shot. It is desirable to do.

In the above-described first to fourth embodiments, the slot machine having three reels arranged in parallel and having five lines as effective lines has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, five reels are arranged in parallel. It may be a slot machine provided with the above, or a slot machine having three effective lines. Further, the activated line may be changed according to the bet number. For example, when the bet number is 3, the effective line is set to 5 lines, when the bet number is 2, the effective line is set to 3 lines, and when the bet number is 1, the effective line is set. May be set to one line. When the number of valid lines is set to three, for example, the upper line L1, the middle line L2, and the lower line L3 shown in FIG. 6 may be set, or the middle line L2, the lower right line L4, and the like. The upper right line L5 may be set.

In the first to fourth embodiments, the case where the maximum bet number is 3 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the maximum bet number may be set to an arbitrary value of 2 or more. .. For example, the maximum bet number may be four. In this case, if the game is played with the bet number less than the maximum bet number, the winning probability of each prize mode is set so that the prize mode in which the maximum bet number (or a multiple thereof) is paid out is highly likely to be won. Good. If the maximum number of bets is 4, if the game is played with one bet, for example, a winning mode in which two medals are paid out is highly likely to be won If the probability is set and the game is played with two coins, for example, the winning probability of each prize mode in the two coins is set so that the winning mode in which three medals are paid out is highly probable. When the game is played by being multiplied, for example, the winning probability of each prize mode in the case of 3 coins may be set so that the prize mode in which four medals are paid out is won with a high probability. In this way, when the number of bets is small, the ratio of the expected value of the number of medals to the number of bets to less than 100% is set by setting the number of medals to be paid out in the winning mode with a high probability of winning, to be small. Even when the winning probability is set, the winning probability of the winning mode can be increased. It is desirable to set the winning probability and the number of medals to be paid for each prize mode so that the ratio of the expected number of medals to the number of bets is less than 100% and close to 100%.

In the fifth to eighth embodiments, the case where the drawing content for additionally displaying the continuous notice effect which is not normally displayed in the variable effect on the third symbol display device 281 is defined as the additional data table has been described. However, the additional data table is not necessarily limited to this, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in addition to one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 310. Drawing contents for drawing various effects to be drawn may be defined. Further, in the additional data table, the drawing content necessary to add and display an image that is not normally displayed to one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from main controller 310. Instead of, or in addition to specifying such drawing content, the drawing content necessary to change a part or all of the color tone in that one effect, and the display in one effect. The drawing content necessary for changing and displaying the displayed image may be preset.

When the drawing content necessary for changing a part or all of the color tone in one effect is defined by the additional data table, an image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in the additional data table. Corresponding to an address that represents time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) as one unit, the type of sprite whose color tone is changed and color information that specifies the changed color tone of the sprite at that time. It may be prescribed. Then, in the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 433e, the MPU 431 stores at the address indicated by the pointer 433g the type of the sprite whose color tone is to be changed and the color information designating the changed color tone in the sprite. If specified, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433d, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified at the address indicated by the pointer 433g is replaced with the color information specified by the additional data table. Then, a drawing list may be created. As a result, the image controller 437 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

Further, when the drawing content necessary for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is defined by the additional data table, in the additional data table, the image for one frame in the third symbol display device 281 is displayed. Is made to correspond to an address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new sprite type. The drawing information of the sprite to be displayed may be defined. Then, in the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 433e, the MPU 431, at the address indicated by the pointer 433g, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the sprite to be newly displayed. Of the various types of sprites defined by the address indicated by the pointer 433g in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433d instead of the sprite to be replaced. The sprite type to be displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. Accordingly, the image controller 437 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

In the fifth to eighth embodiments, the case where the transfer data table is prepared corresponding to each display data table has been described. A data table may be prepared. In this additional transfer data table, the sprite that is used in the corresponding additional data table corresponding to the address specified in the additional data table (or the display data table) and at which the transfer is started at the time indicated by the address Transfer data information of image data may be described.

Further, in this case, when the additional transfer data table buffer is provided in the work RAM 433 of the display control device 281, and one additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 433e, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is Alternatively, the additional transfer data table corresponding to the one additional data table may be set in the additional transfer data table buffer. Then, if the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 433g in the additional transfer data table set in the additional transfer data table buffer, the MPU 431 adds the transfer data information to the drawing list. You may do it. Accordingly, the image controller 437 can transfer the image data of the sprite used by the additional data table to the normal video RAM 436 in advance according to the drawing list before the image data is used. Therefore, even if the character ROMs 434, 534, 634, and 734a are configured by the NAND flash memories 434a, 534a, 634a, and 734a whose reading speed is slow, the effect defined by the additional data table can be easily and surely displayed on the third symbol. It can be displayed on the device 281. Further, by using the additional transfer data table corresponding to the additional data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 436 while instructing the drawing of the image based on the additional data table. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional data table. Therefore, even if the character ROMs 434, 534, 634, and 734 are configured by the NAND flash memories 434a, 534a, 634a, and 734a whose reading speed is slow, various types of effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

In the fifth to eighth embodiments, in the display control device 314, in addition to the display data table that defines the drawing content of the effect (for example, variable effect) to be the base, an effect additionally displayed (for example, continuous operation). Although a case has been described in which an additional data table that defines the drawing content of (preliminary notice effect) is set and the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 433g is acquired from each data table, the present invention is not limited to this. When the display of the effect (for example, continuous notice effect) additionally displayed for the effect (for example, variable effect) is determined, the display data table corresponding to the effect as the base is determined. The drawing contents of the additional data table corresponding to the additionally displayed effect are added for each address indicating the display time to generate a new display data table, and based on the new display data table, the image is displayed. The drawing content may be acquired. As a result, it is possible to easily display the effect additionally displayed with respect to the base effect. In addition, for each type of effect that is the base, a display data table that defines the drawing content of only the effect that is the base, and display data that specifies the image content that overlaps the effect that is displayed in addition to the effect that is the base. Since it is not necessary to have a table and the like, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of data tables. Further, since the drawing content can be specified only by using the newly created display data table, the process required for specifying the drawing content can be compared with the case where the drawing content is specified from two of the display data table and the additional data table. The load can be reduced.

If it is determined that the effect to be additionally displayed with respect to the base effect is not displayed, the display data table corresponding to the base effect is used as it is to acquire the drawing content of the image. May be.

In addition, in the display data table, the drawing content of the effect (for example, continuous notice effect) additionally displayed together with the drawing content of the base effect (for example, variable effect) is additionally displayed. It is described in a format that clearly indicates the drawing content of the effect to be displayed, and when the effect to be additionally displayed is to be displayed, it is additionally displayed together with the drawing content of the base effect. If the drawing content of the effect is specified from the display data table, and if the additionally displayed effect is hidden, the drawing content of the additionally displayed effect is discarded and the effect becomes the base effect. It is also possible to specify only the drawing contents of the above from the display data table. This eliminates the need for an additional data table that defines the rendering content of the additionally displayed effect, so that control over the additional data table becomes unnecessary and the processing load can be reduced.

In the fifth to eighth embodiments, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table. A case has been described where only the drawing content corresponding to the super reach selected by the player is specified, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and it can be regarded as an effect in which each super reach is added and displayed. It is also possible to prepare an additional data table corresponding to the super reach and set the additional data table corresponding to the super reach selected by the player in the additional data table buffer 433e. Further, the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach may be added to the display data table. As a result, it is possible to easily specify the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player. Further, since it is not necessary to define the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to prevent the data size of the display data table from increasing.

In the fifth to eighth embodiments, the display control device 314 prepares a transfer data table that defines the transfer data information of the image data corresponding to the sprite used in the display data table, corresponding to the display data table. The case has been described in which the transfer data table corresponding to the predetermined display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 433f while the predetermined display data table is set in the display data table buffer 433d. When setting a predetermined display data table in the display data table buffer 433d, the transfer data information defined by the corresponding transfer data table is set to an address indicating the display time. Alternatively, a new display data table may be generated, and the drawing content of the image and the transfer data information may be acquired at the same time based on the new display data table. This makes it possible to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information using the display data table, so that the drawing content and the transfer data information are specified from the display data table and the transfer data table, respectively. The processing load required for identification can be reduced.

In addition, when the above-mentioned additional transfer data table, which is a transfer data table corresponding to each additional data table, is prepared, when a predetermined additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 433e, the additional data table is added to the additional data table. On the other hand, the transfer data information specified by the corresponding additional transfer data table is added for each address indicating the display time to generate a new additional data table, and based on the new additional data table, the image is displayed. The drawing content and the transfer data information may be acquired at the same time. With this, it is possible to specify the rendering content of the effect to be additionally displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering. Therefore, from the additional data table and the additional transfer data table, Compared with the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are respectively specified, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

Further, when the display of the effect (for example, the continuous notice effect) additionally displayed with respect to the effect as the base (for example, continuous notice effect) is determined, the display data table corresponding to the effect as the base is determined. On the other hand, the drawing content of the additional data table corresponding to the additionally displayed effect is added for each address indicating the display time, a new display data table is generated, and based on the new display data table. When acquiring the drawing content of an image, the transfer data information defined by the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is added to the display data table for each address indicating the display time. The transfer data information defined by the additional transfer data table corresponding to the additional data table may be added for each address indicating the display time to generate a new display data table. Thus, the display data table can be used to specify the drawing content of the effect to be the base, the drawing content of the effect to be added, and the transfer data information of the image necessary for drawing them. It is possible to reduce the processing load required for specifying the drawing content and the transfer data information from the table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the additional transfer data table, respectively.

Further, transfer data information may be described in advance in the display data table. Also by this, since it is possible to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information using the display data table, compared with the case of specifying the drawing content and the transfer data information from the display data table and the transfer data table, respectively, The processing load required for the identification can be reduced. Further, in the display data table, the drawing content of the effect (for example, continuous notice effect) additionally displayed together with the drawing content of the base effect (for example, variable effect) is additionally displayed. When describing in a format that clearly indicates the drawing content of the effect, the display data table is used not only for the transfer data information used in the base effect, but also for the drawing of the effect additionally displayed. The transfer data information of the image is described in a format that clearly indicates that it is the transfer data information of the effect additionally displayed, and it becomes the base when the effect additionally displayed is displayed. If the drawing content and transfer data information of the effect and the drawing content and transfer data information of the effect additionally displayed are specified from the display data table and the effect additionally displayed is hidden, add It is also possible to discard the drawing content and the transfer data information of the effect that are displayed by, and specify only the drawing content and the transfer data information of the base effect from the display data table. Thus, the display data table can be used to specify the drawing content and transfer data information of the base effect, and the drawing content and transfer data information of the effect to be added. Therefore, the display data table and the transfer data table can be specified. As compared with the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are respectively specified from the additional data table and the additional transfer data table, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

In the fifth to eighth embodiments, the display control device 314 has described the case where the display data table is prepared for each variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation For example, a display data table is prepared for each element such as "variation start-up", "high-speed variation", "notice production", "normal reach", "super reach", and the variation indicated by the variation pattern command for display is prepared. After specifying the elements required for the variation effect according to the pattern, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets required for the specified variation effect are combined into one, and the final regular display corresponding to the variation pattern is made. A data table may be generated. In many cases, "variation start-up", "high-speed variation", "normal reach", etc. are commonly displayed for each variation pattern. Therefore, by making the variable effect into elements and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element in this way, the data table can be efficiently provided.

In the fifth to eighth embodiments, the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are specified from the address indicated by the pointer 433g using the common pointer 433g in the display data table, the additional data table and the transfer data table Although described, a pointer may be prepared for each data table.

In the fifth to eighth embodiments, the image controller 437 sends the V interrupt signal to the MPU 431 at every display interval (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) of the image for one frame at which the drawing process is finished. Although the case of transmitting has been described, the image controller 437 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 431 every time the third symbol display device 281 is driven to display an image of one frame. Good. The third symbol display device 281 is driven so that an image for one frame is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals). By sending, the time interval can be kept accurate without timing.

In the fifth to eighth embodiments, the image controller 437 specifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be expanded based on the drawing target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 431, and the other frame buffer first. The case where the developed image information is read and transmitted to the third symbol display device 281 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the image controller 437 displays the drawn image each time the drawing list is received. The frame buffers to be expanded are selected alternately, and the image information previously expanded is read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 281. Good. Further, the image controller 437 outputs the image information to the frame buffer where the drawn image should be expanded and the third symbol display device 281 every time the image information for one frame is transmitted to the third symbol display device 281. The frame buffer to be used may be replaced.

In the fifth to eighth embodiments, after the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect is set in the display data table buffer 433d and before the confirmed display effect is completed, the audio lamp control device 313 is used. When neither the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) nor the demo command (demonstration command for display) is received from the main control unit 310, the demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is displayed in the display data table buffer 433d. In the above description, the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be set again in the display data table buffer 433d. Further, in this case, the fixed display effect ends until both the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) and the demo command (display demo command) are received from the main control device 310 via the voice lamp control device 313. Each time, the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 433d. Thereby, until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 310, it is possible to continue displaying the final display effect on the third symbol display device 281.

In the fifth to eighth embodiments, the case where the demonstration effect is to change the back image and stop and display the third symbol composed of the main symbols without numbers “0” to “9” Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semitransparent state. Further, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a rear image that is completely different from the third symbol or the rear image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the fifth to eighth embodiments, in the display control means 314, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are first supplied from the character ROM 434, 534, 634, 734 to the resident video RAM 435 after the power is turned on. Of the power-on main image area 435a and the power-on fluctuation image area 435b, and after the transfer is completed, the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and the remaining resident image data is displayed. The transfer from the character ROMs 434, 534, 634, 734 to the resident video RAM 435 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the display control means 314, after the power is turned on, first, only the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROMs 434, 534, 634, 734 to the power-on main image area 435a of the resident video RAM 435, and After the transfer is completed, the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is resident from the character ROMs 434, 534, 634, 734. It may be transferred to the video RAM 435. As a result, the main image at power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 sooner after power-on, so that the pachinko machine 200 can be used in the operation check in the player, the hall personnel, or the factory during manufacturing. You can immediately confirm that the operation has started without any problem when the power is turned on.

Further, in this case, the MPU 431 may monitor completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 435b. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 313 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 435b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 435b, a simple fluctuation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281. It should be noted that the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 435b is preferably performed immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. As a result, it is possible to more quickly perform the variable display by the power-on fluctuation image.

In the fifth to eighth embodiments, the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table correspond to the time in which 20 milliseconds is set as one unit, and the content of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing content ) And the case of defining the information of image data to be transferred at that time (transfer data information), but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to specify the display content at every predetermined time interval. Good. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 281. For example, the frame rate of the third symbol display device 281 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 281 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 281 is 1/30. Since one frame image is displayed every second, the display data table may define the display contents at intervals of 1/30 second.

Further, in the display data table and the additional data table, as the sprite type to be drawn defined at each predetermined time interval, the sprite type itself is not designated, but the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. The addresses of the character ROMs 434, 534, 634, 734 may be defined. In the display control device 314, since the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is read from the character ROMs 434, 534, 634, 734, the image data of the sprite type is associated with each sprite type. Manages the addresses of the character ROMs 434, 534, 634, 734 in which is stored. Therefore, in the display data table, if the addresses of the character ROMs 434, 534, 634, 734 storing the image data corresponding to the sprite type are specified as the display contents defined at each predetermined time interval, each sprite type is defined. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the sprite and the addresses of the character ROMs 434, 534, 634, and 734 in association with, it is possible to reduce the processing load.

In the fifth to eighth embodiments, the work RAM 433 of the display control device 314 is provided with the stored image discrimination flag 433j, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436 for each sprite. Although the case where the data is stored has been described, the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 436a may be stored in the work RAM 433 instead. In this case, the MPU 431 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 436a stored in the work RAM 433 when the image data of the predetermined sprite type is transferred, and refers to the predetermined image data. May be already stored in the image storage area 436a, and if not stored, an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the transfer instruction of the image data of the predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 431 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 433 and also stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 436a may be deleted.

In the fifth to eighth embodiments, when the image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 434, 534, 634, 734 to the normal video RAM 436, the sprite type of the sprite type is determined based on the stored image determination flag 433j. It is determined whether or not the image data is stored in the normal video RAM 437, and if the normal video RAM 436 stores the image data of the predetermined sprite type, the process of not executing the transfer process is executed. Although the case has been described where the MPU 431 performs this processing, the image controller 437 may perform this processing. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image discrimination flag 433j is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 437 to store whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 436 for each sprite. You may let me. The work RAM provided in the image controller 437 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436. In this case, if the MPU 431 needs to transfer the image data of the predetermined sprite type from the character ROMs 434, 534, 634, 734 to the normal video RAM 436, the MPU 431 is irrelevant to the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 436. Instead, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted to the image controller 437.

In the fifth to eighth embodiments, the case where only the image data corresponding to the “rear surface A” among the plurality of rear images is made resident in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, the image data corresponding to two or more rear images may be made resident in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. For example, the image data of the rear image used in some super reach may be made resident in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. In particular, by making the rear image of the super reach, which is expected to appear frequently or frequently, resident in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, image data transfer processing from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times that the

In the fifth to eighth embodiments, the transfer data table defines the transfer instruction of the image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 433g, and the MPU 431 transfers the image data at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. The case where the image controller 437 is controlled so as to transfer the image data instructed by the command from the character ROMs 434, 534, 634, 734 to the normal video RAM 436 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table The information about the sprite type required in the display data table is described at the beginning of the, and the MPU 431 sets the necessary image data to the character ROMs 434, 534, 634, based on the information described at the beginning of the display data table. The image controller 437 may be controlled so as to transfer data from the standard video RAM 436 to the normal video RAM 436. Alternatively, based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 313, the MPU 431 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in response to the command, and outputs the image data of the image type to the character ROMs 434 and 534. , 634, 734 to the normal video RAM 436, the image controller 437 may be controlled.

In the fifth to eighth embodiments, the case where the color tone of part of the image on the back surface C, which is the back image of the “island stage”, changes with time, but the color tone of the entire image changes with time. It may be one. Further, the back image is not limited to one that scrolls or changes in color tone over time, and instead of such a back image, an object (for example, a person) that appears over time may appear. It may be something that moves or changes.

In the fifth to eighth embodiments, the case where the continuous notice effect is also executed in the third symbol display device 281 in which the variable effect is performed has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the pachinko machine 200 is provided with the third effect. By providing a fourth symbol display device different from the symbol display device 281 and displaying the fourth symbol on the fourth symbol display device together with the variable effect executed by the third symbol display device 281, a continuous notice effect is produced. May be executed. In this case, the display control device 314 may control the fourth symbol display device or the voice lamp control device 313. Alternatively, the continuous notice effect may be executed by providing the pachinko machine 200 with an accessory that operates according to various effects and operating the accessory in a predetermined mode together with the variable effect. Further, the sound lamp control device 313 may control the sound output device 426 of the pachinko machine 200 to output a sound for the continuous notice effect to execute the continuous notice effect, or the illumination portion of the pachinko machine 200. The continuous announcement effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 229 to 233 together with the variable effect.

As a result, every time a variation effect is performed in the third symbol display device 281 (and the first symbol display device 237), symbols are continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or the accessory operates in a predetermined mode. The player can have a big hit expectation by playing a sound, outputting a sound from the sound output device 426, or lighting or blinking the illumination portions 229 to 233. In addition, the player usually keeps watching the third symbol display device 281 in which the variable effect is performed and continues the game, but the display of the symbol by the fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 281. Since the continuous notice effect is performed by the operation of the accessory, the sound output from the sound output device 426, or the lighting/blinking of the illumination portions 229 to 233, an effect different from the normal effect is given to the player. It can be easily recognized. Further, the continuous notice effect can be easily continued by simple control such as the display of the symbols by the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the accessory, the voice output from the voice output device 426, or the lighting/blinking of the illumination portions 229 to 233. A notice production can be performed.

Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by voice output from the voice output device 426 and lighting or blinking of the illumination portions 229 to 233, the continuous notice effect is controlled by the voice lamp control device 313, so at the time of winning the start prize. In the pachinko machine 200, the pachinko machine 200 is continuously operated by causing the main control device 310 to perform the win/no decision process at the start of the variation and the lottery process at the start of the variation, to cause the voice lamp control device 313 to perform the continuous announcement effect, and to cause the display control device 314 to perform the variation effect. When performing the notice production, each processing can be shared by each control device. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, it is possible to suppress the performance required for the MPU of each control device to be low.

In addition, the display of the symbol for the continuous notice effect on the third symbol display device 281, the display of the symbol for the continuous notice effect on the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined mode, the voice from the voice output device 426. At least two or more of the output and the lighting or blinking of the illumination portions 229 to 233 may be combined, and the continuous advance notice effect may be executed by controlling them in conjunction with each other. As a result, it is possible to execute more various continuous announcement effects. In addition, the method of executing the continuous notice effect (display by the third symbol display device 281, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the accessory, voice output from the voice output device 426, lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 229 to 233. , Or a combination thereof, even if a plurality of continuous notice production modes selected according to the game state (15R sure change big hit, 2R sure change big hit, time saving big hit, miss) after the end of the continuous notice effect is prepared. Good.

Further, in the fifth to eighth embodiments, when the continuous announcement effect is performed, the case where an image for the continuous announcement effect different from the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 has been described. The present invention is not limited to this, and the continuous notice effect may be performed by displaying a so-called “chance eye”, which is a combination of predetermined symbols, as a stop symbol displayed when the variable effect is finished. .. In this case, in the continuous notice command process (see FIG. 57) of the command determination process executed by the MPU 421 of the display control device 313, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance eye is turned on, and other stop symbol determination is performed. The flag may be set to off. In the command determination process, the continuous notice command process is executed after the stop identification command process, so instead of the stop design set by the reception of the display stop identification command, the chance chance is set as the stop design, so the variable stop Occasionally, the chance eyes can be confirmed and displayed. Then, in the third symbol display device 281, if the chance eyes are continuously displayed as a stop symbol for each variation effect, it is possible to give the player an expectation that a jackpot will be finally obtained.

In the fifth to eighth embodiments, the main control device 310 notifies the voice lamp control device of various counters (first per random number counter C1, first per type counter C2, stop pattern selection) acquired at the time of the start winning. Although the case where the information of the counter C3) is included in the reserved ball number command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The information of the hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3) may be notified to the voice lamp control device 313.

In the fifth to eighth embodiments, the main control device 310 uses, in the reserved ball number command, various counters (first random number counter C1, first per type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3) acquired at the time of starting winning. Of the number of held balls, the voice lamp controller 313 sends the number-of-holding-balls command to the voice lamp controller 313, and the number-of-holding-balls command is sent by the voice lamp controller 313 according to the values of various counters included in the number of held balls. Estimate the result of the lottery performed corresponding to the held ball held at the time when was sent and the stop type after the variation production, based on the estimation result and the number of held balls held at that time, The case of deciding whether or not to perform the continuous notice presentation has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the main control device 310 estimates the result of the lottery corresponding to the start winning and the stop type after the variation production from the values of the various counters acquired at the time of winning the start winning, and at least a part of the estimation result is the number of reserved balls. The voice lamp control device 313 may be included in the command and notified to the voice lamp control device 313, and the voice lamp control device 313 may determine whether or not to perform the continuous notice presentation based on the notified estimation result. In addition, the main control device 310 may perform the continuous notice presentation based on the result of the lottery corresponding to the start winning, which is estimated from the values of the various counters acquired at the time of the start winning, and the stop type after the variation presentation. It is determined whether or not the voice lamp control device 313 includes at least the determination result in the hold ball number command, and the voice lamp control device 313 finally performs the continuous notice presentation based on the determination result. May be determined. Further, the main control device 310 determines whether or not the continuous announcement effect is to be performed, and the determination result is included in the number of reserved balls command to notify the audio lamp control device 313, and the audio lamp control device 313 notifies the continuous announcement effect. You may make it determine only a performance mode. As information to be included in the number of reserved balls command, information regarding the result of the lottery corresponding to the estimated starting prize, information regarding the stop type after the variation production, information regarding whether or not continuous notice production may be performed, or continuous notice production is performed. By using this information as to whether or not the value of various counters is included, the command size of the number of reserved balls command can be reduced. In addition, the result of the lottery corresponding to the estimated starting prize, the information about the stop type after the variation effect, the information as to whether or not the continuous notice effect may be performed, or the information as to whether or not the continuous notice effect is performed, The command may be transmitted from main controller 310 to voice lamp controller 313 by a command different from the number of reserved balls.

In the fifth to eighth embodiments, when the voice lamp control device 313 transmits the continuous advance notice command to the display control device 314, the continuous advance notice image indicated by the continuous advance notice command is displayed on the display control device 314. The case where a transfer instruction is issued to transfer the image data corresponding to the type from the character ROMs 434, 534, 634, 734 to the normal video RAM 436 has been described. If the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type indicated by the continuous notice command is once transferred from the character ROM 434, 534, 634, 734 to the normal video RAM 436, the continuous notice effect is continuously displayed. It may be controlled so as not to be overwritten by other image data until the notice production ends. This makes it possible to prevent the same image data from being repeatedly transferred.

If the continuous notice image type indicated by the continuous notice command constitutes a step-up type continuous notice effect, not only the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type indicated by the continuous notice command but also the step It may be a transfer instruction to transfer the image data corresponding to all the continuous notice image types used in the up-type continuous notice effect from the character ROMs 434, 534, 634, 734 to the normal video RAM 436. Also in this case, the image data corresponding to these continuous notice image types once transferred to the normal video RAM 436 is controlled so as not to be overwritten by other image data until the continuous notice effect is completed. Good. Thereby, before the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type is used by the continuous notice effect, the image data can be surely stored in the normal video RAM 436. In addition, it is possible to suppress the repeated transfer of the same image data.

Further, in the voice lamp control device 313, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined by the continuous announcement determination process (S2009) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 50), and the continuous announcement effect mode is determined. At this stage, a command for notifying the display control device 314 of the execution decision of the continuous notice effect and the continuous notice effect mode may be transmitted to the display control device 314. Then, in response to the reception of this command, the display control device 314 transfers the image data of the continuous notice image type used in the continuous notice mode from the character ROMs 434, 534, 634, 734 to the normal video RAM 436. A transmission instruction may be set. As a result, the transfer of the image data of the continuous notice image type used in the continuous notice mode from the character ROM 434, 534, 634, 734 to the normal video RAM 436 is performed before the variation effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed is started. Since it can be started, it is possible to surely store the image data in the normal video RAM 436 before the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type is used by the continuous notice effect.

Further, the display control device 314 may store the image data used in the continuous announcement effect in a sub area dedicated to the continuous announcement effect image provided in the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436. As a result, the image data used in the continuous announcement effect can be prevented from being overwritten by other image data, so that the image data corresponding to the desired continuous announcement image type is stored in the normal video RAM 436. The probability can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the image data used in the continuous announcement presentation from being repeatedly transferred.

Further, the continuous notice command transmitted from the display control device 314 may include a signal notifying that it is the last continuous notice effect in which the variable effect is set. Thereby, the display control device 314 can recognize that the display of the continuous announcement effect is the last, and therefore, while the continuous announcement effect is being performed, it is stored in the normal video RAM 436 used in the continuous announcement effect. When the control is performed so that the image data is not overwritten, the overwriting control can be easily canceled.

Further, in the fifth to eighth embodiments, the case where the sound lamp control device 313 notifies the display control device 314 of the execution of the continuous notification effect and the continuous notification image type by the continuous notification command has been described. May be included in the display variation pattern command. That is, in the variable display process (see FIG. 51) executed by the voice lamp control device 313, when the display variation pattern command is generated (S2104), it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is performed, and the continuous notice effect is performed. When the notice production is performed, information regarding the execution and the continuous notice image type may be included in the display variation pattern command. Then, in the display control device 314, when the received variation pattern command includes information regarding the execution of the continuous notice image and the continuous notice image type, the character ROM 434 of the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type. The transfer instruction from the 534, 634, 734 to the normal video RAM 436 may be performed, and the additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice image type may be set in the additional data table buffer 433e. As a result, the number of commands is reduced, so that the processing can be simplified.

In addition, when the information regarding the execution of the continuous notice effect and the type of the continuous notice image is included in the display variation pattern command, the display data table that does not correspond to the continuous notice image for each variation pattern and the corresponding for each continuous notice image type The display control device 314 sets the corresponding display data table in the display data table buffer 433d in accordance with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display and the continuous notice image type. May be. That is, the display data table may include both the drawing content corresponding to the variation pattern and the drawing content of the continuous notice effect corresponding to the continuous notice image type. In this case, it is not necessary to set the additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice type. Therefore, the number of data tables to be set can be reduced, and the increase in processing load can be suppressed. In this case, the instruction to transfer the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type may be issued in response to the reception of the display variation pattern command. As a result, only one transfer data table needs to be prepared for each variation pattern, so that an increase in the data table can be suppressed.

In the fifth to eighth embodiments, the stop symbol of the variable effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed is based on the stop symbol (rear out-of-front reach, reach other than out-of-front/rear reach, complete out-reach) determined by the main control device 310. Although the case where the voice lamp control device 313 sets the time has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the voice lamp control device 313 determines to execute the continuous announcement effect, the last fluctuation that has been held. If the stop symbol of the effect is not a big hit, the stop symbol of the last variable effect may be set not by the stop symbol determined by the main control device 310 but by the stop symbol in the front/rear outreach manner. As a result, the stop symbol of the last variable effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed is not the stop symbol determined by the main control device 310 but always the front/rear reach, so that the player has a high expectation. be able to.

In the fifth to eighth embodiments, in the case of performing the continuous announcement effect together with all the pending fluctuation effects, each fluctuation effect is performed in the effect mode based on the lottery result performed at the start of each fluctuation effect. However, when the continuous announcement effect is performed together with all the pending variable effects, the effect mode of the variable effects other than the last pending variable effect may be changed to the outlying variable effect. In this case, the voice lamp control device 313 changes the variation pattern according to the setting state of the continuous announcement effect and the number of times of execution of the continuous announcement effect by the process of generating the variation pattern command for display (see S2104 in FIG. 51). You can When the stop design after the fluctuating effect is a big hit, the effect mode of the fluctuating effect is not updated, and the effect mode of the fluctuating effect is displayed as it is based on the fluctuating pattern determined by main controller 310. May be. Here, even if the continuous notice production is continuously performed, even if the corresponding variation production mode is, for example, super reach variation production, if the situation in which the big hit does not appear as a result continues, the player's expectation May be moved backwards, but the continuous notice effect is continuously performed, and the variation effect other than the variation effect that is finally executed is continuously performed by the outlying variation effect, so that it is finally executed. It is possible to give the player a higher sense of expectation for the variation effect.

In the fifth to eighth embodiments, the case where the continuous announcement effect is always executed on the third symbol display device 281 when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the frame button 222 is pressed by the player in a situation where the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, the continuous announcement effect may be executed on the third symbol display device 281.

In the fifth to eighth embodiments, when performing the variation effect, a case has been described in which a high-speed variation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed so that the player cannot visually recognize them is displayed. Instead of displaying, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are displayed as snow noise images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed. May be.

In the fifth to eighth embodiments described above, the case where one game ball 213 is provided with one first ball entrance 264 for which a big hit lottery is started when a ball has entered has been described, but this is not always the case. The number is not limited to the above, and a plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances where the balls are independently detected and the jackpot lottery is started may be provided in the game board 213. In this case, the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 310 to the voice lamp control device 313 when there is a hold at each of the first entrances indicates which of the first entrances is the hold. Information may be included. Further, when the fluctuation starts, the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 310 to the voice lamp control device 313 may include information indicating which of the first entrances the fluctuation effect is held. Good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 313, a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first ball entrance, and when a reserved ball number command is received, the first ball entered indicated by the reserved ball number command. If the number of holding balls for the mouth is set to the number of holding balls and the variation pattern command is received, if the number of holding balls for the first entrance indicated by the variation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entrance The number of reserved balls can be counted for each.

Further, when a plurality of first ball entrances are provided, when the voice lamp control device 313 decides to start the continuous announcement effect when the hold ball number command is received, all the first ball entrances are made at that time. The continuous notice effect may be executed over the variable effect (holding ball) held by the mouth. In addition, in a pachinko machine that is provided with a plurality of first entrances and preferentially executes the variation effect held in one first entrance, the variation effect is preferentially executed. The start of the continuous announcement effect may be determined only when the player has entered the first entrance. As a result, since the continuous announcement effect is not started for the variation effect held in the first entrance having a low priority, the continuous announcement effect is performed for the fluctuation effect held in the first entrance having a low priority. It is possible to prevent the situation in which the continuous announcement production does not end easily when the variation production is continuously suspended in the first entrance having a high priority.

In the fifth to eighth embodiments, when the voice lamp control device 313 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 310, the value of the reserved ball number counter 423a is decremented by 1 (see S2105 in FIG. 51). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the variation process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 401 of the main control device 310, the number of reserved balls of the main control device 310 subtracted in accordance with the variation pattern command being set by the variation start process (S1207). The value (N) of the counter 403a (see S1205 in FIG. 41) is set so that the main controller 310 transmits it to the voice lamp controller 313, and the hold ball number command is set, and the hold ball number command changes pattern. Along with the transmission of the command, it may be transmitted from the main control device 310 to the voice lamp control device 313. In this case, S2105 of FIG. 51 is omitted. In addition, when transmitting the value (N) of the subtracted reserve ball number counter 403a of the main control device 310, the reserve ball number command includes information indicating that it is the reserve ball number after subtraction (that is, the start prize). The number of reserved balls may be generated without including the values of the various counters acquired in association with the start winning, including the information (which means that the number of reserved balls is not added according to the above). The determination as to whether or not the continuous notice effect is permitted is performed when there is a start winning. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 313, in the command determination process (see FIG. 50), the number of reserved balls command is changed. When reception is detected, if the number of holding balls indicated by the number of holding balls command is the number of holding balls after subtraction, that is, if it is not the number of holding balls added with the starting prize, the continuous notice determination process. The execution of may be skipped.

In the fifth to eighth embodiments, in the voice lamp control device 313, when the start of the continuous announcement effect is determined when the hold ball number command is received, all the variable effects held at that time are continuously changed. Although the case of executing the preliminary announcement effect has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. When the start of the continuous preliminary announcement effect is determined, it is further determined whether or not to execute the continuous preliminary announcement effect in each individual variable effect. You may. As a result, the continuous announcement effect may or may not appear for each variation effect, so that it is possible to give the player an expectation for the appearance of the continuous announcement effect, and perform an effect that does not tire the player. You can In this case, the MPU 421 of the voice lamp control device 313 is updated each time the variable display process (see FIG. 51) is executed, and a counter is provided to determine whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect in each variable effect. May be. Then, in the variable display process, when the continuous announcement effect is performed (S2107: Yes), the value of the counter for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect in each variation effect is limited to a predetermined value. The continuous notice command may be set (S2108). Further, in this case, the number (range) of the predetermined value of the counter that sets the continuous notice effect execution for the corresponding variable effect may be changed according to the condition. The conditions include, for example, the value of the reserved ball number counter 423a at the time of determining whether or not to start the continuous announcement effect, the number of executions of the remaining continuous announcement effects, the variation pattern of the variable effect for which the determination is performed, and the series. The game state after the end of the continuous announcement effect (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, time saving jackpot, miss), or a combination of two or more of these. As a result, the probability that the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined in each variation effect is changed according to the condition, so that the player can be made aware of the appearance ratio of the continuous announcement effect in each variation effect. ..

In the fifth to eighth embodiments, each command is transmitted from the main control device 310 to the voice lamp control device 313, and the voice lamp control device 313 instructs the display control device 314 to display. Although configured, the command may be directly transmitted from the main control device 310 to the display control device 314. Further, a voice lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and the display control device may be configured to transmit to the voice lamp control device a command instructing output of each voice and lighting of the lamp. Furthermore, the voice lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. When the voice lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, instead of the command such as the continuous advance notice command or the error generation command generated by the voice lamp control device 313 and notified to the display control device 314, the continuous advance notice is issued. Various flags such as a flag and an error occurrence flag are generated, and the display data table and the additional data table are set in the display data table buffer 433d or the additional data table buffer 433e based on the flags, and various image data such as a warning image is set. It may be generated or a transfer instruction of necessary image data may be set.

In the fifth to eighth embodiments, the winning of the first entrance 264 and the passage of the second entrance 267 are each configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is The number of times is not limited to four, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). In addition, the number of balls to be held for variable display based on winning in the first ball entrance 264 is a number in a part of the third symbol display device 281, or an area divided into four is the number of balls to be held. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 237, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. You may comprise.

Further, as shown in the fifth to eighth embodiments, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is such that the symbol as the identification information is vertically scrolled on the display screen of the third symbol display device 281. The present invention is not limited to this, and the symbols may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as the vertical direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbols, and, for example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed together with the symbols, or may be displayed in a variety of motions or changed separately from the symbols. It also includes the presentation display that is said. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

The invention described in the fifth to eighth embodiments may be implemented in the first to fourth embodiments. That is, in the slot machine 10, a display data table and an additional data table are prepared in advance for each of the various effects displayed on the auxiliary display device 65 in response to the command received from the main control device 101, and the main control device Depending on the content of the received command, select the display data table or additional data table to be used, expand the drawing content described in the selected data table in the order of address according to the pointer update, and expand it. The image displayed on the auxiliary display device 65 may be drawn by instructing the image controller 188 to draw an image in accordance with the drawn contents. In addition, the corresponding transfer data table is set according to the setting of the display data table, and the transfer data information described in the transfer data table is expanded in the address order according to the update of the pointer. Image data may be transferred from the character ROMs 187, 191, 192, 193 to the normal video RAM 190 according to the information.

Here, in game machines other than gaming machines (pachinko machines and slot machines), the displayed contents cannot be predicted because the displayed contents must be changed momentarily based on the user's operation. The display data table corresponding to each effect as described above cannot be provided. On the other hand, in the slot machine 10, the display control device 81 performs the lottery based on the gaming state of the slot machine 10 determined by various commands received from the main control device 101 and the start command by operating the start lever 41. Since the effect mode is selected based on the result of (judgment of winning mode) and the auxiliary effect section executes various effects, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect, and an effect to be displayed. It is possible to easily set a display data table buffer according to the above and create a drawing list for each frame according to the set data table. With such a configuration, as in the conventional slot machine, the program to be executed by the MPU 181 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is changed. Compared to the case where a large amount of load is involved in the process of starting and executing programs, which is complicated and enormous with the diversification of various types of Since the effect image to be displayed on 65 can be changed, it is possible to display various kinds of effect images on the auxiliary display section 65 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 81.

The present invention may be implemented in a slot machine of a type different from the so-called A type slot machine described in the first to fourth embodiments. For example, the present invention may be applied to any slot machine such as B type, C type, A type and C type combined type, B type and C type combined type, and type having a CT game. In any case, it is clear that the same operational effects as those of the above-described first to fourth embodiments can be obtained. The bonus wins in each of these types include BB wins, RB wins, SB wins, CT wins, and the like.

Further, the present invention may be carried out on a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the fifth to eighth embodiments. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right property, a 3rd right property, etc.) that can increase the expectation value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. May be implemented as). Alternatively, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated may be implemented.

As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for confirming and displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a ball launching handle is not provided. There are things. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, or due to, for example, the operation of the stop switch or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is caused to do so. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restriction on the place where the game machine is installed due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be shown below in addition to the slot machine and the gaming machine of the present invention.

It is provided with main control means for performing main control of the game, sub control means for operating based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and image display means for displaying an image based on control by the sub control means. In the slot machine, the sub control means responds to an image drawing means for drawing an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means and a command received from the main control means from a plurality of display modes. A first display determining means for determining a display type to be displayed, and drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in each of the display types is defined for each screen. First regulation information storage means for storing first regulation information, and first selection for selecting, from the first regulation information storage means, the first regulation information corresponding to the display type determined by the first display determination means. Means, a first pointer means updated every time, and each time the first pointer means is updated, the first pointer means is updated based on the first regulation information selected by the first selecting means. 1 for the image drawing means based on the drawing information specifying means for specifying the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the first pointer means and the drawing information for the one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means. And a drawing instruction information generating unit for generating drawing instruction information for instructing the drawing of an image for a screen, and the image drawing unit generates one screen based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating unit. A slot machine 1 for drawing an image of minutes.

According to the slot machine 1, in the sub control means, the first prescribed information storage means is provided for each of a plurality of display types, and the drawing information indicating the information necessary for drawing the image to be displayed in the display type is set to 1 The first definition information defined for each screen is stored, and the first display information corresponding to the display type to be displayed for the command received from the main control unit determined from the plurality of display modes by the first display determination unit. The regulation information is selected from the first regulation information storage means by the first selection means. Further, the first pointer means is updated every time the time elapses, and each time the update is performed, the first pointer means 1 corresponding to the updated first pointer means based on the first regulation information selected by the first selecting means. The drawing information for the screen is specified by the drawing information specifying means, and the drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw the image for one screen is drawn based on the specified drawing information for the one screen. It is generated by the instruction information generating means. Then, based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means, the image for one screen is drawn by the drawing image means. Thus, when the display type to be displayed for the command received from the main control means changes, the first regulation information corresponding to the display type can be easily displayed by selecting it from the first regulation information storage means. An image corresponding to the type can be generated and displayed on the image display means. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

It is provided with main control means for performing main control of the game, sub control means for operating based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and image display means for displaying an image based on control by the sub control means. In the slot machine, the sub-control unit stores a program executed by the arithmetic processing unit together with arithmetic processing unit and image information for displaying an image on the image display unit. Also includes a first storage means capable of holding information, and the arithmetic processing means is generated at the time of starting the supply of power, pointer means for specifying an address for specifying an instruction of a program to be executed by the arithmetic processing means. Reset signal receiving means for receiving a reset signal, and pointer initialization for initializing the pointer means to an address that specifies the first instruction of a predetermined program to be executed first based on the reset signal received by the reset receiving means Means for storing the image information and the program, the first storage means capable of performing a read operation faster than the first sub-storage means, and the arithmetic processing Second sub-storage means for storing a program which is a part or all of the predetermined program to be executed first upon receipt of the reset signal in the means, and which includes a first instruction of the predetermined program; It includes address acceptance means for accepting an address that identifies one of the information stored in the first sub-storage means and the second sub-storage means, and information identified by the address accepted by the address acceptance means. The address accepting means accepts a predetermined group of information from the temporary storage means for reading the temporary information from the first sub-storage means or the second sub-storage means and temporarily storing it, and the information stored in the temporary storage means. Information output means for reading and outputting the information specified by the specified address, and the temporary storage means stores the predetermined program to be executed first by the initialization by the pointer initialization means of the arithmetic processing means. When the address accepting means accepts that the address specifying the first instruction is designated by the pointer means, a part or all of the predetermined program including the first instruction is transferred from the second sub-storage means. A slot machine 2 for reading and temporarily storing the read program.

According to the slot machine 2, the sub-control means can retain the information even when the power is turned off, which stores the program executed by the arithmetic processing means together with the arithmetic processing means and the image information for displaying the image on the image display means. And a first storage means. Further, the arithmetic processing means includes pointer means for designating an address for specifying an instruction of a program to be executed by the arithmetic processing means, reset signal receiving means for receiving a reset signal generated at the start of power supply, and reset receiving means for the reset signal. A pointer initialization unit that initializes the pointer unit to an address that identifies the first instruction of a predetermined program to be executed first, based on the reset signal received by the unit, and the first storage unit includes: The first sub-storing means for storing the image information and the program, and the read-out operation that can be performed at a higher speed than the first sub-storing means, and the predetermined program to be executed first based on the reception of the reset signal in the arithmetic processing means. Part or all of the second sub-storage means for storing a program including the first instruction of the predetermined program, and one of the information stored in the first sub-storage means and the second sub-storage means. An address acceptance unit that accepts an address that identifies information, and a predetermined set of information that includes the information identified by the address accepted by the address acceptance unit are read from the first sub storage unit or the second sub storage unit, It has a temporary storage means for temporarily storing, and an information output means for reading out and outputting the information specified by the address accepted by the address acceptance means from the information stored in the temporary storage means.

Here, the temporary storage means, by the address reception means, indicates that the address specifying the first instruction of the predetermined program to be executed first by the pointer initialization means of the arithmetic processing means is designated from the pointer means. When accepted, a part or all of a predetermined program including the first command is read from the second sub storage means, and the read program is temporarily stored. As described above, since the second sub-storage means can read data faster than the first sub-storage means, the first program of the predetermined program to be executed first by the initialization by the pointer initialization means of the arithmetic processing means. When the address for specifying the instruction is designated by the pointer means, a part or all of the predetermined program including the first instruction executed by the arithmetic processing means after receiving the reset signal is immediately stored in the temporary storage means. Above, it can be output to the arithmetic processing means. Therefore, even when the program is stored together with the image information in the first sub-storage unit having a slow reading speed, it is possible to immediately read the program to be executed and start the processing.

It is provided with main control means for performing main control of the game, sub control means for operating based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and image display means for displaying an image based on control by the sub control means. In the slot machine, the sub-control unit stores a program executed by the arithmetic processing unit together with arithmetic processing unit and image information for displaying an image on the image display unit. Also includes a first storage means capable of holding information, and the arithmetic processing means is generated at the time of starting the supply of power, pointer means for specifying an address for specifying an instruction of a program to be executed by the arithmetic processing means. Reset signal receiving means for receiving a reset signal, and pointer initialization for initializing the pointer means to an address that specifies the first instruction of a predetermined program to be executed first based on the reset signal received by the reset receiving means The first storage means specifies a first sub-storage means for storing the image information and the program, and one information from the information stored in the first sub-storage means. Address acceptance means for accepting an address, and a temporary storage means for reading out a predetermined group of information including information specified by the address accepted by the address acceptance means from the first sub-storage means and temporarily storing the information. An information output means for reading and outputting the information specified by the address accepted by the address accepting means from the information stored in the temporary storage means, and a power supply detection for detecting the start of power supply. The temporary storage means, when the power supply detection detects that the power supply is started, the temporary storage means should be executed first based on the reception of the reset signal in the arithmetic processing means. A part or all of the predetermined program, including a first instruction of the predetermined program, is read from the first sub-storage unit, and the read program is temporarily stored. Slot machine 3 characterized by.

According to the slot machine 3, the sub-control unit can retain the information even when the power is turned off, which stores the program executed by the arithmetic processing unit together with the arithmetic processing unit and the image information for displaying the image on the image display unit. And a first storage means. Further, the arithmetic processing means includes pointer means for designating an address for specifying an instruction of a program to be executed by the arithmetic processing means, reset signal receiving means for receiving a reset signal generated at the start of power supply, and its reset receiving means. A pointer initialization unit that initializes the pointer unit to an address that identifies the first instruction of a predetermined program to be executed first, based on the reset signal received by the unit, and the first storage unit includes: First sub-storing means for storing image information and a program, address accepting means for accepting an address for identifying one of the information stored in the first sub-storing means, and addresses accepted by the address accepting means A predetermined group of information including the information specified by is read from the first sub-storage means and temporarily stored therein, and is received by the address receiving means from the information stored in the temporary storage means. The information output means for reading and outputting the information specified by the address and the power supply detection means for detecting the start of the power supply.

Here, when it is detected by the power supply detection that the power supply is started, the temporary storage means is a part or all of the predetermined program to be executed first based on the reception of the reset signal in the arithmetic processing means. Further, the program including the first instruction of the predetermined program is read from the first sub-storage means, and the read program is temporarily stored. Accordingly, when the pointer means is initialized by the pointer initialization means by receiving the reset signal, a part or all of the predetermined program to be executed first in the arithmetic processing means based on the reception of the reset signal is detected. Since the program including the first instruction of the predetermined program is already stored in the temporary storage means or is being stored in the temporary storage means, initialization by the pointer initialization means of the arithmetic processing means When the address specifying the first instruction of the predetermined program to be executed first is designated by the pointer means by the, the part of the predetermined program including the first instruction executed by the arithmetic processing means after receiving the reset signal. Alternatively, all of them can be immediately output from the temporary storage means to the arithmetic processing means. Therefore, even when the program is stored together with the image information in the first sub-storage unit having a slow reading speed, it is possible to immediately read the program to be executed and start the processing.

It is provided with main control means for performing main control of the game, sub control means for operating based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and image display means for displaying an image based on control by the sub control means. In the slot machine, the sub-control means stores a program executed by the arithmetic processing means together with arithmetic processing means and image information for displaying an image on the image display means. Also includes first storage means capable of holding information, and the arithmetic processing means is generated at the time of starting the supply of power, pointer means for specifying an address for specifying an instruction of a program to be executed by the arithmetic processing means. Reset signal receiving means for receiving a reset signal, and pointer initialization for initializing the pointer means to an address that specifies the first instruction of a predetermined program to be executed first based on the reset signal received by the reset receiving means Means for storing the image information and the program, the first storage means capable of performing a read operation faster than the first sub-storage means, and the arithmetic processing Second sub-storage means for storing a program which is a part or all of the predetermined program to be executed first upon receipt of the reset signal in the means, and which includes a first instruction of the predetermined program; It includes address acceptance means for accepting an address that identifies one of the information stored in the first sub-storage means and the second sub-storage means, and information identified by the address accepted by the address acceptance means. The address accepting means accepts a predetermined group of information from the temporary storage means for reading the temporary information from the first sub-storage means or the second sub-storage means and temporarily storing it, and the information stored in the temporary storage means. The information output means for reading and outputting the information specified by the specified address, and the power supply detection means for detecting the start of the power supply, wherein the temporary storage means detects the power supply by the power supply detection. When it is detected that the supply of is started, a part or all of the predetermined program to be executed first based on the reception of the reset signal in the arithmetic processing means, A program including a first instruction is read from the second sub storage means, and the read program is temporarily stored. Slot machine 4.

According to the slot machine 4, the sub-control means can retain the information even when the power is turned off, which stores the program executed by the arithmetic processing means together with the arithmetic processing means and the image information for displaying the image on the image display means. And a first storage means. Further, the arithmetic processing means includes pointer means for designating an address for specifying an instruction of a program to be executed by the arithmetic processing means, reset signal receiving means for receiving a reset signal generated at the start of power supply, and reset receiving means for the reset signal. A pointer initialization unit that initializes the pointer unit to an address that identifies the first instruction of a predetermined program to be executed first, based on the reset signal received by the unit, and the first storage unit includes: The first sub-storing means for storing the image information and the program, and the read-out operation that can be performed at a higher speed than the first sub-storing means, and the predetermined program to be executed first based on the reception of the reset signal in the arithmetic processing means. Part or all of the second sub-storage means for storing a program including the first instruction of the predetermined program, and one of the information stored in the first sub-storage means and the second sub-storage means. An address acceptance unit that accepts an address that identifies the information, and a predetermined group of information that includes the information identified by the address that is accepted by the address acceptance unit are read from the first sub storage unit or the second sub storage unit, Temporary storage means for temporarily storing, information output means for reading and outputting information specified by the address accepted by the address acceptance means from the information stored in the temporary storage means, and power supply are started. And a power supply detection means for detecting the fact.

Here, when it is detected by the power supply detection that the power supply is started, the temporary storage means is a part or all of the predetermined program to be executed first based on the reception of the reset signal in the arithmetic processing means. In addition, the program including the first instruction of the predetermined program is read from the second sub storage means, and the read program is temporarily stored. As described above, the second sub-storage unit can perform the read operation at a higher speed than the first sub-storage unit. Therefore, the second sub-storage unit stores the data in the second sub-storage unit when the start of power supply is detected. If the stored program is read out and stored in the temporary storage means, when the pointer means is initialized by the pointer initialization means by receiving the reset signal, the arithmetic processing means first executes a predetermined operation based on the reception of the reset signal. This is a stage in which a part or all of the above program, including the first instruction of the predetermined program, is already stored in the temporary storage means or is being stored in the temporary storage means. Therefore, when the pointer initializing means of the arithmetic processing means initializes the address for specifying the first instruction of the predetermined program to be executed first, the pointer processing means executes the address after receiving the reset signal. It is possible to immediately output a part or all of the predetermined program including the first instruction to the arithmetic processing means from the temporary storage means. Therefore, even when the program is stored together with the image information in the first sub-storage unit having a slow reading speed, it is possible to immediately read the program to be executed and start the processing.

It is provided with main control means for performing main control of the game, sub control means for operating based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and image display means for displaying an image based on control by the sub control means. In the slot machine, the sub-control unit stores a program executed by the arithmetic processing unit together with arithmetic processing unit and image information for displaying an image on the image display unit. And a first storage means capable of holding information, and a predetermined program that can be read out faster than the first storage means and is first executed by the arithmetic processing means. And a program storing unit that stores a part or all of the predetermined program including the first instruction and that can retain information even when the power is cut off, and the arithmetic processing unit stores the program to be executed by the arithmetic processing unit. A pointer means for designating an address for specifying an instruction, a reset signal receiving means for receiving a reset signal generated at the start of power supply, and a predetermined signal to be executed first based on the reset signal received by the reset receiving means. A pointer initialization unit that initializes the pointer unit to an address that specifies the first instruction of the program, and the program storage unit is a predetermined program first executed by the arithmetic processing unit, When an address specifying an instruction included in a part or all of the predetermined program including the first instruction of the predetermined program is specified by the pointer means, an instruction specified by the address specified by the pointer means A slot machine 5 which reads out and outputs.

According to the slot machine 5, the sub-control means holds the information even when the power is turned off, which stores the arithmetic processing means and the image information for displaying the image on the image display means as well as the program executed by the arithmetic processing means. A possible first storage means and a predetermined program that can be read out faster than the first storage means and is first executed by the arithmetic processing means, and includes the first instruction of the predetermined program. It has a program storage means for storing a part or all of a predetermined program and capable of holding information even when the power is turned off. Further, the arithmetic processing means includes pointer means for designating an address for specifying an instruction of a program to be executed by the arithmetic processing means, reset signal receiving means for receiving a reset signal generated at the start of power supply, and reset receiving means for the reset signal. And pointer initialization means for initializing the pointer means to an address that specifies the first instruction of a predetermined program to be executed first, based on the reset signal received by the means.

Here, the program storage means is an address that identifies a predetermined program that is first executed by the arithmetic processing means and that is included in a part or all of the predetermined program including the first instruction of the predetermined program. Is designated by the pointer means, the instruction designated by the address designated by the pointer means is read and output. As described above, the program storage means can perform the read operation faster than the first storage means. Therefore, the initialization of the pointer initialization means of the arithmetic processing means saves a predetermined program to be executed first. When the address specifying the first instruction is designated by the pointer means, a part or all of the predetermined program including the first instruction executed by the arithmetic processing means after receiving the reset signal is immediately read from the program storage means. And output to the arithmetic processing means. Therefore, even when the program is stored together with the image information in the first storage unit having a slow reading speed, it is possible to immediately read the program to be executed and start executing the process.

It is provided with main control means for performing main control of the game, sub control means for operating based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and image display means for displaying an image based on control by the sub control means. In the gaming machine, the sub control means responds to an image drawing means for drawing an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means and a command received from the main control means from a plurality of display modes. A first display determining means for determining a display type to be displayed, and drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in each of the display types is defined for each screen. First regulation information storage means for storing first regulation information, and first selection for selecting, from the first regulation information storage means, the first regulation information corresponding to the display type determined by the first display determination means. Means, a first pointer means updated every time, and each time the first pointer means is updated, the first pointer means is updated based on the first regulation information selected by the first selecting means. 1 for the image drawing means based on the drawing information specifying means for specifying the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the first pointer means and the drawing information for the one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means. And a drawing instruction information generating unit for generating drawing instruction information for instructing the drawing of an image for a screen, and the image drawing unit generates one screen based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating unit. A game machine A1 for drawing an image of minutes.

According to the gaming machine A1, in the sub control means, the first prescribed information storage means is provided for each of a plurality of display types, and the drawing information indicating the information necessary for drawing the image to be displayed in the display type is set to 1 The first definition information defined for each screen is stored, and the first display information corresponding to the display type to be displayed for the command received from the main control unit determined from the plurality of display modes by the first display determination unit. The regulation information is selected from the first regulation information storage means by the first selection means. Further, the first pointer means is updated every time the time elapses, and each time the update is performed, the first pointer means 1 corresponding to the updated first pointer means based on the first regulation information selected by the first selecting means. The drawing information for the screen is specified by the drawing information specifying means, and the drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw the image for one screen is drawn based on the specified drawing information for the one screen. It is generated by the instruction information generating means. Then, based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means, the image for one screen is drawn by the drawing image means. Thus, when the display type to be displayed for the command received from the main control means changes, the first regulation information corresponding to the display type can be easily displayed by selecting it from the first regulation information storage means. An image corresponding to the type can be generated and displayed on the image display means. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

In the gaming machine A1, the sub control means includes a first image information storage means for storing a plurality of image information used for drawing an image by the image drawing means, and is defined for each screen in the first defining information. The drawing information includes specifying information for specifying image information necessary for drawing the image for one screen, and the drawing instruction information generating means is for the one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means. Based on the drawing information of the drawing information, the drawing instruction information including the image instruction information for instructing the image information necessary for drawing the image for the one screen is generated from the specific information included in the drawing information. Of the plurality of pieces of image information stored in the first image information storage means based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means, the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information A gaming machine A2, which draws an image for one screen using the created image information.

According to the gaming machine A2, in the sub control means, the first image information storage means stores a plurality of image information used for drawing an image by the image drawing means. Further, the drawing information specified for each screen in the first specifying information includes the specifying information for specifying the image information necessary for drawing the image for the one screen, and the drawing information specifying means Based on the identified drawing information for one screen, the drawing instruction information including the image instruction information for instructing the image information necessary for drawing the image for the one screen is drawn based on the specific information included in the drawing information. It is generated by the instruction information generating means. Then, based on the generated drawing instruction information, the image information designated by the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information among the plurality of image information stored in the first image information storage means by the image drawing means. Is used to draw an image for one screen. As a result, various image types can be supported by specifying the image information necessary for drawing the image for one screen by the specifying information included in the drawing information specified for each screen in the first specifying information. The drawn image can be drawn and displayed on the image display means. Therefore, it is possible to more easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

In the gaming machine A2, the sub-control unit can perform a read operation faster than the first image storage unit, stores the image information stored in the first image storage unit, and stores the stored image information. A rewritable second image storage means, wherein the image drawing means draws an image to be displayed on the image display means based on at least image information stored in the second image storage means. When the one image information is used in the drawing of the image by the image drawing means in accordance with the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information, the sub-control means further uses the first image information before the image information is used. A gaming machine A3, comprising: first transfer control means for controlling transfer of the one image information from the image storage means to the second image storage means.

According to the gaming machine A3, the sub-control means can perform a read operation faster than the first image storage means, stores the image information stored in the first image storage means, and stores the stored image. A second image storage means capable of rewriting information is provided, and the image drawing means draws an image to be displayed on the image display means based on at least the image information stored in the second image storage means. It is configured. When one piece of image information is used for drawing an image by the image drawing means in accordance with the image indication information included in the drawing indication information, the one piece of image information is controlled by the first transfer control means before the image information is used. Image information is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means. As a result, even if a memory having a slow reading speed is used for the first image storing means, the image drawing means uses the at least predetermined image information transferred to the second storing means capable of high-speed reading operation to generate an image. Since the image to be displayed on the display means is drawn, the image can be displayed at a desired time without any problem. Therefore, even if a memory having a slow reading speed is used for the first image storage unit, various types of effects can be immediately displayed on the image display unit.

In the gaming machine A3, the first transfer control means sets the one image information before the one image information is used in the drawing of the image by the image drawing means according to the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information. The sub-control means generates transfer instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to transfer the image from the first image storage means to the second image storage means. The image drawing means includes instruction information generating means for generating instruction information including drawing instruction information and the transfer instruction information generated by the first transfer control means, and the image drawing means is generated by the drawing information generating means. An image for one screen is drawn based on the drawing instruction information included in the instruction information, and the first image storage means transfers to the second image storage means based on the transfer instruction information included in the instruction information. A gaming machine A4, which transfers one image information.

According to the gaming machine A4, in the sub control means, the one image information is used before the one image information is used in the image drawing by the image drawing means by the first transfer control means in accordance with the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information. Transfer instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to transfer information from the first image storage means to the second image storage means is generated, and the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means and the first transfer control means are generated. Instruction information including the generated transfer instruction information is generated by the instruction information generating means. Then, the image drawing means draws an image for one screen based on the drawing instruction information included in the instruction information generated by the drawing information generating means, and at the same time based on the transfer instruction information included in the instruction information. The one image information is transferred from the one image storage means to the second image storage means. As a result, before one piece of image information is used for drawing an image by the image drawing means based on the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information, the image drawing means instructs the transfer instruction information included in the instruction information. Since the image information can be transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means, the image drawing means can operate at high speed even if a memory having a slow reading speed is used for the first image storage means. It is possible to reliably draw an image to be displayed on the image display unit by using at least the predetermined image information transferred to the second storage unit capable of reading.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the first specified information storage means stores the first specified information for each element obtained by subdividing the display mode of each display type, and the sub control means is configured to An element specifying unit that specifies an element configuring a display mode of the display type determined by the first display determining unit is provided, and the first selecting unit corresponds to the display type determined by the first display determining unit. As the first specified information, all the first specified information corresponding to the element specified by the element specifying means is selected from the first specified information storage means, and the gaming machine A5.

According to the gaming machine A5, the first prescribed information storage means stores the first prescribed information for each element obtained by subdividing the display mode of each display type. Here, the display mode of each display type generally includes many elements in which the images displayed in common are common, and the drawing information necessary for drawing the image to be displayed in the common elements is generally displayed. , The first prescribed information corresponding to each display type may be included only in the first prescribed information corresponding to the element, so that the first prescribed information can be efficiently stored in the first prescribed information storage means. Can be memorized. On the other hand, even if the first regulation information is stored for each element, the sub-control means specifies the elements constituting the display mode of the display type determined by the first display determination means by the element identification means, and the first selection means. As a result, all the first specified information corresponding to the element specified by the element specifying means is selected from the first specified information storage means as the first specified information corresponding to the display type determined by the first display determining means. .. With this, it is only necessary to specify the element constituting the display mode of the display type determined for the command received from the main control means and select the first prescribed information corresponding to the element from the first prescribed information storage means. It is possible to easily draw an image according to the display type and display it on the image display means. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the display mode displayed on the image display means while efficiently storing the first specified information.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the display type includes a plurality of dynamic display effects for dynamically displaying identification information on the image display means in an effect mode set based on the command, Is for imparting a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information appears due to the dynamic display effect, and the first regulation information storage means stores the first regulation information. Is stored for each of the plurality of dynamic display effects, the gaming machine A6.

According to the gaming machine A6, the dynamic display effect for dynamically displaying the identification information in the effect mode set based on the command is displayed on the image display means, and the predetermined identification information appears by the dynamic display effect. In this case, a predetermined game value is given to the player. By this dynamic display effect, it is possible to give the player an expectation that a predetermined game value will be given, and by changing various effect modes of this dynamic display effect, it is possible to adapt to the effect mode. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. Here, since the first prescribed information storage means stores the first prescribed information for each of a plurality of dynamic display effects, the first display determination means causes the image display means to provide one effect mode based on the command. When it is determined to display the dynamic display effect of, the first selecting unit selects the first specified information corresponding to the dynamic display effect of the one effect form from the first specified information storage unit. Thereby, in the dynamic display effect that gives the player various expectations, the first specified information corresponding to the dynamic display effect of one effect mode set based on the command is selected from the first specified information storage means. Only by doing so, it is possible to easily draw an image according to the effect mode and display it on the image display means. Therefore, since it is possible to easily diversify the dynamic display effects displayed on the image display means, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player by the dynamic display effects.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the sub-control unit determines a second display type to be displayed in addition to the image of the display type determined by the first display determination unit from a plurality of display modes. And a second display determining unit that is provided for each of the plurality of second display types and that defines, for each screen, drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be additionally displayed in the second display type. Second regulation information storage means for storing regulation information, and second selection for selecting the second regulation information corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determination means from the second regulation information storage means. Means and a second pointer means updated together with the updating of the first pointer means, and the drawing information specifying means is selected by the first selecting means every time the first pointer means is updated. The drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified based on the first specified information that has been updated, and based on the second specified information selected by the second selecting means. A game machine B1 characterized in that the drawing information necessary for the entire image is specified by specifying the drawing information of the image to be additionally displayed on the one screen corresponding to the updated second pointer means.

According to the gaming machine B1, in the sub control means, the second display type added to the image of the display type determined by the first display determination means from the plurality of display modes and displayed is the second display determination means. Determined by Further, the second prescribed information storage means is provided for each of the plurality of second display types, and the drawing information showing the information necessary for rendering the image to be additionally displayed in the second display type is prescribed for each screen. The second regulation information is stored. Here, the second specifying information corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determining means is selected from the second specifying information storage means by the second selecting means. Further, the second pointer means is updated together with the update of the first pointer means. Then, the drawing information specifying means, each time the first pointer means is updated, based on the first prescribed information selected by the first selecting means, one screen portion corresponding to the updated first pointer means. By specifying the drawing information and the drawing information of the image to be additionally displayed on one screen corresponding to the updated second pointer means, based on the second prescribed information selected by the second selecting means. , Is configured to specify drawing information required for the entire image. As a result, when the image of the second display type is additionally displayed on the image of the display type for the command received from the main control means, the second prescribed information corresponding to the second display type is stored in the second prescribed information storage means. It is possible to easily add and display the image of the second display type simply by selecting from the above. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

In the gaming machine B1, the display type includes a plurality of dynamic display effects for dynamically displaying the identification information on the image display means in an effect mode set based on the command, and the game machine is the dynamic A predetermined game value is given to the player when predetermined identification information is displayed by the display effect, and the sub-control means is the dynamic display effect displayed by the image display means. Standby number storage means for storing the number of standby times, and the second display determination means adds to the dynamic display effect in each of the dynamic display effects for the number of standby times stored in the standby number storage means. The game machine B2 is characterized in that it decides to display an image of the second display type.

According to the gaming machine B2, the dynamic display effect for dynamically displaying the identification information in the effect mode set based on the command is displayed on the image display means, and the predetermined identification information appears by the dynamic display effect. If so, a predetermined game value is given to the player. By this dynamic display effect, it is possible to give the player an expectation that a predetermined game value will be given, and by changing various effect modes of this dynamic display effect, it is possible to adapt to the effect mode. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. Further, in the sub-control means, the number of times of waiting for the dynamic display effect displayed by the image display means is stored in the number-of-waiting storage means, and based on a command from the main control device, the number of waiting times stored in the number-of-waiting storage means. In each of the dynamic display effects for the number of times, the second display determining means determines to display the image of the second display type in addition to the dynamic display effects. Thereby, the image of the second display type can be continuously added and displayed over a plurality of dynamic display effects. Thereby, it is possible to give various expectations to the player who visually recognizes that the images of the second display type are continuously displayed. Then, even if the images of the second display type are continuously added to the dynamic display effect and displayed, the second prescribed information corresponding to the second display type is changed to the second by the configuration described in the gaming machine B1. The image of the second display type can be easily added to the dynamic display effect and displayed by simply selecting from the prescribed information storage means. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the effects displayed on the image display means.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the second display determination means determines whether or not to display the image of the second display type on the image display means, and the second selection means causes the second display to be displayed. When it is determined by the determination means that the image of the second display type is not displayed, the display mode of the display type determined by the first display determination means should be added instead of the second prescribed information. A gaming machine B3 characterized by selecting information indicating that there is no drawing information.

According to the gaming machine B3, when the second display determination means determines to hide the image of the second display type, the display type determined by the first display determination means instead of the second regulation information. The information indicating that there is no drawing information to be added to the display mode is selected by the second selecting means. Thus, each time the drawing information specifying means updates the first pointer means, the drawing information specifying means corresponds to the updated first pointer means specified based on the first defining information selected by the first selecting means. The drawing information related to the second display type is not added to the drawing information for one screen, and the drawing information necessary for the entire image is specified. Therefore, even when the image of the second display type is displayed or hidden, it is possible to easily switch the display/non-display of the image of the second display type. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the effects displayed on the image display means.

The gaming machine B4 in any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, wherein the first pointer means also serves as the second pointer means.

According to the gaming machine B4, since the first pointer means also serves as the second pointer means, the drawing information specifying means is the first rule selected by the first selecting means each time the first pointer means is updated. Based on the information, the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified, and corresponding to the first pointer means based on the second regulation information selected by the second selecting means. By specifying the drawing information to be additionally displayed on one screen, it is possible to specify the drawing information necessary for the entire image, and it is possible to easily display the entire image to be displayed from each specified information with only one pointer means. It is possible to specify the drawing information required for.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the sub-control unit determines a second display type to be displayed in addition to the image of the display type determined by the first display determination unit from a plurality of display modes. And a second display determining unit that is provided for each of the plurality of second display types and that defines, for each screen, drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be additionally displayed in the second display type. Second regulation information storage means for storing regulation information, and second selection for selecting the second regulation information corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determination means from the second regulation information storage means. Means and drawing information of an image to be additionally displayed defined by the second defining information selected by the second selecting means, with respect to the first defining information selected by the first selecting means, for each screen. In addition to the above, there is provided a first regulation information generating means for generating new regulation information, and the drawing information specifying means is generated by the first regulation information generating means every time the first pointer means is updated. A gaming machine C1 characterized in that drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified based on the new specified information.

According to the gaming machine C1, in the sub control means, the second display type added to the image of the display type determined by the first display determination means from the plurality of display modes and displayed is the second display determination means. Determined by Further, the second prescribed information storage means is provided for each of the plurality of second display types, and the drawing information showing the information necessary for rendering the image to be additionally displayed in the second display type is prescribed for each screen. The second regulation information is stored. Here, the second specifying information corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determining means is selected from the second specifying information storage means by the second selecting means. Further, the drawing information of the image to be additionally displayed defined by the second defining information selected by the second selecting unit with respect to the first defining information selected by the first selecting unit by the first defining information generating unit. Is added for each screen, new regulation information is generated. Then, each time the drawing information specifying means updates the first pointer means, one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means based on the new specifying information generated by the first specifying information generating means. Minute drawing information is specified. As a result, when the image of the second display type is additionally displayed on the image of the display type for the command received from the main control means, the second prescribed information corresponding to the second display type is stored in the second prescribed information storage means. If selected from the above, the image of the second display type can be easily added and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

In the gaming machine C1, the display type includes a plurality of dynamic display effects for dynamically displaying the identification information on the image display means in an effect mode set based on the command, and the gaming machine is the dynamic A predetermined game value is given to the player when predetermined identification information is displayed by the display effect, and the sub-control means is the dynamic display effect displayed by the image display means. Standby number storage means for storing the number of standby times, and the second display determination means adds to the dynamic display effect in each of the dynamic display effects for the number of standby times stored in the standby number storage means. Then, the gaming machine C2 is characterized in that it decides to display an image of the second display type.

According to the gaming machine C2, the dynamic display effect for dynamically displaying the identification information in the effect mode set based on the command is displayed on the image display means, and the predetermined identification information appears by the dynamic display effect. In this case, a predetermined game value is given to the player. By this dynamic display effect, it is possible to give the player an expectation that a predetermined game value will be given, and by changing various effect modes of this dynamic display effect, it is possible to adapt to the effect mode. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. Further, in the sub-control means, the number of times of waiting for the dynamic display effect displayed by the image display means is stored in the number-of-waiting storage means, and based on a command from the main control device, the number of waiting times stored in the number-of-waiting storage means. In each of the dynamic display effects for the number of times, the second display determining means determines to display the image of the second display type in addition to the dynamic display effects. Thereby, the image of the second display type can be continuously added and displayed over a plurality of dynamic display effects. Thereby, it is possible to give various expectations to the player who visually recognizes that the images of the second display type are continuously displayed. Even if images of the second display type are continuously added to the dynamic display effect and displayed, the second prescribed information corresponding to the second display type is set to the second by the configuration described in the gaming machine C1. The image of the second display type can be easily added to the dynamic display effect and displayed by simply selecting from the prescribed information storage means. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the effects displayed on the image display means.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the second display determination means is for determining whether or not to display the image of the second display type on the image display means, and the drawing information identification means is for the second display. When the deciding unit decides to hide the image of the second display type, it corresponds to the updated first pointer unit based on the first stipulated information selected by the first selecting unit. A gaming machine C3 characterized in that it specifies drawing information for one screen.

According to the gaming machine C3, when the second display determination means determines to hide the image of the second display type, the drawing information identification means uses the first prescribed information selected by the first selection means. Based on this, the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified. Therefore, even when the image of the second display type is displayed or hidden, the display/non-display of the image of the second display type can be easily switched. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the effects displayed on the image display means.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the sub-control unit selects a second display type from a plurality of display modes, which is to be additionally displayed in the display mode of the display type determined by the first display determination unit. A second display determining means for determining, wherein the first specified information stored in the first specified information storage means includes, in addition to drawing information necessary for drawing an image of a corresponding display type, an image of the display type. The drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the second display type additionally displayed is defined for each screen, and the drawing information specifying means is provided every time the first pointer means is updated. , The drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified based on the first prescribed information selected by the first selecting means, and the drawing information is determined by the second display determining means. A game machine D1 characterized in that the drawing information necessary for the entire image is specified by specifying the drawing information of the image to be additionally displayed on the one screen corresponding to the second display type.

According to the gaming machine D1, in the sub control means, a second display is additionally displayed on the image of the display type determined by the first display determination means from among the plurality of display aspects. The type is determined by the second display determining means. In addition to the drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the corresponding display type, the second display displayed in addition to the image of the display type by the first specified information stored in the first specified information storage means. The drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the type is defined for each screen, and the drawing information specifying means updates the first specifying information selected by the first selecting means each time the first pointer means is updated. Based on this, the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified, and the image to be additionally displayed on one screen corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determining means. Drawing information is specified, and drawing information required for the entire image is specified. As a result, when the image of the second display type is additionally displayed on the image of the display type for the command received from the main control means, the drawing of the second display type to be additionally displayed is selected from the selected first regulation information. If the information is specified, the image of the second display type can be easily added and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

In the gaming machine D1, the display type includes a plurality of dynamic display effects for dynamically displaying the identification information on the image display means in an effect mode set based on the command, and the game machine is the dynamic A predetermined game value is given to the player when predetermined identification information is displayed by the display effect, and the sub-control means is the dynamic display effect displayed by the image display means. Standby number storage means for storing the number of standby times, and the second display determination means adds to the dynamic display effect in each of the dynamic display effects for the number of standby times stored in the standby number storage means. Then, the game machine D2 is characterized in that it decides to display an image of the second display type.

According to the gaming machine D2, the dynamic display effect for dynamically displaying the identification information in the effect mode set based on the command is displayed on the image display means, and the predetermined identification information appears by the dynamic display effect. If so, a predetermined game value is given to the player. By this dynamic display effect, it is possible to give the player an expectation that a predetermined game value will be given, and by changing various effect modes of this dynamic display effect, it is possible to adapt to the effect mode. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. Further, in the sub-control means, the number of times of waiting for the dynamic display effect displayed by the image display means is stored in the number-of-waiting storage means, and based on a command from the main control device, the number of waiting times stored in the number-of-waiting storage means. In each of the dynamic display effects for the number of times, the second display determining means determines to display the image of the second display type in addition to the dynamic display effects. Thereby, the image of the second display type can be continuously added and displayed over a plurality of dynamic display effects. Thereby, it is possible to give various expectations to the player who visually recognizes that the images of the second display type are continuously displayed. Then, even if images of the second display type are continuously added to the dynamic display effect and displayed, the second prescribed information corresponding to the second display type is set to the second by the configuration described in the gaming machine D1. The image of the second display type can be easily added to the dynamic display effect and displayed by simply selecting from the prescribed information storage means. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the effects displayed on the image display means.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the second display determination means is for determining whether or not to display the image of the second display type on the image display means, and the drawing information identification means is for the second display. When it is determined by the determining means that the image of the second display type is not displayed, the updated first pointer means is supported based on the first defining information selected by the first selecting means. The game machine D3 is characterized in that the drawing information for one screen is specified and the drawing information of the image of the second display type specified in the first specifying information is discarded.

According to the gaming machine D3, when the second display determination means determines to hide the image of the second display type, the drawing information identification means uses the first prescribed information selected by the first selection means. On the basis of this, the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified, and the drawing information of the image of the second display type defined in the first defining information is discarded. There is. Therefore, even when the image of the second display type is displayed or hidden, it is possible to easily switch the display/non-display of the image of the second display type. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the effects displayed on the image display means.

In the gaming machine A3 or A4, the sub-control means can perform a read operation faster than the first image storage means, and third image storage means for storing the image information stored in the first image storage means. The image drawing means draws an image to be displayed on the image display means based on at least the image information stored in the third image storage means and the image information stored in the second image storage means. The sub control means further controls to transfer a part of the image information stored in the first image storage means to the third image storage means at the time of start-up by turning on the power. Image data transferred under the control of the second transfer control means is retained in the third image storage means, and the first transfer control means is provided with the third image storage means. When the non-held image information stored in the third image storage means is used for drawing an image by the image drawing means in accordance with the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information, the image information is used before the image information is used. A gaming machine E1 for controlling transfer of image information from one image storage means to the second image storage means.

According to the gaming machine E1, the sub-control means has a third image storage means capable of performing a read operation faster than the first image storage means and storing the image information stored in the first image storage means. The image drawing means is provided and draws an image to be displayed on the image display means based on at least the image information stored in the third image storage means and the image information stored in the second image storage means. Is configured. Here, a part of the image information stored in the first image storage means is transferred to the third image storage means under the control of the second transfer control means at the time of start-up by turning on the power, and is stored in the third image storage means. Holds the image information transferred under the control of the second transfer control means at least until a predetermined trigger comes. On the other hand, when the image information not held in the third image storage means is used for image control by the image drawing means according to the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information, the first transfer control means is used before the image information is used. The image information is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means under the control of.

As a result, the image drawing means transfers the image information held in the third image storage means capable of high-speed read operation and the second image storage means even if a memory having a slow reading speed of the first storage means is used. Since the image to be displayed on the image display means is drawn using the image information thus obtained, the image can be displayed at a desired time without any problem. Further, since the image information held in the third image storage means is held at least until a predetermined trigger comes, the amount of image information transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means should be reduced. You can Therefore, it is possible to suppress the load on the transfer of the image information from the first image storage means to the second image storage means.

In the gaming machine E1, the image information stored in the third image storage means is image information for displaying an image frequently displayed by the image display means, and the gaming machine E2.

According to the gaming machine E2, the image information for displaying the image frequently displayed by the image display means is held in the third image storage means. Therefore, every time the image display means displays the image, Since it is not necessary to read the image information from the one-image storage means, the frequently displayed image can be surely displayed at a desired time.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the image information held in the third image storage means is controlled by the sub control means based on a command transmitted from the main control means or a signal input to the sub control means. A gaming machine E4, which is image information for displaying an image to be displayed immediately on the image display means.

The signal input to the sub-control unit may be an input signal from various sensors such as a vibration sensor provided in the game machine or a game medium detection sensor that detects a game medium loaded in the game machine, It may be an input signal from a button operated by the player. Further, the image to be immediately displayed on the image display means may be, for example, an image for notifying an error or a rear image displayed on the image display means.

According to the gaming machine E3, an image for displaying an image to be immediately displayed on the image display means under the control of the sub-control means based on a command transmitted from the main control means or a signal input to the sub-control means. Since the information is stored in the third image storage means, an image for displaying the image to be displayed immediately after the command transmitted from the main control means or the signal input to the sub control means is input. The image control unit can control the image by using the image information held in the third image storage unit without reading the information from the first image storage unit. Therefore, the image to be displayed immediately can be surely displayed at the desired time.

Any one of the gaming machines A3, A4, and E1 to E3, wherein the first image storage means is constituted by a NAND flash memory.

According to the gaming machine E4, the first image storage means is composed of a NAND flash memory. Here, since the NAND flash memory is characterized in that it has a large storage capacity in a small area and is inexpensive, it is possible to increase the capacity of the first image storage means while suppressing an increase in cost. be able to. Therefore, since a large amount of image information for displaying an image on the image display means can be stored in the first image storage means, the image displayed on the image display means can be made into various modes, which is of interest to the player. Can be improved. On the other hand, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that the reading speed is slower than other memories, but the image drawing means has the configuration described in any of the gaming machines A3, A4, and E1 to E3. Since the image to be displayed on the image display means is drawn using the image information transferred to at least the second image storage means capable of high-speed reading operation, even if the first image storage means is configured by the NAND flash memory, It is possible to display a predetermined image at a desired time without any problem. Therefore, it is possible to display a predetermined image at a desired time without any problem, while diversifying images displayed on the image display means.

In any of the gaming machines A3, A4, and E1 to E4, the sub-control means is associated with the first regulation information, and among the image information necessary for drawing the image prescribed by the first regulation information, Third definition information storage means storing third definition information defining image information to be transferred to the second image storage means, and third definition information corresponding to the first definition information selected by the first selection means. Is selected from the third definition information storage means, and image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is specified based on the third definition information selected by the third selection means. Transfer information specifying means, wherein the first transfer control means sets the image information to be transferred specified by the transfer information specifying means according to the image instruction information in which the image information is included in the drawing instruction information. A gaming machine F1 characterized by controlling to transfer from the first image storage means to the second image storage means before being used for drawing an image by the drawing means.

According to the gaming machine F1, in the sub control means, the image to be transferred to the second image storage means among the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the first definition information in correspondence with the first definition information. The third regulation information defining the information is stored in the third regulation information storage means. Here, the third selecting means selects the third specifying information corresponding to the first specifying information selected by the first selecting means from the third specifying information storage means, and based on the selected third specifying information. The image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified by the transfer information specifying means. Then, by the first transfer control means, before the specified image information to be transferred is used in the drawing of the image by the image drawing means in accordance with the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information, 2 is transferred to the image storage means. This makes it possible to easily specify the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means, out of the image information necessary for drawing the image specified by the first specified information, with respect to the selected first specified information. Therefore, the image displayed based on the first regulation information can be surely drawn and displayed on the image display means.

In the gaming machine E1, the sub-control unit is not held in the third image storage unit among the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the first definition information in association with the first definition information. Corresponding to the third prescribed information storage means storing the third prescribed information that regulates the image information as the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means, and the first prescribed information selected by the first selecting means. Based on the third selecting means for selecting the third specifying information to be stored from the third specifying information storage means, and the third specifying information selected by the third selecting means, it should be transferred to the second image storage means. Transfer information specifying means for specifying image information, wherein the first transfer control means includes the image information to be transferred specified by the transfer information specifying means, the image information including the image information in the drawing instruction information. A gaming machine F2 characterized by controlling to transfer from the first image storage means to the second image storage means before being used for drawing an image by the image drawing means according to instruction information.

According to the gaming machine F2, in the sub control means, the image information that is not held in the third image storage means among the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the first definition information in association with the first definition information. The third definition information defining the information as the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is stored in the third definition information storage means. Here, the third selecting means selects the third specifying information corresponding to the first specifying information selected by the first selecting means from the third specifying information storage means, and based on the selected third specifying information. The image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified by the transfer information specifying means. Then, by the first transfer control means, before the specified image information to be transferred is used in the drawing of the image by the image drawing means in accordance with the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information, 2 is transferred to the image storage means. As a result, of the selected first specified information, among the image information necessary for drawing the image specified by the first specified information, it is not held in the third image storage means, so that the second image storage is performed. Since the image information to be transferred to the means can be easily specified, the image displayed based on the first prescribed information can be reliably drawn and displayed on the image display means.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the sub control means includes a third pointer means that is updated together with the updating of the first pointer means, and the transfer information specifying means corresponds to the updated third pointer means. The game machine F3 is characterized in that the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is specified based on the third specified information selected by the third selection means.

According to the gaming machine F3, the third pointer means is updated together with the updating of the first pointer means, and the transfer information specifying means selects the third pointer means in correspondence with the updated third pointer means. The image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is specified based on the third prescribed information. Thereby, the predetermined image information can be transferred from the first image storage area to the second image storage area according to the update of the first pointer means, and the transfer timing can be easily set.

In the gaming machine F3, the third definition information defines image information to be transferred to the second image storage means for each unit time when an image for one screen is displayed on the image display means. Characteristic game machine F4.

According to the gaming machine F4, the third definition information defines the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means for each unit time. Therefore, the transfer information specifying means updates the third pointer means. In addition, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage area to be transferred can be easily specified.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is stored in the third definition information storage means out of the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the first definition information. If it does not exist, the third regulation information corresponding to the first regulation information is not stored, and the transfer information specifying means stores the third regulation information corresponding to the first regulation information selected by the first regulation means. If the third selecting means determines that the image information is not stored in the third prescribed information storage means, it is specified that there is no image information to be transferred to the second image storage area. Gaming machine F5.

According to the gaming machine F5, if there is no image information to be transferred to the second image storage means out of the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the first regulation information, then the first regulation information is dealt with. The third regulation information is not stored in the third regulation information storage means. Then, when the third selecting means determines that the third specifying information corresponding to the first specifying information selected by the first specifying means is not stored in the third specifying information storage means, the transfer image specifying means determines. , It is specified that there is no image information to be transferred to the second image storage area. Accordingly, it is possible to easily determine whether or not there is image information to be transferred to the second image storage unit among the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the first defined information, based on the presence or absence of the third defined information. Therefore, the processing can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to prevent unnecessary third regulation information from being stored in the third regulation information storage means, so that it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the storage means.

In any one of the gaming machines A3, A4, and E1 to E4, the sub-control means adds and displays to the image of the display type determined by the first display determination means from a plurality of display modes Second display determining means for determining a display type and drawing information provided for each of the plurality of second display types and showing information necessary for drawing an image to be additionally displayed in the second display type for each screen. Second prescribed information storage means for storing the prescribed second prescribed information, and the second prescribed information corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determination means are selected from the second prescribed information storage means. And a second pointer unit that is updated together with the updating of the first pointer unit. The drawing information specifying unit is configured to perform the first pointer operation each time the first pointer unit is updated. Based on the first regulation information selected by the selection means, the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified, and the second regulation selected by the second selection means. Based on the information, the drawing information of the image to be additionally displayed on the one screen is specified corresponding to the updated second pointer means, thereby specifying the drawing information necessary for the entire image, and the sub-control means. Further, in association with the second prescribed information, among the image information necessary for drawing the image to be additionally displayed prescribed by the second prescribed information, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means. A fourth regulation information storage means for storing the prescribed fourth regulation information; and a fourth regulation information storage means for selecting the fourth regulation information corresponding to the second regulation information selected by the second selection means from the fourth regulation information storage means. 4 selection means and transfer information specifying means for specifying image information to be transferred to the second image storage means based on the fourth prescribed information selected by the fourth selection means, and the first transfer The control means, before the image information to be transferred specified by the transfer information specifying means is used in the drawing of the image by the image drawing means according to the image instruction information whose image information is included in the drawing instruction information, A gaming machine F6, which controls to transfer from the first image storage means to the second image storage means.

According to the gaming machine F6, in the sub-control means, the second display type to be additionally displayed on the image of the display type determined by the first display determining means from the plurality of display modes is the second display determining means. Determined by Further, the second prescribed information storage means is provided for each of the plurality of second display types, and the drawing information showing the information necessary for rendering the image to be additionally displayed in the second display type is prescribed for each screen. The second regulation information is stored. Here, the second specifying information corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determining means is selected from the second specifying information storage means by the second selecting means. Further, the second pointer means is updated together with the update of the first pointer means. Then, the drawing information specifying means, each time the first pointer means is updated, based on the first prescribed information selected by the first selecting means, one screen portion corresponding to the updated first pointer means. By specifying the drawing information and the drawing information of the image to be additionally displayed on one screen corresponding to the updated second pointer means, based on the second prescribed information selected by the second selecting means. , Is configured to specify drawing information required for the entire image. As a result, when the image of the second display type is additionally displayed on the image of the display type for the command received from the main control means, the second prescribed information corresponding to the second display type is stored in the second prescribed information storage means. It is possible to easily add and display the image of the second display type simply by selecting from the above. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

Further, in the sub control means, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means among the image information necessary for drawing the image to be additionally displayed defined by the second regulation information in correspondence with the second regulation information. Is stored in the fourth prescribed information storage means. Here, the fourth selecting means selects the fourth specifying information corresponding to the second specifying information selected by the second selecting means from the fourth specifying information storage means, and based on the selected fourth specifying information. The image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified by the transfer information specifying means. Then, by the first transfer control means, before the specified image information to be transferred is used in the drawing of the image by the image drawing means in accordance with the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information, 2 is transferred to the image storage means. Thus, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage unit can be easily selected from the image information necessary for drawing the image to be additionally displayed defined by the second specified information with respect to the selected second specified information. Therefore, it is possible to reliably draw an image to be additionally displayed based on the second regulation information and display the image on the image display means.

In any of the gaming machines A3, A4, and E1 to E4, the sub-control means is associated with the first regulation information, and among the image information necessary for drawing the image prescribed by the first regulation information, Third definition information storage means storing third definition information defining image information to be transferred to the second image storage means, and third definition information corresponding to the first definition information selected by the first selection means. Is selected from the third specification information storage means, and the first specification information selected by the first selection means is defined by the third specification information selected by the third selection means. A second prescribed information generating unit for generating new prescribed information by adding image information to be transferred to the second image storage unit, and the drawing information specifying unit updates the first pointer unit. For each time, based on the new regulation information generated by the second regulation information generating means, the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified, and the second image storage area is specified. Image information to be transferred to the second image storage means, and the first transfer control means transfers the image information to be transferred specified by the drawing information specifying means from the first image storage means to the second image storage means. A gaming machine G1 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine G1, in the sub control means, an image to be transferred to the second image storage means out of the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the first definition information in association with the first definition information. The third regulation information defining the information is stored in the third regulation information storage means. Here, the third selecting means selects the third specifying information corresponding to the first specifying information selected by the first selecting means from the third specifying information storage means, and is specified by the selected third specifying information. The image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is added to the first regulation information selected by the first selection means by the second regulation information generation means, and new regulation information is generated. Then, each time the first pointer means is updated, the drawing information specifying means specifies the image information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means, based on the newly generated regulation information. At the same time, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified, and the specified image information to be transferred is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means by the first transfer control means. To be done. As a result, it is possible to easily specify the image information necessary for drawing the image specified by the first specified information with respect to the selected first specified information, and to draw the image specified by the first specified information. The image information to be transferred to the second image storage means can be easily specified from among the various image information. Therefore, the image displayed based on the first prescribed information is surely drawn and displayed on the image display means. Can be made.

In the gaming machine E1, the sub-control unit is not held in the third image storage unit among the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the first definition information in association with the first definition information. Corresponding to the third prescribed information storage means storing the third prescribed information that regulates the image information as the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means, and the first prescribed information selected by the first selecting means. A third selecting means for selecting the third specifying information to be stored from the third specifying information storage means, and the first specifying information selected by the first selecting means to the third specifying means selected by the third selecting means. Image information to be transferred to the second image storage means defined by information, and second defining information generating means for generating new defining information, wherein the drawing information specifying means includes the first pointer. Each time the means is updated, the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified based on the new prescribed information generated by the second prescribed information generating means, and The image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified, and the first transfer control means transfers the image information to be transferred specified by the drawing information specifying means from the first image storage means to the second image storage area. A gaming machine G2 characterized by transferring to an image storage means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in the sub-control unit, the image information not held in the third image storage unit out of the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the first defined information in association with the first defined information. Third definition information defining the information as image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is stored in the third definition information storage means. Here, the third selecting means selects the third specifying information corresponding to the first specifying information selected by the first selecting means from the third specifying information storage means, and is specified by the selected third specifying information. The image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is added to the first regulation information selected by the first selection means by the second regulation information generation means, and new regulation information is generated. Then, each time the first pointer means is updated, the drawing information specifying means specifies the image information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means, based on the newly generated regulation information. At the same time, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified, and the specified image information to be transferred is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means by the first transfer control means. To be done. As a result, it is possible to easily specify the image information necessary for drawing the image specified by the first specified information with respect to the selected first specified information, and to draw the image specified by the first specified information. The image information to be transferred to the second image storage means because it is not held in the third image storage means among the various image information can be easily specified, and is displayed based on the first prescribed information. An image can be surely drawn and displayed on the image display means.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the third definition information defines image information to be transferred to the second image storage means for each unit time when one screen image is displayed on the image display means. A gaming machine G3 characterized in that.

According to the gaming machine G3, the third definition information defines the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means for each unit time when one screen image is displayed on the image display means. The second specified information generating means sets the image information to be transferred in one unit time among the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means specified by the third specified information selected by the third selecting means. It is possible to easily generate new specified information by adding it to the drawing information for one screen to be displayed in the one unit time specified by the specified information.

In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the third prescribed information storage means stores image information to be transferred to the second image storage means out of the image information necessary for drawing the image prescribed by the first prescribed information. If it does not exist, the third regulation information corresponding to the first regulation information is not stored, and the drawing information specifying means stores the third regulation information corresponding to the first regulation information selected by the first regulation means. When the third selecting means determines that the first pointer is not stored in the third specifying information storage means, the updated first pointer is based on the first specifying information selected by the first selecting means. A gaming machine G4 characterized by specifying drawing information for one screen corresponding to the means.

According to the gaming machine G4, if there is no image information to be transferred to the second image storage means out of the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the first regulation information, then the first regulation information is dealt with. The third regulation information is not stored in the third regulation information storage means. When the third selecting information determines that the third specifying information corresponding to the first specifying information selected by the first specifying means is not stored in the third specifying information storage means, the drawing information specifying means determines , The drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified based on the first prescribed information selected by the first selecting means. Accordingly, when the third regulation information is not stored, it is possible to easily specify the drawing information of the image to be displayed using the first regulation information selected by the first selecting means. The processing load can be reduced as compared with the case where the drawing information of the image to be displayed is specified from the new specified information generated by the 2 specified information generating means.

In any one of the gaming machines A3, A4, and E1 to E4, the sub-control means adds and displays to the image of the display type determined by the first display determination means from a plurality of display modes, the second display Second display determining means for determining a display type and drawing information provided for each of the plurality of second display types and showing information necessary for drawing an image to be additionally displayed in the second display type for each screen. Of the image information necessary for drawing the image to be additionally displayed which is defined by the second definition information and is associated with the second definition information storage unit that stores the specified second definition information, Fourth definition information storage means storing fourth definition information defining image information to be transferred to the second image storage means, and the fourth display information corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determination means. Second selecting means for selecting the second specifying information from the second specifying information storage means, and fourth specifying information corresponding to the second specifying information selected by the second selecting means from the fourth specifying information storage means. Drawing of an image to be additionally displayed defined by the second selection information selected by the second selection means with respect to the fourth selection means selected and the first definition information selected by the first selection means. Information is added for each screen, and image information to be transferred to the second image storage means defined by the fourth definition information selected by the fourth selection means is added to generate new specification information. The drawing information specifying means, based on the new specifying information generated by the third specifying information generating means, every time the first pointer means is updated. The drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified, and the image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified, and the first transfer control means is the drawing information specifying means. The game machine G5, wherein the image information to be transferred specified by is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means.

According to the gaming machine G5, in the sub control means, the second display type added to the image of the display type determined by the first display determination means from the plurality of display modes and displayed is the second display determination means. Determined by Further, the second prescribed information storage means is provided for each of the plurality of second display types, and the drawing information showing the information necessary for rendering the image to be additionally displayed in the second display type is prescribed for each screen. The second regulation information is stored. Here, the second specifying information corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determining means is selected from the second specifying information storage means by the second selecting means. Further, the drawing information of the image to be additionally displayed defined by the second defining information selected by the second selecting unit with respect to the first defining information selected by the first selecting unit by the third defining information generating unit. Is added for each screen, new regulation information is generated. Then, each time the drawing information specifying means updates the first pointer means, one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means based on the new specifying information generated by the first specifying information generating means. Minute drawing information is specified. As a result, when the image of the second display type is additionally displayed on the image of the display type for the command received from the main control means, the second prescribed information corresponding to the second display type is stored in the second prescribed information storage means. If selected from the above, the image of the second display type can be easily added and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

In the sub-control unit, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage unit out of the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the second definition information is associated with the second definition information. The 4th regulation information is stored in the 4th regulation information storage means. Here, the fourth selecting means selects the fourth specifying information corresponding to the second specifying information selected by the second selecting means from the fourth specifying information storing means, and is specified by the selected fourth specifying information. Image information to be transferred to the second image storage means, together with drawing information for each screen of an image to be additionally displayed, which is defined by the second definition information selected by the second selection means, and third definition information generation means. Thus, new regulation information is generated in addition to the first regulation information selected by the first selecting means. Then, each time the first pointer means is updated, the drawing information specifying means specifies the image information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means, based on the newly generated regulation information. At the same time, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified, and the specified image information to be transferred is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means by the first transfer control means. To be done. This makes it possible to easily specify the image information to be transferred to the second image storage unit, out of the image information necessary for drawing the image specified by the second specified information, with respect to the selected second specified information. Therefore, it is possible to reliably draw the image to be additionally displayed based on the second regulation information and display the image on the image display means.

In any of the gaming machines A3, A4, and E1 to E4, the first prescribed information stored in the first prescribed information storage means is in addition to the drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the corresponding display type. Of the image information necessary for drawing the image of the display type, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is defined, and the drawing information specifying means is provided every time the first pointer means is updated. , The drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means should be specified based on the first prescribed information selected by the first selecting means, and transferred to the second image storage area. The image information is specified, and the first transfer control means transfers the image information to be transferred specified by the drawing information specifying means from the first image storage means to the second image storage means. A gaming machine H1 to play.

According to the gaming machine H1, the first specified information stored in the first specified information storage means is necessary for drawing the image of the display type in addition to the drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the corresponding display type. The image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is defined among the various image information. Then, each time the drawing information specifying means updates the first pointer means, based on the first prescribed information selected by the first selecting means, one screen portion corresponding to the updated first pointer means. The drawing information is specified, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified, and the specified transfer image information is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image by the first transfer control means. It is transferred to the storage means. This makes it possible to easily determine the image information necessary for the selected first prescribed information and which should be transferred to the second image storage means, and transfer it to the second image storage means. Therefore, the image displayed based on the first regulation information can be reliably drawn and displayed on the image display means.

In the gaming machine E1, the first specified information stored in the first specified information storage means is necessary for drawing the image of the display type in addition to the drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the corresponding display type. Of the image information, image information that is not held in the third image storage means and is to be transferred to the second image storage means is defined, and the drawing information specifying means updates the first pointer means. Each time, the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified based on the first prescribed information selected by the first selecting means, and the drawing information is stored in the second image storage area. Image information to be transferred is specified, and the first transfer control means transfers the image information to be transferred specified by the drawing information specifying means from the first image storage means to the second image storage means. A gaming machine H2 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine H2, the first specified information stored in the first specified information storage means is necessary for drawing the image of the display type in addition to the drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the corresponding display type. Image information that is not held in the third image storage means and should be transferred to the second image storage means. Then, each time the drawing information specifying means updates the first pointer means, based on the first prescribed information selected by the first selecting means, one screen portion corresponding to the updated first pointer means. The drawing information is specified, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified, and the specified transfer image information is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image by the first transfer control means. It is transferred to the storage means. This makes it easy to determine the image information that is necessary for the selected first specified information and should be transferred to the second image storage means because it is not held in the third image storage means. Since it can be transferred to the second image storage means, the image displayed based on the first prescribed information can be reliably drawn and displayed on the image display means.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the first definition information defines image information to be transferred to the second image storage means for each screen in which drawing information required for drawing an image of a corresponding display type is defined. However, the drawing information specifying means corresponds to the updated first pointer means each time the first pointer means is updated, based on the first prescribed information selected by the first selecting means. A gaming machine H3, characterized in that the drawing information for the screen is specified, and the image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified corresponding to the updated first pointer means.

According to the gaming machine H3, the first definition information defines the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means for each screen in which the drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the corresponding display type is defined. Therefore, every time the drawing information specifying means updates the first pointer means, one screen portion corresponding to the updated first pointer means is based on the first prescribed information selected by the first selecting means. And the image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified corresponding to the updated first pointer means. Thereby, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means can be easily transferred to the second image storage means at a predetermined timing in accordance with the update of the first pointer means, and therefore, based on the first prescribed information. When drawing the first effect to be displayed, it is possible to reliably transfer the image information necessary for the drawing to the second image storage means.

In any of the gaming machines A3, A4, and E1 to E4, the sub-control unit additionally displays the display mode of the display type determined by the first display determination unit from a plurality of display modes. A second display determining unit that determines two display types is provided, and the first defining information stored in the first defining information storage unit is in addition to drawing information necessary for drawing an image of the corresponding display type. The drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the second display type to be displayed in addition to the image of the display type is defined for each screen, and the second image is included in the image information necessary for drawing the images. Image information to be transferred to the storage means is defined, and the drawing information specifying means is based on the first defining information selected by the first selecting means each time the first pointer means is updated. And an image to be additionally displayed on the one screen corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determining means while specifying the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means. Specifying the drawing information necessary for the entire image, and further specifying the image information to be transferred to the second image storage area, and the first transfer control means The game machine H4, wherein the image information to be transferred specified by the drawing information specifying means is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means.

According to the gaming machine H4, in the sub-control means, the second display that is additionally displayed on the image of the display type determined by the first display determination means from the plurality of display modes The type is determined by the second display determining means. In addition to the drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the corresponding display type, the second display displayed in addition to the image of the display type by the first specified information stored in the first specified information storage means. The drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the type is defined for each screen, and the drawing information specifying means updates the first specifying information selected by the first selecting means each time the first pointer means is updated. Based on this, the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified, and the image to be additionally displayed on one screen corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determining means. Drawing information is specified, and drawing information required for the entire image is specified. As a result, when the image of the second display type is additionally displayed on the image of the display type for the command received from the main control means, the drawing of the second display type to be additionally displayed is selected from the selected first regulation information. If the information is specified, the image of the second display type can be easily added and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

In the sub control means, the first specified information stored in the first specified information storage means includes, in addition to the drawing information necessary for drawing the image, the second image out of the image information necessary for drawing the image. The image information to be transferred to the storage means is specified. Then, the drawing information specifying means specifies the image information to be transferred to the second image storage area every time the first pointer means is updated, and the specified image information to be transferred is the first transfer control means. Is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means. This makes it possible to easily determine the image information necessary for the selected first prescribed information and which should be transferred to the second image storage means, and transfer it to the second image storage means. Therefore, the image displayed based on the first regulation information can be reliably drawn and displayed on the image display means.

In the gaming machine A6, the main control means sub-controls the first command generation means for generating the first command for confirming the identification information appearing by the dynamic display effect and the various generated commands. Command transmission means for transmitting the identification information displayed by the dynamic display effect based on receiving the first command from the main control means. And a first time elapse determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed in the dynamic display effect after the display of the dynamic display effect is started, and a first time elapse determination A second time elapse determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after it has been determined by the means that the predetermined time has elapsed, and the first display determination means has the second time elapse determination means for the predetermined time. If the reception of the first command is not yet recognized at the stage when it is determined that the time has passed, the re-dynamic display is performed to dynamically display the identification information again as the display type to be displayed on the image display unit. An amusement machine I1 characterized in that it determines an effect.

According to the gaming machine I1, in the sub control means, the identification information appearing by the dynamic display effect is decided by the deciding means based on the reception of the first command by the main control means. Based on the confirmed identification information, the gaming machine gives a predetermined game value to the player if it is predetermined identification information. On the other hand, the first time elapse determination means determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed for the dynamic display effect after the display of the dynamic display effect is started, and the first time elapse determination means determines the time. The second time elapse determination means determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after it was determined that Then, the first display determination means causes the image display means to display if the reception of the first command is not yet recognized at the stage when the second time elapse determination means determines that the predetermined time has elapsed. As a display type, it is configured to determine a re-dynamic display effect in which the identification information is dynamically displayed again. As a result, the first selecting means selects the first specified information corresponding to the restart effect from the first specified information storage means, so that the display on the image display means can be easily switched to the restart effect. Further, when the identification information cannot be determined because the first command is not accepted from the main control means even though the dynamic display effect is finished, the identification information is dynamically displayed again. , It is possible to make the player recognize that the identification information is not fixed.

In the gaming machine I1, the first prescribed information corresponding to the restart effect is displayed on the image display means in a display mode of the restart display effect different from the display mode of the dynamic display effect. A gaming machine I2, which defines image information necessary for drawing an image.

According to the gaming machine I2, the first regulation information corresponding to the restart effect is displayed so that the display mode of the restart display effect is displayed on the image display means differently from the display mode of the dynamic display effect. Since the image information necessary for drawing is defined, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the re-dynamic display effect has started without the identification information being fixed in the dynamic display effect. ..

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, when the drawing information specifying means determines the re-dynamic display effect as the first effect by the first display determining means, the first corresponding to the re-dynamic display effect. When the image information necessary for drawing an image is specified over the entire screen defined by the regulation information, the first one screen defined by the first regulation information is recursed, and the image information necessary for drawing the image is calculated for each screen. A gaming machine I3 characterized by specifying image information.

According to the gaming machine I3, the drawing information specifying means, when the first display determining means determines the re-dynamic display effect as the first effect, the drawing information specifying means specifies the first specifying information corresponding to the re-dynamic display effect. When the image information necessary for drawing the image is specified over the entire screen, the image information necessary for drawing the image is specified for each screen by returning to the first one screen specified by the first specified information. Is configured to. As a result, even if the image information necessary for drawing the image is specified as the first specified information corresponding to the re-dynamic display for only a few screens, the re-dynamic display can be repeatedly displayed.

In the gaming machine A6, the main control means, depending on the type of the identification information to be displayed by the dynamic display effect and the identification information to be displayed by the dynamic display effect, the effect mode type of the dynamic display effect. And a second command generation means for generating a second command for notifying the effect mode type of the dynamic display effect determined by the dynamic display effect determination means. Third command generating means for generating a third command for notifying the type of identification information to be revealed by the dynamic display effect determined by the dynamic display effect determining means, and various generated commands to the sub-control means. Command transmitting means for transmitting, and the first display determining means corresponds to the effect mode type notified by the second command based on receiving the second command from the main control device. The dynamic display effect is displayed on the image display means, and the sub-control means receives the third command transmitted from the main control device, and then the dynamic display is performed. The identification information determining means for determining the identification information that appears by the effect, the dynamic display effect determined by the first display determining means, and the identification information determined by the identification information determining means are appropriate. The dynamic display discriminating means for discriminating whether or not it is the one and the first display deciding means discriminates that the dynamic display effect and the identification information are not appropriate by the dynamic display discriminating means. In this case, the gaming machine J1 is characterized in that the dynamic display effect is changed to a dynamic display effect of an effect mode in which a dynamic display invisible to a player is continuously performed.

Note that the dynamic display invisible to the player is, for example, a state in which the identification information is dynamically displayed at a high speed to the extent that the player cannot view it, or the identification information is displayed in a reduced size to the extent that it cannot be viewed. In addition, various states such as a state in which a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed so as to cover the identification information are displayed are included.

According to the gaming machine J1, the main control means, depending on the type of identification information to be revealed by the dynamic display effect and the identification information to be revealed by the dynamic display effect, the effect mode type of the dynamic display effect. And are determined by the dynamic display effect determination means. Then, the second command generating means generates a second command for notifying the effect mode type of the dynamic display effect determined by the dynamic display effect determining means, and the third command generating means dynamically generates the second command. A third command for notifying the type of identification information to be revealed by the dynamic display effect determined by the display effect determining means is generated, and these commands are transmitted to the sub control means by the command transmitting means. On the other hand, in the sub control means, based on the reception of the second command from the main control device, the first display determination means displays the dynamic display effect corresponding to the effect mode type notified by the second command. A decision is made to display on the display means. In addition, the identification information determining means determines the identification information that appears in the dynamic display effect based on the reception of the third command transmitted from the main control device. Then, the dynamic display determination unit determines whether the dynamic display effect determined by the first display determination unit and the identification information determined by the identification information determination unit are appropriate. If it is determined that the display effect and the identification information are not appropriate, the dynamic display effect is continuously displayed by the first display determining means as a dynamic display invisible to the player. The display is changed to dynamic display. Here, if the dynamic display effect determined by the first display determination means and the identification information determined by the identification information determination means are not appropriate, there is a possibility that the command cannot be correctly received. In such a case, the dynamic display effect is displayed in a display mode in which a dynamic display that is invisible to the player is continuously performed, so that the dynamic display can be performed without giving the player a special expectation. A display effect can be displayed.

In the gaming machine J1, the sub-control means appropriately matches the dynamic display effect determined by the first display determination means with the dynamic display determination means with the identification information determined by the identification information determination means. If it is determined that the identification information to be displayed by the dynamic display effect is identification information different from the predetermined identification information, the identification information to be displayed only in a special case. A gaming machine J2, characterized in that it comprises identification information changing means for changing.

According to the gaming machine J2, the dynamic display determination means determines that the dynamic display effect determined by the first display determination means and the identification information determined by the identification information determination means are not appropriate. The identification information displayed by the dynamic display effect is changed by the identification information changing means to identification information different from the predetermined identification information and displayed only in a special case. Here, such a situation may have occurred because the command could not be correctly received, and in practice, a game value may be given to the player. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J2, in such a case, the identification information, which is not the predetermined identification information that gives the player a predetermined game value, is displayed only in a special case. Since it can be visually recognized by the player, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that some kind of game value is added.

In the gaming machine A6, the first specified information corresponding to the dynamic display effect is displayed as the information specifying the identification information to be displayed for each screen in the immediately preceding dynamic display effect up to a predetermined screen. The offset information from the identification information is defined, and after the predetermined screen, the offset information from the identification information to be displayed in the dynamic display effect performed based on the first definition information is defined. Is an identification information storage unit that stores previous identification information that identifies the identification information that was displayed in the immediately preceding dynamic display effect, and an identification that is displayed in the dynamic display effect based on a command from the main control unit. Identification information determining means for determining information, wherein the drawing information identifying means is configured such that when the first prescribed information selected by the first selecting means is the first prescribed information corresponding to the dynamic display effect. Up to a predetermined screen corresponding to the changed first pointer means, the previous identification information stored in the identification information storage means and the immediately preceding dynamic display effect defined by the first definition information are displayed. The identification information to be displayed on one screen is specified based on the offset information from the displayed identification information, and after the predetermined screen, the identification information determined by the identification information determination means and the first information. Specifying the identification information to be displayed on one screen based on the offset information from the identification information that is displayed in the dynamic display effect performed based on the first regulation information, which is defined by the regulation information. Characteristic gaming machine K1.

According to the gaming machine K1, the first prescribed information corresponding to the dynamic display effect is displayed as the information specifying the identification information to be displayed for each screen up to the predetermined screen in the immediately preceding dynamic display effect. The offset information from the identification information is defined, and after the predetermined screen, the offset information from the identification information to be displayed in the dynamic display effect performed based on the first definition information is configured. Then, in the sub-control means, the previous identification information for identifying the identification information that has appeared in the immediately preceding dynamic display effect is stored in the identification information storage means, and based on the command from the main control means, the dynamic display The identification information to be revealed by the effect is determined by the identification information determining means. Here, the drawing information specifying means corresponds to the changed first pointer means when the first prescribed information selected by the first selecting means is the first prescribed information corresponding to the dynamic display effect. Up to a predetermined screen, one screen based on the previous identification information stored in the identification information storage means and the offset information from the identification information that appears in the immediately preceding dynamic display effect defined by the first defining information The identification information to be displayed on the display screen is specified, and after the predetermined screen, the dynamic display effect performed based on the identification information determined by the identification information determination means and the first regulation information The identification information to be displayed on one screen is specified on the basis of the offset information from the identification information to be displayed. Here, in the dynamic display effect, it is common to start from the identification information displayed in the immediately preceding dynamic display effect. However, the dynamic display of the identification information in the dynamic display effect is performed by the gaming machine K1. However, while it can be started based on the identification information presented by the immediately preceding dynamic display effect, this dynamic display effect ends based on the identification information determined based on the command from the main control device. Can be made. Therefore, even when the first regulation information is used, it is possible to easily generate an image to be displayed in the dynamic display effect.

In the first prescribed information corresponding to the dynamic display effect, as the information for specifying the identification information to be displayed for each screen, the offset information from the identification information appearing in the immediately preceding dynamic display effect, The predetermined screen for switching to the offset information from the identification information to be displayed in the dynamic display effect performed based on the first stipulated information is displayed during a period in which the identification information that is invisible to the player is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine K2 characterized by being set to a screen to be displayed.

Note that the dynamic display invisible to the player is, for example, a state in which the identification information is dynamically displayed at a high speed to the extent that the player cannot view it, or the identification information is displayed in a reduced size to the extent that it cannot be viewed. In addition, various states such as a state in which a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed so as to cover the identification information are displayed are included.

According to the gaming machine K2, in the first prescribed information corresponding to the dynamic display effect, as the information for specifying the identification information to be displayed for each screen, the identification information displayed in the immediately preceding dynamic display effect is used. A predetermined screen that is switched from the offset information to the offset information from the identification information that is displayed in the dynamic display effect that is performed based on the first specified information is dynamically displayed as the identification information that is invisible to the player. Since it is set on the screen displayed during the period, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the switching, and it is possible to allow the player to continue playing the game without feeling discomfort.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2, each of the identification information is given a unique number, and the offset information defined for each screen is the identification information presented in the immediately preceding dynamic display effect. Or a number attached to the identification information to be displayed in the dynamic display effect performed based on the first prescribed information in which the offset information is prescribed, and the corresponding one screen should be displayed. A gaming machine K3 characterized by showing a difference from a number attached to the identification information.

According to the gaming machine K3, a unique number is attached to the identification information, and the number attached to the identification information appearing in the immediately preceding dynamic display effect by the offset information defined for each screen, Alternatively, a number attached to the identification information to be displayed in the dynamic display effect performed based on the first prescribed information in which the offset information is prescribed, and a number attached to the identification information to be displayed on the corresponding one screen. Since the difference is shown, the identification information to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing the identification information with the number attached to the identification information.

It is provided with main control means for performing main control of the game, sub control means for operating based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and image display means for displaying an image based on control by the sub control means. In the gaming machine, the sub-control means stores a program executed by the arithmetic processing means together with the arithmetic processing means and image information for displaying an image on the image display means. Also includes a first storage means capable of holding information, and the arithmetic processing means is generated at the time of starting the supply of power, pointer means for specifying an address for specifying an instruction of a program to be executed by the arithmetic processing means. Reset signal receiving means for receiving a reset signal, and pointer initialization for initializing the pointer means to an address that specifies the first instruction of a predetermined program to be executed first based on the reset signal received by the reset receiving means Means for storing the image information and the program, the first storage means capable of performing a read operation faster than the first sub-storage means, and the arithmetic processing Second sub-storage means for storing a program which is a part or all of the predetermined program to be executed first upon receipt of the reset signal in the means, and which includes a first instruction of the predetermined program; It includes address acceptance means for accepting an address that identifies one of the information stored in the first sub-storage means and the second sub-storage means, and information identified by the address accepted by the address acceptance means. The address accepting means accepts a predetermined group of information from the temporary storage means for reading the temporary information from the first sub-storage means or the second sub-storage means and temporarily storing it, and the information stored in the temporary storage means. Information output means for reading and outputting the information specified by the specified address, and the temporary storage means stores the predetermined program to be executed first by the initialization by the pointer initialization means of the arithmetic processing means. When the address accepting means accepts that the address specifying the first instruction is designated by the pointer means, a part or all of the predetermined program including the first instruction is transferred from the second sub-storage means. A gaming machine L1 for reading and temporarily storing the read program.

According to the gaming machine L1, the sub-control unit can retain the information even when the power is turned off, which stores the program executed by the arithmetic processing unit together with the arithmetic processing unit and the image information for displaying the image on the image display unit. And a first storage means. Further, the arithmetic processing means includes pointer means for designating an address for specifying an instruction of a program to be executed by the arithmetic processing means, reset signal receiving means for receiving a reset signal generated at the start of power supply, and reset receiving means for the reset signal. A pointer initialization unit that initializes the pointer unit to an address that identifies the first instruction of a predetermined program to be executed first, based on the reset signal received by the unit, and the first storage unit includes: The first sub-storing means for storing the image information and the program, and the read-out operation that can be performed at a higher speed than the first sub-storing means, and the predetermined program to be executed first based on the reception of the reset signal in the arithmetic processing means. Part or all of the second sub-storage means for storing a program including the first instruction of the predetermined program, and one of the information stored in the first sub-storage means and the second sub-storage means. An address acceptance unit that accepts an address that identifies information, and a predetermined set of information that includes the information identified by the address accepted by the address acceptance unit are read from the first sub storage unit or the second sub storage unit, It has a temporary storage means for temporarily storing, and an information output means for reading out and outputting the information specified by the address accepted by the address acceptance means from the information stored in the temporary storage means.

Here, the temporary storage means, by the address reception means, indicates that the address specifying the first instruction of the predetermined program to be executed first by the pointer initialization means of the arithmetic processing means is designated from the pointer means. When accepted, a part or all of a predetermined program including the first command is read from the second sub storage means, and the read program is temporarily stored. As described above, since the second sub-storage means can read data faster than the first sub-storage means, the first program of the predetermined program to be executed first by the initialization by the pointer initialization means of the arithmetic processing means. When the address for specifying the instruction is designated by the pointer means, a part or all of the predetermined program including the first instruction executed by the arithmetic processing means after receiving the reset signal is immediately stored in the temporary storage means. Above, it can be output to the arithmetic processing means. Therefore, even when the program is stored together with the image information in the first sub-storage unit having a slow reading speed, it is possible to immediately read the program to be executed and start the processing.

In the gaming machine L1, the gaming machine L2, wherein the predetermined program is a starting program for executing a starting process for enabling the arithmetic processing means to execute various controls in the sub control means.

According to the gaming machine L2, the predetermined program executed by the arithmetic processing means after receiving the reset signal is a starting program for executing a starting processing for enabling various controls in the sub-control means in the arithmetic processing means. Therefore, after receiving the reset signal, the startup program is immediately read out and executed by the arithmetic processing means, so that the sub-control means can quickly execute various controls.

In the gaming machine L2, the sub-control means can be read and written by the arithmetic processing means, can perform a read operation faster than the first sub-storage means, and cannot store information when the power is turned off. The startup program transfers the program stored in the first sub-storage means to the second storage means, and transfers the pointer means to the second storage means after the transfer is completed. A gaming machine L3 including an instruction for executing a process of setting an address of the second storage means in which an instruction to be executed first in the program is stored.

According to the gaming machine L3, when the start program is first executed by the arithmetic processing means of the sub control means after receiving the reset signal, the program stored in the first sub storage means can be read at high speed. After the transfer is completed, the pointer means is set to the address of the second storage means in which the instruction to be executed first among the programs transferred to the second storage means is stored. As a result, when the program stored in the first sub-storage means is transferred to the second storage means capable of high-speed reading operation, the arithmetic processing means subsequently outputs an instruction from the second storage means. Since the program can be read out and executed, the instruction can be read out at high speed even when the program is stored together with the image information in the first sub-storing means having a slow reading out speed.

In the gaming machine L3, the second sub storage means stores a part of the start program including the first instruction in the start program, and the first sub storage means stores the second sub of the start program. Various programs are stored including the rest of the startup program that is not stored in the storage means, and the startup program stored in the second sub storage means is stored in the first sub storage means. Of various programs, a predetermined amount of programs including a part or all of the remaining startup programs are transferred to the second storage unit, and after the transfer is completed, the pointer unit is transferred to the second storage unit. A gaming machine L4 including an instruction for executing a process of setting the address of the second storage means in which an instruction to be executed first of the remaining activated programs is stored.

According to the gaming machine L4, the second sub-storage means stores a part of the startup program including the first instruction in the startup program, while the first sub-storage means stores the second of the startup programs. Various programs are stored in the sub storage unit, including the remaining startup program that is not stored. The startup program stored in the second sub storage means is a part or all of the remaining startup programs that are not stored in the second sub storage means among the various programs stored in the first sub storage means. A predetermined amount of the program including the above is transferred to the second storage means, and after the transfer is completed, the instruction to be executed first among the remaining start programs transferred to the second storage means by the pointer means is stored. It includes an instruction for executing the process of setting the address of the second storage means. As a result, even if only a part of the boot programs including the first instruction among the boot programs is stored in the second sub storage means, the first sub program can be stored in the first sub program by the boot program stored in the second sub storage means. Of the various programs stored in the sub storage unit, a predetermined amount of programs including a part or all of the remaining startup programs that are not stored in the second sub storage unit are transferred to the second storage unit, and the transfer is performed. Is completed, the pointer means is set to the address of the second storage means in which the instruction to be executed first among the remaining boot programs transferred to the second storage means is set. It is possible to reliably execute some or all of the remaining transferred startup programs. Therefore, it is not necessary to store all the startup programs in the second sub-storage means, so that the storage capacity of the second sub-storage means can be suppressed to a small capacity.

In the gaming machine L4, a predetermined amount of a program including a part of the remaining start program among various programs stored in the first sub storage means by the start program stored in the second sub storage means. Is transferred to the second storage means, the part of the startup programs transferred to the second storage means is the second storage of the various programs stored in the first sub storage means. A predetermined amount of the program including a part or all of the remaining startup program that is not transferred to the means, is transferred to the second storage means, and after the transfer is completed, the pointer means is transferred to the second storage means by the latest transfer processing. 2 a game machine including an instruction for executing a process of setting an address of the second storage means in which an instruction to be executed first among the remaining boot programs transferred to the storage means is stored. L5.

According to the gaming machine L5, among the various programs stored in the first sub storage means, the remaining start programs which are not stored in the second sub storage means by the startup program stored in the second sub storage means. When a predetermined amount of programs including a part of the above is transferred to the second storage means, a part of the startup programs transferred to the second storage means are among the various programs stored in the first sub storage means. , A predetermined amount of the program including a part or all of the remaining non-transferred start-up program to the second storage means is transferred to the second storage means, and after the transfer is completed, the pointer means is moved to the first transfer processing by the latest transfer processing. It includes an instruction for executing the process of setting the address of the second storage means in which the instruction to be executed first among the remaining boot programs transferred to the two storage means is stored. As a result, a process of further transferring the non-transferred boot program to the second storage means is executed by a part of the boot program transferred to the second storage means, and after the transfer is completed, the transfer is performed to the second storage means. Execution can start from the first instruction of the stored boot program. Therefore, even when the program size of the startup program is large, the arithmetic processing means transfers all the startup programs except the startup program stored in the second sub storage means from the first sub storage means to the second storage means. After being transferred, it can be surely executed from the second storage means.

In the gaming machines L3 to L5, the program stored in the second storage means is programmed so that the pointer means is always set to an address that specifies an instruction included in the program stored in the second storage means. A gaming machine L6 characterized in that.

According to the gaming machine L6, the program stored in the second storage means is programmed so that the pointer means is always set to an address specifying an instruction included in the program stored in the second storage means. Therefore, once the pointer means is set to the address specifying the instruction contained in the program stored in the second storage means, the arithmetic processing means always reads the instruction from the second storage means and executes the processing thereafter. be able to. Here, the program stored in the first sub storage means is transferred to the second storage means by the startup program, and then the instruction to be executed first among the programs transferred to the second storage means by the pointer means Since the stored address of the second storage means is set, the arithmetic processing means is transferred to the second storage means after the program stored in the first sub storage means is transferred to the second storage means. Therefore, it is possible to always read the instruction from the program and execute the process. That is, since the arithmetic processing means can always read the instruction from the program stored in the second storage means having a high read speed at a high speed and execute the processing, the program is stored in the first sub storage means having a slow read speed together with the image information. Even in the case where the program is stored, the program stored in the first sub storage unit is transferred to the second storage unit, and then the program stored in the second storage unit is immediately read out to execute the processing. You can

In the gaming machines L1 to L6, the gaming machine L7, wherein the first sub storage means is constituted by a NAND flash memory.

According to the gaming machine L7, the first sub storage means is configured by a NAND flash memory. Here, since the NAND flash memory is characterized in that it has a large storage capacity in a small area and is inexpensive, it is possible to increase the capacity of the first storage means while suppressing an increase in cost. You can Therefore, not only the image information but also the program can be easily stored in the first storage means, so that another storage means for storing the program can be eliminated and the cost can be reduced. You can On the other hand, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that the read speed is slower than that of other memories. Even when the program is stored together with the image information in the configured first sub-storage unit, the program to be executed can be immediately read and the execution of the process can be started.

In the gaming machines L1 to L7, the second sub-storage means is constituted by a NOR type ROM, wherein the gaming machine L8.

According to the gaming machine L8, the second sub storage means is composed of a NOR type ROM. Here, since the NOR type ROM is characterized by being capable of high-speed read operation, a part or all of a predetermined program to be executed first based on acceptance of a reset signal in the arithmetic processing means, By storing the program including the first instruction of the predetermined program in the NOR type ROM, the reset signal is accepted even when the program is stored together with the image information in the first sub-storage means having a slow reading speed. It is possible to immediately read the program to be executed afterwards from the NOR type ROM, store it in the temporary storage means, and then output the program to the arithmetic processing means. Therefore, the arithmetic processing means can immediately start executing the processing.

In the gaming machines L1 to L7, the first storage means includes first storage control means for controlling the operation of the first storage means including the read/write operation to the temporary storage means, and the second sub storage means, A gaming machine L9, which is incorporated in the first storage control means.

According to the gaming machine L9, the first storage means is provided with the first storage control means for controlling the operation of the first storage means including the read/write operation to the temporary storage means, and the second sub storage means is provided with the first storage control means. It is built in the first storage control means. Here, since the second sub storage means is built in the first storage control means, the first storage control means can perform a high-speed read operation from the second sub storage means. Therefore, a part or all of the predetermined program to be executed first based on the reception of the reset signal in the arithmetic processing means, and the program including the first instruction of the predetermined program is stored in the second sub storage means. As a result, even when the program is stored together with the image information in the first sub-storing means having a slow reading speed, the program to be executed after receiving the reset signal is immediately read from the second sub-storing means and is temporarily stored. Then, the program can be output to the arithmetic processing means. Therefore, the arithmetic processing means can immediately start executing the processing.

It is provided with main control means for performing main control of the game, sub control means for operating based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and image display means for displaying an image based on control by the sub control means. In the gaming machine, the sub-control means stores a program executed by the arithmetic processing means together with the arithmetic processing means and image information for displaying an image on the image display means. Also includes a first storage means capable of holding information, and the arithmetic processing means is generated at the time of starting the supply of power, pointer means for specifying an address for specifying an instruction of a program to be executed by the arithmetic processing means. Reset signal receiving means for receiving a reset signal, and pointer initialization for initializing the pointer means to an address that specifies the first instruction of a predetermined program to be executed first based on the reset signal received by the reset receiving means The first storage means specifies a first sub-storage means for storing the image information and the program, and one information from the information stored in the first sub-storage means. Address acceptance means for accepting an address, and a temporary storage means for reading out a predetermined group of information including information specified by the address accepted by the address acceptance means from the first sub-storage means and temporarily storing the information. An information output means for reading and outputting the information specified by the address accepted by the address accepting means from the information stored in the temporary storage means, and a power supply detection for detecting the start of power supply. The temporary storage means, when the power supply detection detects that the power supply is started, the temporary storage means should be executed first based on the reception of the reset signal in the arithmetic processing means. A part or all of the predetermined program, including a first instruction of the predetermined program, is read from the first sub-storage unit, and the read program is temporarily stored. A gaming machine M1 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine M1, the sub-control means can retain the information even when the power is turned off, which stores the program executed by the arithmetic processing means together with the arithmetic processing means and the image information for displaying the image on the image display means. And a first storage means. Further, the arithmetic processing means includes pointer means for designating an address for specifying an instruction of a program to be executed by the arithmetic processing means, reset signal receiving means for receiving a reset signal generated at the start of power supply, and its reset receiving means. A pointer initialization unit that initializes the pointer unit to an address that identifies the first instruction of a predetermined program to be executed first, based on the reset signal received by the unit, and the first storage unit includes: First sub-storing means for storing image information and a program, address accepting means for accepting an address for identifying one of the information stored in the first sub-storing means, and addresses accepted by the address accepting means A predetermined group of information including the information specified by is read from the first sub-storage means and temporarily stored therein, and is received by the address receiving means from the information stored in the temporary storage means. The information output means for reading and outputting the information specified by the address and the power supply detection means for detecting the start of the power supply.

Here, when it is detected by the power supply detection that the power supply is started, the temporary storage means is a part or all of the predetermined program to be executed first based on the reception of the reset signal in the arithmetic processing means. Further, the program including the first instruction of the predetermined program is read from the first sub-storage means, and the read program is temporarily stored. Accordingly, when the pointer means is initialized by the pointer initialization means by receiving the reset signal, a part or all of the predetermined program to be executed first in the arithmetic processing means based on the reception of the reset signal is detected. Since the program including the first instruction of the predetermined program is already stored in the temporary storage means or is being stored in the temporary storage means, initialization by the pointer initialization means of the arithmetic processing means When the address specifying the first instruction of the predetermined program to be executed first is designated by the pointer means by the, the part of the predetermined program including the first instruction executed by the arithmetic processing means after receiving the reset signal. Alternatively, all of them can be immediately output from the temporary storage means to the arithmetic processing means. Therefore, even when the program is stored together with the image information in the first sub-storage unit having a slow reading speed, it is possible to immediately read the program to be executed and start the processing.

In the gaming machine M1, the gaming machine M2, wherein the predetermined program is a start-up program that executes a start-up process for enabling the arithmetic processing means to execute various controls in the sub-control means.

According to the gaming machine M2, the predetermined program executed by the arithmetic processing means after receiving the reset signal is a start program for executing the start processing for enabling various controls in the sub control means in the arithmetic processing means. Therefore, after receiving the reset signal, the startup program is immediately read out and executed by the arithmetic processing means, so that various controls can be quickly executed in the sub control means.

In the gaming machine M2, the sub-control means can be read and written by the arithmetic processing means, can perform a read operation faster than the first sub-storage means, and cannot store information when the power is turned off. The startup program transfers the program stored in the first sub-storage means to the second storage means, and transfers the pointer means to the second storage means after the transfer is completed. A game machine M3 including an instruction for executing a process of setting an address of the second storage means in which an instruction to be executed first in the program is stored.

According to the gaming machine M3, when the arithmetic processing means of the sub control means first executes the startup program after receiving the reset signal, the program stored in the first sub storage means can be read out at high speed. After the completion of the transfer, the pointer means is set to the address of the second storage means in which the instruction to be executed first among the programs transferred to the second storage means is stored. As a result, when the program stored in the first sub-storage means is transferred to the second storage means capable of high-speed reading operation, the arithmetic processing means subsequently outputs an instruction from the second storage means. Since the program can be read out and executed, the instruction can be read out at high speed even when the program is stored together with the image information in the first sub-storing means having a slow reading out speed.

In the gaming machine M3, the predetermined program stored in the temporary storage means when the power supply detection detects that the power supply is started, the start-up including the first instruction in the start-up program A part of the program, and a part of the start program is a part or all of the remaining start program that is not stored in the temporary storage unit among various programs stored in the first sub storage unit. An instruction to be executed first of the remaining boot programs transferred to the second storage means after the transfer of a predetermined amount of a program including A game machine M4 including an instruction for executing a process of setting the address of the second storage means in which is stored.

According to the gaming machine M4, the predetermined program stored in the temporary storage means when the power supply is detected by the power supply detection is one of the start programs including the first command in the start program. It is a department. Then, of the various programs stored in the first sub-storage unit, a predetermined amount of programs including a part or all of the remaining startup programs that are not stored in the temporary storage unit are transferred to the second storage unit. At the same time, after the transfer is completed, a process for setting the pointer means to the address of the second storage means in which the instruction to be executed first among the remaining start programs transferred to the second storage means is executed. Contains instructions. As a result, even if only a part of the boot programs including the first instruction among the boot programs is stored in the temporary storage means, it is stored in the first sub-storage means by the boot program stored in the temporary storage means. Among the various programs, a predetermined amount of programs including some or all of the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the temporary storage means are transferred to the second storage means, and after the transfer is completed, the pointer means is Of the remaining boot programs transferred to the second storage means, since the instruction to be executed first is set to the address of the second storage means, the remaining boot programs transferred to the second storage means are stored. Some or all can be executed reliably. Therefore, even if the program size of the boot program is large, it is not necessary to store all the boot programs in the temporary storage means, and therefore the storage capacity of the temporary storage means can be suppressed to a small capacity.

In the gaming machine M4, various types stored in the first sub-storage means by the startup program stored in the temporary storage means when it is detected that the power supply is started by the power supply detection. Of the programs, when a predetermined amount of programs including a part of the remaining startup programs is transferred to the second storage unit, the part of the startup programs transferred to the second storage unit is the power supply. Of the various programs stored in the first sub-storage means except the startup program stored in the temporary storage means immediately after the supply of the data is started, the remaining startup that is not transferred to the second storage means A predetermined amount of a program including a part or all of the program is transferred to the second storage means, and after the transfer is completed, the pointer means is transferred to the second storage means by the most recent transfer process. A game machine M5 including an instruction for executing a process of setting the address of the second storage means in which an instruction to be executed first is stored in the boot program.

According to the gaming machine M5, among the various programs stored in the first sub-storage means by the start-up program stored in the temporary storage means when it is detected that the power supply is started by the power supply detection. When a predetermined amount of programs including a part of the remaining start-up programs is transferred to the second storage means, the part of the start-up programs transferred to the second storage means is immediately after the power supply is started. Of the various programs stored in the first sub-storage means excluding the startup program stored in the temporary storage means, a predetermined amount of programs including a part or all of the remaining non-transferred startup programs in the second storage means. A second instruction in which the instruction to be executed first among the remaining boot programs transferred to the second storage means by the latest transfer processing after the transfer is transferred to the second storage means is completed. It includes an instruction for executing the process of setting the address of the storage means. As a result, a process of further transferring the non-transferred boot program to the second storage means is executed by a part of the boot program transferred to the second storage means, and after the transfer is completed, the transfer is performed to the second storage means. Execution can start from the first instruction of the stored boot program. Therefore, even when the program size of the startup program is large, the arithmetic processing means stores all the startup programs except the startup program stored in the temporary storage means immediately after the power supply is started, as the first sub storage means. From the second storage means to the second storage means, it can be surely executed from the second storage means.

In the gaming machines M3 to M5, the program stored in the second storage means is programmed so that the pointer means is always set to an address that specifies an instruction included in the program stored in the second storage means. A gaming machine M6 characterized in that.

According to the gaming machine M6, the program stored in the second storage means is programmed so that the pointer means is always set to an address that specifies an instruction included in the program stored in the second storage means. Therefore, once the pointer means is set to the address specifying the instruction contained in the program stored in the second storage means, the arithmetic processing means always reads the instruction from the second storage means and executes the processing thereafter. be able to. Here, the program stored in the first sub storage means is transferred to the second storage means by the startup program, and then the instruction to be executed first among the programs transferred to the second storage means by the pointer means Since the stored address of the second storage means is set, the arithmetic processing means is transferred to the second storage means after the program stored in the first sub storage means is transferred to the second storage means. Therefore, it is possible to always read the instruction from the program and execute the process. That is, since the arithmetic processing means can always read the instruction from the program stored in the second storage means having a high read speed at a high speed and execute the processing, the program is stored in the first sub storage means having a slow read speed together with the image information. Even in the case where the program is stored, the program stored in the first sub storage unit is transferred to the second storage unit, and then the program stored in the second storage unit is immediately read out to execute the processing. You can

In the gaming machines M1 to M6, the gaming machine M7 is characterized in that the first sub storage means is constituted by a NAND flash memory.

According to the gaming machine M7, the first sub storage means is configured by a NAND flash memory. Here, since the NAND flash memory is characterized in that it has a large storage capacity in a small area and is inexpensive, it is possible to increase the capacity of the first storage means while suppressing an increase in cost. You can Therefore, not only the image information but also the program can be easily stored in the first storage means, so that another storage means for storing the program can be eliminated and the cost can be reduced. You can On the other hand, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that the read speed is slower than that of other memories. Even when the program is stored together with the image information in the configured first sub-storage unit, the program to be executed can be immediately read and the execution of the process can be started.

It is provided with main control means for performing main control of the game, sub control means for operating based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and image display means for displaying an image based on control by the sub control means. In the gaming machine, the sub-control means stores a program executed by the arithmetic processing means together with the arithmetic processing means and image information for displaying an image on the image display means. Also includes first storage means capable of holding information, and the arithmetic processing means is generated at the time of starting the supply of power, pointer means for specifying an address for specifying an instruction of a program to be executed by the arithmetic processing means. Reset signal receiving means for receiving a reset signal, and pointer initialization for initializing the pointer means to an address that specifies the first instruction of a predetermined program to be executed first based on the reset signal received by the reset receiving means Means for storing the image information and the program, the first storage means capable of performing a read operation faster than the first sub-storage means, and the arithmetic processing Second sub-storage means for storing a program which is a part or all of the predetermined program to be executed first upon receipt of the reset signal in the means, and which includes a first instruction of the predetermined program; It includes address acceptance means for accepting an address that identifies one of the information stored in the first sub-storage means and the second sub-storage means, and information identified by the address accepted by the address acceptance means. The address accepting means accepts a predetermined group of information from the temporary storage means for reading the temporary information from the first sub-storage means or the second sub-storage means and temporarily storing it, and the information stored in the temporary storage means. The information output means for reading and outputting the information specified by the specified address, and the power supply detection means for detecting the start of the power supply, wherein the temporary storage means detects the power supply by the power supply detection. When it is detected that the supply of is started, a part or all of the predetermined program to be executed first based on the reception of the reset signal in the arithmetic processing means, A game machine characterized by reading a program including a first instruction from the second sub-storage means and temporarily storing the read program. N1.

According to the gaming machine N1, the sub-control means can hold the information even when the power is turned off, which stores the program executed by the arithmetic processing means together with the arithmetic processing means and the image information for displaying the image on the image display means. And a first storage means. Further, the arithmetic processing means includes pointer means for designating an address for specifying an instruction of a program to be executed by the arithmetic processing means, reset signal receiving means for receiving a reset signal generated at the start of power supply, and reset receiving means for the reset signal. A pointer initialization unit that initializes the pointer unit to an address that identifies the first instruction of a predetermined program to be executed first, based on the reset signal received by the unit, and the first storage unit includes: The first sub-storing means for storing the image information and the program, and the read-out operation that can be performed at a higher speed than the first sub-storing means, and the predetermined program to be executed first based on the reception of the reset signal in the arithmetic processing means. Part or all of the second sub-storage means for storing a program including the first instruction of the predetermined program, and one of the information stored in the first sub-storage means and the second sub-storage means. An address acceptance unit that accepts an address that identifies the information, and a predetermined group of information that includes the information identified by the address that is accepted by the address acceptance unit are read from the first sub storage unit or the second sub storage unit, Temporary storage means for temporarily storing, information output means for reading and outputting information specified by the address accepted by the address acceptance means from the information stored in the temporary storage means, and power supply are started. And a power supply detection means for detecting the fact.

Here, when it is detected by the power supply detection that the power supply is started, the temporary storage means is a part or all of the predetermined program to be executed first based on the reception of the reset signal in the arithmetic processing means. In addition, the program including the first instruction of the predetermined program is read from the second sub storage means, and the read program is temporarily stored. As described above, the second sub-storage unit can perform the read operation at a higher speed than the first sub-storage unit. Therefore, the second sub-storage unit stores the data in the second sub-storage unit when the start of power supply is detected. If the stored program is read out and stored in the temporary storage means, when the pointer means is initialized by the pointer initialization means by receiving the reset signal, the arithmetic processing means first executes a predetermined operation based on the reception of the reset signal. This is a stage in which a part or all of the above program, including the first instruction of the predetermined program, is already stored in the temporary storage means or is being stored in the temporary storage means. Therefore, when the pointer initializing means of the arithmetic processing means initializes the address for specifying the first instruction of the predetermined program to be executed first, the pointer processing means executes the address after receiving the reset signal. It is possible to immediately output a part or all of the predetermined program including the first instruction to the arithmetic processing means from the temporary storage means. Therefore, even when the program is stored together with the image information in the first sub-storage unit having a slow reading speed, it is possible to immediately read the program to be executed and start the processing.

In the gaming machine N1, the predetermined program is a start-up program that executes a start-up process for enabling the arithmetic processing means to execute various controls in the sub-control means.

According to the gaming machine N2, the predetermined program executed by the arithmetic processing means after receiving the reset signal is a start-up program for executing the start-up processing for enabling various controls in the sub-control means in the arithmetic processing means. Therefore, after receiving the reset signal, the startup program is immediately read out and executed by the arithmetic processing means, so that various controls can be quickly executed in the sub control means.

In the gaming machine N2, the sub-control means can be read and written by the arithmetic processing means, can perform a read operation faster than the first sub-storage means, and cannot store information when the power is cut off. The starting program transfers the program stored in the first sub-storage unit to the second storage unit, and transfers the pointer unit to the second storage unit after the transfer is completed. A gaming machine N3 including an instruction to execute a process of setting an address of the second storage means in which an instruction to be executed first in the program is stored.

According to the gaming machine N3, when the arithmetic processing means of the sub-control means first executes the startup program after receiving the reset signal, the program stored in the first sub-storage means can be read out at high speed. After the completion of the transfer, the pointer means is set to the address of the second storage means in which the instruction to be executed first among the programs transferred to the second storage means is stored. As a result, when the program stored in the first sub-storage means is transferred to the second storage means capable of high-speed reading operation, the arithmetic processing means subsequently outputs an instruction from the second storage means. Since the program can be read out and executed, the instruction can be read out at high speed even when the program is stored together with the image information in the first sub-storing means having a slow reading out speed.

In the gaming machine N3, the second sub storage means stores a part of the start program including the first instruction in the start program, and the first sub storage means stores the second sub of the start program. Various programs are stored including the rest of the boot program that is not stored in the storage means, and the boot program stored in the second sub storage means is stored in the first sub storage means. Of the various programs, a predetermined amount of the program including a part or all of the remaining startup program is transferred to the second storage means, and after the transfer is completed, the pointer means is transferred to the second storage means. A gaming machine N4 including an instruction to execute a process of setting an address of the second storage means in which an instruction to be executed first of the remaining activated programs is stored.

According to the gaming machine N4, the second sub-storage means stores a part of the startup program including the first instruction in the startup program, while the first sub-storage means stores the second of the startup programs. Various programs are stored in the sub storage unit, including the remaining startup programs that are not stored. The startup program stored in the second sub storage means is a part or all of the remaining startup programs that are not stored in the second sub storage means among the various programs stored in the first sub storage means. A predetermined amount of the program including the above is transferred to the second storage means, and after the transfer is completed, the instruction to be executed first among the remaining start programs transferred to the second storage means by the pointer means is stored. It includes an instruction for executing the process of setting the address of the second storage means. As a result, even if only a part of the boot programs including the first instruction among the boot programs is stored in the second sub storage means, the first sub program can be stored in the first sub program by the boot program stored in the second sub storage means. Of the various programs stored in the sub storage unit, a predetermined amount of programs including a part or all of the remaining startup programs that are not stored in the second sub storage unit are transferred to the second storage unit, and the transfer is performed. Is completed, the pointer means is set to the address of the second storage means in which the instruction to be executed first among the remaining boot programs transferred to the second storage means is set. It is possible to reliably execute some or all of the remaining transferred startup programs. Therefore, it is not necessary to store all the startup programs in the second sub-storage means, so that the storage capacity of the second sub-storage means can be suppressed to a small capacity.

In the gaming machine N4, a predetermined amount of programs including a part of the remaining startup programs among various programs stored in the first sub storage means by the startup programs stored in the second sub storage means. Is transferred to the second storage means, the part of the startup programs transferred to the second storage means is the second storage of the various programs stored in the first sub storage means. A predetermined amount of the program including a part or all of the remaining non-transferred start-up program to the means, and after the transfer is completed, the pointer means is moved by the latest transfer processing. A game characterized by including an instruction for executing a process for setting an address of the second storage means in which an instruction to be executed first among the remaining boot programs transferred to the second storage means is stored. Machine N5.

According to the gaming machine N5, among the various programs stored in the first sub storage means, the remaining start programs which are not stored in the second sub storage means by the startup program stored in the second sub storage means. When a predetermined amount of programs including a part of the above is transferred to the second storage means, a part of the startup programs transferred to the second storage means are among the various programs stored in the first sub storage means. , Transferring a predetermined amount of programs including a part or all of the remaining non-transferred start-up programs to the second storage means, and, after the transfer is completed, moving the pointer means to the latest transfer processing. It includes an instruction for executing the process of setting the address of the second storage means in which the instruction to be executed first among the remaining boot programs transferred to the second storage means is stored. As a result, a process of further transferring the non-transferred boot program to the second storage means is executed by a part of the boot program transferred to the second storage means, and after the transfer is completed, the transfer is performed to the second storage means. Execution can start from the first instruction of the stored boot program. Therefore, even when the program size of the startup program is large, the arithmetic processing means transfers all the startup programs except the startup program stored in the second sub storage means from the first sub storage means to the second storage means. After being transferred, it can be surely executed from the second storage means.

In the gaming machines N3 to N5, the program stored in the second storage means is programmed so that the pointer means is always set to an address that specifies an instruction included in the program stored in the second storage means. A gaming machine N6 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine N6, the program stored in the second storage means is programmed so that the pointer means is always set to an address that specifies an instruction included in the program stored in the second storage means. Therefore, once the pointer means is set to the address specifying the instruction contained in the program stored in the second storage means, the arithmetic processing means always reads the instruction from the second storage means and executes the processing thereafter. be able to. Here, the program stored in the first sub storage means is transferred to the second storage means by the startup program, and then the instruction to be executed first among the programs transferred to the second storage means by the pointer means Since the stored address of the second storage means is set, the arithmetic processing means is transferred to the second storage means after the program stored in the first sub storage means is transferred to the second storage means. Therefore, it is possible to always read the instruction from the program and execute the process. That is, since the arithmetic processing means can always read the instruction from the program stored in the second storage means having a high read speed at a high speed and execute the processing, the program is stored in the first sub storage means having a slow read speed together with the image information. Even in the case where the program is stored, the program stored in the first sub storage unit is transferred to the second storage unit, and then the program stored in the second storage unit is immediately read out to execute the processing. You can

In the gaming machines N1 to N6, the gaming machine N7 is characterized in that the first sub-storage means is constituted by a NAND flash memory.

According to the gaming machine N7, the first sub storage means is composed of a NAND flash memory. Here, since the NAND flash memory is characterized in that it has a large storage capacity in a small area and is inexpensive, it is possible to increase the capacity of the first storage means while suppressing an increase in cost. You can Therefore, not only the image information but also the program can be easily stored in the first storage means, so that another storage means for storing the program can be eliminated and the cost can be reduced. You can On the other hand, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that the read speed is slower than other memories, but the configuration described in any of the gaming machines N1 to N6 allows the NAND flash memory to have a slow read speed. Even when the program is stored together with the image information in the configured first sub-storage unit, it is possible to immediately read the program to be executed and start executing the process.

In the gaming machines N1 to N7, the second sub storage means is constituted by a NOR type ROM, and the gaming machine N8 is characterized.

According to the gaming machine N8, the second sub storage means is composed of a NOR type ROM. Here, since the NOR type ROM is characterized by being capable of high-speed read operation, a part or all of a predetermined program to be executed first based on acceptance of a reset signal in the arithmetic processing means, By storing the program including the first instruction of the predetermined program in the NOR type ROM, the reset signal is accepted even when the program is stored together with the image information in the first sub-storage means having a slow reading speed. A program to be executed later can be immediately read from the NOR ROM upon detection of power supply, stored in the temporary storage means, and then output to the arithmetic processing means. Therefore, the arithmetic processing means can immediately start executing the processing.

In the gaming machines N1 to N7, the first storage means has at least one of the address acceptance means, the information output means and the power supply detection means, and the first storage means includes a read/write operation to/from the temporary storage means. A gaming machine N9, comprising: first storage control means for controlling the operation of the storage means, wherein the second sub storage means is incorporated in the first storage control means.

According to the gaming machine N9, the first storage means has at least one of the address acceptance means, the information output means, and the power supply detection means, and controls the operation of the first storage means including the read/write operation to the temporary storage means. The first storage control means is provided, and the second sub-storage means is built in the first storage control means. Here, since the second sub storage means is built in the first storage control means, the first storage control means can perform a high-speed read operation from the second sub storage means. Therefore, a part or all of the predetermined program to be executed first based on the reception of the reset signal in the arithmetic processing means, and the program including the first instruction of the predetermined program is stored in the second sub storage means. Therefore, even when the program is stored together with the image information in the first sub-storage unit having a slow reading speed, the program to be executed after the reset signal is received is first triggered by the detection of the power supply. The program can be output to the arithmetic processing means after being immediately read from the sub storage means, stored in the temporary storage means. Therefore, the arithmetic processing means can immediately start executing the processing.

It is provided with main control means for performing main control of the game, sub control means for operating based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and image display means for displaying an image based on control by the sub control means. In the gaming machine, the sub-control means stores a program executed by the arithmetic processing means together with the arithmetic processing means and image information for displaying an image on the image display means. And a first storage means capable of holding information, and a predetermined program that can be read out faster than the first storage means and is first executed by the arithmetic processing means. And a program storing unit that stores a part or all of the predetermined program including the first instruction and that can retain information even when the power is cut off, and the arithmetic processing unit stores the program to be executed by the arithmetic processing unit. A pointer means for designating an address for specifying an instruction, a reset signal receiving means for receiving a reset signal generated at the start of power supply, and a predetermined signal to be executed first based on the reset signal received by the reset receiving means. A pointer initialization unit that initializes the pointer unit to an address that specifies the first instruction of the program, and the program storage unit is a predetermined program first executed by the arithmetic processing unit, When an address specifying an instruction included in a part or all of the predetermined program including the first instruction of the predetermined program is specified by the pointer means, an instruction specified by the address specified by the pointer means A gaming machine O1 characterized by reading out and outputting.

According to the gaming machine O1, the sub-control means can retain the information even when the power is turned off, which stores the program executed by the arithmetic processing means together with the arithmetic processing means and the image information for displaying the image on the image display means. And a predetermined program that can be read out faster than the first storage means and that is first executed by the arithmetic processing means and that includes the first instruction of the predetermined program. And a program storing means capable of holding information even when the power is cut off. Further, the arithmetic processing means includes pointer means for designating an address for specifying an instruction of a program to be executed by the arithmetic processing means, reset signal receiving means for receiving a reset signal generated at the start of power supply, and reset receiving means for the reset signal. And pointer initialization means for initializing the pointer means to an address that specifies the first instruction of a predetermined program to be executed first, based on the reset signal received by the means.

Here, the program storage means is an address that identifies a predetermined program that is first executed by the arithmetic processing means and that is included in a part or all of the predetermined program including the first instruction of the predetermined program. Is designated by the pointer means, the instruction designated by the address designated by the pointer means is read and output. As described above, the program storage means can perform the read operation faster than the first storage means. Therefore, the initialization of the pointer initialization means of the arithmetic processing means saves a predetermined program to be executed first. When the address specifying the first instruction is designated by the pointer means, a part or all of the predetermined program including the first instruction executed by the arithmetic processing means after receiving the reset signal is immediately read from the program storage means. And output to the arithmetic processing means. Therefore, even when the program is stored together with the image information in the first storage unit having a slow reading speed, it is possible to immediately read the program to be executed and start executing the process.

In the gaming machine O1, the predetermined program is a start-up program that executes a start-up process for enabling the arithmetic processing means to execute various controls in the sub-control means.

According to the gaming machine O2, the predetermined program executed by the arithmetic processing means after receiving the reset signal is a startup program for executing the startup processing for enabling the arithmetic processing means to execute various controls in the sub control means. Therefore, after receiving the reset signal, the startup program is immediately read out and executed by the arithmetic processing means, so that various controls can be quickly executed in the sub control means.

In the gaming machine O2, the sub-control unit includes a second storage unit that can be read and written by the arithmetic processing unit, can perform a read operation faster than the first storage unit, and cannot hold information when the power is turned off. The startup program transfers the program stored in the first storage means to the second storage means, and the pointer means stores the program transferred to the second storage means after the transfer is completed. A gaming machine O3 including an instruction for executing a process of setting the address of the second storage means in which an instruction to be executed first is stored.

According to the gaming machine O3, when the arithmetic processing unit of the sub-control unit first executes the startup program after receiving the reset signal, the program stored in the first storage unit can be read out at high speed. After the transfer to the second storage means and the completion of the transfer, the pointer means is set to the address of the second storage means in which the instruction to be executed first in the program transferred to the second storage means is stored. As a result, when the program stored in the first storage means is transferred to the second storage means capable of high-speed read operation, the arithmetic processing means subsequently reads the instruction from the second storage means. Since it is possible to execute the processing by executing the processing, it is possible to read the instruction at high speed even when the program is stored together with the image information in the first storage unit having a low reading speed.

In the gaming machine O3, the program storage means stores a part of the startup program including the first command in the startup program, and the first storage means is not stored in the program storage means of the startup program. Various kinds of programs are stored including the remaining starting program, and the starting program stored in the program storage means is the remaining one of the various programs stored in the first storage means. A predetermined amount of a program including a part or all of the boot program is transferred to the second storage means, and after the transfer is completed, the pointer means of the remaining boot programs transferred to the second storage means. A gaming machine O4 including an instruction for executing a process of setting the address of the second storage means in which an instruction to be executed first is stored.

According to the gaming machine O4, the program storage means stores a part of the startup program including the first command in the startup program, while the first storage means stores the startup program in the program storage means. Various programs are stored, including the remaining startup programs that are stored. The startup program stored in the program storage means is a predetermined amount of various programs stored in the first storage means, including a part or all of the remaining startup programs not stored in the program storage means. The second storage means stores the program to be transferred to the second storage means, and after the transfer is completed, the pointer means stores the instruction to be executed first among the remaining boot programs transferred to the second storage means. It includes an instruction to execute the process of setting the address. As a result, even if only a part of the start programs including the first instruction among the start programs is stored in the program storage means, the start program stored in the program storage means stores the start program in the first storage means. Of the various stored programs, a predetermined amount of programs including some or all of the remaining startup programs that are not stored in the program storage means are transferred to the second storage means, and after the transfer is completed, the pointer means Is set to the address of the second storage means in which the instruction to be executed first among the remaining start programs transferred to the second storage means is set. Therefore, the remaining start program transferred to the second storage means is set. A part or all of can be surely executed. Therefore, it is not necessary to store all the boot programs in the program storage means, so that the storage capacity of the program storage means can be suppressed to a small capacity.

In the gaming machine O4, a predetermined amount of a program including a part of the remaining startup program among the various programs stored in the first storage means is stored in the first storage means by the startup program stored in the program storage means. When being transferred to the second storage means, the part of the startup programs transferred to the second storage means is not transferred to the second storage means among the various programs stored in the first storage means. Of a predetermined amount of the program including a part or all of the remaining starting program of (1) is transferred to the second storage means, and after the transfer is completed, the pointer means is moved to the second storage means by the latest transfer processing. A gaming machine O5, including an instruction for executing a process of setting an address of the second storage means in which an instruction to be executed first among the remaining boot programs transferred to is stored.

According to the gaming machine O5, among the various programs stored in the first storage means, the startup program stored in the program storage means includes a part of the remaining startup programs that are not stored in the program storage means. When a predetermined amount of programs is transferred to the second storage means, a part of the startup programs transferred to the second storage means is stored in the second storage means among the various programs stored in the first storage means. A predetermined amount of programs including some or all of the non-transferred remaining startup programs are transferred to the second storage means, and after the transfer is completed, the pointer means is transferred to the second storage means by the latest transfer processing. It includes an instruction to execute the process of setting the address of the second storage means in which the instruction to be executed first among the remaining activated programs is stored. As a result, a process of further transferring the non-transferred boot program to the second storage means is executed by a part of the boot program transferred to the second storage means, and after the transfer is completed, the transfer is performed to the second storage means. Execution can start from the first instruction of the stored boot program. Therefore, even if the program size of the startup program is large, the arithmetic processing unit transfers all the startup programs except the startup program stored in the program storage unit from the first storage unit to the second storage unit. Thus, it can be surely executed from the second storage means.

In the gaming machines O3 to O5, the program stored in the second storage means is programmed so that the pointer means is always set to an address that specifies an instruction included in the program stored in the second storage means. A gaming machine O6 characterized in that.

According to the gaming machine O6, the program stored in the second storage means is programmed so that the pointer means is always set to an address that specifies an instruction included in the program stored in the second storage means. Therefore, once the pointer means is set to the address specifying the instruction contained in the program stored in the second storage means, the arithmetic processing means always reads the instruction from the second storage means and executes the processing thereafter. be able to. Here, the program stored in the first storage means is transferred to the second storage means by the startup program, and then the instruction to be executed first among the programs transferred to the second storage means by the pointer means is stored. Since the program stored in the first storage means is transferred to the second storage means, the arithmetic processing means sets the address stored in the second storage means to the address stored in the second storage means. It will always be possible to read instructions and perform processing. That is, the arithmetic processing means can always read the instruction from the program stored in the second storage means having a high reading speed at a high speed and execute the processing, so that the program is stored in the first storage means having a slow reading speed together with the image information. Even in such a case, the program stored in the first storage means can be transferred to the second storage means, and then the program stored in the second storage means can be immediately read out to execute the processing. ..

In the gaming machines O1 to O6, the first storage means is constituted by a NAND flash memory, and the gaming machine O7 is characterized.

According to the gaming machine O7, the first storage means is composed of a NAND flash memory. Here, since the NAND flash memory is characterized in that it has a large storage capacity in a small area and is inexpensive, it is possible to increase the capacity of the first storage means while suppressing an increase in cost. You can Therefore, not only the image information but also the program can be easily stored in the first storage means. On the other hand, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that the read speed is slower than that of other memories. Even when the program is stored together with the image information in the configured first storage unit, the program to be executed can be immediately read and the execution of the process can be started.

In the gaming machines O1 to O7, the program storage means is constituted by a NOR type ROM, and the gaming machine N8.

According to the gaming machine O8, the program storage means is composed of a NOR type ROM. Here, since the NOR type ROM is characterized by being capable of high-speed read operation, a part or all of a predetermined program to be executed first based on acceptance of a reset signal in the arithmetic processing means, By storing the program including the first instruction of the predetermined program in the NOR type ROM, even when the program is stored together with the image information in the first storage means having a slow reading speed, after receiving the reset signal. It is possible to immediately read the program to be executed from the NOR type ROM and output the program to the arithmetic processing means. Therefore, the arithmetic processing means can immediately start executing the processing.

Gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B4, C1 to C3, D1 to D3, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I3, J1, J2, K1 to K3, L1 to L9, The gaming machine P1 in any one of M1 to M7, N1 to N9, and O1 to O8, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then fixedly displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It becomes a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the final identification information is specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

Gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B4, C1 to C3, D1 to D3, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I3, J1, J2, K1 to K3, L1 to L9, Any one of M1 to M7, N1 to N9, and O1 to O8, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through an operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is definitely stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift sphere but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

Gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B4, C1 to C3, D1 to D3, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I3, J1, J2, K1 to K3, L1 to L9, Any one of M1 to M7, N1 to N9, O1 to O8, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused game machine is "provided with a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is provided. The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Other>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in gaming machines such as slot machines, various effect images are displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game. In such a gaming machine, generally, the image information of the image to be displayed on the display device is stored in the storage means in advance, and when the image is displayed, the corresponding image information is read out from the storage means to perform the image processing. After that, the image is displayed on the display device (Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-223598).
Now, in recent game machines, the images displayed on the display device have become diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the interest of the player. As a storage means for storing image information of such an image, there is a demand to use an inexpensive one that can obtain a large storage capacity in a small area.
Further, when an inexpensive storage device that can obtain a large storage capacity in a small area is used as the storage unit for storing the image information, the storage unit also stores the program for controlling the display device and the like together with the image information. There may be a desire to do so.
However, some inexpensive storage means that can obtain a large storage capacity in a small area have a low speed for reading information (reading speed), and when a program is stored in such storage means, for example, There is a possibility that the program to be read cannot be immediately read out to start the process.
The present technical idea is made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like. While storing a program in a storage unit that stores image information, the program to be executed is immediately read to execute the process. It is intended to provide a game machine that can be started.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the slot machine of the technical idea 1 is a main control means for performing the main control of the game, a sub-control means that operates based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and its sub-control. Image display means for displaying an image on the basis of control by the means, wherein the sub-control means includes the arithmetic processing means and the image information for displaying the image on the image display means together with the arithmetic operation. A memory for storing a program to be executed by the processing means and capable of holding information even when the power is cut off; and the arithmetic processing means is an address for specifying an instruction of the program to be executed by the arithmetic processing means. Based on the reset signal accepted by the reset signal accepting means, the reset signal accepting means for accepting the reset signal generated at the start of power supply, the first instruction of the predetermined program to be executed first. A pointer initializing means for initializing the pointer means to an address for identifying the first memory, the first memory means storing the image information and the program, and the first sub memory. A read operation can be performed at a higher speed than that of the means, and a part or all of the predetermined program to be executed first based on acceptance of the reset signal in the arithmetic processing means, Second sub-storage means for storing a program including an instruction, address reception means for receiving an address for identifying one information from the information stored in the first sub-storage means and the second sub-storage means, and A temporary storage means for reading out a predetermined group of information including information specified by the address received by the address receiving means from the first sub-storage means or the second sub-storage means, and temporarily storing the information, and a temporary storage means. Information output means for reading and outputting information specified by the address accepted by the address acceptance means from the information stored in the storage means, and power supply detection means for detecting that power supply has been started. The temporary storage means, when the power supply detection detects that the supply of the power supply is started, the predetermined processing to be executed first based on the acceptance of the reset signal in the arithmetic processing means. A program, which is a part or all of the program and includes the first instruction of the predetermined program, is read from the second sub-storage unit, and the read program is read. This is for temporarily storing ram.
The game machine of the technical idea 2 is a main control means for performing the main control of the game, a sub-control means that operates based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and an image based on the control by the sub-control means. And an image display unit for displaying the above, wherein the sub-control unit is executed by the arithmetic processing unit together with the arithmetic processing unit and image information for displaying an image on the image display unit. A first storage means for storing the program, which is capable of holding information even when the power is cut off; and the arithmetic processing means, pointer means for designating an address for specifying an instruction of the program to be executed by the arithmetic processing means, Reset signal receiving means for receiving a reset signal generated at the start of power supply, and the pointer to an address for specifying the first instruction of a predetermined program to be executed first based on the reset signal received by the reset receiving means Pointer storage means for initializing the means, wherein the first storage means stores the image information and the program, and a read operation faster than the first sub storage means. And storing a program which is a part or all of the predetermined program to be executed first based on the reception of the reset signal in the arithmetic processing means and includes a first instruction of the predetermined program. Second sub-storage means, address reception means for receiving an address that identifies one piece of information stored in the first sub-storage means and the second sub-storage means, and the address reception means. A predetermined group of information including information specified by an address is read from the first sub-storage unit or the second sub-storage unit and temporarily stored therein, and information stored in the temporary storage unit. From the information receiving means, the information output means for reading and outputting the information specified by the address accepted by the address accepting means, and the power supply detecting means for detecting the start of the power supply, the temporary storing means. When the power supply detection detects that the power supply is started, a part or all of the predetermined program to be executed first based on the reception of the reset signal in the arithmetic processing unit is detected. Therefore, the program including the first instruction of the predetermined program is read from the second sub-storage means, and the read program is temporarily stored. ..
The game machine according to the technical idea 3 is the game machine according to the technical idea 2, in which the predetermined program executes a start process for executing various controls in the sub control unit in the arithmetic processing unit. It is a program.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 3, in which the sub-control means can read and write by the arithmetic processing means and can read out faster than the first sub-storage means. And a second storage unit that cannot hold information when the power is off, and the start-up program transfers the program stored in the first sub-storage unit to the second storage unit and the transfer is completed. An instruction for executing a process of setting the pointer means to the address of the second storage means in which the instruction to be executed first in the program transferred to the second storage means is included.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 4, wherein the second sub-storage means stores a part of the starting program including the first command in the starting program, The sub-storage means stores various programs including the rest of the startup programs that are not stored in the second sub-storage means, and the startup program stored in the second sub-storage means. Among the various programs stored in the first sub storage unit, the program transfers a predetermined amount of the program including a part or all of the remaining startup program to the second storage unit, and the transfer is completed. After that, the pointer means includes an instruction for executing a process of setting the pointer means to the address of the second storage means in which the instruction to be executed first among the remaining boot programs transferred to the second storage means is stored. I'm out.
<Effect>
According to the slot machine described in the technical idea 1, the sub-control unit stores the program executed by the arithmetic processing unit together with the arithmetic processing unit and the image information for displaying the image on the image display unit when the power is turned off. Also has a first storage means capable of holding information. Further, the arithmetic processing means includes pointer means for designating an address for specifying an instruction of a program to be executed by the arithmetic processing means, reset signal receiving means for receiving a reset signal generated at the start of power supply, and its reset receiving means. A pointer initialization unit that initializes the pointer unit to an address that identifies the first instruction of a predetermined program to be executed first, based on the reset signal received by the unit, and the first storage unit includes: A first sub-storing means for storing image information and a program, and a read-out operation that can be performed at a higher speed than that of the first sub-storing means, and a predetermined program to be executed first based on acceptance of a reset signal in the arithmetic processing means A part or all of the second sub-storage means for storing the program including the first instruction of the predetermined program, and one of the information stored in the first sub-storage means and the second sub-storage means. An address acceptance unit that accepts an address that identifies the information, and a predetermined group of information that includes the information identified by the address accepted by the address acceptance unit are read from the first sub storage unit or the second sub storage unit, Temporary storage means for temporarily storing, information output means for reading and outputting information specified by the address accepted by the address acceptance means from the information stored in the temporary storage means, and supply of power are started. And a power supply detection means for detecting the fact.
Here, when it is detected by the power supply detection that the power supply is started, the temporary storage means is a part or all of the predetermined program to be executed first based on the reception of the reset signal in the arithmetic processing means. Further, the program including the first instruction of the predetermined program is read from the second sub-storage means, and the read program is temporarily stored. As described above, since the second sub-storage unit can perform the read operation at a higher speed than the first sub-storage unit, the second sub-storage unit is stored in the second sub-storage unit when the start of the power supply is detected. If the stored program is read out and stored in the temporary storage means, when the pointer means is initialized by the pointer initialization means by the reception of the reset signal, the arithmetic processing means first executes a predetermined operation based on the reception of the reset signal. Is a part or all of the program, and the program including the first instruction of the predetermined program is already stored in the temporary storage means or is being stored in the temporary storage means. Therefore, when the address for specifying the first instruction of the predetermined program to be executed first is designated by the pointer means by the initialization by the pointer initialization means of the arithmetic processing means, the address is specified by the arithmetic processing means after receiving the reset signal. It is possible to immediately output a part or all of the predetermined program including the first instruction to the arithmetic processing means from the temporary storage means. Therefore, even when the program is stored together with the image information in the first sub-storage unit having a slow reading speed, it is possible to immediately read the program to be executed and start the execution of the process.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the sub-control unit stores the program executed by the arithmetic processing unit together with the arithmetic processing unit and the image information for displaying the image on the image display unit when the power is turned off. Also has a first storage means capable of holding information. Further, the arithmetic processing means includes pointer means for designating an address for specifying an instruction of a program to be executed by the arithmetic processing means, reset signal receiving means for receiving a reset signal generated at the start of power supply, and its reset receiving means. A pointer initialization unit that initializes the pointer unit to an address that identifies the first instruction of a predetermined program to be executed first, based on the reset signal received by the unit, and the first storage unit includes: A first sub-storing means for storing image information and a program, and a read-out operation that can be performed at a higher speed than that of the first sub-storing means, and a predetermined program to be executed first based on acceptance of a reset signal in the arithmetic processing means A part or all of the second sub-storage means for storing the program including the first instruction of the predetermined program, and one of the information stored in the first sub-storage means and the second sub-storage means. An address acceptance unit that accepts an address that identifies the information, and a predetermined group of information that includes the information identified by the address accepted by the address acceptance unit are read from the first sub storage unit or the second sub storage unit, Temporary storage means for temporarily storing, information output means for reading and outputting information specified by the address accepted by the address acceptance means from the information stored in the temporary storage means, and supply of power are started. And a power supply detection means for detecting the fact.
Here, when it is detected by the power supply detection that the power supply is started, the temporary storage means is a part or all of the predetermined program to be executed first based on the reception of the reset signal in the arithmetic processing means. Further, the program including the first instruction of the predetermined program is read from the second sub-storage means, and the read program is temporarily stored. As described above, since the second sub-storage unit can perform the read operation at a higher speed than the first sub-storage unit, the second sub-storage unit is stored in the second sub-storage unit when the start of the power supply is detected. If the stored program is read out and stored in the temporary storage means, when the pointer means is initialized by the pointer initialization means by the reception of the reset signal, the arithmetic processing means first executes a predetermined operation based on the reception of the reset signal. Is a part or all of the program, and the program including the first instruction of the predetermined program is already stored in the temporary storage means or is being stored in the temporary storage means. Therefore, when the address for specifying the first instruction of the predetermined program to be executed first is designated by the pointer means by the initialization by the pointer initialization means of the arithmetic processing means, the address is specified by the arithmetic processing means after receiving the reset signal. It is possible to immediately output a part or all of the predetermined program including the first instruction to the arithmetic processing means from the temporary storage means. Therefore, even when the program is stored together with the image information in the first sub-storage unit having a slow reading speed, it is possible to immediately read the program to be executed and start the execution of the process.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the following effect is exhibited. That is, since the predetermined program executed by the arithmetic processing means after receiving the reset signal is a starting program for executing the starting processing for enabling various controls in the sub control means in the arithmetic processing means, After receiving the signal, the startup program is immediately read out and executed by the arithmetic processing means, so that there is an effect that various controls can be quickly executed in the sub control means.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the start-up program is first executed by the arithmetic processing means of the sub-control means after receiving the reset signal, the program stored in the first sub-storage means can be read out at high speed by the second storage means. After completion of the transfer, the pointer means is set to the address of the second storage means in which the instruction to be executed first in the program transferred to the second storage means is stored. As a result, when the program stored in the first sub-storage means is transferred to the second storage means capable of high-speed reading operation, the arithmetic processing means subsequently outputs an instruction from the second storage means. Since it is possible to read out and execute the processing, there is an effect that the instruction can be read out at high speed even when the program is stored together with the image information in the first sub-storing means having a slow reading out speed.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second sub-storage means stores a part of the start-up program including the first instruction in the start-up program, while the first sub-storage means stores the start-up program in the second sub-storage means. Various programs are stored, including the remaining startup programs that are stored. The startup program stored in the second sub storage means is a part or all of the remaining startup programs that are not stored in the second sub storage means among the various programs stored in the first sub storage means. A predetermined amount of the program including the above is transferred to the second storage means, and after the transfer is completed, the instruction to be executed first among the remaining starting programs transferred to the second storage means by the pointer means is stored. It includes an instruction to execute a process of setting the address of the second storage means. As a result, even if only a part of the start-up programs including the first instruction of the start-up programs is stored in the second sub-storage means, the first sub-program is stored in the second sub-storage means by the start-up program stored in the second sub-storage means. Of the various programs stored in the sub storage unit, a predetermined amount of programs including some or all of the remaining startup programs that are not stored in the second sub storage unit are transferred to the second storage unit, and the transfer is performed. Is completed, the pointer means is set to the address of the second storage means in which the instruction to be executed first among the remaining boot programs transferred to the second storage means is set. It is possible to reliably execute some or all of the remaining transferred startup programs. Therefore, it is not necessary to store all the boot programs in the second sub-storage unit, so that the storage capacity of the second sub-storage unit can be suppressed to a small capacity.

10 slot machines (game machines)
65 Auxiliary display section (image display means)
81 Display control device (sub control means)
101 main control device (main control means)
181 MPU (arithmetic processing means, reset signal receiving means, pointer initialization means)
181a Instruction pointer (pointer means)
185 Work RAM (second storage means)
187 Character ROM (first image information storage means, first storage means)
187a NAND flash memory (first sub storage means)
187b ROM controller (address receiving means, information output means, first storage control means)
187c Buffer RAM (temporary storage means)
187d NOR type ROM (second sub storage means)
188 Image controller (image drawing means)
189 Resident video RAM (third image information storage means)
190 Normal video RAM (second image information storage means)
191 Character ROM (first image information storage means, first storage means)
191a NAND flash memory (first sub storage means)
191b ROM controller (address acceptance means, information output means, power supply detection means)
191c Buffer RAM (temporary storage means)
192 character ROM (first image information storage means, first storage means)
192a NAND flash memory (first sub storage means)
192b ROM controller (address acceptance means, information output means, power supply detection means, first storage control means)
192c Buffer RAM (temporary storage means)
192d NOR type ROM (second sub storage means)
193 character ROM (first image information storage means, first storage means)
194 NOR type ROM (program storage means)
200 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
281 Third symbol display device (image display means)
310 Main control device (main control means)
313 Voice lamp control device (part of sub-control means)
314 Display control device (part of sub-control means)
423a Reserved ball number counter (standby number storage means)
431 MPU (arithmetic processing means, reset signal receiving means, pointer initialization means)
431a Instruction pointer (pointer means)
433 Work RAM (second storage means)
433b Data table storage area (first prescribed information storage means, second prescribed information storage means, third prescribed information storage means)
434 Character ROM (first image information storage means, first storage means)
434a NAND flash memory (first sub storage means)
434b ROM controller (address receiving means, information output means, first storage control means)
434c Buffer RAM (temporary storage means)
434d NOR type ROM (second sub storage means)
435 Resident Video RAM (Third Image Information Storage Means)
436 Normal video RAM (second image information storage means)
437 Image controller (image drawing means)
534 Character ROM (first image information storage means, first storage means)
534a NAND flash memory (first sub storage means)
534b ROM controller (address acceptance means, information output means, power supply detection means)
534c Buffer RAM (temporary storage means)
634 Character ROM (first image information storage means, first storage means)
634a NAND flash memory (first sub storage means)
634b ROM controller (address receiving means, information output means, power supply detection means, first storage control means)
634c Buffer RAM (temporary storage means)
634d NOR type ROM (second sub storage means)
734 Character ROM (first image information storage means, first storage means)
735 NOR type ROM (program storage means)
S701 Boot process (start process)
S1213 (first command generating means)
S1302 to S1305 (dynamic display effect determination means)
S1306 (second command generating means)
S1307 (third command generating means)
S1701 (command transmission means)
S2201 Boot process (start process)
S2203, S2204 (part of second transfer control means)
S2507 Confirm command processing (determining means)
S2508 (a part of first display determining means)
S2510 (part of first display determining means)
S2515 (second display determining means)
S2621 (part of the first selecting means)
S2622 (Part of second selection means, third selection means)
S2633 (part of the second selecting means)
S2631 (part of the first selecting means)
S2632 (part of the third selecting means)
S2641 (identification information determining means)
S2652 (part of the second selecting means)
S2711 Pointer update processing (first pointer means, second pointer means, third pointer means)
S2712 (Drawing information specifying means)
S2714 (first time elapse determination means)
S2715 (part of first display determining means)
S2716 (Part of the first selecting means, part of the second selecting means, part of the third selecting means)
S2721 (identification information storage means)
S2722 (part of the first display determining means)
S2730 (second time passage determination means, part of first display determination means)
S2731 (part of first selecting means, part of second selecting means, part of third selecting means)
S2783 (Part of first display determination means, dynamic display determination means)
S2785 (Identification information changing means)
S2724 (Part of the first selection means)
S2731 (part of first selecting means, part of second selecting means, part of third selecting means)
S2784 (Part of first selecting means, part of second selecting means, part of third selecting means)
S3002 Resident image transfer setting process (part of second transfer control means)
S3003 Normal image transfer setting process (first transfer control means)
S3201 (transfer information specifying means)
S3301 (drawing instruction information generating means, instruction information generating means)

Claims (1)

It is provided with main control means for performing main control of the game, sub control means for operating based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and image display means for displaying an image based on control by the sub control means. It was a gaming machine,
The sub-control means,
Image drawing means for drawing an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means,
First image storage means for storing a plurality of image information used for drawing an image by the image drawing means,
First display specifying means for specifying, from a plurality of display modes, a predetermined display mode for dynamically displaying identification information on the image display means in response to a predetermined command received from the main control means,
First regulation information storage means for storing first regulation information that regulates, for each screen, rendering information indicating information necessary for rendering in each display mode,
First specifying means for specifying the first prescribed information corresponding to the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying means;
Update means that is updated every time a predetermined time elapses,
Every time the updating means is updated, drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen based on the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated updating means Drawing instruction information generating means for generating
And a measuring means capable of measuring time,
The image drawing means draws an image for one screen using the image information based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means.
The display mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed on the image display means is predetermined for each display mode from the start to the end of the dynamic display.
The sub-control means,
When the required time has elapsed since the display was started in the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying means, the first prescribed information used for the dynamic continuous display of the identification information to be continuously displayed is specified. A second identifying means,
When the command transmitted from the main control means is the predetermined command, the sub-control means that has received the predetermined command executes the dynamic display of the identification information of the time corresponding to the predetermined command in a specific display mode. Is what
There are a plurality of display modes that can be executed for a predetermined time corresponding to the predetermined command,
There are multiple times corresponding to the predetermined command,
Regardless of the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying means for any predetermined time, the display mode of the dynamic continuous display of the identification information that is continuously displayed when the required time has elapsed Is the same display mode,
The sub-control means,
A predetermined display execution means for performing a predetermined display on the image display means when an operation means operable by a player is operated,
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined display is not executed by the predetermined display execution means at least during a period in which the dynamic continuous display of the identification information is performed on the image display means.

Images